LaLGr
C3l96p.l
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK
CONTAINING
INTRODUCTORY LESSONS AND EXERCISES
IN LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION,
BASED ON CESAR'S COMMENTARIES ON THE GALLIC WAR;
WITH
A COMPLETE SYNOPSIS OF ACCIDENCE AND SYNTAX.
BY
ADAM CARRUTHERS, B.A.,
Classical Master, Jameson Avenue Collegiate Institute, Toronto; m o
AND
J. C. ROBERTSON, B.A.,
Head Master, Toronto Junction High School.
TORONT
-
WILLIAM BRIGGS.
1892.
Entered, according to the Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousand
eight hundred and ninety-two, by WILLIAM BRIGGS, Toronto, in the Office of the
Minister of Agriculture, at Ottawa.
PREKACE.
THIS BOOK, it is hoped, will satisfy in a measure the widespread
demand in Ontario for a more suitable text-book in Latin than
those which have hitherto been used in our schools, and will fur-
nish the pupil with a better means of acquiring early a reading
power in that language, as a necessary foundation for all sub-
sequent scholarship.
In any instance where some departure has been made from the
usual methods, the one motive has been to make the work a more
practical instrument of training in the hands of the teacher.
The scope of the book is more extended than is usual in Latin
text-books, but there are many advantages in having a work which
shall contain all that will be required in the ordinary High School
course, with the exception of the authors prescribed from year to
year.
The order of the lessons has been carefully considered, and the
exercises have been so graded that a continuous progress is pos-
sible with no sudden increase of difficulty at any one part.
Scarcely any words or phrases are employed which are not
found in Csesar, so that the vocabulary the pupil acquires in
these lessons is of the same nature as that which he meets in
the prose author he reads first in his course.
In the method atlopted in Part I., a working compromise be-
tween the older system and the so-called inductive method has
been followed, avoiding, on the one hand, the monotonous memory
IV PREFACE.
work and almost total absence of inference drawing of the former,
and, on the other hand, the very great indefiniteness and the con-
tinually and unexpectedly recurring difficulties of the latter ; but
the arrangement is such that the teacher is left to do all the real
teaching himself, and is free to adopt his own method of reaching
the desirsd goal.
Under the heading Observation, all the various points are
referred to which are required for the intelligent translation of
the exercise which follows, and sufficient help and illustration are
given to enable the pupil, under the teacher's guidance, to learn
by observation and inference the new usages, etc., which are
treated of in the exercise. For instance, in Lesson XXV.
examples are given of the ablative and the accusative of time
from such examples the pupil can readily, under the direction
of the teacher, gain for himself the knowledge required to use
these constructions in the accompanying exercise. But if any
teacher prefers simply to tell his pupils the rule, and set them
to work to memorize and then apply it, he may do so as readily
with this work as with any other. It need not be said, however,
that the book is intended to suggest and make possible a better
way than this.
Many more sentences are given in each exercise than may be
found advisable for a single lesson. There will thus be abundance
of material for review, for additional practice at difficult points,
and for a change in the routine of exercises from year to year.
By such a change new work is secured for the teacher, and fresh
practice for pupils who are not promoted, while the exercise can
be readily suited to the capacity of the students.
The supplementary exercises beginning on page 106 will, it is
believed, lend additional interest to the study of the language,
and, if introduced at the points suggested, will materially aid in
the progress of the pupil in reading connected sentences.
PREFACE. V
Jn Part II., which is intended to accompany the reading of
<.. 1 ;csar, the most important idioms in Latin are dealt with as far as
possible in what is thought to be the order of their importance,
this order being varied at times through due regard to the diffi-
culties of the points to be discussed. In the illustrative examples,
the English sentence is given first, as the student in Latin prose is
not chiefly observing Latin usage, but endeavoring to find some
equivalent for the English which he is given to translate ; and
moreover, by having his attention rest first on the English, he is
more likely to catch the exact meaning of the sentence in that
tongue, the ignorance of which meaning is often a great draw-
back to the pupil's progress in writing correct Latin. The lessons
dealing with special usages are supplemented by a few exercises
in the writing of continuous prose Latin. As these exercises also
have for their basis the style and vocabulary of Caesar, the pupil
has the same model constantly before him throughout the book,
and is more likely to have developed a correct style of writing
narrative Latin after the manner of this model than if tho
vocabulary and sentences had been taken at random from dif
ferent authors.
Part III. is for reference mainly. The grouping of all the
paradigms in one place will be found a great convenience, and
the arrangement of the conjugation of the regular verb is specially
adapted for the purpose of comparison.
In the paradigms of the verb, no translations of the various
forms have been given. These should be learned in the intro-
ductory lessons of Part I., and for use as a book of reference the
names of the tenses and moods should be sufficient. This will
discourage the pernicious habit many students have of being
blindly guided, in their translations from or into Latin, by the
translation, often necessarily inadequate, given side by side with
the conjugation in most Latin grahimars and introductory books.
VI PREFACE.
The ordinary translations given for the subjunctire (e.g., amem,
[ may <r can love, anu'trcm, I might, could or would love) and
for the participles are much more misleading than helpful.
The synopsis of accidence and compendium of syntax are suffi-
ciently complete to cover the forms and usages met with in the
authors (in both prose and poetry) ordinarily read in High Schools
and Collegiate Institutes. Throughout Parts II. and III., the
more essential matter is as a rule distinguished from the less
essential by the use of different types.
In the exercises, examples and vocabularies, the quantity of all
vowels long by nature has been marked. This will be found
especially convenient in using the Roman method of pronunci-
ation.
In order to make the book a complete manual of reference
for High School work in Latin, a few sections have been added
on the metre of Virgil.
Thanks are due for valuable hints and suggestions which have
been received from Mr. L, E. Embree, M.A., Principal of Jame-
son Avenue Collegiate Institute, Toronto, and from Mr. I. M.
Levan, B.A., Principal of Owen Sound Collegiate Institute.
J. C. ROBERTSON.
TORONTO, 1892. A. CARRUTHERS.
CONTENTS.
PAGE
PART I. Introductory Lessons and Exercises ... 1
PART II. Rules of Syntax and Exercises in Prose Composi-
tion ......... 115
PART III. Accidence, Compendium of Syntax and Vocabu-
laries . .218
PART I.
INTRODUCTORY LESSONS AND EXERCISES.
LESSON
Introductory. Pronunciation, Syllabication, Accent. . , 1
I. Present Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and II. . 3
II. Nominative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and
II 5
III. Accusative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and
II. ... . .6
IV. Genitive Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II. 7
V. Dative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II.
Ad with Accusative ...... 8
VI. Imperfect Indicative Active of Conjugations I. and II 10
VII. Ablative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II.
Cum, in, a, ab, with Ablative . . . .11
VIII. Vocative Singular and Plural of Declensions I. and II.
Nouns in er and ir of Declension II. Use of -que. 13
IX. Nouns in um of Declension II. Gender . . .15
X. Adjectives of Declensions I. and II. . . . .16
viii CONTENTS.
LESSON PAGE
XT. Futmv [ndioative Active of Conjugations I. and II. 18
\ I I . Masculine and Feminine Nouns of Declension III. 19
XIII. I'd feet Indicative Active of all Conjugations . 20
XIV. Neuter Nouns of Declension III. . . .22
XV. Pluperfect Indicative Active of all Conjugations . 24
XVI. Prepositions, d, ab, ad, cum, de, < .'.;, in, inter, per,
post, jn't >/>t>' i', .W/tf, t I'd its. . . . . .25
XVII. Future Perfect Indicative Active of all Conjuga-
tions 26
XVIII. Adjectives of Declension III 28
XIX. Complementary Infinitive (Active Voice) . . 29
XX. Nouns of Declension IV. . . . . .30
XXI. Perfect Indicative Passive of all Conjugations . 32
XXII. Ablative of Agent with a, ab . . . .34
XXIII. Pluperfect and Future Perfect Indicative Passive
of all Conjugations . . . . . .36
XXIV. Nouns of Declension V. Ordinal Numerals . 38
XXV. Ablative of Point of Time. Accusative of Dura-
tion of Time 39
XXVI. Nouns of Declension III. with I-stems . . 40
XXVII. Present, Imperfect and Future Indicative Passive
of Conjugations I. and II. . . .42
XXVIII. Regular Comparison of Adjectives . . .43
XXIX. Indicative and Present Infinitive of sum. Predi-
cate Adjectives ...... 44
XXX. Dative with Adjectives . . . . .45
XXXI. Irregular Comparison of Adjectives . . .46
XXXII. Present Indicative Active and Passive of Conju-
gations III. and IV .48
XXXIII. Adjectives with Genitive in -lus . . . .49
XXXIV. Imperfect and Future Indicative Active and Pas-
sive of Conjugations III. and IV. . . .50
XXXV. Cardinal Numerals ...... 51
XXXVI. Active Periphrastic Conjugation . . . .52
CONTENTS. IX
LESSON PAGE
XXXVII. Use of Millc. Accusative of Extent of Space . 53
XXXVIII. Dative with Special Intransitive Verbs . . 55
XXXIX. Relative Pronoun 56
XL. Passive Periphrastic Conjugation . . . .58
XLI. Conjunctions quod, dum, ubi, postquam, sirnv.l
<.(t<i_i\ id, with the Indicative . . . .59
XLII. Personal Pronouns, eyu, tfi, is . . . .61
XLIII. Dative of Agent with Gerundives . .62
XLIV. Reflexive Pronoun, mu. Possessive Pronouns . 63
XLV. Perfect Participle Passive 65
XL VI. Verbs in -id of Conjugation III 67
XL VII. Demonstrative Pronouns, Tile, ille, is . . .68
XL VIII. Present Participle Active. Present Infinitive Pas-
sive . ' . . . 69
XLIX. Demonstrative Pronouns, //w, ld>:tn . . .71
L. Ablative Absolute . . . . . .72
LI. Interrogative Pronouns . . . . .74
LII. Adverbs ; Formation and Comparison. Quamwith
Superlative ....... 76
LIII. Deponent Verbs 78
LIV. Ablative of Specification. Quam with Comparative 79
LV. Accusative and Infinitive . . . . .81
LVI. Genitive and Ablative of Characteristic . . 84
LVII. Present and Perfect Infinitive Passive. Infinitives
of Deponents. Dative of Purpose . . 85
LVIII. Ablative of Manner and Accompanying Circum-
stances ........ 87
LIX. Present and Imperfect Subjunctive Active. Sub-
junctive of Result . . . . . .88
LX. Pluperfect Subjunctive Active. Subjunctive of
* itni. Cum with Subjunctive . . . .89
LXT. Possum ........ 91
LXII. Perfect Subjunctive Active. Subjunctive Passive.
Subjunctive of Indirect Question . . .92
X CONTENTS.
LESSON PAGE
I A" I 1 1. To/,,, n#0, mdlo 94
LXIV. Subordinate Clauses in Indirect Narration . ' 95
LXV. Fero 97
LXVI. Subjunctive of Purpose 98
LXVIL Ed, fid 100
LXVIII. Gerund 101
LXIX. Gerundive Construction . 102
LXX. Indefinite Pronouns. . . . . . 104
Supplementary Exercises ....... 106
Review Exercises in Accidence. . 110
PART II.
RULES OF SYNTAX AND EXERCISES IN PROSE COMPOSITION.
EXERCISE
I. Order of words ; concords ; accusative and infinitive ;
verbs of promising, etc. ; verbs of saying and thinking
used personally in the passive ; phrases such as
certior fieri, spem habere, etc. ; complementary infini-
tive ; coepl, void, jubeo, etc. ..... 115
II. Final clauses with ut (utT), ne, qul, quo ; verbs of urging,
exhorting, persuading, etc. ; sequence of tenses ; that
nobody, that nothing, etc. ; connectives with negative
final clauses ; verbs with two constructions . . 123
III. Consecutive clauses with ut (uti) and ut non ; rela-
tive clauses of characteristic ; clauses of characteristic
after dignus, etc. ; clauses with quln ; sequence of
tenses . . . . . . . . .126
IV. Questions direct and indirect or dependent ; how
introduced ; uses of nonne, num and -ne ; indirect
question found with verbs meaning learn, tell, see,
etc.; use of the tenses in dependent questions;
English abstract nouns frequently expressed in Latin
by dependent clauses ...... 129
CONTENTS. XI
EXERCISE I'At.K
V. Ablative absolute and its commonest equivalents :
how best translated; ablative absolute with ni*i;
when ablative absolute not used ; position of the
ablative absolute ; clauses with cum, <l>/ut. i><>xf-<:jnnin.
and uU ... . . .131
VI. Verbs with the dative; pCuviJ, iinj.n.'ri), etc.; dative
with compounds ; impersonal use of such verbs when
used in the passive ; different uses of un^i-0, funsulo,
etc. ; dative does not represent to after a verb of
motion ......... 135
VII. Verbs with the genitive ; misereor, memini, obllviscor,
etc.; interest and refert; recordor and merninl with
the accusative ; verbs with the ablative ; fdor,
ft'iior, etc. ; verbs of plenty and want ; potior, eged,
raeo .138
VIII. Verbs with two cases ; accusative and genitive ;
accusative and dative ; two accusatives ; accusative
and ablative ; two datives ; two datives in connection
with accusative ; utor, interfiled .... 140
IX. Conditional clauses ; distinction of conditions into
(1) present or past, (2) future; present conditions
contrary to the fact and otherwise ; past conditions
contrary to the fact and otherwise ; future conditions
in the more vivid, and in the less vivid form ;
English present represents future or future perfect
in Latin ; irregularities with regard to mood and
tense ; possum, debed, etc. ; alternative conditions ;
conditional sentences in indirect narration . . 143
X. Clauses of concession; etsl, etiamsl, tametsl, quamquam ;
quamvis, cum, licet, ut ; quamvis and nisi joined
with single words 147
XI. Uses of the accusative ; object of verb or preposition ;
subject of infinitive ; duration of time and extent
of space ; limit of motion ; in expressing place to
which, several phrases taken closely with the verb ;
accusative with verbs of the senses and feelings ;
intransitive verbs compounded with prepositions ;
cognate accusative ; accusative of reference ; accu-
sative in exclamations ; verbs with two accusatives. 148
XII. Uses of the dative ; indirect object ; dative of interest ;
dative of service or purpose ; dative of interest with
adjectives ; dative of possession ; attraction of dative
xii CONTENTS.
EXERCISE PAGE
with nomen est ; dative with compounds of sum;
dative of apparent agent ; dative of reference ;
ethical dative ; dative with verbs .... 151
XIII. Uses of the genitive ; possessive genitive ; subjective
genitive; objective genitive; partitive genitive; when
partitive genitive not used ; genitive of character-
istic ; genitive of definition ; objective genitive with
adjectives ; genitive of respect ; predicate genitive ;
omission of governing word ; extensive use of object-
ive genitive ; verbs with genitive .... 154
XIV. Uses of the ablative; (Mat ice proper; source, separa-
tion and cause ; place from which ; ablative with
comparatives; use of plus, minus, etc.; instrumental
ablative j means, manner, accompaniment and char-
acteristic ; difference between the genitive and the
ablative of characteristic ; price and value ; degree
of difference ; ablative of specification ; locative abla-
tive; place in which; pregnant construction; time
when ; ablative absolute ; ablative with dignus, etc.,
and with adjectives of plenty and want ; verbs with
the ablative ; agency, how expressed ; in expressing
place from which, several phrases taken closely with
the verb 158
XV. Verbal nouns ; infinitive ; historical infinitive ; verb
peculiarities of infinitive ; gerund, how used ; with
pronouns, sometimes used as a pure substantive ;
supine in -urn, how used ; supine in -zZ, how used . 163
XVI. Verbal adjectives; the gerundive ; general distinc-
tion as regards use between gerund and gerundive ;
gerundive of deponents ; passive periphrastic conju-
gation ; intransitive verbs used impersonally ; pre-
dicative use of gerundive with do, trddo, etc. ;
participles; present; perfect; future; chief uses of
participles ........ 1G6
XVII. Expressions of command ; imperative and substi-
tutes ; prohibition, how expressed ; independent
uses of the subjunctive ; hortative or jussive sub-
junctive; potential subjunctive; subjunctive in dubi-
tative and rhetorical questions ; ne the proper nega-
tive ; neve or neu the usual connective ; indicative
in certain expressions . . . . . .170
XVIII. Verbs of fearing, hindering, doubting, objecting ;
construction with verbs of fearing ; when ut (lie non)
used, when ne ; vereor as a modal verb ; construction
CONTENTS. Xlll
EXERCISE PAGE
with verbs of hindering, etc.; common expressions
with quin ; with qudmiuus ; verbs with different con-
structions 172
XIX. Duty, necessity, possibility, permission ; three ways
of expressing duty or obligation ; necessity expressed
by gerundive or by necesse est ; permission expressed
by licet ; different values of should .... 174
XX. Uses of quod, quoniam and cum ; quod with indica-
tive ; quod with subjunctive; quoniam; cum, causal
or concessive ; cum (when, whenever) with primary
tenses ; cum (when), with historical tenses ; cases in
which cum (when) takes the indicative of historical
tenses; cum . . . turn . . . . . . 176
XXI. Uses of dum, donee, quoad, antequam, priusqnam ;
dum in conditional clause ; dum, donee and quoad
meaning as long as ; meaning until ; antequam and
priusquam denoting mere priority of time ; denoting
purpose or a result prevented ..... 180
XXII. Pronouns and pronominal adjectives; personal
pronouns, when expressed ; hie ; iste ; ille ; is ; ipse ;
alter; alivs; ceteri; reliqui; different words for some,
aliquis, surd qui, nonnulli, nescio quis; different words
for any, quisquam (ullus), quis, quivis, quilibet ;
quldam ; quisqne and uterque ; quis and uter ; idiom-
atic expressions ....... 182
XXIII. The relative or conjunctive pronoun; used in
final and consecutive clauses ; used instead of demon-
strative ; used to introduce clauses of condition, con-
cession and cause ; antecedent omitted ; clause forms
antecedent ; antecedent repeated ; antecedent incor-
porated into relative clause ; attraction of relative ;
as, translated by qui or dc ; use of relative in case of
two successive clauses modifying same antecedent ;
superlative placed in relative clause ; relative always
expressed in Latin ....... 187
XXIV. Tenses of the indicative ; uses of the present ; of
the imperfect ; of the future ; of the perfect ; habed
with perfect participle passive ; memini, ndvi, con-
suew, etc. ; uses of the pluperfect ; imperfect and
pluperfect in letters ; uses of the future perfect . 190
XXV. Different forms of the noun clause ; definition of
noun clause ; accusative and infinitive, subject,
object, appositive ; clauses with ut, ne, quin, quo-
minus; clauses involving notion of purpose, sub-
XIV CONTENTS.
EXERCISE PAGE
ject, object, appositive ; of result, subject, object,
appositive ; quod clauses, subject, object, appositive ;
dependent questions, subject, object, appositive ;
verbs with more than one construction . . . 194
XXVI. Indirect narration oratio o"bllqua ; difference
between direct and indirect discourse ; rules for
changing direct into indirect narration ; verbs ; pro-
nouns ; adverbs ; exceptions to these rules ; informal
indirect narration ; indirect statement ; indirect com-
mand ; indirect question : examples illustrating rules ;
subjunctive due to attraction ..... 199
XXVII. Roman mode of reckoning time ; Calends ; Ides ;
Nones ; contracted forms ; leap year ; dates in the
Christian era . . . . ' . . . .207
XXVIII. Exercises for continuous translation ; figurative
language ; examples illustrating different modes of
expression ; ^uosi-idioms ; different modes of viewing
the action ; in Latin the verb the significant word, in
English the noun, examples illustrating this ; use of
abstract nouns not so common in Latin as in English ;
a clause often used instead ; precise meaning of the
English word should be noted ; periodic construction
in Latin ; connection of clauses and sentences in
Latin ; Exercises 28, 29, 30, 31, 32 and 33 . . 210
PART III.
ACCIDENCE, COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX, AND VOCABULARIES
I. PARADIGMS OF INFLECTION.
SECTION PAGE
1- 9. The Noun 218
10-16. The Adjective (Declension, Comparison, Numerals) . 223
17. The Adverb. 229
18-26. The Pronoun ... .... 229
27-40. The Verb (Regular Conjugation) 234
41-46. The Verb (Irregular Conjugation) . . . .246
CONTENTS. XV
II. SYNOPSIS OF ACCIDENCE.
SECTION PAGE
47-54. Nouns 252
55-58. Adjectives ......... 258
59. Adverbs 261
60-63. Pronouns 262
64-72. Verbs .265
73. Prepositions .272
74. Conjunctions 272
75-76. Derivatives and Compounds ... . 273
III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX.
77. Apposition 276
78. Attributive Words 276
79. The Predicate .... ... 276
80-86. The use of the Cases 277
87. The use of the Prepositions 286
88. The use of Adjectives 288
89-95. The use of the Pronouns 288
96. The Active and Passive Voices 292
97-99. The Indicative and Subjunctive 293
100. The Imperative 297
101. The Infinitive 298
102. The Participle ' 299
103. The Gerund 300
104. The Gerundive 300
105. The Supine . . _ 301
106. General Rules of Oratio Obllqua 301
107. Sequence of Tenses 302
108. Adverbs 303
109. Conjunctions 303
110. Order of Words 304
111-119. Metre. Dactylic Hexameter . . . .305
Latin-English Vocabulary 313
English-Latin Vocabulary ....... 324
Index . 344
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
PART I.
INTRODUCTORY LESSONS AND EXERCISES.
PRONUNCIATION OF LATIN.
I. SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 1
Vowels. 2
a is sounded like the first a in aha, papa.
a it M second a in aha, papa.
en lie in met.
e n it e in tJiey.
I n ii i in sit.
I it n i in machine.
6 ii H o in obey, or the first o in olio.
6 n M o in holy, or the second o in olio.
ti n n u in put, or oo in foot.
u n n oo in boot.
1. The method of pronouncing Latin given above is called the Roman method.
The English method is as follows :
The vowels are sounded as in English (long u having the sound of you), but long
vowels are often sounded as short, especially in final syllables, and before two conson-
ants (e.g., mcns'i* as ?/<</<*<>); and short vowels are often sounded as long, especially
before another vowel (or h), and before a single consonant, either in the first syllable
of dissyllabic words, or in the unaccented syllables of other words (e.g., nlhil as nlhU,
sine as sine, popidun as populus).
The diphthongs are sounded as follows: ae and oe as ee; auas aw; eu as you; ei
and ui as eye.
The consonants are sounded as in English : c and g as s and j before e and i sounds,
otherwise as k and g hard ; like z at the end of a word, and occasional!}' in other
cases through the influence of English (e.g., causa) ; t and c before t (unless preceded
by s, t or x), as sh.
2. Vowels before ns, n/, <jn and j, are regularly long.
2 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Diphthongs.
In diphthongs both vowels should be sounded in their
proper order.
ae is sounded much like the ai in pain. 1
au ii ii M on in our, house.
oe M ii H ?<** in wade. 1
ei ii it ii ei in vein.
eu M n H ew in blew.
ui M ii ii we in weep.
Consonants.
Consonants are for the most part pronounced as in English,
with the following exceptions :
c is always sounded as in come, never as in cent.
g M M in game, n n gem.
s ii M in this, n n his.
t M n in native, n M nation.
x n n in axe, n n exact.
j 'i " y in yet.
v M n w in want.
n before c, </, gu, ae, is sounded as ng, or as n in ankle.
II. SYLLABICATION.
In the following list the words in parentheses are English
words to be contrasted with the Latin ; in other cases the
Latin and the English words to be contrasted have the same
spelling, the quantity of the Latin words being marked. 2
Die, salve, miles, pares, mane, care, honor t comes, consumes,
palma (palm), alwnus (alien), resisto (resist), possessio (possess, pos-
session), condemno (condemn}, legionis (legion), festlno (hasten),
nuptidlis (nuptial), auctio (auction), desertor (deserter), scena (scene),
regnum (reigning).
1. It is held by some that ae is sounded like ai in aisle, and oe like oi in coin.
re indicat
as short.
2. Throughout this book, all long vowels are indicated, except in footnotes;
vowels not marked are accordingly to be regarded as si
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 3
Observation. What can be learned from the foregoing exam-
ples, (a) of silent letters in Latin, (6) of the number of syllables
in each Latin word, (r) of the number of sounds represented by
each letter in Latin. 1
III. ACCENT.
(a) mo'-ves rl'-pa te'-16 va'da
an'-nus i'-ter ser'-vo con'-sul
Observation. How are'words of two syllables accented ?
(b) spe-ra'-mus sa-lu'-tem ge'-ne-ra el'-vi-tas
vec-tl-ga'-ll re-dux'-it hi'-e-mes i-do'-ne-us
con-sen'-sus po-ten'-tes con-sen'-se-ras re'-li-qul
Observation. How are words of more than two syllables ac-
cented, () when the vowel of the second last syllable is long or
precedes two consonants ; (b) when the vowel of the second last
syllable is short and does not precede two consonants ? -
LESSON I.
() Oppugnamus, we attack. Jubemus, ice order.
Vulneramus, we wound. Removemus, we rcmore.
Convocamus, we call together. Obtiiiemus, we occupy,
(b) Oppugnant, they attack. Jubent, tJiey order.
Vulnerant, they wound. Removent, they remove.
(c 1 ) Vulnerat, he, she or it, Obtinet, he, sJie or it, occupies.
wounds.
Convocas, you call together. Removes, you remove.
(When speaking to one person.)
1. Every letter in a Latin word should be sounded, and ^iven always Die SINK:
sound, except in the case of the vowels, which have each t\\o sounds, a long and
a short.
In dividing Latin words into syllables, place at the beginning of each syllable all
the consonants which, with the following vowel or diphthong, could be pronounced at
the beginning of a word; e.g., a-sper, ni-r-i-n, m it -to. In compounds, however, the
several parts are kept distinct; e.g., ab-est, not a-best.
2. Two exceptions should be noted : (i.) When the two consonants consist of r
(or I) preceded by a different consonant, the word is accented as though there were
but one consonant; e.g., ar'bitror, multiplex, but impuFsvs, ri'si/'/inn, fnlrrrtn,
iiicur'ro, according to the general rule, (ii.) x is treated as a double consonant ; e.g.,
contex'-o.
(The second last syllable is called the penult, the third last the antepenult.)
4 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Convocatis, you call together. Removetis, you remove.
(When speaking to more than one person.)
(d) Vulnero, I wound. Jubeo, I order.
Oppugiid, I attack. Obtineo, I o'.rupii.
Observation. How does Latin express the persons we, // '</,
he, she, it, you and I, as subjects of the verb'/ What two classes
of verb are represented? What irregularity is there in joining
the personal endings to the first part ? x
EXERCISE I.
Vocabulary.
(are and ere arc used to indicate -a and -e 2 verbs respectively.)
Adequito, are, ride up, Oppuguo, are, attack.
Coiivoco, are, summon, call Pareo, ere, be obedient.
together. Paro, are, prepare, procure.
Habeo, ere, hare. Permoveo, ere, alarm.
Impero, are, (jive orders. Propero, are, hasten.
Jubeo, ere, order. Removed, ere, remove.
Niivigo, are, sail. Teneo, ere, fiold.
Obtineo, ere, occupy. Vulnero, are, wound.
I. 1. Permoves. 2. Tenemus. 3. Convocant. 4. Paratis. 5.
Imperamus. 6. Jubet. 7. Paremus. 8. Vulnerant. 9. Habeo.
10. Jubetis. 11. Tenet. 12. Adequitant. 13. Bemovet. 14.
Propero. 15. Oppugnatis. 16. Obtines.
II. 1. They hasten. 2. He sails. 3. I hold. 4. You (singu-
lar) order. 5. You (plural) have. 6. We prepare. 7. She has.
8. I occupy. 9. He wounds. 10. It alarms. 11. They remove.
12. She is obedient. 13. We give orders. 14. You (plmaL)
alarm. 15. They attack. 16. You (singular) ride up.
1. CAUTION. It must not be supposed that the ending is -amus or -ant, -cmu$
or -ent. Instead, the same endings, -inns, -nt, etc., are added to forms (representing
verbal ideas) which differ in that in some cases the final letter is a, in others e. (It
will be seen later that other final letters are found in the first part.) The only
difference between these a and c verbs is that, before the personal ending o, a final
a is dropped, while a final e is retained.
2. These -a, and -c verbs are generally called verbs of the first and second conjuga-
tions respectively. There are in all four conjugations, or divisions of verbs according
to form.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
LESSON II.
(a) Vulneraimis, ire, i round or we are
Tnbent, tin' 1 if order or tlu'ij are
Oppugnat, /" <ittrl;x or Ar /.s aUarl:!n</.
Observation. The twofold translation of each form, and the
point of time referred to.
(/>) Romamis, ft- Roman. Roman!, fhe Romans.
IV.-iutu, //' MI if <>r. Nautae, tlir .svf /7o/-.s.
Lesatus eonvooat, a licnti-iimit mil*
IiesfJitl jnbcnt, //V liriiti'iiinitx
Victoria pormovct, //"' ricfoi'ij alaj'
Victoriae pcrinovont, ?;///<//>* l<tnn.
Observation. How is the plural of nouns ending in -?/-s and a
formed? How are r/, and ^//e exj^rcssud in Latin? Tlie personal
endings, -t and ->/:, retained even when a noun is tin; subject, and
when English does not use he or they.
EXERCISE II.
Vocabulary.
Barbarns, I, m., Itarltnrinn. Gallus, I, m., Cnntl (a nativi> of
ao, m., tt'.-lij'mn. (one of the country called Gaul).
a tribe in Gaul). T.esratus, I, in., lu'iitcndni.
Copia, ae, f. (in singular), sup- Naiita, ae, m., sailor.
/>//, abund&nce, j>Icnli/; (ill Nuntio, are, <innoiin<-<-.
plural), /*>/vv.s, troops. Romanus, I, m., Jfouiau.
Kxspeeto, Tire, airait. Soeins, I, in., affy.
Fusra, ae, f., flight. Turina, ae, f. squadron.
Cieriiiaiius, I, in., German. Victoria, ae, f., riclonj.
I. 1. Lugatus adequitat. 2. Fuga permovet. 3. IxomanT ex-
spcilant. 4. Nautae pro])erant. 5. Nuntifimus. (>. SociT oliti-
nent. 7. Bafbari adequitant. H. Germanus vulncral . 1*. Turmae
oppugnant. 10. Bclgae ol.tinciit. 11. Expectatis. 1'J. .Iiiltf-s.
13. German! habent. 14. Copiae o}pugnant. 15. Victoriae }>er-
movent. K>. Nauta habct.
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. 1. We are awaiting. 2. They are removing. 3. He is
holding. 4. The squadrons ride up. 5. The victory alarms. 0.
The allies summon. 7. The lieutenant is sailing. 8. The sailor
removes. 1). You are preparing. 10. The Belgians have. 11.
The forces occupy. 12. The Roman is ordering. 13. We are
obedient. 14. The lieutenant is giving orders. 15. The Gauls
occupy. 10. The barbarians ;ire attacking.
LESSON III.
Victoria Tirtiiifiiios permovct, tin'- riflonj l<mnx 11ie Rom fins.
Li'ffatus virtoriam nuntiat, flic l.icuh'iid nl <innon>n-c* //
C'opiae It'Sffttum cxsprctant, ///c /o/rcx <//r a irnif in<i th<' I irtiirn<nit.
Itomanl c-opias exspeetant, flu 1 l!i>iitnnm<r<' <nni!fin<i UK' forces.
Observation. What different forms have nouns in us and a, in
tin; singular and the plural, when they are used as the subject, and
when they are used as the object of the verb ? l How does the
order of the Latin sentences differ from that of the English ?-
EXERCISE III.
Vocabulary.
Animus, I, m., spirit, mind, Nuntins, i, m., messenger, mes-
Captlvus, I, m., cnj>lir<\ Pcrturbo, firo, throir into c<>n-
Coniporto, arcs l>rin</ 'iii. fusion, dixhirh.
Confirmo, are, rwvmmf/f, cstab- Praccla, ac, f., plunder.
lidi; (iron*'. Provincia, ac, f., province.
Kquus, I, m., horse. Piigno, are, fiyht.
TCt, anil. Servus, I, m., slave.
Labienus, I, m., Labienus (a Supero, are, conquer, prevail.
Roman's name). Tribunus, I, m., trinune (a
Locus, I, m., place, position, military officer among the
<j round. Romans).
1. The form used as the subject is called the Nominatin'. Caxc, that used as the
object the A, -cu. ratine Case.
2. It must not be supposed that this order is invariable in Latin, but it should be
retained by the beginner until he has learned something of the causes (or at least,
some of the cases) of variation from the general rule. This applies to all other general
rules of order, to which attention may be directed.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 7
I. 1. Copias superat^ 2. Praedam comportamus. 3. Roman!
locum obtinent. 4. Labienus equos removet. 5. Legatos et
tribunes coiivocas. 6. Yictoriae animos conformant. 7. Servi
piignant. 8. Nuntium exspectat. 9. Captivos habetis. 10. Belgae
GallSs superant. 11. Barbarl Romanes et socios perturbant. 12.
Belgas permovet. 13. Copiam habeo. 14. Turnia copias pertur-
bat. 15. Victoriam nuiitias. 16. Nautae legatum exspectant.
IT. 1. The slaves are wounding the messenger. 2. The forces
occupy the province. 3. The Germans conquer the Gauls. 4.
The lieutenant conquers the Germans" and the Belgians. 5. The
tribunes await the allies. 6. You attack the place. 7. It arouses
the spirit. 8. The flight alarms the barbarians. 9. The sailor
announces the flight. 10. I am summoning the lieutenants. 11.
The forces are awaiting the squadrons. 12. They have plenty.
13. It disturbs the hearts. 14. You (plural) are fighting. 15.
The sailors prevail. 16. The captive is obedient.
LESSON IV.
Equos legatorum removet, he removes the horses of the lieu-
tenants.
Socios Belgarnm exspectat, he awaits the allies of the Belgians.
Fuff.a turmae aiiimum legatl tlie flight of the squadron alarms
permovet, the mind of the lieutenant.
Equnm lejsratl removet, he removes the lieutenant's horse.
Observation. How is of expressed in Latin? What is the
position of the word translated by means of of, or by the English
EXERCISE IV.
Vocabulary.
Aedtma, I, m., an Aeduan ; in Contineo, ere, hem in, restrain.
plural, the Aedui (a tribe in Cotta, ae, in., Gotta (a Roman's
Gaul). name).
Cibus, I, m., food. Do, are, give, grant.
Concilio, are, ivin over. Filing, I, in., .so//.
1. This form is known as the (tenit-'nie Case,
8 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Galba, ae, m., Galba (a Ro- Occupo, are, seize.
man's name). Porta, ae, f., gate.
Inopia, ae, f., want, scarcity. Probo, are, /aror.
Natura, ae, f., nature. Sententia, ae, f., opinion.
Obsideo, ere, blockade, beset. Via, ae, f., road.
I. 1. Roman! copias Germanorum superant. 2. Sententiam
Cottae probamus. 3. Sententia Labieni superat. 4. Inopia cib!
Belgas perturbat. 5. Equum Galbae yulnerat. 6. Socii Belga-
rum locum oppugnant. 7. Natura loci Aeduos continet. 8. Aedui
portas occupant. 9. Victoriae copiarum animos sociomm cfmnr-
mant. 10. Barbari copias parant. 11. Copiae Belgarum locum
obsident. 12. Labienus copiam captivorum habet. 13. Fuga
turmarum Belgas permovet. 14. Equos legatorum removet. 15.
Victoriam legatl nuntiat.
II. 1. We are removing the horse of the lieutenant. 2. The
allies of the Aedui give food. 3. Galba's sons procure horses. 4.
The victory of Galba arouses the Belgians' spirit. 5. The forces
of the allies beset the roads. 6. The tribune's son has plenty of
horses. 7. You are wounding the sons of Cotta and Labienus. 8.
The lieutenant wins over the Belgians. 9. The Belgians are
awaiting the forces of the Gauls. 10. A squadron rides up. 11.
They favor the place. 12. The tribunes and the lieutenants
restrain the forces. 13. We favor the opinions of the lieutenants
and the tribunes. 14. Galba procures forces.
LESSON V.
(a) Legato victoriam nuntiat, he announces the victory to the
lieutenant.
Provinciae imperat, he gives orders to the province.
Copils imperat, he gives orders to the forces.
Socils praedam don at , he presents the plunder to the allies.
Observation. How is to before a noun expressed in Latin?
What is the position of the word translated by means of to ? l
1. The indirect object (i.e., the word translated hy means of to) is more frequently
placed before than after the direct object of the verb. In most of the sentences which
follow, either order may be followed. This form is known as the Dative Case.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 9
(6) Ad provinciam properat, he hastens to the province.
Ad copias adequitat, he rides up to the forces.
Ad legates adequitat, he rides tip to the lieutenants.
Ad locum legates convocat, he summons the lieutenants to the
place.
Observation. How is to before a noun expressed in Latin,
when it is used in a phrase implying motion towards a place or
person ?
EXERCISE V.
Vocabulary.
Agricultura, ae, f., agriculture, Pertineo, ere, extend.
farming. Praesto, arc, be superior.
Dono, are, present. Pugna, ae, f., battle, fielding.
Evoco, arc, challenge. Responded, ere, reply.
Fllia, ae, f., daughter. Rhenus, I, m., the Rhine.
Italia, ae, f., Italy. Rlpa, ae, f., bank.
Legatus, I, m., ambassador. Silva, ae, f., wood, forest.
Materia, ae, f., timber, mate- Stndeo, ere, pay attention.
rials. Venia, ae, f., pardon.
Murus, I, m., wall. Ventito, are, come often.
I. 1. Materiam ad locum comportant. 2. Aedui ad provinciam
ventitant. 3. Aeduis vemam dat. 4. Copils praedam donat. 5.
Galli Romanos ad pugnam evocant. 6. German! Belgls praestant.
7. Legatus ad copias adequitat. 8. Socil Romanorum agriculturae
student. 9. Aeduis imperat. 10. Ad Belgas adequitamus. 11.
Silva ad locum pertinet. 12. Belgae Labien5 respondent. 13.
Ad Italiam ventitas. 14. Filiam legato dat. 15. Legatus Belgils
Romanis conciliat.
II. 1. Labienus hastens to the forces. 2. You are superior to
the forces of the Belgians. 3. We come often to the provinces. 4.
They grant pardon to the captives. 5. The ambassadors win over
the allies of the Germans to the Ronmns. 0. They come often to
the walls. 7. The woods extend to the Rhine. 8. I give orders
to the province. 9. He announces the victory of the allies to the
ambassador. 10. You are obedient to Labienus' son. 11. The
squadrons ride up to the barbarians. 12. Labienus replies to the
10 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ambassadors. 13. He challenges the Gaul to battle. 14. The
forces of the Germans ride up to the banks of the Rhine. 15. He
summons the lieutenants to the province.
LESSON VI.
(a) Oppiiffiiabnt, lie irns attti<'l:iit<i, or If i/W t<>
Jnbebainiis, ire ire re <<!' j-in<j, or ire used to order.
Convocabiint, they ire-re Sitmmoninff, or tliei/ nsrd to summon.
Permovebati.s, you (plur.) ir^re <il(irniin>i, or -u<>u iixed t<> <d<irn).
Vuliierabas, t/ou(sing,) iff re irniinilimj, or /</ /.W /<> wound.
(/) flnbobam, I ir<tx or<I<'r!n<i, or 7 /.s<v/
f'onvooabaiii, 7 ?/v/.s sirinnn>'n ///;/, or /
Observation. The new element in the Latin verbs. What
idea does this new element express ? What new personal ending
is used ? What point of time is referred to ? x
EXERCISE VI.
Vocabulary.
Compleo, ero.jill up, fill. Hiemo, are, pass the irintcr,
Fin no* arc, strengthen. winter.
Fossa, ae, f., trcni'li, moot. Impetro, are, obtoin one's- rc-
Fiimla, ac, f., slhxj. quest.
Gallia, ao, f., Gaul (the country Provoco, are, call out, challenge.
now called France). Remaneo, ere, remain.
Glaclius, I, m., sicord. Revoco, are, recall.
I. 1. Exspectabamus. 2. Oppugnabant. 3. Complebat. 4.
Habetis. 5. Studebam. 6. Perturbant. 7. Removebat. 8.
Hiemabant. 9. Fossas complebant. 10. Gladimn nautac da-
batis. 11. Ad Galliam ventitabatis. 12. Remanemus. 13. Ro-
manos ad pfignam evocabant. 14. Impetratis. 15. Fundam
habeo. 16. Locum firmabant.
1. Notice that where was or were are used to translate these forms, containing the
letters -ha, the English verb will end in -ing. (The translation hy the simple past
tense of English should not even be referred to until the student is much further
advanced.)
2. Put his, hrr, thdr, ??/, our, your, in place of one's, as the context suggests.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 11
II. 1. They were recalling. 2. He used to pass the winter.
3. She was awaiting. 4. I was obedient. 5. We used to have.
6. We are filling up the trench. 7. You (plur.) were ordering.
8. You (.sw/7.) are superior. 9. They were attacking the wall.
10. I was hastening to Italy. 11. He was occupying. 12. He
used to favor. 13. They used to have. 14. I remain. 15. She
obtains her request. 10. They were strengthening the walls.
LESSON VII.
() Legatnm fnmla vuliierat, he wounds the lieutenant iritli a
ding.
Cum in rm a properat, he hastens with a squadron.
LiC'Ratum gladio vulnerat, lie ^rounds tlie lieutenant with a
sword.
C 11111 K'sfjito aclcquitat, lie, rides up with the lieutenant.
Cnin copils hicmat, he ivinters with the forces.
Locum murls et fossls ftrmat, he strengthens the place with walls
and trenches.
Cum Gallls pugnant, they jiyht ivith the Gauls.
Observation. In what two ways is w-ith expressed in Latin? 1
What corresponding difference is there in the meaning of with in
English ? 2
(I) In Gallia liicmat, he winters in Gaul.
In loco remanent, they remain in the place.
Copias a pugna revocat, he recalls the forces from battle.
Ab Italia propcrat, he hastens from Italy.
Ab legato et Rdmanls im- he obtains his request from the
petrat, lieutenant and the Romans.
Observation. How are in and from expressed in Latin ? When
is <ib used in place of a? 3
1. These forms are known as the Ablative Case.
2. In the last example, notice that cum, like the English with, is usol of one's
opponents, rather than of one's allies, with verbs of //<///////</. <"<iiiti-n<lin>i, n-ai/in/t
war, etc. Here also cum means toyether with, in company unth. ("It takes two to
make a quarrel.")
3. A is never used before vowels.
12 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE VII.
Vocabulary.
rircuimlo, arc, surround. Pecunia, ae, f., money.
Oolloco, arc, station, place. Permaneo, ere, perxi.4.
f'omparo, arc, )vr/.s, collect. Proliibeo, ere, restrain.
C'oiitinco, ere, keep, hem in. Raimis, I, in., l>ran<-h.
Iiijiiria, ac, f., wr^ny-doing, in- Sagitta, ac, f., arrow.
.;'"///, ?r/v//H/. Sollicito, arc, />>/ to influence.
IiiKidiae, arum, f. (used in plu- Submoveo, ere, drive off.
ral only), ambush.
I. 1. Legatus Acduos ah injfiria prohibebat. 2. Cum c5pils in
Italia hiemabamus. 3. Galll miiros copiis complebant. 4. Belgae
locum miiro et fossa firmant. 5. Silva ah Aeduls ad Belgas perti-
net. 6. Labienus copias in msidils collocahat. 7. Barbari fossas
riimls complent. 8. Cum turma ad locum properabam. 9. Tribu-
num sagitta, vulneras. 10. Captivi in sententia permanent. 11.
Copias a pugna revocabamus. .12. Sagittis et fundis Aedu5s a
mfiro submovebant. 13. Cum filio legati ad Italiam navigabjltis.
14. Barbari in loco remanebant. 15. Legati Aeduorum a sociis
Germanorum impetrant. 16. German! cum Belgis pugnabant.
17. Animos copiarum pecunia sollicitatis.
II. 1. Forests used to extend from Gaul to Italy. 2. The
tribunes were keeping the forces in the woods. 3. He was re-
straining the allies from battle. 4. The barbarians used to fight
with slings. 5. They remain with the lieutenant. 6. The allies
were raising forces in Gaul. 7. We were surrounding the place
with trenches. 8. Labienus used to winter with the allies. 9.
We were sailing from Italy to the province with the lieutenant.
10. The barbarians used to station ambushes in the woods. 11.
You were wounding the tribune's son with a sling. 12. She
obtains her request from Labienus. 13. You are driving off the
Gauls from the place. 14. I was passing the winter with the
lieutenant and tribunes in the province. 15. They were trying to
influence the allies with money. 16. The slave was lighting with
the sailor.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 13
LESSON VIII.
(a) In seutentia, Labiene, per- you persist in (your) opinion, La-
manes, bienus.
Copias, legatl, comparamus, ice are raising forces, lieutenants.
Jfuntios, Belgae, exspec- ice ((re aicaitiny messengers, Bel-
taimis, gians.
Sententiam, fllia, collaudo, (my) daughter, I commend (your)
opinion.
Observation. What forms of the nouns ending in us and a are
used in speaking to a person ? In what position are these forms i l
Omission of Latin words meaning your, my, etc. 2
(b) The student should now turn to Part III., sections 1 and 2,
where examples are given of nouns ending in a and us, in the
order in which the cases are usually arranged. To give all the
forms of a noun in this order is called declining a noun, and the
different series of endings are called Declensions.
(c) On the same page, section 3, are declined the words puer,
ager and vir.
Observation. How do the endings of these nouns differ from
those of nouns ending in us I What is the difference between the
declension of puer and that of ager ? Notice how the vocabulary,
by always giving the genitive case of a noun, 3 indicates whether a
noun ending in er is declined like puer or like ager.
(d) RoiuanI et socil, or RomanI the, Romans and (their) allies.
socilque,
Legates et tribunes, or le- tfic lieutenants and the tribunes.
gatos tribunosque,
Murum et fossani, or niuruiii a wall and trench.
fossamque,
Observation. The use and position of -quo. 4
1. These forms are in the Vocative Case.
2. Latin possesses words meaning ni>i, our, i/our, //<'*, her, //.sand their, but dues
not use them when it can be readily gathered from the context to whom the thing (or
person) spoken of belongs. So in translating from Latin these words have often to
be inserted in the English, and until Exercise XLIV. are to be regularly omitted in
translating into Latin. For several exercises to come these words are put in paren-
theses, to indicate their omission.
3. In all vocabularies the genitive of each noun is given, and as no .two of the five
declensions have the same genitive, this serves to indicate to what declension the
noun belongs.
4. When -que is added to a word, the accent is shifted to the syllable before -que ;
e.g., f on' sum, but
14 PRIMARY LATIN 13OOK.
EXERCISE VIII.
Vocabulary.
Agrer, ngrl, m., land, field, tern- Need, are, kill.
ton/. Non, not.
Amlcitia, ae, f., friendship. Occulto, are, conceal.
Ainlcus, I, m., friend. Puer, erl, m., boij.
Arbiter, trl, m., arbitrator. Socer, erl, m., father-in-law.
Faber, brl, m., workman. Vaco, are, be unoccupied, lie
Gener, erl, m., son-in-law. waste.
LIberl, drum, m. (in plural Vasto, are, lay waste.
only), children. Vlcus, I, m., village.
Marcus, I, m., Marcus (a man's Vir, virl, m., man.
name).
I. 1. Agros vicosque, Aedui, habetis. 2. Labienus fabros
nautasque ad Galliam convocat. 3. Cum liberls ad Rhenum pro-
perant. 4. Gallis, socii, arbitros dant. 5. A legato, Belgae, non
impetramus. 6. German! agros Belgarum vastabant. 7. Cum
Aeduis, Labiene, amicitiam confirmas. 8. In agrls Aeduorum
hiemabamus. 9. Pueros in silvis occultant. 10. Socerum legati
liberosque necant. 11. Virum gladio vulnerant. 12. Cum generis
ad copias adequitat.
II. 1. He grants lands to the son-in-law of the tribune. 2.
He grants pardon to the boys. 3. The workmen used to come
often to the wall. 4. You used to have friends, Marcus. 5. The
lands of the Belgians are unoccupied. 6. The Gauls were estab-
lishing friendship with the Belgians. 7. The forces were fighting
in the land of the Belgians. 8. The father-in-law of the lieutenant
was giving money to the children of (his) friend. 9. They are
giving lands to the Germans, lieutenant. 10. The men were fight-
ing with swords, the boys with slings and arrows. 11. The forces
of the Belgians are laying waste the land of the Gauls. 12. They
were concealing an ambush.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 15
LESSON IX.
(a) In part III., section 3, is given the declension of tcmplnm.
Observation. How does the declension of nouns ending in um
differ from that of nouns ending in us ?
(6) The student should look over the vocabularies of this and
the preceding lessons, to see what is the gender of the nouns that
have been used.
Observation. Of what gender are all the Latin nouns that
refer to males ? to females ? to what is neither male nor female ?
What is the gender of the nouns ending in us ? in er ? in ir ? in
um ? in a ?- Explain the apparent exceptions to the general rule
in the vocabulary of Exercises II. and IV.
EXERCISE IX.
Vocabulary.
Bellum, I, n., war. Imperlum, I, n., command.
Tcistra, orum, n. (plural form Man 06, ere, remain, continue.
with singular meaning), camp. Moveo, ere, move.
Exemplum, I, n., example. Officium, I, n., duty, allegiance.
Expugno, are, take by storm. Oppidum, I, n., town.
Frumentum, I, n., grain, corn. Postulo, are, demand.
Helvetius, I, m., Helvetian (one Praemium, I, n., reward.
of a tribe in Gaul). Praesidium, I, n. , garrison.
HIberna, orum, n. (plural form Proelium, I, n., battle.
with singular meaning), win- Renovo, are, renew.
ter quarters.
I. 1. Frumentum comportabant. 2. Legatus copia-s in hiber-
nis collocat. 3. Animos copiarum praemils sollicitab.amus. 4.
Imperium belli postulant. 5. Ab hlbernis ad provinciam prope-
rabat. 6. Romanes a proelio revocat. 7. Murum oppidl virls
compleiit. 8. Ad oppidum ventitabatis. 9. Roman! castra mo-
vent. 10. Germanos in officio continebat. 11. Praesidio locum
tenemus. 12. Bellum cum Romanis renovabant. 13. Exempla
habetis. 14. Labienus copias a proelio continet. 15. Copiam
frfimentl habemus. 16. In castris Helvetiorum manent.
16 PKIMAEY LATIN BOOK.
II. 1. They are stationing garrisons in the towns. 2. We
were bringing in plenty of corn. 3. The forces of the Belgians
were renewing war with Labienus. 4. The Germans continue in
(their) allegiance. 5. The allies of the Romans kill the garrisons
of the towns. 6. He was arousing the spirit of the boy with
examples and rewards. 7. The children have an example. 8.
The Helvetians were laying waste the lands of the Aedui, and
taking by storm (their) towns and villages. 9. The forces were
renewing the battle. 10. They are attacking the camp. 11.
He was stationing a garrison in the town. 12. They used to
come often with the barbarians to the winter quarters of the forces.
13. You were surrounding the camp with a trench. 14. He gives
orders to the garrison. 15. The Gauls attack the camp and fill up
the trench.
LESSON X.
(a) 1. Legatus darns, a famous lieutenant.
2. Victoria dura, a famous victory.
3. Exemplum clarum, a famous example.
4. Legatl clarl, of a famous lieutenant.
5. Victoriae clarae, famous victories.
(b) 6. Vir darns, a famous man.
7. Belgae clarl, the famous Belgians.
8. Ager publicns, public land.
9. Locus asper, a rough place.
10. Nauta perltus, a skilful sailor.
11. Nautarum perltorum, of skilful sailors.
(c) 12. Multa exempla, many examples.
13. Cum paucls Belgls, with a few Belgians.
14. ReliquI Belgae, the remaining Belgians.
15. Magnae copiae, large forces.
Observation. (a) Does the Latin adjective remain unchanged,
like the English ? Is there a change in the gender, the number,
or the case of the nouns accompanying the adjectives, comparing
(i.) 1, 2 and 3 ; (ii.) 2 and 5 ; (iii.) 1 and 4 ?
(6) Are the endings of nouns and adjectives always alike ? How
does the form of the noun affect the form of the adjective ?
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 17
((.) What is the position of the adjective in 1 to 11 ? in 12 to 15 ?
When is the adjective placed before its noun? 1
In Part III., section 10, is given the declension of adjectives
whose masculine nominative singular ends in us or er.
Observation. Is there any difference between the declension
of these adjectives (bonus, liber and aeger) and the declension
of the nouns given in sections 1, 2 and 3 ? How does the vocabu-
lary indicate whether an adjective ending in er is declined like
liber or like aeger ?
EXERCISE X.
Vocabulary.
Ad versus, a, um, unsuccessfid. Latus, a, um, broad, wide.
Altus, a, um, high, deep. Liber, era, erum, free.
Asper, era, erum, rugged, rough. Magnus, a, um, great, large.
Commoveo, ere, disturb, alarm, Maritimus, a, um, maritime, of
agitate. or on the sea.
Creber, bra, brum, numerous, Numerus, I, m., number.
frequent. Ora, ae, f., shore, coast; ora
Excito, are, stimulate. maritima, the sea coast.
Fliiitimus, a, um, neighboring, PaucI, ae, a (plural), few.
adjacent. Populus, I, m., nation, people.
Helvetius, a, um, Helvetian, of Reliquus, a, um, remaining?
the Helvetians. Saxum, I, n., stone.
Idonens, a, um, suitable. Sollicito, are, tempt, bribe, try
Incite, are, arouse, stir up. to win over.
I. 1. Locum fossa lata et muro alto firmant. 2. Oram mari-
timam vastabatis. 3. Fossam crebris ramis complemus. 4. Magna
saxa in 3 muris collocabant. 5. Proelium adversum animos pau-
corum Belgarum commovet. 6. In loco aspero msidias collocant.
7. Magnum numerum servorum et reliquam praedam copiis donat.
8. Liberos Galliae populos superabas. 9. Paucos tribunos ad
1. As a rule, adjectives follow the noun with which they agree, but precede it in
the following cases : (a) when emphatic ; (b) when expressing number or quantity ;
(c) when the noun is modified by both an adjective and a genitive, the order then
being regularly, adjective, genitive, noun. See footnote 2, page 6.
2. The best way generally of translating reliqimis is by "the rest of" ; e.g., reliqui
Uelyac, the rcnniinin;/ Jji-l<j!a/us, /.<., fh- rrst nj tl- Bclyians.
3. Here, as often, Latin in is to be translated by English on.
2
16 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. 1. They are stationing garrisons in the towns. 2. We
were bringing in plenty of corn. 3. The forces of the Belgians
were renewing war with Labienus. 4. The Germans continue in
(their) allegiance. 5. The allies of the Romans kill the garrisons
of the towns. 6. He was arousing the spirit of the boy with
examples and rewards. 7. The children have an example. 8.
The Helvetians were laying waste the lands of the Aedui, and
taking by storm (their) towns and villages. 9. The forces were
renewing the battle. 10. They are attacking the camp. 11.
He was stationing a garrison in the town. 12. They used to
come often with the barbarians to the winter quarters of the forces.
13. You were surrounding the camp with a trench. 14. He gives
orders to the garrison. 15. The Gauls attack the camp and fill up
the trench.
LESSON X.
(a) I. Legatus clarus, a famous lieutenant.
2. Victoria clara, a famous victory.
3. Exemplum claruin, a famous example.
4. Legatl clarl, of a famous lieutenant.
5. Victoriae clarae, famous victories.
(b) 0. Vir clarus, a famous man.
7. Belgae clarl, the famous Belgians.
8. Ager publicus, public land.
9. Locus asper, a rough place.
10. Nauta perltus, a skilful sailor.
11. Nautarum perltorum, of skilful sailors.
(c) 12. Malta exempla, many examples.
13. Cum paucls Belgls, with a few Belgians.
14. ReliquI Belgae, the remaining Belgians.
15. Magnae copiae, large forces.
Observation. (a) Does the Latin adjective remain unchanged,
like the English ? Is there a change in the gender, the number,
or the case of the nouns accompanying the adjectives, comparing
(i.) 1, 2 and 3 ; (ii.) 2 and 5 ; (iii.) 1 and 4 ?
(&) Are the endings of nouns and adjectives always alike ? How
does the form of the noun affect the form of the adjective ?
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 1?
(<) What is the position of the adjective in 1 to 11 ? in 12 to 15 ?
When is the adjective placed before its noun? 1
In Part III., section 10, is given the declension of adjectives
whose masculine nominative singular ends in us or er.
Observation. Is there any difference between the declension
of these adjectives (bonus, liber and aeger) and the declension
of the nouns given in sections 1, 2 and 3 ? How does the vocabu-
lary indicate whether an adjective ending in er is declined like
liber or like aeger ?
EXERCISE X.
Vocabulary.
Adversus, a, urn, unsuccessful. Latus, a, um, broad, wide.
Altus, a, um, high, deep. Liber, era, erum, free.
Asper, era, erum, rugged, rough. Magnus, a, um, great, large.
Commoveo, ere, disturb, alarm, Marltlmus, a, um, maritime, of
agitate. or on the sea.
Creber, bra, brum, numerous, Numerus, I, m., number.
frequent. Ora, ae, f., shore, coast; ora
Excito, are, stimulate. maritima, the sea coast.
Flnitimus, a, um, neighboring, PaucI, ae, a (plural), few.
adjacent. Populus, I, m., nation, people.
Helvetius, a, um, Helvetian, of Reliquus, a, um, remaining*
the Helvetians. Saxum, I, n., stone.
Idoneus, a, um, suitable. Sollicito, are, tempt, bribe, try
Incite, are, arouse, stir up. to win over.
I. 1. Locum fossa lata et muro alto firmant. 2. Oram mari-
timam vastabatis. 3. Fossam crebrls ramis complemus. 4. Magna
saxa in 3 muris collocabant. 5. Proelium adversum animos pau-
corum Belgarum commovet. 6. In loco aspero msidias collocant.
7. Magnum numerum servorum et reliquam praedam copils donat.
8. Liberos Galliae populos superabas. 9. Paucos tribunos ad
1. As a rule, adjectives follow the noun with which they agree, but precede it in
the following cases: (cr) when emphatic; (b) when expressing number or quantity;
(c) when the noun is modified by both an adjective and a genitive, the order then
being regularly, adjective, genitive, noun. See footnote 2, page 6.
2. The best way generally of translating ri'llijimx is by "the rest of" ; e.g., reliqui
fiely&e, the remaining Belffiant, i.e., the, rest of tin' ndyianx.
3. Here, as often, Latin in is to be translated by English on.
'20 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE XII.
Vocabulary.
Caes-nr, -aris, in., Cat'&ll'. Miles, mil it is, ill.,
Ceiituri-6, -oiiis, ill., centurion. Multitu-dd, -diiiis, f., multitude,
CIvi-tas, -tatis, f., state. great nnnil /.
Co-liors, -hortis, f., cohort, coin- Obses, obsidis, m., hostage.
IKIH.IJ (one-tenth of a legion). Or-do, -dinis, in., rani,:.
Eqacs, equitis, m., horse soldier, Pax, pads, f., peace.
(in plural) cavalry. Pedcs, peditis, m., foot soldier,
L.egi-6, -onis, f., legion. (in plural) infantry.
Merca-tor, -toris, m., trader. Servo, are, keep.
I. 1. Obsides Caesari dabimus. 2. Mercatores ad legionem
ventitabant. 3. Pacem et amicitiam cum Caesare confirmabit. 4.
Mllites ordines non servabant. 1 5. PaucI pedites niagiiani nmlti-
tudinem equitum superant. 6. Cum reliquLs legionibus in Gallia
hiemabo. 7. Caesar magnum obsidum numerum 2 imperat. 8.
Tribunes militum et centuriones convocabat. 9. Mllites reli-
quarum legionum civitatem in officio continebunt. 10. Paucas
cohortes in Insidils collocat.
II. 1. He rides up to Caesar. 2. Cresar will hasten with the
rest of the legion to the town. 3. You will grant pardon to the
centurion. 4. The rest of the cohorts will lay waste the neighbor-
ing territory. 5. We were restraining the legions from battle. 6.
The opinion of the centurion will prevail. 7. He fills the camp
with a multitude of soldiers. 8. Cresar establishes peace with the
neighboring states. 9. He will winter in Gaul with the rest of the
legion and the cavalry. 10. They try to win over the rest of the
states. 11. With a few soldiers we shall hasten to the camp.
LESSON XIII.
(a) Expugnavl, I have taken by storm, or I took by storm.
ExpugnavistI, yon (sing.) liave taken by storm, or yon took
by storm.
J. See footnote 2, page 19, 2. See footnote 1, page 17
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
21
Expugnavit, he IMS taken by storm, or he took by storm.
Expugnavimns, ire have taken by storm, or ive took by storm.
Expugnavistis, you (plural) have taken by storm, or you took
by storm.
Expugnaverunt, they have taken by storm, or they took by storm.
Observation. What changes occur in the verb forms, compar-
ing one with another I 1 Resemblance to regular personal endings.
Twofold translation.
(ft) Turn to the perfect tense of all four conjugations, as given
in Part III., section 27.
Observation. Are the endings found in expugnavl, etc.,
found in all these verbs ?
(<) FIRST
CONJUGATION.
SECOND
CONJUGATION.
Present Tense.
Perfect Tense.
Present Tense.
Perfect Tense.
aim*
amavl
moneo
MI on ul
do
dedl
video
vldl
sto
stetl
jubed
jussl
aclj uvo
udjuvl
remaned
remansi
THIRD
CONJUGATION.
FOURTH
CONJUGATION.
Present Tense.
Perfect Tense.
Present Tense.
Perfect Tense.
rego
rexl
audio
audlvl
lego
legl
venio
venl
sumo
sumpsl
vincio
vinxl
mitto
mlsl
sentio
sensl
parco
pepercl
comperio
comperl
Observation. Is the change from the present to the perfect
made in the same way always in each conjugation ? In what one
respect only do all the forms of the perfect given in this list agree ?
Notice that, in the vocabularies that follow, the perfect tense is
always clearly indicated. 2
1. The division recommended in classes for beginners is into the unchanging part
of the perfect stem and the changing endings ; expugnav+i, etc. The relation
between the present and perfect stems should be reserved for a much later stage, and
even the fact that most verbs of conjugations I., II. and IV. have in the perfect of
each conjugation a similar formation, should not be presented for a few lessons, unt il
the pupil has learned to form his perfect, not by the rule of three, but on the
authority of the Vocabulary.
2. For the perfect tense of verbs occurring in the preceding vocabularies, the
student is referred to the general vocabulary, at the end of the book.
22 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE XIII.
Vocabulary.
Accipio, accepl, recf//v. Munio, munlvl, fortify, protect.
Anna, armorum, 11. (in plural Per-maneo, ere, -mansI,rema//(.
only), arms. Peto, petlvl, ask, srck.
Do, dare, dcdl, give. Pono, posul, place, pitch (camp),
Facio, fed, do, make. lay down.
Facul-tas, -tatis, f., opportunity. Tra-do, -didl, give up.
Gero, sressl, carry on, ivage. Vallum, I, n., uvdl, rampart (<f
Jnvo, are. juvl, aid, assist. camp).
Movco, ere, movl, move. Venio, venl, come.
I. 1. Gessimus. 2. Acceperunt. 3. Tradidit. 4. Caesar
castra movife. 5. Helvetii pacem a Caesare petlverunt. 6. Facul-
fcatem fugae captivis dedisti. 7. Magna praesidia in oppidis posul.
8. Reliquae cohortes castra vallo fossaque miimverunt. 9. Caesar
magnam injuriam fecit. 10. Socii legiones frtlmeiito juverunt.
11. Caesar legioiiibus veniam dedit. 12. In officio permansimus.
13. Cum multis equitibus ad castra venit. 14. Arma posuistis et
obsides dedistis. 15. Agros habemus.
II. 1. He has aided. 2. We gave. 3. She has sought. 4.
You have moved. 5. We came. 6. We received the hostages.
7. The Gauls waged war with Caesar. 8. They gave up (their)
arms, captives (and) hostages to Caesar. 9. You fortified the cam])
with high walls. 10. -Caesar has made peace with the neighboring
states. 11. The Gauls gave lands to the Germans. 12. I have
received many injuries from the Romans. 13. He placed a garri-
son in the camp. 14. You gave the legion to the lieutenant. 15.
They came with a few horsemen to Caesar. 16. The rest of the
legion pitched the camp. 17. The soldiers move the camp. 18.
You received great injury from Caesar. 19. They have villages.
LESSON XIV.
The student should turn to the nouns of the third declension,
given in Part III., section 5.
Observation. Compare the endings of the nouns in section 5
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 23
with those of the nouns in section 4. What differences are there
in the endings ? What is the gender of the nouns in section 5 ?
in section 4 ? In what respect do neuter nouns of the second and
third declensions agree ?
EXERCISE XIV.
Vocabulary.
Asr-men, -minis, n., line of inarch, Imped-io, -IvI, obstruct.
nnny (on the march). Iter, itineris 11., march, road.
Amitto, amis!, lose. Lat-us, -eris, n., side, flank.
Avert-6, -I, turn aside. Op-us, -eris, n., work, fortifica-
Contend-6, -I, hasten. Hon.
Dis-ce<16, -cessl, depart, unth- Per-ficio, -feel, finish.
draw. 1 SIgnum, I, n., standard, signal. 2
Flu-men, -minis, n., river. Vuln-us, -eris, n., wound.
I. 1. Iter a flumine avertimus. 2. Milites opus perfeeerunt.
3. Pauci equites vulnera acceperunt. 4. Moguls itineribus Caesar
ad flumen contendit. 5. Signum proelil cohortibus dedit. 6.
Multi pedites ab agmine discesserunt. 7. Milites ab opere revo-
cjlvit. 8. Silva pertinet a flumine ad castra. 9. LegatI ad Caesa-
rem in 3 itiiiere venerunt. 10. Cohortes signa amiserunt. 11.
Iter agminis impediverunt. 12. Helvetii iter fecerunt. 4
II. 1. You have received a wound. 2. Caesar recalled the
soldiers from work. 3. Broad rivers hem in the Helvetii. 4. We
have finished the fortification of the camp. 5. They have marched
(literally, made a march) from the province. 6. By a forced
(literally, great) march I came to the camp. 7. Caesar has turned
aside (his) march from the Helvetii. 8. We have lost a standard.
9. A few soldiers have left (literally, departed from) the standards.
10. The river has protected the sides of the camp. 11. We came
to the river with the rest of the cohorts. 12. We received a few
wounds.
1. Discedo ab I leave, literally, I depart , /'////.
2. A genitive depending on signum (signal) should be translated by for.
3. In is in this phrase to he translated on.
4. Iter f ado I inarch, literally, / make a march.
24 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XV.
Dederam, I had given. Veneramus, we had come.
MIseras, you (sing.) had sent. Jusseratis, you (plural) had
Jusserat, he had ordered. ordered.
Dederant, they had given.
Observation. Personal endings. What letters are found in
each Latin word ? What word occurs in the translation of each of
these Latin words ? Referring to Lesson XIII. (c), are these
forms obtained from the present or the perfect tense ?
EXEHCISE XV.
Vocabulary.
Cognosce, cognovl, leam, find Mitto, mlsl, send.
out. Ob-tine6, ere, -tinul, hold, pos-
Con-fugio, -fugl, flee. sess.
Con-sldo, -sedl, encamp. Occup-6, are, -avl, seize.
Con-venid, -venl, come together, Re-duco, -duxl, lead back,
assemble. Regnum, I, n., royal power.
Erupti-6, -onis, f., sally. Rhenus, I, m., Rhine.
Explora-tor, -toris, in., scout. Tim-eo, ere, -ul, fear, be afraid.
Impedimenta, orum, 11. (in plu- Trans-duco, -duxl, lead across.
ral), baggage, baggage-ani-
mals.
I. 1. Copias reduxeras. 2. Ad Rhenum contenderat. 3.
Legates misimus. 4. Exploratores iter cognoverant. 5. Barbaros
timent. 6. Eruptionem fecerant. 7. Copiae consederant. 8.
Regnum obtinuerat. 9. Acceperamus. 10. Discesserant. 11.
Gesserunt. 12. Feceram. 13. Vulnerant. 14. Dedimus. 15.
Juvistis. 16. Posueratis. 17. Petivimus. 18. Discessit. 19.
Confugeramus. 20. Properat. 21. Imperaverat.
II. 1. He had led the soldiers across. 2. They came together
to Caesar. 3. I shall seize the royal power. 4. We had sent
scouts. 5. They had fled to the baggage. 6. Caesar encamped
with the rest of the forces. 7. Ambassadors had come to the
camp. 8. We led a large number of baggage-animals across. 9.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
25
The forces had encamped. 10. They received a few wounds. 11.
He has sought peace. 12. We had given. 13. You had led back
the legion. 14. I had finished. 15. We encamped. 16. She had
sent. 17. We were hastening. 18. You sent. 19. They will
wound. 20. I received.
LESSON XVI.
Ab Italia pertinet,
Ad Caesarem venerunt.
Cum Gallls pacem fecit,
De pace legates uilsernnt,
Ex agrls frumentum coinpor-
tant,
In provincia hiemat,
Copias in Galliam nilsit,
Inter flumen et silvas iter
fecit,
Inter Belgas valet,
Per provinciam iter fecerunt,
Per Helvetios cognovit,
Litterls cognovit,
Post pugnam cognovit,
Propter mnltitudinem Ger-
maiiorum timent,
Sine causa timent,
Trans Rhenum consederunt,
it extends from Italy.
tliey came to Casnr.
he made peace with the Ganh.
they sent ambassadors concerning
(or about) peace.
they bring in corn out of (or from)
the fields.
he winters in the province.
he sent the forces into (or o) Gaid.
he marched between the river and
the woods.
he is influenticd among the Bel-
gians.
they marched through the province.
he found out through (or by means
of) the Helvetians.
he found out by means of letters.
he found out after the battle.
they are afraid on account of tlie
great number of Germans.
they fear unthout cause.
they encamped across the Rhine.
Observation. The meaning of the prepositions used, and the
case which follows each of them. The difference between in with
accusative and in with ablative ; ab and ex ; ad and in with
accusative ; the ablative of means and per with accusative.
26 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE XVI.
Vocabulary.
Auctori-tas, -tatis, f., influence. Mors, mortis, ., death.
Dediti-6, -onis, f., surrender. Pater, patris, m., ///.
Iiicol-6, -ul, dwell, inhabit. Tim-or, -oris, m., fear.
Inopia, ae, f., want, scarcity. Val-e6, ere, -ul, be influential.
Judic-6, are, -avl, decide. Vir-tus, -tutis, f., valor, brave i /.
I. 1. Sine injuria per provinciam iter fecimus. 2. Frumentum
ex agrls in castra comportabant. 3. Post proelium legati ad
Caesar de deditioiie venerunt. 4. Trans Rhenurn in loco idoneo
consC-derat. 5. Magnam inter Belgas auctoritatem propter vir-
tuteni habebat. 6. Milites ex hibernis et a Caesare convenerant.
7. Ex captivis cognoverat. 8. In certum locum conveneramus.
9. Arbitros inter civitates dedit. 10. Germanos sine causa timent.
11. Cum reliquls legionibus in Galliam contendit. 12. Ex castris
discessistis. 13. Iter in provinciam averterant. 14. Arma ex
oppido tradiderunt. 15. Sine causa bellum gesseratis.
II. 1. He had sent the forces across the river into Gaul. 2.
He found out through scouts. 3. After the death of (his) father
he had held the royal power. 4. They had made numerous sallies
out of the woods. 5. The rest of the Belgians had sent ambassa-
dors concerning peace. 6. He used to be influential among the
Gauls. 7. They remain in the camp not without great danger, on
account of the scarcity of corn. 8. They had placed the baggage
between the river and the cavalry. 9. He led back the forces into
winter quarters. 10. We shall not decide about the road. 11.
They had dwelt across the Rhine. 12. On account of (their) fear
they had fled into the woods. 13: Caesar had led across the forces
without baggage. 14. We used to have lands across the Rhine in
the province. 15. Out of a large number few received wounds.
LESSON XVII.
() Dcderis, you (sing.) ivill have Venerlmus, we shall hare come.
given. Jusserltis, you (plur.) will lutrc
MIscrit, he will have sent. ordered.
Jusserit, lie will have ordered. Dederint, tJtfij u-ill. Jittrr (jiven.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 27
Observation. Personal endings. What letters are found in
each Latin word in the translation of which are found the words
shall han' or n-IU have ? Are these forms obtained from the present-
er the perfect tense ?
(6) Dedero, I shall have given. Mlserd, / shall have sent.
Observation. What variation occurs in that part of the Latin
verb which expresses shall have ?
(c) In Part III., section 27, may be found the names by which
the tenses of the Latin verb are known.
EXERCISE XVII.
Vocabulary.
De-lijsro. -legl, choose. Jubeo, ere, jussl, order.
De-pono, -posnl, lay aside. Memoria, ae, f., memory.
De-terreo, ere, -terrul, deter. Per-duco, -duxl, carry, bring.
Dubit-6, are, -avl, hesitate, have Regi-6, -onis, f., region, f//.s/ //'</.
doubts. Re-tineo, ere, -tinul, preserve.
Fug-6, are, -avl, rout, put to Vet-6, are, -ul, forbid,
flight. Video, ere, vldl, see.
I. 1. Fabros ex legione delegerat. 2. Murum perduxerimus.
3. Anna deposuerint. 4. Regionem vastaverunt. 5. Legio mon-
tem non tenebit. 6. Videtis. 7. Reriovabam. 8. Discessit. 9.
Judicavero. 10. Dubitabamus. 11. Deterret. 12. Vetuisti.
13. Gesseramus. 14. Discesserit. 15. Complebunt. 16. Expiig-
naverunt. 17. Occupaveras. 18. Videritis. 19. Muniverunt.
20. Consederat. 21. Veneram.
II. 1. He has not laid aside the memory. 2. You had remem-
bered (literally, preserved the memory). 3. They will have routed.
4. I shall have learned. 5. We had hesitated. 6. They chose.
7. I shall order. 8. We have come. 9. We were holding. 10.
It used to deter. 11. You were hesitating. 12. She used to be
influential. 13. They will have fled. 14. We shall have sent.
15. I forbade. 16. They order. 17. You are deciding. 18. You
were deterring.
28 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XVIII.
Turn to the adjectives of the third declension, as given in Part
III., section 11.
Observation. How far do the endings of the adjective agree
with those of the noun, as given in sections 4 and 5 (comparing
forms of the same gender always)? Is there always a separate
form for the feminine nominative? for the neuter nominative?
Examine the vocabulary, to see how the genitive case and the
different genders of adjectives of the third declension are marked. 1
EXERCISE XVIII.
Vocabulary.
Decllvis, e, sloping. Levis, e, slight, trifling.
Duplex, duplicis, double. Omnis, e, all.
Eques-ter, -tris, -tre, of cavalry, Pot-ens, -entis, powerful,
cavalry- (adjective). Prae-ceps, -cipitis, steep.
Fertilis, e, fertile. Bee-ens, -entis, recent, unex-
Fortis, e, brave. hausted.
Hnmills, e, low, lowly. Silvestris, e, wooded.
Incend-6, -I, burn. Vel-ox, -ocis, swift, active.
I. 1. Praesidia in omnibus oppidls collocabit. 2. Proelium
equestre fecimus. 2 3. Filiam legato, viro forti et potent!, dedit.
4. In loco silvestrl consederant. 5. Copiae recentes et integrae
proelium renovabant. 6. Animos omnium sociorum confirmat.
7. Pedites veloces et fortes delegeram. 8. Duplicem fossam a
castris ad flumen perduxit. 9. Omnia anna tradiderunt. 10.
Levia equestria proelia fecerant. 2 11. Per regionem fertilem iter
fecerant. 12. Ex humili loco ad magnam auctoritatem Marcum
perduxerat.
1. All adjectives not ending in us (or er), a, urn, are of the third declension.
Adjectives of this declension end generally in (a) masculine and feminine, -is, neuter,
-e, the genitive of each being the same as the masculine nominative ; (b) masculine,
-er, feminine, -ris, neuter, -re, the genitive of each being the same as the feminine
nominative ; (c) masculine, feminine and neuter, -ns, the genitive having -ntis in place
of -ns; (d) masculine, feminine and neuter, -x, the genitive having -cis in place of -x
(but -ids in place of -ex).
2. Proelium facio= I fight a battle, literally, Intake a battle.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 29
II. 1. They had fortified the camp with a double wall. 2.
Csesar removed the horses of all the lieutenants. 3. They were
laying waste all the lands. 4. The Helvetians had burned all the
towns, all the rest of the villages, (and) all the corn. 5. He had
not laid aside the memory of the recent wrongs. 6. He has
granted pardon to all the captives. 7. You have pitched the camp
in a sloping and steep place. 8. He will have sent fresh and
unexhausted cavalry. 9. I hastened with all the cavalry to the
river. 10. We marched through fertile lands. 11. We shall
deter the Gauls l>y (our) recent victory. 12. He summons the
centurions of all ranks.
LESSON XIX.
l-ll HIM renovare clubitant, they hesitate to renew the -irr.
Copias in proviiicia j ussit he ordered the forces to winter in
liiemare, the province.
Lablenum locum tenere jus- he had ordered Labicnus to Jiold
s- rat, the place.
Legates discedere vetult, he forbade the lieutenants to de-
part.
Labienum jubet castra mu- he orders Labienus to fortify the
nlre, camp.
Venire dubitat, he hesitates to come.
Observation. In each sentence notice how one verb completes
the meaning of the other. Formation of the infinitive in each
conjugation. What is generally the position of the infinitive ?
Notice that in the vocabularies that follow, the infinitive is always
given, as a means of indicating the conjugation to which a verb
belongs. 1
EXERCISE XIX.
Vocabulary.
Audeo, ere, venture. Cogo, ere, coegl, collect, compel.
CoepI (used in the perfect tenses C6nstitu-6, ere, -I, determine.
only) began. Desil-16, Ire, -ul, leap doini.
1. In preceding vocabularies, the infinitive has not been given for all verbs. In
such cases the student should refer to the general vocabulary, at the end of the book.
30 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
I. 1. Belluin cum Germams gcrere constituit. 2. Milites
vctuit ab sigiiis discedere. 3. Ex^fliiitimls regionibus milites
jubet convemre. 4. Oppidum oppugnfire et portas inceiidere
coeperunt. 5. Legati nd castra venire dubitaverant. 6. Magna
praesidia in omnibus oppidis constituit collocare, et cum reliquis
copiis in vico Aeduorum hiemare. 7. Copias in hiberiia rediicere
coiistituerat. 8. Omnes legates coegit e(juos removere. 9. Multis
cum lacrimls Caesarem obsecrare coepimus. 10. Proelium renovare
noii audC-buiit. 11. Omiiia oppida incendere constitueramus. 12.
Labieiium cum omnibus equitibus locum tenere jussit. 13. Pa-
trem imperium duponere coegit.
II. 1. Ciusar had ordered all the Acdtii to give up (their) arms.
2. They determined to send ambassadors to Caesar concerning
peace. 3. They had begun to lay waste the lands of the allies.
4. Cresar forbade the legions to leave (their) work. 5. They have
begun to collect forces. 6. He ordered all the soldiers to leap
down. 7. They began to fill up the trenches with branches. 8.
He had ordered the soldiers to fortify the camp with a double
trench. 9. We determined to collect forces and wage war with
Ctesar. 10. They do not venture to send ambassadors. 11. He
had compelled the Aedui to give hostages. 12. They hesitate to
winter in Gaul. 13. The Gauls began to assemble out of all the
towns.
LESSON XX.
Turn to the nouns of the fourth declension given in Part III.,
section 7.
Observation. The case-endings of the declension. The gender
of the nouns in us and in u. 1 How does the vocabulary indicate
that a noun is of the fourth declension ?
EXERCISE XX.
Vocabulary.
Adventus, us, m., arrival. Com-mitto, ere, -mlsl, eutri.ist;
Commeatus, us, m., supplies. 11 (with proelium) join, bojin.
J ? See Part III., section r.o, b. 2. See footnote 1, page 31.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 31
Conspectus, us, m., .s/V/A/, i:ica\ Lacus, us, in., lake.
Coriiu, us, n., //<;/ (of an army). Magistratus, us, in., magistrate,
Dexter, tra, truni, t'Hjltt. office.
Discessus, us, m., departure. Peditatus, us, m., infantry. 1
Equitatus, us, m., cavalry. 1 Sal-us, -utis, f., sttfety.
Exercitus, us, in., army. Sus-tiiieo, ere, -tinul, with-
II 01116. liomiiiis, in., man, (in stand, endure.
plural) people. Usus, us, m., experience.
Impetus, us, m., attacl;, f'ti'i/.
I. 1. Post adventuin Caesaris obsides dare constituerant. 2.
Galli impetum in 2 equitatuin feet-runt. 3. Cum equitatu Helveti-
orum proelium coinmlserunt. 4. Helvetii agros Aeduorum in con-
s}>ectu exereitus Romam vastabant. 5. A lacu ad flumen mui'um
duplicem perdfixeramus. 0. Magistratum obtinebat. 7. Salutem
magistratuum equitatui commisit. 8. In 3 dextro cornu omnem
equitatum collocavit. 9. Oppidum magno impetu oppugnare
coeperunt. 10. Equitatus in 4 conspectum veneram. 11. Magi-
striitus multitudiiiem hominum ex agris coegerant. 12. Reliquum
exercitum Labieno dare constituit. 13. Exercitum sine magno
commeatu cogere non audebunt. 14. Legates ab omnibus exer-
citibus con venire jussit.
II. 1. They will not withstand the attacks of the cavalry. 2.
He ordered the lieutenant to remove out of sight the horses of all
the soldiers. 3. He determined to winter in the province with all
the cavalry. 4. After the departure of the Belgians they had
begun to renew the war. 5. The plunder he orders the lieutenant
to present to the cavalry. 6. He hastened to the lake. 7. We
have determined to await Labienus' arrival. 8. He orders all the
magistrates to assemble. 9. He had forbidden the soldiers to seek
supplies. 10. They were surrounding the forces with cavalry.
11. He ordered Labienus with the rest of the cavalry to hasten to
the right wing. 12. They have experience in camps. 13. He
found out through scouts about the departure of the allies. 14.
He hesitates to entrust all the plunder to the magistrates.
1. These words are to be used in Latin in the singular, not in the plural, in spite of
their meaning.
2. With impetum facto, in with the accusative is to be translated on.
3. See footnote 3, page 17. 4, Translate in here by in, not into.
32
PK1MAKY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXI.
() 31 issus sum, I liave been sent, or I was sent.
Su pe rut us es, i/cm (sing.) Jiave been conquered, or you ivere
conquered.
Audit us est, he lias been heard, or he was Jieard.
Revocati sum us, we Jiave been recalled, or we were recalled.
Jussi estis, you (plural) have been ordered, or you were
ordered.
CoactI sunt, they have been compelled, or they ivere compelled.
Observation. Twofold translation. Voice. Number of words
in each Latin phrase. Which indicates the person ? What does
the change of ending in the other indicate ?
(b) Jussa est, she was ordered,
it has been heard,
the place was fortified,
the camp was fortified.
the legions have been sent,
the soldiers have been ordered.
Audltum est,
Locus munltus est,
Castra munlta sunt,
Legioiies missae sunt,
Mllites jussi sunt,
Observation. What new endings are found in these verbs ?
What do the different endings indicate 1
w
FIRST CONJUGATION.
Present.
Perfect Active.
Perfect Passive.
amu
amavl
aniatus sum
do
dedl
datus sum
veto
vetul
vetitus sum
SECOND CONJUGATION.
inoneo
monul
monitus sum
j ubeo
jussi
jussus sum
coinmoveo
commovl
commotus sum
compleo
coinplevl
completus sum
THIRD CONJUGATION.
rego
rexl
rectus sum
cogo
coegl
coactus sum
cognosco
cognovl
cognitus sum
mitto
mlsl
missus sum
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 33
FOURTH CONJUGATION.
Present. Perfect Active. Perfect Passive.
audio audlvl audltus sum
sentio sensl sensus sum
vincio vinxl vinctus sum
Observation. Is the relation between the forms of the perfect
passive and those of the present or perfect active always the same ''.
Is it the same in any conjugation ? In what respect do all the
perfect passive forms agree ?
Notice how in the vocabularies that follow a form is given with
each verb, from which the perfect passive may easily be obtained, 1
EXERCISE XXI.
Vocabulary.
Ac-cipio, ere, -cepl, -ceptum, Mun-io, Ire, -IvI, -Itum, fortify.
reccir< . Per-ficio, ere, -fed, -fectum,
C oiloc-6, are, -avl, -atum, station. finish.
Com-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -niissum, Proliib-eo, ere, -ul, -ituiii, re-
entrust, begin. strain.
Com-moveo, ere, -uiovl, -1116- Re-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum,
turn, alarm. lead bad;.
Convoc-6, are, -avl, -atum, call Renov-6, are, -avl, -atum, re-
together, new.
De-ligo, ere, -legl, -lectum, Tra-do, ere, -didl, -dituiu, f/U'e
cf loose. up.
Expugn-6, are, -avl, -atum, Trans-duco, ere, -duxl, -duc-
take by storm. tum, lead across.
Facio, ere, feel, faetum, do, Vast-o, are, -avl, -atum, l<nj
make. waste.
lu-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum, Vulner-6, are, -avl, -atum,
burn. wound.
1. For each regular Latin verb the vocabulary gives four forms, ending- in -<i, -re, /
and -nin, called the Principal Parts of the verb. With the exception of the first t\vo,
these have no constant relation one to another in form, although in the first conjuga-
tion a majority of verbs always change -6 to -avl, -Cituin ; in the second conjugation,
-eo to -ul, -Hum; and in the fourth conjugation, -to to -lm, -Itum.
For the perfect passive of verbs occurring in the preceding vocabularies the
student is referred to the general vocabulary, at the end of the book.
3
34 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
I. 1. Agii vastatl sunt. 2. Copiae eoactae sunt. 3. Delect!
sumus. 4. Cdgnitum est. 5. Oppida incensa sunt. 6. Equitatus
missus est. 7. Jussus sum. 8. Yctita es. 9. Locus est 1 munitus.
10. Opus perfectum est. 11. Equi remoti sunt. 12. Fossa com-
pleta est. 13. Reducti sumus. 14. Convocati sunt. 15. Pro-
hibita est. l(i. Prohibitive sunt. 17. Vuliius acceptum est. 18.
Proelium factum est. 19. Exercitus trausductus est. 20. Caesar
commotus est.
II. 1. The soldiers were ordered. 2. A large number of men
has been collected. 3. Wounds were received. 4. We have been
sent. 5. She has been wounded. 6. The camp was fortified. 7.
I was ordered. 8. The war was renewed. 9. The arms have been
given up. 10. The forces were led back. 11. The cavalry has
been led across. 12. Garrisons were stationed. 13. A legion was
stationed. 14. Hostages have been given. 15. We have been
alarmed. 1C. You have been ordered. 17. The signal was given.
18. The battle has been begun. 19. The camp was taken by
storm. 20. The magistrates were called together.
LESSON XXII.
Fuiida vulneratus est, he was wounded by a slui<j.
A-grl a. copils vastatl sunt, tJie fields have been laid waste by
the fwces.
Locus vallo fossaque munitus the place ivas fortified by a wall
est, and trench.
Equi a Caesare remoti sunt, tin- /o/-.sr.s irere removed by <
Observation. Two ways of translating by. Which is used in
connection with the passive voice to denote the person by whom
something is done ? 2
1. Est munitus has the same meaning as munitus est. Not only may the order be
changed in these perfect passive forms, but the two parts are sometimes separated by
other words.
2. With the active voice a and ab will mean from ; with the passive, from or by,
whichever the rest of the sentence requires.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS.
EXERCISE XXII.
Vocabulary.
Onus, onoris, ll., Imrili.'ii. Perturb-6, arc, -avl, -atuiu,
Op-primo, ere, -pressl, -pres- throw into confusion.
sum, Overwhelm. Prae-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum,
send in advance.
I. 1. Obsides ab Helvetiis Caesari dat! sunt. 2. Legati ab
omnibus regionibus verierant. 3. Sagittis et fundls barbari a
muro submutl sunt. 4. Legati et omnes cunturiouos a Caesare eon-
vocatl sunt. 5. A magistratu multitude homiuum ex agrLs coacta
est. 6. Castra a militibus duplici fossa circumdata sunt. 7.
Copiae oppressae sunt timore. 8. EquI omnium ex conspectu
remoti sunt. 9. Jussi sumus obsides dare et frumeiitum in
hiberna comportare. 10. Fossa ramis completa est. 11. Labienus
cum omul equitatu ad provinciam praeinissus est. 12. A Caesare
ex captivis cognitum est. 13. Frumento commeatfKjue a sociis
jiitl estis. 14. Impetus a barbaris in 1 oquitatum factus est. 15.
Human! adverse proelio et fuga Gallorum commoti sunt.
II. 1. Ambassadors were sent in advance by Cresar into Gaul.
2. The forces were thrown into confusion by the attack of the
barbarians. 3. The camp has been fortified by a rampart and
trench. 4. You have been recalled from work. 5. The wall was
filled with men. 6. They were ordered by the lieutenant to
remove the horses. 7. Ambassadors were ordered to assemble
from every town. 8. Large forces have been collected by the
Belgians. 9. A large number of the Belgians was slain. 10. The
soldiers were overwhelmed by the great weight of (their) arms.
11. All the towns were burned by the Helvetians. 12. We were
alarmed by the arrival of Cajsar. 13. The land of the Aedui has
been laid waste by the Germans. 14. She was wounded by an
arrow. 15. Arms were given up by all the Belgians. 16. The
forces were alarmed by the scarcity of com. 17. A sally was
made out of the woods by the Gauls. 18. The army was led back
into camp.
1. See footnote 2, page 31.
36 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXIII.
(a) Missus eraui, I had been sent. RovocatI eramus, we had been
recalled.
Commutus eras, you (sing.) Jussi eratis, you (plural) had
had been alarmed, been ordered.
Audit us erat, he had been CoactI erant, they had been corn-
heard, petted.
Audltum erat, it liad been Castra muiilta eraiit, th-e eain/>
heard. ha<l been fortified.
J ussa erat, she had been or- Copiae missae eraiit, the forces
dered. had been sent.
Observation. Compare these phrases with those given in Les-
son XXI. () and (b). What differences in form and meaning do
you find ?
(6) Missus ero, I shall have been RevocatI erimus, we shall )mce
sent. been recalled.
CoiiiiuutuN eris, yon (sing.) Jussi eritis, you (plural) will
unll hare been alarmed. have been ordered.
Audit inn erit, it will have Castra m unit a eruiit, the camp
been heard. irill hare been fortified.
Jussa erit, she will have been Copiae missae erunt, the forces
ordered. will have been sent.
Observation. Compare these phrases with those in (). What
differences in form and meaning do you find ?
(r) MIseram, I Jiad sent. Jusseratis, you (plural) had or-
dered.
Audlverat, he had heard. Coe^erant, they had coin^elicd.
MIsero, I shall have sent. Mumveriiit, they witt have for-
tified.
Observation. Compare these forms with the phrases in (a) and
(6). What is the difference between the corresponding active and
passive forms in Latin ?
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 37
EXERCISE XXIII.
Vocabulary.
Ad-tliico, ere, -cliixl, -dncttim, In-struo, ere, -striixl, -strnc-
injIiK ,i<-< . tuni, draw up.
Compar-6, are, -avl, -attuii, Tollo, ere, sustull, snblatuiii,
make ready, procure. tnl:c awnj.
I. 1. Copiae mstriictae crant. 2. Adducti eramus. 3. Fril-
incntum comparatum erit. 4. Jilssus ero. 5. Convocatl crant.
6. Collocati sinit. 7. Coegeramus. 8. Incenderunt. 9. Oppida
inceiisa erunt. 10. Collocabit. 11. Vastavit. 12. Commovet.
13. Removit. 14. Mumveratis. 15. Sustulimus. 16. Addilx-
eram. 17. Instruct! suiit. 18. Fossa erat completa. 19. Vulnera
accepta erant. 20. Transducti erimus. 21. Proelium coinmTsc-
rant. 22. Proelium coramissum erat. 23. Jubebat. 24. Com-
movebit. 25. Sustinueramus. 26. Delegeras. 27. Delectus eras.
28. Cognitum erit. 29. Sublatum erat. 30. Vulneratis.
II. 1. The war had been renewed. 2. We had renewed. 3.
We were not influenced. 4. The legion had been drawn up.
5. They had been made ready. 6. The battle was begun. 7.
They will have been overwhelmed. 8. The camp had been taken
by storm. 9. They sent in advance. 10. It had been finished.
11. They used to favor. 12. We were calling together. 13.
They will have found out. 14. It was found out. 15. They had
been compelled. 16. The legion was led back. 17. The legions
had been led across. 18. You were sent in advance. 19. He
procures. 20. They are making ready. 21. I shall have taken
away. 22. The camp had been fortified. 23. They will take the
camp by storm. 24. I shall remove. 25. They had wounded.
26. She had been wounded. 27. They wound. 28. It had been
given. 29. I gave. 30. I was giving.
38 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXIV.
(a) Turn to the nouns of the fifth declension, given in Part III.,
section 8.
Observation. The case-endings of the declension. How docs
the vocabulary indicate that a noun is of the fifth declension ? Of
what gender are most nouns of this declension 2 1
(?>) Turn to the list of ordinal numerals, given in Part III.,
section 15.
Observation. Forms and translation. Notice the way in which
thirteenth, fourteenth, twenty-first, etc. , are expressed.
In the general Vocabulary all ordinal numerals are given as
follows: primus, a, um, first ; secumlns, a, um, second; deci-
mus, a, um, tenth. Whatsis indicated by the letters a, um ?
EXERCISE XXIV.
Vocabulary.
Acies, el, f., line of battle, line. Occasns, us, m., setting.
Dies, el, m., day. Pars, partis, f., part.
Egregius, a, um, remarkable. Res, rel, f., thing, matter, affair.
Fides, el, f., honor, word, fidelity. Scientia, ae, f., knowledge.
Hora, ae, f., hour. Sol, soils, m., sun.
Militaris, e, military. Spes, el, f., hope.
I. 1. Spem fugae sustulerat. 2. Milites in acie mstriicti sunt.
3. Cum tertia legione in provincia hiemare constituit. 4. Fidem
servavit de numero dierum. 5. Scientiam rel 2 militaris hahet.
6. Ab hora septima ad occasum solis pugnaverant. 7. Multis
rebus adducti erant. 8. Egregiam fidem legati cognoverat. 9.
Tertia pars exercitus interfecta est. 10. Omnes centuriones
quartae cohortis interfecti erant. 11. De fide Gallorum dubita-
verant. 12. Propter inopiam omnium rerum milites nonae legionis
in provinciam reducere constituent. 13. Omnem spem salutis in
virtute posueramus.
1. See Part III., section 51, b.
2. Res militaris (the singular) = military affairs, the art of warfare.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 39
II. 1. An attack had been made by the soldiers of the fifth
legion on 1 the first line. 2. They had been influenced by the
hope of plunder. 3. The forces had been led back to the camp
after the fourth day. 4. All things will have been made ready.
5. The second line had been surrounded by the barbarians. 6. He
had had great experience in military affairs. 2 7. He drew up the
line of battle. 8. They had inhabited a third part of Gaul. 9.
They will not withstand the first attack of the forces. 10. The
forces had been influenced by the want of everything (literally, all
things). 11. The matter had been found out through scouts. 12.
They had come into Gaul not without great hope of plunder. 13.
He had stationed the tenth legion in ambush.
LESSON XXV.
Tertio die ad Caesarem ve- on the third day they came to
nerunt, Ccesar.
Hora septima proelium com- he joined battle at the seventh
mlsit, hour.
Occasu solis in castra reducti they were led back into camp at
sunt, sunset (literally, at the set-
ting of the sun).
Mnltos dies iter fecerant, they ha.d marched many days.
Magnam parteiu diel pugna- tJiey Jiad fought a large part of
verant, the day.
Paucas horas impetus snsti- for a few hours they withstood the
nuerunt, attacks.
Observation. The two ideas connected with time found in
these sentences. The mode of expressing each in Latin. Is each
idea always expressed in the same way in English ?
EXERCISE XXV.
(jFor this, and all subsequent exercises, no special vocabulary will
be f/'it'cn. TJie student must depend entirely on the general vocabu-
laries, at the, end of the book.)
1. See footnote 2, pajre 31. 2. See footnote 2, pajje 38.
40 fcKIMARY LATIN BOOli.
I. 1. Postero die castra Labienl oppugnare decreverant. &
Complures horas piignaverunt. 3. Nocte ad Rhenum contendit.
4. Soils occasu copiae in castra reductae sunt. 5. Multds annos
regmmi obtinuerat. 6. Hora circiter decima die! nfnitium ad
Labieiium misimus. 7. Permultos dies iter per provinciam fece-
rant. 8. Coiitinuds complures dies Caesar aciem instriixit. 9.
Prima liice res ab exploratoribus confirmata est. 10. Certo anni
tenipore magistrates a Caesare convenire jiissi erant. 11. Tertiam
partem Galliae paucos annos incolueramus. 12. Adventu Caesaris
barbari constiterunt.
IT. 1. The Helvetians moved their camp the next day at day-
break. 2. In the third watch they made a sally out of the town
with all their forces. 3. For several hours they withstood the
attacks of the cavalry. 4. On the first arrival of the army numer-
ous sallies had been made by the Gauls. 5. He decided to attack
the town on the seventh day. 6. They had for many days laid
waste the lands of the Aedui. 7. On the following day an attack
was made by the Gauls on the cavalry. 8. The camp was moved
in the fourth watch with 1 great noise and confusion. 9. After his
father's death he had possessed the royal power for several years.
10. At daybreak on the remaining days a double line of battle had
been drawn up by Cnesar. 11. They had waged war with the
Romans for many years. 12. We reached the camp the third hour
of the day.
LESSON XXVI.
Turn to the nouns of the third declension, given in Part III.,
section 6.
Observation. How do the case-endings differ from those given
in sections 4 and 5 (comparing always nouns of the same gender) ?
Do the same differences occur in all the words ? 2 Compare the
adjectives of the third declension given in Part III., section 11.
Notice also the irregular declension of the nouns given in Part
III., section 9.
1. Use cum.
2. Most nouns having these endings will be found to belong to one of the following
classes :
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 41
EXERCISE XXVI.
I. 1. Equites impetum hostium sustinent. 2. Fines Aeduorum
multds menses ferrd et ignl vastati suiit. 3. Nilvium figilrii et
remdrum rndtu barbari permdtl erant. 4. Cuhnina Alpinm ab
hostibua occupata craiit. 5. Aiiimalia atque magnum numerum
servdrum ct clientium Galli igni cremabant. 6. Posterd die
Labienum cum omul equitatfi montem tcnere jussit. 7. In fines
hostium incursidnem fecorant. 8. Hicnio naves constitiiit aedifi-
cilre. 9. E fmibus hostium Helvetidrum in fines Acdudrum iter
per vim fecerunt. 10. In fmibus hostium hiemaverat. 11. Prop-
tor altitudinem montium castra in valle posita sunt. 12. Naves
ex fmitimis regionibus jubet convenire.
II. 1. They had built a large number of ships in the third year
of the war. 2. He demanded a large number of hostages. 3. An
attack was made at daybreak by the enemy on the line of battle.
4. All the towns of the enemy were burned. 5. They had marched
through the province by (literally, thruiiyli) force. 6. They were
alarmed by the violence of the rivers. 7. For many years he used
to have a large number of retainers. 8. A forest used to extend
from the mountain to the territories of the Aedui, and restrain 1
the enemy's cavalry from inroads. 8. On account of the depth of
the sea, the soldiers hesitated to leap down out of the ship. 10.
The forces of the enemy had been dismayed by the size of the
ships of war. 11. For a large part of the day they had laid waste
the fields with fire and sword. 12. For several years he had
leased all the rest of the revenues of the Aedui.
(1) Nouns ending in is or cs, and having two syllables in both nominative and
genitive singular.
(2) Monosyllables ending in s or x immediately preceded by a consonant.
(3) Nouns ending in n# or rs.
(4) Neuter nouns ending in <?, al or ar.
These have ium in genitive plural ; very few have i in the ablative singular, the
following being the commonest in Caesar : ignis, fire; navift, a ship; continent, the
continent or mainland.
1. i.e., used to restrain. All similar ellipses are to be supplied in translating from
English to Latin, where the words to be understood are expressed in l^itin 1>\ p.m ^i
a word, not a separate word.
42 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXVII.
Turn to the present, imperfect and future indicative (active and
passive) of the first and second conjugations, as given in Part III.,
sections 27 and 28.
Observation. From which of the principal parts are these
tenses formed in the active voice ? in the passive voice ? How is
the difference between the voices indicated in Latin 7 1
EXERCISE XXVII.
I. 1. Helvetii loci natura continentur. 2. Magnae copiae ab
hostibus comparabantur. 3. Tertia pars Galliae a Belgis obtine-
tur. 4. A Gallis sollicitabamur. 5. Mons a Labieno tenebitur.
6. Fuga Gallorum commovemim. 7. Magnam inter Belgas aucto-
ritatem habere videris. 8. Vicus montibus continebatur. 9.
Equites peditum virtute servantur. 10. In servitute teneberis.
11. Numerus hostium augetur. 12. Naves tempestatibus detine-
buntur. 13. Hostes a pugna tempestatibus continebantur. 14.
Adventu Caesaris commovebar. 15. Copiae hostium e castrls
videntur. 16. Iter a flumine avertere videbimur. 17. Provincia
ab hostibus incursionibus vastabatur. 18. Multitudine hominum
castra complebuntur.
II. 1. The forces of the enemy are being increased. 2. Stones
were being placed on the wall. 3. The battle will be renewed.
4. You will be awaited by the consul. 5. The Helvetians are
inclosed by the river Rhine, the Jura mountains, 2 and the river
Rhone. 6. We shall not be alarmed by the departure of the
allies. 7. The arrival of the forces was being awaited by the
citizens. 8. For several successive days the enemy's forces are
kept in camp by storms. 9. The lands of the Aedui used to be
laid waste by the Germans. 10. It is announced to Caesar. 11. I
shall be held in subjection. 12. They seem to fear without cause.
1. Xotioe also that there is no change whatever in the part that precedes the
personal ending, except that I before s is changed to e before ris (er having almost
the same sound as ir, but being- easier to pronounce).
2. Use the singular of mom, which has the meaning of a mountain chain, as well
as of a single tn<m iitaiii or hill.
FART i. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 43
13. They were removed. 14. We were removing. 15. They were
being removed. 10. He will recall. 17. You will be recalled.
18. They will be recalled. 19. I used to restrain. 20. I used to
be restrained.
LESSON XXVIII.
() Latus, broad ; latior, broader ; latissimus, broadest or very
broad.
Fortis, brave; fortior, braver; fortissiinus,bravestoTvcry
brave.
Velox, sivift ; velocior, sivifter ; velocissiiims, simftest or
very siuift.
Potens, powerful; potentior, more potentissimus, most or very
powerful. power/id.
Observation. Endings indicating the different degrees of com-
parison. Formation of comparative and superlative from the
positive. 1 Twofold translation of the superlative.
(6) Virl fortioris,
Flumen latius,
Fossae latiores,
Mllitis fortissinil,
Flumeii latissiinum.
Fossae latissiiuac-,
of a braver man.
a broader river.
broader trenches,
of a very brave soldier,
a rcry broad river.
very broad trenches.
Observation. Declension and agreement of comparative and
superlative adjectives.
(c) Turn to the declension of comparative adjectives, as given in
Part III., section 12.
Observation. How do the case-endings of the comparative
differ from those of adjectives of the positive degree belonging to
the same declension ? (See section 11.)
1. Notice that the genitive of the positive decree of these adjectives is respectively
lati, fortis, winds, potentis.
44 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE XXVIII.
I. 1. Helvetii flumine latissimo et altissimo continentur. 2.
Oaesarem de adventu Labiem certiorem fecerunt. 3. Urbs in
monte altissimo posita erat. 4. Pedites velocissimi et fortissimi
delect! sunt. 5. Humiliorcs a pote&tidribus expulsi erant. 6.
Legidnes longidre itinere circumduxit. 7. In densissimas silvas
cpnffigemiit. 8. Castra latidribus fossls munita sunt. 9. Ad
fluincn latins veneraiit. 10. Res opportfmissima accidit. 11.
CrebriorC's cxpldratorcs in fines hostium misit. 12. In novissi-
inum agin en impetum fecerunt.
II. 1. The Helvetians had been informed of (litcrall]^ l>ont)
the enemy's departure. 2. The enemy sought denser forests. 3.
He gives his daughter to the centurion, a very brave and powerful 1
man. 4. He came at a most opportune time. 5. They had sent
the noblest (men) of the state. 6. They are alarmed by the
appearance of the wider vessels. 7. He ordered Labienus to make
the vessels lower and wider. 8. They used to possess most fertile
lands. 9. The rear was being thrown into confusion. 10. They
encamped in a very fertile region. 11. They used to be hemmed
in by higher mountains and a broader river. 12. A deeper river
hems in the Helvetians. 13. Cajsar had been~informed by more
frequent messages. 14. He had entrusted the safety of the
hostages to the bravest soldiers.
LESSON XXIX.
(") Missus ost, he iras (or l\s Rdmanns ost, he is a Rcmwn.
been) *<///.
JussI sunt, ihcy were, ordered. Fortes sunt. they arc l>rrc.
Cognitum erat, it had been Potens erat, he mix puircrful.
found out.
ReductI erunt, theywitt have LIberl erunt, they will be fro'.
been led bar I;.
Observation. What difference in translation occurs when est,
sunt, etc., are joined with a noun or adjective, not with the part
1. i.e., ?vn/ jmiwrfnl. See footnote 1, pac^e 41.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 4.')
of the verb used in forming the perfect tenses ? In what case is
the noun or adjective in the predicate with the verb sum '?
(6) Turn to the inflection of the verb sum, given in Part III.,
section 41.
Observation. Formation and translation of the six tenses in
the indicative, and of the present infinitive.
EXERCISE XXIX.
I. 1. Omnium Gallorum fortissimi sunt Belgae. 2. Exercitus
erat 1 in conspectu. 3. Periculosum est. 4. In armis sumiis. 5.
Tertia nocte "Ifma erat plena. 6. Locus erat idoneus. 7. Onmes
res comparatae erant. 8. Noctes breviores sunt. 9. Castra angu-
stiora erant. 10. Spes est sublata. 11. Rex fuerat. 12. Miserior
et gravior esse fortuna Sequanorum videtur. 13. Mons altissimus
est inter Sequanos et Helvetios. 14. In itinere eratis. 15. Prop-
ter frigora frumenta in agris matura 11011 erant. 16. Milites 111011-
tem tenebant. 17. Adventus hostium cognitus erat. 18. Reliquae
naves erunt iiiutiles. 19. Non audebunt esse iiiimici. 20. Vir
fortissimus et nobilissimus fuit. 21. Reducti sunt. 22. Fossa
erat ante oppidum. 23. Homo sum.
II. 1. All the rest of the Belgians are in arms. 2. The road
through the province will be longer. 3. Ambassadors were sent.
4. The adjacent regions are very fertile. 5. They are aided. 6.
The Belgians seem to be very hostile. 7. There- is scarcity of all
things. 8. They were awaiting. 9. The night was very short.
10. The vessels are low and wide. 11. The forces were sent in
advance. 12. The allies used to be free. 13. They began to be
hostile. 14. There 2 had been great danger. 15. Nothing is
easier. 16. We shall be thrown into confusion. 17. You are
useful friends. 18. They have been in Ctesar's army. 19. He
has been influenced. 20. They are making ready all things. 21.
It is uncertain.
1. In this, as in many of the succeeding sentences, the English word there may be
used in translation. This word has no equivalent in Latin, which would express
" tht-TK are tea ntc/t ///< .-n'lit " and " ten men are present" by the same words.
2. There (the introductory adverb) has no equivalent in Latin. See footnote 1.
4U PRIMARY LATIN LOOK.
LESSON XXX.
Populo lloinaiio pcrlculosuiii it icus <lan<jci'out> to tJie Human
erat, people.
Hclvetils erat inimlcus, Ac was hostile to the ll<lr> tin us.
Fliiitiml suiit Galliae, tliaj are adjacent to Gaul.
Observation. 1 Nature of the adjectives. Addition of a noun
deiming their application. Case of the noun indicating the person
concerned or the thing to which the quality is directed. Does the
dative in these sentences generally precede or follow the adjective
it refers to <-
EXERCISE XXX.
I. 1. Amicus fuerat Helvetiis. 2. Caesaii es tidelis. 3. In-
cursioiies hostium provinciae simt peiiculosae. 4. Fugae similis
erat discessus. 5. Turpissimum est refpublicae. 0. Nihil est
grfitius dLs immortalibus. 7. Omnibus equitibus incognitum erat.
8. Galli fmitimi Belgis erant. 9. Caesari erat ininiicus. 10.
Carl fuerunt dis ininiortalibus. 11. Vulnera iniliti perlculosa suiit.
12. Call! non pares eraiit Belgis. Itf. Multls clvibus erit gratum.
II. 1. We are not equal to the enemy's cavalry. 2. The
Aedui are adjacent to the provinces. 3. Nothing was more dis-
graceful to the Germans. 4. The road is dangerous to the army.
5. She is dear to all. 6. We used to be friendly to the Romans.
7. They are useful friends to the hostages. 8. We had been
faithful to the Roman people. 9. The punishments are more
pleasing to the immortal gods. 10. He used to seem to be hostile
to the Roman people. 11. The war will be dangerous to the state.
12. The harbors were unknown to the Gauls. 13. It is similar to
the Gallic war.
LESSON XXXI.
Turn to the list of irregularities in the comparison of adjectives,
given in Part III., section 13 (parts ii., iii. and iv.).
1. For beginners it may be sufficient to call attention to the use of datives (trans-
lated in the ordinary way) depending on adjectives as well as on verbs.
2. See footnote 2, page 6.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 47
Observation. The difference between the comparison of these
adjectives and the regular comparison, given in Lesson XXVIII.
EXERCISE XXXI.
I. 1. Priina luce inajorcm multitudinem equitum ab ulteriore
portu misit. 2. Belgae proxinil sunt Germaiiis. 3. Ascensus est
facillimus. 4. Superiore anno minore cum periculo belluin gesse-
raiit. 5. Creberrima aedilicia in Gallia sunt. 6. Proxima nocte
suinnia erat difficulties. 7. Ocelum est citerioris provinciae oppi-
dum extremum. 8. Spem celerriuiae victoriae habent. 9. Maximis
itineribus in Galliam citeriorem contendit. 10. Iter per provin-
ciam erat facilliiuuin. 11. Summam scieiitiam rei militaris habet.
12. Superiora loca oceupaverant. 13. In citeriore Gallia legioiies
consciipserat. 14. Superiore anno cum proximis civitatibus paceni
et aniicitiam confirmaverunt. 15. Propter suniiiiain virtutem
clelectl sunt. 1C. Superioribus diebus majoreni motuni exspecta-
bamus. 17. Superiorem partem collis densissimis castris com-
pleverant.
II. 1. They had collected very many ships in the preceding
summer. 2. The road will be very difficult. 3. They had been
stationed in the upper line. 4. He had sent very frequent mes-
sengers into farther Gaul. 5. At the most troublesome (literally,
difficult) time of the year more states were conspiring. 6. For the
larger part of the summer they had waged war in hither Gaul. 7.
They made an attack from (literally, o-ut of) the higher ground. 8.
They were attacking the outer fortifications. 9. He had come on
the preceding day to the smaller camp with a larger number of
foot-soldiers. 10. The depth of the river is very great. 11.
Geneva is the farthest town of the Allobroges, and the nearest to
the territories of the Helvetians. 12. Nothing is better. 13.
They fled to the nearest woods. 14. They burned the finest city
of Gaul. 15. It is best to hasten to the lower part of the island.
It). They had collected very large forces.
48 PH1MARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XXXII.
(a) Turn to the present indicative active of the third conjuga-
tion, given in Part III., section 27.
Observation. Personal endings. Manner of joining personal
endings to the common part reg-. 1
(6) In the same way examine the present indicative active of the
fourth conjugation, in the same section.
(c) Turn to the present indicative passive of the third and fourth
conjugations, given in section 28.
Observation. Is the difference between the active and the
passive, in the present tense, the same as in the first and second
conjugations? 2
EXERCISE XXXII.
I. 1. A Caesare in Galliam praemittitur. 2. Hostes in silvas
repelluritur. 3. LegatI ab omnibus civitatibus veniuiit. 4. Ter-
tiain partem Galliae incolitis. 5. Ad castra venit : ad castra venit.
6. Ex castris discedunt. 7. Ad Caesarem convemmus. 8. Castra
vallo altissimo mumuntur. 9. Vincmiim : vmcimiiii. 10. Pontem
rescindunt. 11. Rhodanus provinciam ab Helvetiis dividit. 12.
Vicus flumine dividitur. 13. A populo Romano impedimur. 14.
Exercitum in ulteriorem Galliam ducis. 15. Aciem circumveniunt.
16. Viiicimus. 17. Castra in loco idoneo ponimus. 18. Oppida
omnia inceiidimt. 19. In fluctus desilit. 20. Cum equitatu Hel-
vetiorum proelium committunt.
II. 1. They leap down out of the ship. 2. The line of battle
is drawn up. 3. You are enrolling a legion. 4. A few foot-
soldiers fall. 5. We are being surrounded by the Gauls. 6. We
are waging war with the Romans. 7. They assemble on the
seventh day. 8. They send ambassadors to Ctesar about peace.
9. The legion is led back into winter quarters. 10. You are
binding. 11. We are conquering. 12. The bridge is broken down.
1. With beginners it is sufficient for all practical purposes to consider the present
stem as ending in the consonant preceding o, e.g., reg-, pon-, ger-. To introduce the
so-called thematic vowel -e will only cause confusion.
2. See footnote 1, page 42.
PART I. 1NTKODUCT011Y LESSONS. 49
13. They fortify the camp with a wall and trench. 14. A message
is sent to Ciesar. 15. They are assembling from all the camps.
1(5. The camp is pitched in a valley. 17. Labieiius is sent in
advance with the scouts. 18. I am hindered by the violence of
the river. 19. I am cut off from the army. 20. It is announced.
LESSON XXXIII.
Turn to the adjectives whose declension is given in Part III.,
section 14.
Observation. Declension to which these adjectives in the main
belong. Irregularities in declension.
The most peculiar of the common uses of the adjectives given in
the list may be observed in the following sentences :
Alia loca fossls, alia vallls, Some places lie, was fortifyiiuj with
alia turribus muniebat. trenches, others with walls,
others with towers.
Altera legio in Gallia hiemat. One legion is wintering in Gaul,
altera in Italia. the other in Italy.
EXERCISE XXXIII.
I. 1. Alterum iter facilius erat. 2. Legati totms Galliae ad
Caesarem veniunt. 3. Cum sola, decima legione proelium com-
mittit. 4. Aliud iter habemus nullum. 1 5. Relinquitur 2 una per
Sequanos via. 6. In utram partem flumen fluit ? 3 7. NullI acci-
derat. 8. Neuter proelium committere audebit. 9. Uiio tempore
du adventti equitatus et de Labiem victoria certior factus est. 10.
Alteram partem vici GallLs concedit, alteram cohortibus. 11. Ab
aliis audiunt. 12. Alia in parte legiones collocavit. 13. Factio-
nuin alterius prmcipatum tenent Aedul, alterius Sequanl. 14.
. Sine fillo periculo castra muniunt. 15. Ager Sequanus optimus
est totlus Galliae.
1. Nullum agrees with iter, and is placed where it is for emphasis' sake.
2. By means of this sentence the use of the introductory there in English, where
no corresponding word is found in Latin, may be shown. See footnote 1, page 45.
3. See footnote 2, page 19.
4
50 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. 1. He gives orders to the whole province. 2. An attack
was made from all directions at one time. 3. Some fill the
trenches, others attack the walls. '4. It is pleasing to neither. 5.
They had marched through the province without (doing) any
mischief. 6. The Sequani alone do 1 not venture to ask aid. 7.
He puts the baggage of the whole army in a suitable place. 8.
They assembled in (literally, to) one place. 9. They made a sally
from another part of the town. 10. On the other bank of the
river a legion is left. 11. Neither line begins the battle. 12. He
hastened to the other camp. 13. Some he ordered to give up
their arms, others to give hostages. 14. We shall aid neither.
15. He will not be deterred by the influence of any state.
LESSON XXXIV.
(a) Turn to the imperfect and future indicative active of the
third and fourth conjugations, given in Part III., section 27.
Observation. Compare these with the corresponding forms in
the first and second conjugations. Are they formed from the
same principal part ? Have they the same letters indicating was,
were or used to ? shall or will ?' 2
(6) The corresponding forms of the passive voice are given in
Part III., section 28.
Observation. Are the changes from the active to the passive
made in the same way as in the first and second conjugations '*.*
EXERCISE XXXIV.
I. 1. Bellum gerebant. 2. Acies mstruebatur. 3. Desiliemus.
4. Commoventur. 5. Legionem conscribebat. 0. Castra mfinie-
bamus. 7. Mittemur. 8. Conveniebatis. 9. Intercludemim.
10. Bellum gerunt. 11. Veniebat. 12. Oppida inceiidebantur.
13. Praemittuntur. 14. Castra muniebantur. 15. Vinciar. 16.
Deligentur. 17. Prohibetis. 18. Impedlris. 19. Vinceris. 20.
Tradetur.
1. See footnote 2, page 19. 2. See footnote 1, page 48. 3. See 'footnote 1, page 4
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 51
II. 1. They were assembling. 2. We shall depart. 3. He
was leading back. 4. I shall be led back. 5. He was leaping
down. 6. The camp is being fortified. 7. He will encamp. 8.
They will move the camp. 9. I shall be restrained. 10. It used
to divide. 11. It was being fortified. 12. We were waging war.
13. A legion will be enrolled. 14. You will be bound. 15. You
will be conquered. 16. You, will have conquered. 17. Arms were
being got ready. 18. You shall be hindered. 19. I used to come.
20. We shall not begin battle.
LESSON XXXV.
Turn to the list of cardinal numerals given in Part III., sec-
tion 15.
Observation. Notice the similarity in form of the cardinal and
ordinal numerals ; the formation of the words from eleven to
twenty ; the manner of expressing twenty-one and similar num-
bers ; the various expressions for eighteen and similar numbers.
For the declension of the cardinal numerals, see Part III., sec-
tion 10. l
EXERCISE XXXV.
I. 1. Duas legiones in citcriore Gallia consciibebat, et tres ex
hlberms eduxerat. 2. Quingentis equitibus magnam multitudinem
hostium propulerant. 3. Dies circiter quliidecim iter feceramus.
4. Ad Caesarem cum ducentis obsidibus veiiiebat. 5. Naves
octodecim ex superiore portu solvent. 6. Signa militaria quattuor
et septiuiginta ad Caesarem retulerunt. 7. Centum vlginti quln-
que pagos habent. 8. Equites circiter tiigiiita transports, verat.
9. Quattuordecim annos bellum gesserant. 10. Cum sescentis
equitibus eruptionem fecerunt. 11. Dies decem et octo trans
Rhenum consumemus. 12. Naves octoginta coactae eraiit. 13.
Legionem (^uartam decimam in provinciam reducet. 14. Quadrfi-
ginta coliortes coactae sunt. 15. Dies continuos (iuln<{iie copias
in acie Iiistruxit.
1. The declension and use of mitte are taken up in Lesson XX XVII
52 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. 1. Ho drew up a triple line of four legions. 2. Ho was
demanding five hundred hostages. 3. In. one summer two very
great wars had been finished. 4. They had taken forty-three
towns and about two hundred villages. 5. An attack was made by
four hundred cavalry. 6. He ordered Labienus with two legions
and one hundred and' fifty cavalry to ascend the mountain. 7.
They were collecting twenty-eight ships. 8. Thirty-five soldiers
will be chosen from the whole army. 9. Twenty-three forts were
made. 10. The village is divided into two parts by a river. 11.
There were two parties 1 in Gaul. 12. About four hundred villages
will be burned. 13. He left two legions in the camp, and with
the remaining six marched for nine days through the territories of
the Belgians. 14. Two legions, the eleventh and the sixteenth,
will be left 011 the other bank. 15. On the twenty-fifth day two
hundred and fifty horsemen had been collected. 16. They will
give up the two sons of Galba, and three hundred and fifty
hostages. 17. They have three months' corn.
LESSON XXXVI.
Missurus est, he is going to send, lie. is abont to send,
he intends to send.
Vast atari sum us, . we are going to lay waste, we are on fin
point of laying waste.
Copiac muiilturae eraiit, the forces were on the point of fortify-
ing, were about to fortify.
.) fissi'i i-iis cram, I was going to order.
Logic 11611 veiitura erit, the legion will not be likely to come.
Observation. Formation of Latin verbal phrases. Changes
in ending us, I, ae, a. From which of the principal parts are
miss ur us, jussurus, etc., obtained? Various translations pos-
sible for each form. To which voice do the verbs belong ? Differ-
ence in meaning and formation between missus est and missurus
est, etc.
1. Literally, two parties icere. See footnote 1, page 45.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 53
EXERCISE XXXVI.
I. 1. Duodecim cohortes coacturl sumus. 2. Omnia aedificia
incensuri erant et iter per provinciam per vim temptaturi. 3.
Sine equitatu non est venturus. 4. Belluin cum Romanis gestiiri
erant. 5. Nullo cum periculo copiae ad proxima castra perventurae
sunt. 6. Neque obsides repetituri, neque auxilium a populo
Romano impldraturi erant. 7. Centuridnes et tribunes militum
convocaturus sum. 8. Proxima nocte quarta vigilia castra mdta
erant. 9. De itinere brevi tempore judicaturi estis. 10. Omnes
colles et loca superidra occupatiirl eramus. 11. Impedimenta
relicturi et eruptionem facturl sumus. 12. Injiirias Aeduorum
non neglectiirus erit. 13. Aeduis obsides non redditurus sum.
14. Amicitiam popull Roman! recusaturus est. 15. Cur ab officio
discessiirus es ?
II. 1. The enemy are going to send ambassadors and give
hostages. 2. Reinforcements are likely to come from the nearest
winter quarters. 3. The forces are going to winter in hither Gaul.
4. The flight of the Gauls is likely to alarm the Romans. 5. We
are intending to aid the other army. 6. They were about to lead
across three-fourths (literally, three parts) of their forces. 7. She
is not likely to gain her request. 8. They had been on the point
of giving up their arms. 9. He was about to make an attack with
three hundred cavalry. 10. The army was led out of the camp the
next day. 11. We are likely to finish the war without any danger.
12. They are not likely to refrain from wrong-doing and mischief.
13. I intend to say nothing about Labienus' opinion. 14. Neither
will be likely to begin battle. 15. We shall spend three days in
the province.
LESSON XXXVII.
(a) Mille equltes mittentur, a thousand horsemen will be sent.
Adventus mille eqnitnm, tlie arrival of 'a thousand horsemen.
Cum mille equitilms con- he hastened with a thousand Iwrse-
tendit, men.
54 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Tria millia equitum init- three thousand horsemen ivill be
tentur, sent.
Cum duobus millibns equl- he hastened imth two thousand
turn contendit, horsemen.
Observation. Difference between singular and plural of mille
in declension, and in relation to other parts of the sentence. For
declension, see Part III., section 16.
(/>) Mille passus pertinet, it extends a thousand paces, or a
mile.
Tria millia passuum abest, 1 he is three thousand paces, or three
miles, distant.
Observation. By what case does Latin indicate distance or the
extent of space ?
EXERCISE XXXVII.
I. 1. Hostes sub nionte consederant millia passuum octo a
castris Romanorum. 2. Millia hominum octoginta delecta sunt.
3. Summa omnium erat millia trecenta sexaginta octo. 4. Locus
sescentos passus abest. 5. A lacu Lemanno ad flumen Rhodanum
millia passuum decem novem murum perducit. 6. Niillam partem
noctis iter intermlserunt. 7. Millia sex convenerunt. 8. Ex
millibus triginta, tertia pars interfecta erat. 9. A Germanls iter
paucorum dierum aberant. 10. Milites aggerem latum pedes tre-
centos trlginta, altum-pedes octoginta exstruxerunt. 11. Spatium
trium millium 2 patet. 12. Ex proelio millia hominum trigintca
tria superfuerunt. 3 13. Multa millia passuum agri vacant. 14.
Silva novem dierum iter patet. 15. Sex millia peditum rellquit.
II. 1. They are six miles distant. 2. He restored about twenty
thousand captives to the Aedui. 3. The camp was pitched three
miles from Cesar's camp. 4. Out of a number of fifty-two thou-
sand scarcely a fourth part is left. 5. At day-break he was a mile
and a half from the enemy's camp. 6. The rest of the legions arc
1 . A best is from the verb absum, I am distant, I am away. A Iwm is a compoimd
of the preposition nb and the various forms of the verb sum, which is similarly
Compounded with many other prepositions, as de, ad, prae, sniper.
2. Passuum is generally omitted when the genitive of millia is used.
3. From supcnnim ; see footnote 1.
PART 1. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 55
a great distance away. 7. The Boii with fifteen thousand men
were bringing up the line of march. 8. We were about a mile
away from the river. 9. Twenty-three thousand Gauls had come
to Csesar. 10. The territories of the Helvetians used to extend
two hundred and forty miles. 11. He selected a suitable place
about six hundred paces from the Germans. 12. The Gauls will
send twenty-five thousand, the Belgians ten, the Germans three.
13. We shall advance a journey of ten miles. 14. Four thousand
men had been slain. 15. A town of the Belgians was eight miles
from the camp.
LESSON XXXVIII.
Caesarl parent, they obey (or are obedient to) Ccesar.
EquitatuI Romano praestant, they surpass (or are superior to)
the Roman cavalry.
Lcffionl subvcniunt, they aid (or give aid to) the legion.
Provinciae imperat, he commands (or gives orders to)
the province.
MllitI persuadet, he persuades (literally, makes it
agreeable to) the soldier.
Observation. What case is used with these Latin verbs to
express the object of the English verbs ? Notice that in all the
examples the word expressed by this case represents the person
indirectly affected (to, or for, or in connection with whom some-
thing is done).
Notice how the general vocabulary indicates when a verb (e.g.,
resisto) belongs to the same class as those given above.
EXERCISE XXXVIII.
I. 1. Alii eruptionibus resistunt, alii equitibus subveniunt. 2.
Dumnorigl magnis praemiis persuadet. 3. Ex magno equitum
numero nonnulli Gallicis rebus favebant. 4. Aeduorum civitati
Caesar indulserat. 5. Caesar Dumnorigl Tgnovit. 6. Maritimis
regionibus quattuor reges praeerant. 1 7. Nulla in re communi
1. For praesum, see footnote 1, pa^e 54.
56 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
saluti deerat. 1 8. Omnibus Gallis pracstant. 9. Necessario torn-
pore civitati subvenerat. 10. Legion! succurrunt et equitum
impetus sustinent. 11. Neque ad concilia veniunt neque imperio
Caesaris parent. 12. Omnia navibus deerant. 1 13. Reliquae
legiones Caesarl satisf ecerant.
II. 1. They will aid the allies. 2. He was injuring Csesar and
the government. 3. They decided to give hostages and obey the
rule of the Roman people. 4. Dumnorix had command of the
cavalry. 5. Dumnorix favors the Helvetians on account of the
relationship. 6. Ctesar had indulged the tenth legion, and used
to trust (it) on account of (its) valor. 7. In another direction two
legions were resisting the enemy. 8. They spared neither women
nor infants. 9. The Germans used to surpass the Belgians. 10.
They had given satisfaction to the Aedui about the injuries. 11.
One thing 2 was lacking to Csesar. 12. He favors Labienus
opinion. 13. The infantry was aiding the cavalry.
LESSON XXXIX.
Legatns qul missus erat, the ambassador who had been sent.
Legio, qnae missa erat, tlie legion which had been sent.
Oppidum quod erat expugna- the town which had been taken by
turn, storm.
Legatus quern mlserant, the ambassador whom they had
sent.
Adventus legatorum quos ml- the arrival of the ambassadors
stir a nt. whom they had sent.
Ab oppido quod erat expug- from the ttnvn u'hich had been
natum, taken by storm.
Germanl quibuscum bellum the Germans with whom they had
gesserant, waged icar.
Observation.-^Change of form in the relative pronoun. (The
declension of qul is given in Part III., section 24.) What deter-
1. For desum, see footnote 1, page 54.
2. Instead of using res, the word thing, with an adjective (or pronoun) in agree-
ment, may be expressed by using in Latin the neuter of the adjective (or pronoun).
This should be done only in the nominative and accusative cases.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 57
mines the number, the gender, the case, of the pronoun? Cum
with the relative. The position of the clause introduced by the
relative pronoun. 1
EXERCISE XXXIX.
I. 1. Ex altera parte vlcl, quam Gallls concesserat, omnes
discedere coeperunt. 2. Reliquuni exercitum in 2 Morinds, ab
quibus legati non venerant, diixit. 3. Cum sola decima legidne,
de qua non dubitabat et cui indulserat, discessurus erat. 4. Caesar
posterd die legatum, cum legidnibus, quas ex Britannia rediixerat,
in 2 Morinos, qui rebellidnem fecerant, mlsit. 5. Cum legatls
Commium, ctijus virtiitem et cdnsilium probabat, mittit. 6. In
fines Aedudrum, qui proximl Sequams erant, exercitum duxit. 7.
Ab omnibus natidnibus, quae trans Rhenum incolunt, legati ad
Caesarem missi sunt. 8. Naves habent phirimas, quibus in Bri-
tanniam navigant. 9. Ad oppidum, quod circiter mille passus
aberat, cdnfugerunt. 10. Omnibus druidibus praeest unus, qui
summam habet auctdritatem.
II. 1. The Belgians are nearest to the Germans, who dwell
across the Rhine, with whom they are continually waging war. 2.
He ordered Labienus with two legions which had wintered in the
province to hasten to the river, which was ten miles distant. 3.
They did what they had been ordered. 4. He is likely to per-
suade Casticus, whose father has possessed royal power among the
Sequani for many years. 5. He will collect all his retainers, of
whom he has a great number. 6. He sends the cavalry in advance
through the forest (of) Ardennes, 3 which is the largest in (literally,
of) all Gaul. 7. Twenty-four thousand Germans came to Ario-
vistus, who had settled in the country of the Sequani. 8. Two
legions, which he had enrolled in hither Gaul, brought up the
whole line of march. 9. The Sequani, through whose territories
1. The relative clause is regularly placed immediately after the word to which the
relative pronoun refers (the antecedent). The order in each of the Latin sentences in
the exercise should be observed.
2. Translate in by against.
3. In such phrases as the city of Rome, the province of Gaul, where the city is
Rome, etc., Latin does not use the genitive, but puts the words in the same case.
58 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
we had marched, were going to rebuild the towns which had
been burnt. 10. Dumnorix had command of the cavalry which
had been sent.
LESSON XL.
Ex speot. -nidus est, he should be awaited.
Kq mis removendus est, the horse must, be removed.
Legatus in it tend us erat, an ambassador might to have been sent.
Locus muniendus erit, the place will have to be fortified.
Castra munienda erant, the camp had to be fortified.
Bellum gerendnm est, war is to be waged.
LegatI mittendl simt, ambassadors ought to be sent.
Legid exspectanda erit, the legion will have to be awaited.
Copiae exspectandae erant, the forces should have been awaited.
Observation. Formation in the different conjugations of the
new part 1 of the verb here joined with the verb sum (see the first
four examples). Changes in the ending of the gerundive. The
various translations given for each tense.
EXERCISE XL.
I. 1. Bellum gerendum erat. 2. LegatI ad Caesarem mittendl
sunt. 3. Altera pars vici Gallis concedenda est, altera cohortibus.
4. Injfiriae Aeduorum non negligendae erant. 5. Proelium com-
mittendum est. 6. Ab injuria prohibendi eritis. 7. Omnia 2 iino
tempore agenda erant. 8. In hlberna redticendl sumus. 9. Coer-
cendus atque deterrendus eras. 10. Hieme naves aedificandae,
veteresque reficiendae sunt. 11. Exercitus triinsportandus est.
12. LegatI audiend! erant. 13. Hostus sunt opprimendi. 14.
Aeduos ab injuria defend!. 15. Copiae hostium submovendae
erant.
II. 1. All the horses should have been removed out of sight.
2. The arrival of the cohorts which Caesar sent must be awaited.
1. This form is called the Gerundive. ; it expresses duty or necessity, and is always
passive.
2. See footnote 2, page 56.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 59
3. The opportunity is not to be lost. 4. The camp ought to be
fortified with a double wall. 5. The line of battle had to be
drawn up. 6. The hostages will have to be restored. 7. Two
cohorts should have been sent to the smaller camp, which was
three miles distant. 8. Peace must be established with the near-
est states. 9. The war ought to be renewed. 10. The baggage
should have been stationed in one place. 11. Forces had to be
raised. 12. The rest of the army is to be led into the country
of the Morini. 13. The soldiers should be recalled from work.
14. You should have been sent in advance. 15. The camp must
be defended.
LESSON XLI.
CommotI sunt quod magna they were alarmed because a large
pars exercitus interfecta part of the army had been
erat, slain.
Dum RomanI castra ponunt, while the Romans were pitch in<i
hostes impetum subitd fe- their camp, the enemy sud-
cernnt, denly made an attack.
Ubi paratl sunt, oppida omnia when they were ready, they burned
incenderunt, all t}ieir towns.
Postquam pervenit, obsides after (or when) he arrived, he de-
poposcit, manded hostages.
Simul atque de adventu Cac- as soon as they were informed of
saris certiores factl sunt, Ckesar's arrival, they sent am-
leffatos miser unt, bassadors.
Obsides, ut impcraverat, ad- the hostages were brought, as lie
dactl sunt, had ordered.
Observation. How are the ideas because, while, when, after, as
soon as and as expressed in Latin ? What peculiarity in the tense
used with dnm 2 1 What tense is used after ubi, postquam, shim l
atque ? 2 The position of the dependent clause in each sentence.
1. Latin uses the present tense with dum, where the imperfect might have been
expected.
2. Latin uses the perfect tense with W, poxtquam and si,mul atfjue, whero English
could use either the past or the past perfect forms.
GO PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE XLI.
I, 1. Summa erat difficultas quod milites magno et grav! onere
armor um oppress! sunt. 2. Ubi legat! ad Caesarem reverterunt,
obsides qumgentos poposcit. 3. Postquam omnes Belgarum
copiae in tinum locum coactae sunt, ad flumen Axonam, quod est in
finibus Remorum, contenderunt. 4. Dum bellum cum Venetis
geritur, Sabmus cum copils quas a Caesare acceperat, in fines
Remorum pervenit. 5: Miserior et gravior est fortuna Sequa-
nSrum, quod soli auxilium implorare non audent. 6. Copiae 1 simul
atque in arido coiistiterunt, in hostes impetum fecerunt. 7. Ut
postea ex captivls comperit, adventus Labien! non cognitus erat.
8. Hostes 1 ubi equites conspexerunt, impetum subito fecerunt.
9. Bellum gerendum erat in locis ubi 2 alter legatus interfectus est,
atque unde alter profugerat. 10. Helvetii, quod pridie Roman!
proelium non commlserant, novissimum aginen lacessere coeperunt.
II. 1. When neither army begins the battle, Csesar leads his
forces back to the camp. 2. Of all the Gauls the Belgians were
the bravest, because they were the nearest to the Germans, with
whom they were continually waging war. 3. We are going to
march through the province, because we have no other road. 4.
When the Helvetians were informed of (literally, about) Caesar's
arrival, they sent ambassadors. 5. He ordered the Helvetians to
rebuild all the towns which they had burned, because the place
whence they had departed was unoccupied. 6. The forces had to
be led back to the province, because there 3 was a scarcity of corn.
7. While the ships were assembling, ambassadors came from a
large part of the Morini to Caesar. 8. As soon as he learned of
(literally, about) Caesar's departure, he began to collect forces. 9.
Because he was eighteen miles from the largest town of the Aedui,
he turned (his) march aside from the Helvetians. 10. The bar-
barians were alarmed because the town had been taken by storm.
1. Often in Latin the subject (or some other prominent word) of a dependent
sentence beginning with a conjunction, is placed before the conjunction. This is
especially common where the subject is the same as that of the leading verb.
2. Ubi means where as well as when.
3. See footnote 1, page 45.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 61
LESSON XLII.
The declension of the pronouns ego (/), tu (you), and is, ea, id
(kc, she, it), is given in Part III., sections 18, 19 and 22.
Observation. The translation of the various forms of the per-
sonal pronouns. 1
EXERCISE XLII.
I. 1. Pacem vobiscum 2 feceramus. 2. Ab els circumvenienmr.
3. Impetum in nos fecerunt. 4. Magnam inter eos auctoritatem
habebat. 5. Nihil a vobls postulo. 6. Ubi legatos de deditione
ad euni mlserunt, adventum Caesaris eos exspectare jussit. 7.
Tecum 2 remitteiidi suiit. 8. Minim niihi videtur. 9. Duo
fratres els praeerant. 10. Jussit eos impedimenta in unum locum
collocare et eum mumre. 11. Ego vobls regna conciliabo. 12.
Nuntius a te missus erat. 13. Id ab eo comperit. 14. Nobis
nocebat. 15. Mihi, noil tibi, indulgebat. 16. Els satisfecimus
de injuriis quas intuleramus. 17. Tu, Labiene, mihi relque pub-
licae utilis f uisti. 18. Alteram partem vlci els concessit.
II. 1. They sent ambassadors to him. 2. They will not spare
you. 3. Hostages will be given up to us by you. 4. Peace must
be established with them. 5. We slew a large part of them. 6.
When we were informed of Caesar's arrival, we sent ambassadors
to him. 7. He ordered us to select a suitable place and fortify it
with a double wall. 8. They favor us, not you. 9. The citizens
fear you. 10. I had not made war on 3 the Gauls, but the Gauls
on me. 11. We do not believe him. 12. They will come with
you. 13. We were eight miles from him. 14. He is not likely to
persuade her. 15. He strove with us for many years about the
leadership. 16. (His) son will have to be restored to him. 17.
We shall aid the Gauls, who are ' wintering with us, neither with
corn nor (any) other thing. 18. He sent an army into the country
of the Morini, because ambassadors had not come from them.
1. The nominative of these pronouns should be used only when the subject of the
verb is to be emphasized.
2. With the ablative (both singular and plural) of e;/o, tu, sui, and generally of '////
and quis, the preposition cum is placed after the pronoun, forming one word with it.
The accent, in such cases, is on the syllable preceding <-nm.
3. The phrase for make war on is bellum infero, with the dative case expressing
the idea of on.
62 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XLIII.
Bell urn a Itomaiiis gcstum war had been waged by the Ro-
erat, mans.
Belluiu llomauls gerendum war should have been waycd by
erat, the Romans, or Hie Romans
should have waged war.
Acies a Caesare lustructa cst, the line was drawn up by Caesar.
Acies Caesarl lustrueuda est, tlie line must be drawn up by
CdBsar, or Cwsar must draw
up the line.
Occasio a me non aiuittetur, the opportunity will not be lost
by me.
Occasio inilii iiou amitteuda the opportunity must not be lost
est, by me, or I must not lose ttie
opportunity.
Observation. How is the personal agent expressed in Latin
with ordinary passive forms ? with the gerundive ? Notice also the
free translation of the gerundive by the active voice. 1
EXERCISE XLIII.
I. 1. Caesar! oinnia 2 uno tempore erant agenda ; vexillum pro-
poneiidum, 3 signum tuba daiidum, ab opere revocandl inllitOs qui
castra munire coeperant, acies instruenda. 2. Allobrogibus vel
persuasiiii sunius, vel vi coiicturi. 3. Copiae hostium Sabliio
distiiiendae erunt. 4. Classis, quae ab els missa est, nobis est
exspectanda. 5. Loca superiora occupjltuii sunt. 0. Postquain
equitatus in conspectum venit, hostes terga verterunt iiiagnus(|ue
eoruni iiumerus est occisus. 7. Niillam partem iioctis iter vobis
intermitteiidum est. 8. Mihi 11011 aniittenda erat occasio. 9. Res
tibi cogitanda est. 10. Castra erant angustiora quod sine iinpedi-
mentis Caesar legiones transportaverat. 11. Dum reliquae copiae
1. There is no form in the Latin active voice corresponding- to the gerundive of the
passive voice, but by a change in the fonn of the English sentence, duty or obligation
expressed in the active voice may be rendered into Latin by the passive gerundive.
2. See footnote 2, page 56.
3. With each of the gerundives erat (or erant) is to be understood.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 63
conveniunt, legati ad eum venerunt. 12. Complures ex els
oceiderunt.
II. 1. Ambassadors should have been sent to him by us. 2.
You must not lead a larger number of men across. 3. Caesar will
have to raise large forces. 4. When Cresar found it out, he
ordered them to hasten with us to the river. 5. We are not going
to make war on 1 them, because the winters are very early in Gaul.
6. Opportunity had been given him. 2 7. Labieiius must seize the
heights. 8. The army will have to be led across without baggage,
on account of the scarcity of ships. 9. Some had to fill up the
trenches, others to tear down the walls. 10. I must not neglect
the wrongs of the Aedui. 11. He was going to break up camp
the next night in the fourth watch. 12. They must await the
arrival of the forces. 13. As soon as they made an attack on us,
Caasar had to remove all the horses out of sight. 14. The Morini,
from whom ambassadors have not come, are going to collect very
large forces and renew the war.
LESSON XLIV.
(a) Se abdidit, he hid himself.
Se abdiderunt, tJiey hid themselves.
Dnas legioues secum eduxit, lie led out two legions with him.
Duas legiones cum co mlsit, he sent two legions with him.
Observation. The declension of the word from which se comes
(Part III., section 20). How are the singular and plural to be
distinguished? Two translations (e.g., him and himself) given.
Difference between se and is. Position when used with cum. 3
(6) Mourn adveiitum oxspec- he awaited my arrival.
tavit,
Tuum advent u in. Caesar, Jie aivaited your arrival, Cc&sar.
exspectavit,
Nostrum adveiitum exspec- lie aivaited our arrival.
tavit.
1. See footnote 3, page 01. 2. Literally, to him. 3. See footnote 2, page 61.
04 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Vestrum ud\ eiitum exspec- /i* awaited your arrival, citizen*.
tavit, elves,
Nos adveiitum suuiu ox- he ordered us to await his arrival.
spectare j ussit,
Nos advcntum ejusexspec- they ordered us to await his ar-
tare jusserunt, rival.
Nos adveiitum suum ex- they ordered us to await tJieir
spectare j usserunt, arrival.
Nos adventum eorum ex- he ordered us to await their ar-
spectare j ussit, rind.
Observation. Manner of expressing in Latin the possessive
pronouns, my, your, our, his (her, its), their. For the declension
of the Latin possessive pronouns see Part III., section 21. Differ-
ence between tuus and vester, suus and ejus, suus and eorum.
(c) Anna tradiderunt, they gave up their arms.
In officio permanebimus, we shall remain in our allegiance.
Fllium mlsit, he sent his son.
Fllium suum mlsit, lie sent his own son.
Observation. When are the English possessive pronouns not
expressed in Latin? 1 What is the effect if they are expressed
when not needed for clearness' sake ?
EXERCISE XLIV.
I. 1. In conspectu exercitus nostri, agri eorum vastati erant.
2. Eorum fuga nostri 2 erant perterriti. 3. Cur de tua virtute aut
do moil diligeiitica desperas ? 4. Se suaque 2 omnia sine mora el
dediderunt. 5. Eos suum adveiitum exspectare jussit. 6. Ubi do
ej us adventu Helvetil certiores fact! sunt, legates ad eum miserunt.
7. Fratrem tuum ad se vocat. 8. Helvetil qui vos non solum
in suls sed etiam in vestris fmibus superaverunt, nostro exercitul
11011 pares suiit. 9. Ego mels copiis meoque exercitu vobis regna
conciliabo. 10. Legio, quam secum habebat, in nostros 2 impetum
fecit. 11. Sequams, qui intra fines suos eum receperunt, quorum
1. See footnote 2, page 13.
2. Nostri is often used without a noun, in the sense of our men; so sui may mean
his (or their) men, friends, people, and stta (neuter plural), their posseasiojis.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 65
omnia oppida in potestate ejus sunt, omnes cruciatiis sunt per-
ferendl. 12. Regnum in civitate sua occupaturus est. 13. Ves-
trae salutis causa suum periculum neglexerunt. 14. Sese in silvas
abdiderunt. 15. Caesar primum suum deinde omnium equos ex
conspectu removit. 16. Se in montem receperunt. 17. Se ad
suos recepit.
II. 1. He resolved to lead out with him two legions. 2. The
Helvetians had now led their forces into the territories of the
Aedui, and were laying waste their fields. 3. He gave the signal
to his men. 1 4. He ordered us to obey him. 5. He hastens to
them and sends all the cavalry before him. 6. They will not with-
stand the attacks of our men. 1 7. On his arrival they withdrew
themselves and all their possessions 1 into the town. 8. They
were waging war with your allies. 9. The cavalry betook them-
selves to him. 10. For the sake of their safety I neglected my
own danger. 11. They are going to join battle with our men. 1
12. Caesar was restraining his men 1 from battle. 13. We learned
it through their messengers. 14. Caesar ought to lead the legions
which he has with him across into our province. 15. We are
going to march through your territories. 16. They will surrender
themselves to him.
LESSON XLV.
Adventu Caesaris commotl they iuere alarmed by Ccesar's ar-
sunt, rival.
Adventu Caesaris commotl, le- alarmed (or being alarmed) by
gates miserunt, Ccesar's arrival, they sent
hostages.
Copiae in unum locum coactae the forces had been gathered to
erant, one place.
Copiae in unum locum coactae, the forces, after being gatJiered (or
in provinciam mittentur, on being gathered)to one place,
ivill be sent into the province.
Legio delecta est, a legion was chosen.
Legionem delectam mlsit, he sent a chosen legion.
1. See footnote 2, pajre 64.
6() PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Observation. The use and force of commoti, eoactae, delecta,
when no longer joined with parts of the verb sum. 1 The different
translations given. The voice. The relation in point of time of
the participle and the principal verb. The formation and declen-
sion of the participle.
EXERCISE XLV.
I. 1. Nostro adventu commotus, Caesar duas legiones in citeri-
ore Gallia conscribit. 2. Nonnulli pudore adducti remanebunt.
3. Vulneribus confecti, barbari se in- fugam contulerunt. 2 4.
Repentmo ejus adventu prohibitus, copias in fines suos reduxit.
5. In nostros disjectos impetum fecerunt. 6. In omnibus collibus
expositas hostium copias armatas conspexit. 7. Spe praedae
adducti, in Galliam contenderunt. 8. Hostes vulneribus confectos
ex loco superiore in flumen compulimus. 9. Barbari commoti
quod oppidum, et 3 natura loci et manu mumtum, expugnatum
erat, majores copias parare coeperunt. 10. Omnes Belgarum
copiae, in unum locum coactae, ad eum veniebant. 11. Impulsi
a prmcipibus, a nobis defecturi erant. 12. Hostes undique cir-
cumvent!, fuga salutem petierunt. 13. Celeritate Romanorum
commoti, legates ad eum de deditione mittunt. 14. Alteram
partem vici Gallls concessit, alteram vacuam ab els relictam cohor-
tibus attribuit. 15. Helvetil omnium rerum inopia adducti legates
ad eum miserunt.
II. 1. After being driven back into the town they made a sally.
2. They withdrew themselves and all their possessions into a place
excellently fortified by nature. 3. Alarmed by the want of sup-
plies, he hastened the next day to the province. 4. The Aedui,
after being called brothers by the senate, are held in bondage by
him. 5. Being defeated by the first attack of our men, they
betook themselves to the camp. 6. Dumnorix on being recalled
had resisted the cavalry. 7. The Aedui, being defeated by him,
had suffered great loss. 8. The soldiers, weighed down by the
heavy burden of their armor, had to join battle with the enemy
1. This part of the verb is known as the Perfect Participle Passive.
2. Contulerunt is from confero.
3. Et . . . . et here, as often, means both .... and.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 67
at an unfavorable time. 9. Caesar, on being informed of their
approach, leads out with him all the cavalry and hastens to them.
10. Led by his influence, they detained the ambassadors sent by
him. 11. Dismayed by the appearance of the ships, the bar-
barians halted. 12. The Aedui, having been crushed by the
battles and disasters, had given hostages to him. 13. The Hel-
vetians, alarmed by his sudden approach, are going to send ambas-
sadors to him. 14. He has led his forces across into Gaul, having
been asked and invited by the Gauls. 15. Driven by madness and
folly, they have made war 1 on us.
LESSON XLVL
Turning to Part HI., section 39, examine the inflection of the
verb capio, in the indicative (active and passive), the present
infinitive active, and the gerundive passive.
Observation. The peculiarities of inflection in verbs like
capio. 2
EXERCISE XLVI.
I. 1. Accipiet. 2. Se recipiunt. 3. Faciendum est. 4. Tela
conjiciebant. 5. Nuntiat. 6. Res est suscipienda. 7. Se in
oppidum recipere coeperunt. 8. Suscipietur. 9. Superiora loca
multitudine hostium completa conspiciebantur. 10. Perfacile est
conata perficere. 11. Mumtiones perficientur. 12. Legatos inter-
ficiunt. 13. Ex oppido profugere non audebunt. 14. Condiciones
pacis accipiendae erant. 15. Ab amicitia populi Roman! deficie-
bant. 16. Non solum vires sed etiam tela nostros deficiunt.
II. 1. The Roman people makes peace with them. 2. They
undertake the war. 3. They were marching through the province.
4. The war should not have been undertaken. 5. We fortify. 6.
Supplies will fail us. 7. He will be put to death by them. 8.
They were ordered to hurl their darts. 9. The fortifications must
be finished. 10. We receive. 11. They will make an attack.
12. They will announce. 13. They hesitate to revolt from the
Aedui. 14. He undertakes the matter. 15. They perceive him.
16. They were fleeing.
1. See footnote 3, page 61. 2. See Part III., section 67.
68 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON XLVII.
(a) Turn to Part III., section 23.
Observation. The declension of lilc and ille.
(6) Provincia mea haec est, ilia this is my province, that (is) yours.
vestra,
Eum locum munlverunt, they fortified that place.
In eos qul haec faciebant they made an attack on those who
impetuni fecerunt, were doing this (literally,
these things). 1
Legatl pacem a Caesare pe- the ambassadors asked peace of
tierunt. Ille haec re- Ccesar. He answered as fol-
spomiit, lows (literally, these things).
Observation. The various translations of hie, ille and is.
What word is used for that (those) when emphatic (by contrast) ?
when the antecedent of a relative ? When is ille, not is, used for
he (they, etc.)? 2
EXERCISE XLVII.
I. 1. Haec omnia 1 Gallis erant incognita. 2. Gallos, qui ea
loca iiicoluerant, expulerunt. 3. Hos Germanos Helvetil, non
solum in suis, sed etiam in illorum finibus, superaverant. 4.
Haec consuetudo victiis cum ilia non comparanda est. 5. Hi in
armis sunt, ill! domi remanent. 6. Ad earn sententiam haec ratio
duduxit. 7. Dum haec in his locis geruntur, ad maritimas regiones,
quibus quattuor reges praeerant, nuntios mittit. 8. Nostri pila
in hostes conjiciunt. 111! primo concursu in fugam conjecti proxi-
mas silvas petierunt. 9. Hoc latus insulae pertinet circiter millia
passuum qumgenta. 10. Ab iis, quos miserat, exploratoribus haec
cognovit. 11. Hunc ill! comprehenderant. 12. Hujus loci haec
erat natura. 13. Uni ex omnibus, Sequam nihil earum rerum
faciebant, quas ceteri fecerant. 14. Ilium pro amico, te pro hoste
habebo.
1. See footnote 2, page 56.
2. Hie is practically an emphatic is; hence when he or they is emphasized, ille
should be used. This includes the case where there is a change of subject, as in the
last example.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 69
II. 1. The Helvetians on the following day move their camp
from that place. 2. On being informed of these things, he orders
them to give up all their arms. They quickly do (his) commands.
3. We shall defend those into whose territories Caesar has sent
this army. 4. Alarmed by all these things, they send ambassadors
to him. 5. These do 1 not agree with those. 6. The width of this
forest extends a nine days' journey. 7. Of all these the Belgians
are the bravest, because they are nearest to the Germans. 8. By
this speech he persuades them. 9. On their arrival he leads his
forces into the country of the Morini. They flee into the woods
and swamps. 10. This legion Caesar had indulged. 11. At that
time he held the leading place in this state. 12. They hasten
towards the camp and those who were finishing the fortifications.
13. Our men drove them into the woods, but lost a few of (liter-
ally, out of) their comrades. 14. As soon as Caesar came to the
border of these woods, they betook themselves to their friends,
and Caesar led his forces into winter quarters.
LESSON XLVIII.
(a) Turn to Part III., section 33.
Observation. The formation in each conjugation of the present
participle active.
(6) AdventumCaesarisexspec- while awaiting Ccesar's approach
tans magnas copias he raised large forces.
coegit,
Adventum Caesaris exspec- while awaiting Ccesar's approach
tantes castra munie- we shall fortify the camp.
mus,
Legatum fortiter resisten- they wmmded the lieutenant while
tern vulneraverunt, he was bravely resisting.
In eos fug-ientes impetum we made an attack on them as
f ecimus, (or while or when) they were
fleeing.
1. See footnote 2, paje 19.
70 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Observation. Declension and agreement of present participle
active. The different translations given. The voice. The rela-
tion in point of time of the participle and of the principal verb.
(c) Equltes re vocarl jusslt, he ordered the cavalry to be re-
called.
Fossas complerl jusslt, he ordered the trenches to be filed.
Naves cogl jusslt, he ordered ships to be collected.
Castra munlrl jusslt, he ordered a camp to be fortified.
Observation. The formation in each conjugation and the
translation of the present infinitive passive.
EXERCISE XLVIII.
I. 1. Discedens ab hiberms in Italiam, jussit plurimas hieme
naves aedificari. 2. Leges Aeduorum duo ex una familia magi-
stratus creari vetant. 3. Magnum numerum eorum fugientium
conciderunt. 4. Haec flens a Caesare petivit. 5. Naves paulum
remover! et remis incitari et ad 1 latus apertum hostium constitui
jiissit. 6. Succurrit ill! Vorenus et laboranti subvenit. 7. Equites
cedere seque in castra recipere, simul castra altiore valid muniri
jiissit. 8. Caesar petentibus Aeduis concessit. 9. Scaphas mili-
tibus compleri jubet, et subsidia els quos laborantes conspicit
submitti. 10. Hunc fugientem silvae texerunt. 11. Obsides in
continentem adduci jussit. 12. Fortiter pugnans interfectus est.
13. Hostes, his rebus, permotl, Lutetiam incendl, pontesque ejus
oppidi rescind! jubent.
II. 1. He orders the ambassadors to be called to him. 2.
C?esar, while expecting a larger uprising of Gaul, began to hold a
levy. 3. Weeping they besought him. 4. He ordered the camp
to be fortified by a wall. 5. We made an attack 011 the enemy as
they were betaking themselves to the camp. 6. Our men, while
resisting bravely, were surrounded by the enemy's cavalry. 7.
He ordered the enemy to be dislodged and driven off with slings
and arrows. 8. Lucius Cotta while fighting is slain with a very
large portion of the soldiers, the rest betake themselves to the
camp. 9. On departing they order cavalry to be procured. 10.
1. Translate ad here by on.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 71
Influenced by their statements, he ordered the battle to be begun.
11. The enemy, because they had a larger number of men, sur-
rounded our men as they were fighting. 12. We seized him as
he was fleeing.
LESSON XLIX.
(a) Turn to Part III., section 23.
Observation. The declension of ipse and Idem.
(6) Labieiium cum duabns le- he orders Labienus with two le-
gidnibus castra munlre giuns to fortify tlie camp, tie
jubet, ipse in Gallium himself hastens to Gaid.
contendit,
Ab Aeduls ipsls certior fac- lie was informed by the Aedui
tus est, themselves.
Se ad castra receperunt, tJiey betook themselves to tlie camp.
Eiisdom copias rellquit, he left the same forces.
Observation. The translation of ipse and Idem. The, differ-
ence between se and ipse. 1
EXERCISE XLIX.
I. 1. Eodem tempore Caesarem certiorem faciunt de ejus
adventu. 2. Omnibus Gallis idem 2 est faciendum, quod Helvetii
fecerunt. 3. Aquilam intra vallum projecit, ipse pro castris
pugnans occiditur. 4. Postulat eadem. 2 5. Haec ipsi ab alils
audiverant. 6. Eodem die hostes sub monte consederant millia
passuum ab Caesaris castris octo. 7- Neque Caesaris ipsius
adventus neque Labieni cognitus erat. 8. Ab eisdem nostra con-
silia hostibus enuntiantur. 9. Constituit cohortes duas in provincia
collocare, et ipse cum reliquis ejus legionis cohortibus hiemare.
10. Horum auctoritate adducti, eadem de causa legates retinent.
11. Eadem nocte se intern 1 chmt. 12. Eldem prmcipes qui 3 ante
veiierant ad eum revertcruiit. 13. Ipse in Aeduos, quae civitas
1. Se is the reflexive pronoun of the third person ; ipse is used purely for emphasis,
and may be used of auy person.
2. See footnote 2, page 56.
3. Notice that, after idem, qui may be translated as, instead of who.
72 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
propinqua his locis erat, contendit. 14. His de rebus Caesar
certior factus, quod ipse longe aberat, naves aedificari, remiges ex
provincia mstitui, nautas gubernatoresque comparari jubet.
II. 1. On the same day ambassadors sent by the enemy came
to Caesar. 2. He himself drew up a triple line of four legions. 3.
He hastens to them by the same route and sends all the cavalry
before him. 4. He had learned this from the Romans themselves
through the same messengers. 5. He ordered them to be sent to
him. 6. The same night the camp was moved. 7. These are the
same enemies with whom the Helvetians have waged war. 8.
They themselves sought denser forests. 9. The enemy betook
themselves to the camp. 10. The next day they move the camp
from that place ; Cresar does the same. 11. Supplies began to fail
the enemy themselves. 12. Hostages were given up, and the
two sons of the king himself. 13. They were ordered to give
themselves up to him. 14. The Sequani remained silent^in the
same dejection. 15. He himself began the battle on (literally,
from) the right wing. 16. The town was protected by the very
nature (literally, the nature itself) of the place.
LESSON L.
(a) Castrls munltls, copias In- the camp having been fortified, he
struxit, . drew up his forces.
Obsidibus acceptls, pacem (literally, hostages having been
fecit, received) having received
hostages (or after receiving
hostages), he made peace.
Armls traditls, pacem fecit, (literally, arms having been given
up) when (or as) the arms
were given up, lie made peace.
Impetu facto, nostros per- (literally, an attack having been
turbaverunt, made) making an attack, they
threw our men into confusion.
Cognito Caesaris adventu, (literally, Cassar's arrival having
legates inittunt, been learned) on learning of
Caesar's arrival, they send
ambassadors.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 73
Observation. The nature of the ablative absolute. 1 The vari-
ous translations for the ablative absolute in the perfect participle
passive. The absence of a perfect participle active in Latin.
(6) Nostris castra oppugnanti- while (or as) our men were assaidt-
bus, eruptionem liostes ing the camp, tlie enemy made-
fecerunt, a sally.
Observation. The translation of the ablative absolute in the
present participle active. The position of the ablative absolute
clause.
EXERCISE L.
I. 1. Hoc proelio facto, exercitum traducit. 2. Dato signo ex
castris erumpunt. 3. Vlcis aedificiisque eorum incensis, Caesar
exercitum reduxit. 4. His rebus expositis, sigmim dat. 5. His
nuntiis acceptis, consilium convocavit. 6. Colle occupato, mille
passus ab nostris munitionibus considunt. 7. German! clamore
audito, armis abjectls se ex castris ejecerunt. 8. Hoc facto,
duabus legionibus quas in Italia conscripserat in castris relictls,
reliquas sex legiones pro castris in acie constituit. 9. His ntintiis
litterisque commotus, re frumentaria comparata, castra movet. 10.
Nullo hoste prohibente, legionem in provinciam perdtixit, ibique
hiemavit. 11. His constitutis rebus, paulum supra eum locum
pontem fecerunt. 12. Deditione facta obsidibusque acceptis, prae-
sidia deducent. 13. Itinere converse, novissimum agmen lacessere
coeperunt. 14. Multa, .ipso praesente, in concilio Gallorum dicta
erant. 15. Phalange disjecta equitibusque repulsis, impetum in
eos fecerunt. 16. Impedimentis relictis eruptione facta, eisdem
itineribus quibus pervenerant, ad flumen Rhenum contenderunt.
17. Celeritate nostrorum permoti, legates ad Caesarem de deditione
mittunt, et petentibus Remis impetrant. 18. Itaque re frumen-
taria proviso, equitatuque comparato, in hostium fines exercitum
introduxit. 19. Nihil timentibus nostris, hostes impetum fecerunt.
20. Instructs exercitu ut loci natura postulabat, proelium com-
misit. 21. Helve tii impedimenta in tinum locum contulerunt, ipsi
rejecto nostro equitatu, phalange facta, sub primam nostram aciem
successerunt. 22. Caesar, primum suo deinde omnium ex con-
spectu remotis equis, proelium commisit.
1. See more fully Part 111., section 85, o.
74 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. 1. After receiving many wounds, they betook themselves
to the woods. 2. Having pitched the camp, they determined to
await his arrival. 3. Collecting large forces, he drives him out of
the state. 4. When several towns had been taken by storm,
Caesar determined to await the fleet. 5. Having procured sup-
plies and selected the cavalry, he began to march into that country.
6. Drawing their swords, they seized the gates. 7. Having sent
ambassadors, they had sought peace from him. 8. As a large
number had been slain, the rest cast themselves into the river.
9. After capturing a large number of men and cattle and laying
waste the fields, he compelled them to give hostages. 10. As
our men were in distress, he ordered the third line to make an
attack on the enemy's forces. 11. When several battles had been
fought, they sent ambassadors to Csesar and surrendered them-
selves to him. 12. On learning this (literally, these things), he
sends Labienus in advance with three legions ; he himself with the
remaining two hastened to the river. 13. While these were
fighting, a few fled to the camp. 14. Having slain a third part
of them, our men began to attack the town. 15. On learning of
his arrival, the enemy, collecting large forces, began a cavalry
battle with our men on the march ; then on their cavalry being
defeated, they suddenly disclosed the infantry which they had
stationed in ambush. 16. As (but) a few are defending (it), they
are likely to take the town by storm. 17. Having thus routed all
the forces of the enemy, they withdrew themselves to their own
camp. 18. He himself, after drawing up a triple line of battle,
advanced to the enemy's camp. 19. The signal being given, our
men made an attack on the enemy's line. 20. Having in one
summer finished two very important (literally, great) wars, Caesar
withdrew the army into winter quarters ; he himself wintered in
hither Gaul. 21. As these were resisting bravely, he ordered the
ships to be removed.
LESSON LI.
Quis tibi persuasit ? who has persuaded you?
Quoin usiuii belli liabent ? what experience of war have tJiey ?
Quid venistis ? why have you come ?
.'ART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 75
Quanta est Insula? how large is the island?
Uter est celerior ? which (of the two) is the swifter ?
Cur me accusas? why do you accuse me?
Observation. The difference between the English and the
Latin verb in asking a question. 1 The declension of the interroga-
tive pronouns. (For quis and qul, see Part Hi., section 25 ; for
uter, section 14.)
EXERCISE LI.
I. 1. Quanta est Tnsulae magnitude ? 2. In utram partem 2
flunien fluit ? 3. Quis ejus consilii auctor fuit ? 4. Qua de causa 3
discedunt ? 5. Cognito Caesaris adventu, bellum parare coeperunt.
6. Quae et quantae nationes Britanniam incolunt ? 7. Quid mihi
faciendum est ? 8. Prima luce productis omnibus copiis, duplici
acie mstructa, hostes exspectabat. 9. His rebus cognitis, eum
ad se vocari jubet. 10. Cur ab officio discessurus es ? 11. Qui-
bus ex regionibus 3 venistis, quasque ibi res cognovistis ? 12.
Quid dubitas? 13. Quid petunt aliud Roman!? 14. Quid illo
bello simile fuit ? 15. Cur de vestra virtute aut de mea diligentia
desperatis ? 16. Hac oratione habita, concilium dimisit.
II. 1. What states are in arms ? 2. Why have they led their
forces across into our territories? 3. What 4 was said in the
council of the Gauls about him? 4. Alarmed by the scarcity of
corn and supplies, he hastened the next day into the province,
after burning all the buildings of that village. 5. What 4 is being
done in the enemy's camp ? 6. In what 3 place have the forces of
the enemy encamped ? 7. How large a number of men are they
likely to send to that war ? 8. The enemy, after losing all their
baggage, fled. 9. What (literally, of what sort) is the nature of
the mountain ? 10. On giving this answer he withdrew. 11. In
1. In English the order is often different in a statement and in a question, the
subject (unless it is itself the interrogative pronoun) coming after either the whole or
part of the verb ; e.fj., he ha* come, has he come ? No such difference is found in
Latin. See also footnote 2, page 19. In both Latin and English the interrogative
begins the sentence.
2. In . . . . partem in . . . . direction, literally, into .... quarter (or part).
3. When the interrogative pronoun agrees with a noun whioh depends on a prepo-
sition of one syllable, the order is pronoun, preposition, noun; this order is usual
with the relative pronouns also, and is often found with emphatic adjectives.
4. The neuter plural, literally, what thiiiya, is very commonly rendered by ichat.
See footnote 2, page 56.
76 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
what 1 place is Caesar? 12. In what 1 direction are the enemy
marching? 13. With whom are they waging war? 14. What 2
have you heard or learned about this matter ? 15. On receiving
hostages he leaves Labienus with the cavalry in the same village ;
he himself hastens to the nearest town. 16. What is more dis-
graceful ? 17. Which is the more disgraceful deed ?
LESSON LTI.
(a) Longe, far ; longius, farther ; longissime, farthest, or very
far.
Llbere, freely ; llberius, more llberrime, most, or very
freely. freely.
Acriter, fiercely ; acrius, more acerrime, most, or very
fiercely. fiercely.
Fortiter, bravely; fortius, more fortissime, most, or very
bravely. bravely.
Dlligenter, care- dlligentius, dlligentissime, most, or
fully ; more carefully. very carefully.
Observation. The regular formation of adverbs from adjectives
in the positive, comparative and superlative degrees. 3
(b) Turn to Part III., section 17.
Observation. Irregular formation and comparison of adverbs.
(c) Quam maximas copias coe- he collected forces as large as pos-
git, sible.
Quam longissime, as far as possible.
Observation. The translation of a superlative modified by
quam.
EXERCISE LII.
I. 1. Horum omnium fortissimi sunt Belgae, propterea quod a
cultu atque humanitate provinciae longissime absunt. 2. Inter-
1. See footnote 3, page 75. 2. See footnote 4, page 75.
3. The corresponding adjectives are longus, a, urn; liber, era, erum; acer, acris,
acre; j'urtis, e; diligem, entis.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 77
pretibus remotls, dicit liberius atque audacius. 3. Se in currus
citissime recipiunt. 4. Ea res legionl feliciter evenit. 5. Novo
genere pugnae perterritls nostris, ill! per medios audacissime per-
ruperunt. 6. Quam maximis itineribus in Galliam ulteriorem
contendit. 7. Id quod ipsi aegerrime confecerant, ille uno die
fecit. 8. Cupidissime popull Roman! amicitiam appetunt. 9.
Milites legionis decimae, cul quam maxime confidebat, acriter
pugnaveruiit. 10. Qua minime arduus ascensus erat, ex oppido
eruptionem subito fecerunt. 11. Facillime impetus hostium diu-
tius sustinebimus. 12. Haec civitas longe plurimum totms Galliae
valet. 13. Haec civitas diu plurimum totius Galliae valebat.
14. His rebus quam maturrime occurrere constituit. 15. Huic
legionl Caesar indulserat praecipue, et propter virtutem confide-
bat maxime. 16. Omnes acerrime fortissimeque pugnaverunt.
17. Quam aequissimum locum delegit, atque castra quam maxime
contraxit.
II. 1. They will resist us less easily. 2. They are approaching
nearer. 3. After procuring supplies as quickly as possible, he
hastens by forced marches towards Ariovistus. 4. Our men were
greatly alarmed. 5. They began to resist more boldly and fight
more bravely. 6. He persuades them more, easily because the
Helvetians are hemmed in on all sides by the nature of the coun-
try. 7. Our men hesitated to leap down, chiefly on account of the
depth of the sea. 8. He forbade the soldiers to depart too far 1
from the line of march. 9. Our men, quickly making an attack on
them, fought long and vigorously. 10. He ordered as many ships
as possible to be collected in that winter. 11. The right of ambas-
sadors must be more carefully upheld. 12. "Many ships were most
seriously shattered. 13. He demanded as large a number of
soldiers as possible. 14. He stationed the army in winter quarters
in those states which had last made war. 15. He himself is slain
while fighting bravely. 16. He determined to have an escort as
friendly as possible. 17. He has waged many wars with the
neighboring states most successfully.
1. Translate too far by the comparative ; literally, farther (than they shotild).
78 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON LIII.
(a) Morabantnr, they were de- SecutI erant, they had followed,
laying. SequI coepit, lie began to follow.
Moratus, after delaying. Potltur, he gains.
Veretur, he fears. Potltus, having gained.
Veritus, fearing. Progreditur, he advances.
Observation. To what voice do these verb-forms belong (a)
with respect to their form, (6) with respect to the translation ? x
(6) Seqnens, while following.
Secuturl sunt, they are going to follow.
Observation. To which voice do these forms belong ?
For a synopsis of the deponent verb in all conjugations, see
Part III., section 40.
EXERCISE LIII.
I. 1. Dum in his locis Caesar moratur, tempestas subito coorta
est. 2. Helvetii, oppidls suls vlclsque exustis, cum els proficisceii-
tur. 3. Legatos conantes dlcere prohibuit. 4. Hostes impeditos
nostri consecuti, magnum numerum eorum conciderunt. 5. Ino-
piam frumenti veritus, constituit lion progredl longius. 6. Nostrls
mllitibus cunctantibiis, centurio deos contestatus desilit. 7. Id
conspicati, Helvetii, itinere converse, nostros Insequi ac lacessere
coeperunt. 8. Dum civitas jus suum exsequl conatur, Orgetorix
mortuus est. 9. Germanos cedentes insequi ausl erant. 10.
Cohortatus suos, hostes aggressus est. 11. Ne in locis quidem
superioribus hostes consistere patiuntur. 12. Repulsi ab equitatu
se in silvas abdiderunt, locum nacti egregie et natura et opere
munltum. 13. Hi nostros adortl proelium renovant. 14. His
constitutis rebus, nactus idoneam tempestatem, tertia vigilia solvit,
equitesque in ulteriorem portum progredl et se sequi jussit. 15.
1. Puch verbs are called Deponents. The principal parts, as given in the vocabu-
lary, differ, of course, from those of the regular active verb; e.g., moror, ari, atus
wtii ; sequor, i, seciitiis xum. Of these the first is the present indicative, the second
the infinitive marking the conjugation (see Lesson XLVIII., c), and the third the
perfect indicative.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 79
Equitatu sud pulso atque msequentibus nostris, subito pedestres
copias ostenderunt.
II. 1. Csesar, after encouraging his men, gives the signal. 2.
The Aedui had promised corn. 3. He did not allow the soldiers
to go outside of the fortifications. 4. On the interpreters being
removed he converses with him more freely. 5. After advancing
seven miles from that place, he drew up the line of battle. 6. A
sudden war arose in Gaul. 7. When this battle had been reported,
those who had come to the Rhine began to return ; he himself set
out for hither Gaul. 8. He ordered the Helvetians to return to
their own territories, from which they had set out. 9. They have
not ventured to attack us. 10. They will attempt to seize the
higher ground. 11. He himself sets out with all his forces. 12.
At daybreak, leaving the camp of the Helvetians, they hastened to
the territories of the Germans. 13. A great storm having arisen,
all the ships were most seriously shattered. 14. Suddenly attack-
ing them, they slew a large number. 15. With whom (plural)
does he hold converse ?
LESSON LIV.
(a) Virtute praestant, they are superior in valor.
Celeritate omnes praece- they excel all in speed.
dunt,
Oppida numero duottecim, towns twelve in number.
Oppidum nomine Bibrax, a town Bibrax by name.
Observation. The use of the ablative without a preposition to
specify in what respect a statement or term is to be applied.
(b) Fortiores quam Galll sunt, they are braver than the Gauls.
Hibernia est minor quam Ireland is smaller than Britain.
Britannia,
Amplius octingentae naves more than eight hundred vessels
erant vlsae, had been seen.
Mllites minus septingentl less than seven hundred soldiers
eon ven iuiit, assemble.
80 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Observation. The force of quam after a comparative. 1 The
omission of quam with numerals. 2
EXERCISE LIV.
I. 1. Haec civitas hominum multitudine praestabat. 2. Magis
virtute quam dolo contendimus. 3. Venetl scientia atque usu
nauticarum rerum reliquos Gallos antecedunt. 4. Virtute omni-
bus praestatis. 5. Uno die amplius viginti urbes incenduntur.
6. Praestat omnia a populo Romano patl quam ab Gallis interficl.
7. Flumen ab castrls non amplius millia passuum decem aberat.
8. Germanos Galli virtute superabant. 9. Plurimum inter eos
BellovacI et 3 virtute et auctoritate et hominum numero valent.
10. Haec res Caesarl non mindrem quam ipsa victoria voluptatem
attulit. 4 11. Aquitania et 3 regionum latitudine et multitudine
hominum tertia pars Galliae est aestimanda. 12. Gallos disperses
adortus, magis ratione et consilio quam virtute vicit. 13. Plus
tertia parte iiiterfecta, reliquos in fugam conjiciunt.
II. 1. The Helvetians surpass in valor all the rest of the Gauls.
2. They are strong in infantry. 3. He himself was not farther
than a mile and a half from the enemy's camp. 4. Our fleet was
superior in swiftness. 5. They themselves have not more than
three hundred cavalry. 6. They are going to burn all their own
towns, twelve in number. 7. The Gauls do not compare them-
selves with them in valor. 8. The lot of the Sequaiii is more
wretched and bitter than (that) of the others. 9. Our men were
equal to the enemy both in valor and in number. 10. The nights
are shorter than in Gaul. 11. Labienus has collected all the ships,
two hundred in number. 12. It is better to be slain in battle (use
acizs) than not to regain our liberty.
1. So also after words implying comparison, e.g., praestat, it i$ better. The use of
the ablative of comparison is omitted here because of its rarity in Ca3sar.
2. So only after amplius, plus, minus and longius.
3. See footnote 3, page 66.
4. Froma/ero.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 81
LESSON LV. 1
(a) Respondent Romanes ve- they answer that tJie Romans are
nlre, coming.
Existimat Gallos esse in- hn thinks that the Gauls are hos-
imlcos, tile.
Certior factus est Helvetica he has been informed that the Hel-
iter face re, vetians are marching.
Intellegit nostros castra he perceives that our men are
movere, breaking up camp.
Observation. The Latin equivalent for English clauses intro-
duced by that after verbs of saying, thinking, knowing, perceiving.
Mood. Case of subject. Translation of tliat.
(b) Respondent Romanes ve- they answer that the Romans have
nisse, come.
Existimat Gallos fuisse in- he thinks that the Gauls have been
imicos, hostile.
Intellegit nostros castra he perceives that our men are
moturos (esse), going to move the camp.
Respondet se non venturum he answers that he will not come.
(esse),
Respondent eum non ven- they answer tliat he will not come.
turum (esse),
Observation. The formation of the various tenses of the infini-
tive active, and their translation after verbs of saying, thinking,
etc. (See Part III., section 31, and for the verb sum, section 41.)
The changes of form in the future infinitive. 2 Use of se and eum
as subject of an infinitive. 3
1. On account of the length and difficulty of this lesson, the exercise is so arranged
that sections (a), (b) and (c) may be taken as separate lessons. See more fully Part II.,
sections 12 aiid 16, and Part III., section 101, b.
2. The future infinitive is made up of the future participle in -urus and the
infinitive of sum, but esse is generally omitted. The participle in -urus will, of
course, agree in gender, number and case with the person to whom it refers, i.e. t
its subject.
3. Se regularly in short sentences refers to the subject of the verb on which the
infinitive depends. As there are no personal endings with the infinitive, the subject
should always be expressed by a noun or pronoun in the accusative case.
82 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(c) Certior factns erat cos iter he had been informed that they
fact- re, ''"' i' 1 '!.(( I'chlny.
Responderunt Romanos ve- they answered that the Romans
nirc, iccre cuinimj.
Responderunt Romanos ve- they ansivered that tJie Ramans
nisse, had come.
Existimabat copias ventu- he thought that the forces would
ras (esse), come.
Observation. The translation of the various tenses of the
infinitive, when the verb of saying, thinking, etc., is in a past
tense, i.e., imperfect, perfect ( = English past) or pluperfect. 1
EXERCISE LV.
I. ( a ) 1. Renuntiant Gallos ex vico discedere. 2. Intellegit
Nervios belluin parare. 3. Nostros ex navi desilire conspiciunt. 2
4. Hostem intra portas esse existimant. 2 5. Dicit copias hostium
fossas complere vallumque scindere. 6. Videtis nihil esse arduum.
(b) 7. Se obsides reciperaturum existimat. 8. Cognoscit naves
in continentem revertisse. 9. Duas venisse legiones videt. 10.
Nos iter facturos cognoscit. 11. Copias temperaturas ab injuria
et maleficio existimat. 12. Els sese vel persuasuros vel vi coac-
turos existimant. 13. Omnem exercitum discessisse renuntiant.
(c) 14. Respondit magnam Caesarem injuriam facere. 15. Re-
nuntiaverant Gallos adventum Romanorum exspectare constituisse.
16. Negavit Aeduis se obsides redditurum esse. 17. Helvetii
angustos se fines habere arbitrabantur. 3 18. Helvetios tempera-
tures ab injuria existimabat. 3 19. Ex captivis cognovit flumen ab
castrls suls non amplius millia passuum duodecim abesse, trans
id flumen omnes Nervios consedisse, adventumque ibi Romanorum
exspectare. 20. Hostes simul atque se ex fuga receperunt, ad
Caesarem de pace legatos miserunt, atque obsides se datui-os
poUiciti sunt. 21. Caesari renuntiatur Helvetios iter in Aeduorum
1. These tenses are called the secondary or histijrical tenses ; the present, future
and perfect (when translated by have) being called the primary tenses.
2. The verb of saying, thinking, etc., often follows the clause which depends on it-
3. With verbs of thinking, feeling and knowing, the imperfect tense is generally to
be^ translated by the English past tense.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 83
fines faccre. 22. Caesar postquam per exploratores comperit
hostes sese in silvas recepisso, iiiopiam f rumen ti veritus, cdnstituit
nun progredl longius. 23. Helvetii timore perterritos Romanes
discedere a se existimabant. 1 24. Breviores esse quam in Gallia
noctes viclebamus. 1
II. () 1. He learns that the Belgians are assembling. 2.
They think that Caesar is waging war without supplies. 3. He
sees that the Germans do not venture to begin battle. 4. They
bring back word that the enemy's cavalry are riding up and hurl-
ing stones and weapons. 5. They understand that cavalry, ships
(and) provisions are wanting. 6. He says that the corn is now
ripe in the fields.
(6) 7. They perceive that Caesar has led across the forces with-
out baggage. 8. Pie thinks that Labienus will order the Aedui to
send ambassadors. 9. He learns that the Britons have seized the
ambassador and put (him) in chains. 10. He says that they have
rested all hope of safety in valor alone. 11. They bring back word
that Caesar, after leading his army across, has broken down the
bridge. 12. All the states promise to send (literally, that they will
send) hostages.
(c) 13. He answered that he would break up camp the next
night. 14. On the same day Caesar was informed by scouts that
the enemy had encamped at the foot of the mountain, eight miles
from his camp. 15. He promised not to neglect 2 the wrongs of
the Aedui. 16. He was informed that all the neighboring states
were revolting. 17. They promised not to revolt. 2 18. They
declare that they will neither send ambassadors nor surrender their
arms. 19. He said that for this reason he had been silent. 20.
From these he learns that a town, protected by woods and marshes,
is not far distant from that place. 21. They said that, influenced
by him, they had revolted from the Aedui. 22. He declares that
they have always been hostile to him. 23. Caesar, thinking (liter-
ally, having thought) that this had happened quite opportunely,
demands hostages. 24. He promised to finish 2 the war without
any danger to them (literally, of them).
1. See footnote 3, page 82.
2. Compare sentence 12, and avoid using the present infinitive after verbs of
promising.
84 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
LESSON LVI.
Vlr maximae virtutis, a man of the greatest bravery.
Classis naviuiu vlgintl, a fleet of twenty ships.
Novem dierum iter, a nine days' march (literally, a
march of nine days).
Mons magna altitudine, a mountain of great height.
Vlr maxima vlrtute, a man of the greatest bravery.
Iiiiiua nl corporum magnitu- men of huge size (of bodies).
dine homines,
Observation. The cases used to describe the qualities or char-
acteristics of objects. Which case is used when the description
refers to number ? which case is preferred when physical charac-
teristics are described I 1
EXERCISE LVI.
I. 1. Reperit Nervios esse homines magnae virtutis. 2. Quod
erat civitas magnae inter Belgas auctoritatis, atque hominum
multitudine praestabat, sescentos obsides poposcit. 3. Volusenus,
tribunus militum, vir et consilii magnl et summae virtutis, ad
Galbam accurrit, atque unam esse spem salutis docet. 4. Merca-
tores ingenti magnitudine corporum Germanos esse praedicabant.
5. Nervii vallo pedum novem et fossa qumdecim 2 hiberiia cingunt.
6. Erat inter Labienum atque hostem dinicili transitu flumen.
7. Quibus viribus homines tantulae staturae tanti oneris turrim
moturi sunt ? 8. Per exploratores certior factus est silvam esse
infmita magnitudine. 9. Vercingetorix, summae potentiae adules-
cens, cujus pater principatum Galliae totius obtinuerat, clientes
convocat. 10. Ceteri ejusdem generis sunt humaniores.
II. 1. He was distant a few days' journey from him. 2. A
mountain of great height takes up the rest of the space. 3. It was
an enterprise of great danger. 4. A wood of immense extent
stretches from the river Rhine to their territories. 5. They
1. See more fully Part III., sections 81, e, and 85, c.
2. The height of the wall and the breadth of the trench are the important measure-
ments. Compare sentence 6 in the English.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 85
brought back word that the Germans were (men) of incredible
bravery. 6. They are going to fortify the town with a rampart
twelve feet high (literally, of ttcelve feet). 7. He found that Dum-
norix was (a mail) of the utmost boldness, and of great influence
with the Gauls on account of his liberality. 8. He sends to them
Valerius, a young man of the highest valor and accomplishments.
9. He did not think that men of an unfriendly disposition would
refrain from wrong-doing and mischief. 10. This state was power-
ful, and was of great weight among them.
LESSON LVII.
(<<) Certior factus cat agros he was informed that the fields
vastarl, were being laid waste.
Responderunt agros vasta- they answered that their fields had
tos et oppida Incensa been laid waste and their
esse, towns burned.
PollicitI sunt se secuturos they promised to follow (literally,
(esse), that they would follow).
Dlxit eos loqul conatos esse, he said they had attempted to
speak.
Observation. Formation of present and perfect infinitive pas-
sive (see Part III., section 32). Changes in form of the perfect
infinitive passive. Infinitive of Deponents (see Part III., section
40). Compare Lesson LV.
(b) Praesidio castrls erant, they were a protection (literally,
for a protection) to the camp.
Oiiniia qnae eraut usul all things which were of service
nostris, (literally, for an advantage)
to our men.
Nostris erat iinpedlineuto, it was a hindrance (literally, for
a hindrance) to our men.
Equites auxilio iiostrls ml- they sent the cavalry as aid (liter-
seruut, ally, for an aid) to our men,
or to aid our men.
86 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Observation. The case used as a predicate to state the purpose
a person or thing serves. 1
EXERCISE LVII.
I. 1. Respondit omnes eorum copias a se pulsas ac superatas
esse. 2. Multitudine hostium castra compler! et nostras legiones
premi vTderunt. 3. Easdem copias praesidio castris rellquit. 4.
Renuntiant Helvetios iter per provinciam facere conari. 5. Haec
res magno usui fuit. 6. Demonstrat idem omnibus Gallis esse
faciendum. 7. Equites nuntiaverunt superiore nocte, maxima
coorta tempestate, omnes naves afflictas esse. 8. Equites ab
hostibus urgeri conspicatus, decimam legionem subsidio nostris
misit. 9. Gallis magno erat impedimento. 10. Arbitrati eum
non longius progredi conaturum, in fines suds reverterunt. 11.
Responderunt non se hostem vereri sed magnitudinem silvarum.
12. Certiores fact! sunt Caesarem, praesidio quinque cohortium
impediment^ relicto, cum reliquis copiis prima luce profectum
esse. 13. Hoc magno sibi usm fore arbitrabantur. 2
II. 1. He found that their arrival was being awaited by the
enemy. 2. He was afterwards informed that Labienus' approach
had not been discovered by the enemy. 3. The two legions which
had been last enrolled were left as guard for the baggage. 4. He
promised to follow Caesar. 5. Those who were coming to the
aid of the Belgians learned that several towns had been taken by
storm. 6. He was informed that a sudden war had arisen in
Gaul. 7. One thing was a great advantage to our men. 8. They
answered that the friendship of the Roman people was an honor
and a safeguard, not a loss. 9. These informed Caesar that the
two ambassadors had been put to death. 10. All (things) were
wanting which were of use for (use ad) these purposes. 11. He
said that the Aedui had been compelled to give hostages. 12. He
said that he would set out for the province the next day. 13. He
perceived that our men were being surrounded by the enemy.
1. This use of the dative is found chiefly with the words given above. It should be
noticed that there is generally another dative telling the person to whom the thing
spoken of is a benefit or injury, and often to be translated by for.
2. See footnote 3, page 82.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 87
LESSON LVIII.
Magna celeritate decurrertmt, they ran down ivith great swift-
ness.
Alia ratione bellum gerunt, they carry on the war in another
manner.
Summo studio castramuniunt, they fortify the camp with the.
greatest zeal.
Sua coiisuetudiue desiluerunt, they leaped down, according to
their custom.
Caesaris voluntate profectl they set out with Ccesar's consent.
sunt,
Observation. The use and translation of the ablative express-
ing the manner in which, or that in accordance with which, some-
thing is done.
EXERCISE LVIII.
I. 1. Equitibus iiostris pulsis, incredibili celeritate ad flumen
decurrunt. 2. Gallis magno erat impediments quod nudo corpore
pugnaverunt. 3. Ab els cognovit Gallos more suo concilio habito,
nuntios in omnes partes dimisisse. 4. Hostes maximo clamore
scalis vallum ascendere coeperunt. 5. Consuetudine sua Caesar
cohortes complures praesidio castris rellquerat. 6. Repperit id
flumen per fines Aeduorum in Rhodanum influere incredibili
lenitate. 7. Ad castra magno cursu contenderunt. 8. Consensu
omnium Gallorum, pace facta, GermanI hunc sibi domicilio locum
delegerunt. 9. Ad haec Caesar respondit se nunquam alia ratione
bellum gesturum. 10. Summo studio mllite's naves aedificare
veteresque reficere coeperunt.
II. 1. He ordered the camp to be moved with greater noise and
confusion. 2. He said this in a loud voice. 3. They reported
that all the Gauls with loud weeping began to ask aid from Caesar.
4. Having with incredible speed covered a great distance, they
reached the camp on the eighth day. 5. According to their cus-
tom, they leap down and fight on foot. 6. They brought back
word that the camp had not been fortified with the same care on
88 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(use ex) all sides. 7. He answered that he would not come on any
other condition. 8. With the same speed they hastened towards
our camp. 9. With the approval of all, they sent ambassadors to
him and promised to give hostages. 10. He found out through
scouts that, according to the practice of the Roman people, the
enemy were fortifying a camp.
LESSON LIX.
Impetum tain subito faciunt they make an attack so suddenly
ut nemo resistat, that no one resists.
Impetum tarn subito fecerunt they made an attack so suddenly
ut nemo resisteret, that uo one resisted.
Tantus timor bostes occupavit such a panic seized the enemy that
ut procliurn committere they did not dare to join
non auderent, battle.
Accidit ut castra milites mu- it happened that the soldiers ivere
nlrent, fortifying the camp.
Observation. Formation of the subjunctive in the present and
imperfect active of all conjugations. (See Part III., section 29. ) x
The translation and use of these tenses of the subjunctive in
dependent sentences of result. 2 Position of the clause introduced
by ut. 3
EXERCISE LIX.
I. 1. Tarn subito impetum fecerunt ut hostes terga verterent.
2. Non tarn barbarus sum ut haec non sciam. 3. Ita Helvetii
instituti sunt ut obsides accipere non dare soleant. 4. Tantus fuit
timor ut discedere ab signis non auderemus. 5. Accidit ut Galli
copias compararent. 6. Ita currus collocant ut expedltum ad
suds receptum habeant. 7. Tan turn potentia antecesserant ut
1. See also Part III., section 39, for the subjunctive of the verbs in -io of the third
conjugation.
2. In these lessons it will be sufficient to notice that the tenses of the subjunctive
are translated in the same way as the indicative is; the present like the present
indicative, the imperfect like the imperfect or perfect (= English past) indicative, the
perfect like the perfect indicative, and the pluperfect like the perfect (= English past)
or pluperfect indicative. This is for beginners a safer guide in translation than the
rules for the " Sequence of Tenses."
3. Notice that except after verbs of happening (the result of chance), some word
containing the idea of so or such precedes the ut clause.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 89
Galliae totlus prmcipatum obtinerent. 8. Tarn celeriter erup-
tionem faciunt ut nemo resistat. 9. Tantam sibi auctoritatem
comparaverat ut undique ad eum legationes concurrerent. 10.
Tantum exercitatione efficiunt ut in praecipitl loco equos brevi
moderari soleant. 11. Sic nostros contempserunt ut fossas com-
plere auderent. 12. Hostes tantam virtutem praestiterunt ut
altissimas rlpas ascendere auderent.
II. 1. The enemy were so terrified that they fled to the woods.
2. So great was the valor of the soldiers that all fought fiercely
and bravely. 3. On their arrival such a change occurred (literally,
was made) that our men at once renewed the battle. 4. It hap-
pened that the soldiers were leaving the standards. 5. Such was
the swiftness of the Germans that they equalled the speed of
their horses. 6. So great is the panic that we do not venture to
engage battle with them. 7. So great a storm arose that very few
of all the ships reached land. 8. The enemy have been so alarmed
by his arrival that they are sending ambassadors about peace. 9.
They fought so fiercely that no one dared leave the standards. 10.
They display such valor that the neighboring states eagerly seek
their friendship. 11. They have such influence among the Bel-
gians that no one dares to lay waste their fields. 12. So quick
were they (literally, so great was tJieir quickness) that he with
difficulty saved himself from the enemy's hands.
LESSON LX.
Cum frumentum nostrl com- when our men were bringing in
portarent, certior factus corn, he ivas informed ....
est . . . ,
Cum haec vldisset, equites when he saw (literally, had seen)
mlsit, this, he sent the cavalry.
Cum agros vastavissent, oppl- when (or after, or since) they had
da oppugnaverunt, laid waste the fields (or after
laying waste the fields), tJiey
attacked the towns.
Cum mille passus abesset, cer- when he was a mile distant, he
tior factus est . . . , was informed ....
90 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Observation. Formation of pluperfect subjunctive active of all
conjugations (see Part III., section 29). 1 The subjunctive of sum
(see Part III., section 41). The use and translation of cum and
thu subjunctive. 2 The difference between the imperfect and the
pluperfect subjunctive after cum. 3 The position of the clause
introduced by cum.
EXERCISE LX.
I. 1. Cum per eorum fines quattuor dies iter fecisset, ad fltimen
pervenit. 2. Caesar 4 cum ab hoste non amplius passuum duo-
decim millia abesset, ad eum legatl revertuntur. 3. Ibi* cum alii
fossas complement, alii tela ex loco superiore conjicerent, nostri
subito eruptionem fecerunt. 4. Eadem nocte accidit ut esset luna
plena. 5.. Cum appropinquarent P>ritanniae, tempestas subito
coorta est. 6. Cum sine impedlmentis Caesar legiones trans-
portavisset, castra erant angustiora. 7. Eo 4 cum de improviso
venisset, Remi, qui proximi Galliae sunt, ad eum legates miserunt.
8. Nostri 4 cum se in castra reciperent, hostibus occurrunt. 9.
Caesar 4 cum septimam legionem urgeri ab hoste vidisset, equites
subsidio mlsit. 10. Cum jam non solum vires sed etiam tela
nostros deficerent, atque hostes acrius instarent, et fossas com-
plere coepissent, Volusenus ad eum accurrit, atque iinam esse
spem salutis docet. 11. Tanta est equitum virtus ut hostes non
pares sint.
II. 1. When Caesar was in hither Gaul in winter quarters he
was informed that all the Belgians were conspiring. 2. When our
men saw that the camp was being filled with a multitude of the
enemy, they betook themselves to flight. 3. After he had ordered
corn to be brought in, he was informed by scouts that all the
Gauls had departed. 4. So great a storm arose that the rest of the
ships were useless. 5. It happens that the nights are shorter. 6.
When the Germans were inarching into our province, they left
throe thousand men as a guard for 5 the baggage. 7. When he had
1. See footnote 1, page 88. 2. See footnote 2, page 88.
3. As both are often rendered by the same English tense, it is important to notice
that with the imperfect the time of both verbs is the same, while the pluperfect
refers to a time earlier than that of the principal verb.
4. See footnote 1, page 60. 6. See footnote 1, page 86.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 91
approached nearer, he was ordered to throw away his arms. 8. So
great is the scarcity of all things that we are in very great danger.
9. When he was a few days' march from their territories, ambas-
sadors came to him. 10. When the Gauls saw that our legions
were being hard pressed, they hastened towards the camp. 11.
On learning that Caesar was going to set out that night, they
stationed an ambush in the woods. 12. It happened that the
camp was smaller.
LESSON LXI.
Haec facere possum, I am able to do this, or I can do
this.
Cum liaec facere non possent, when they were not able to do this,
or when they could not do
this.
DIxit se haec facere posse, he said that he could do this.
DIxit se haec facere potuisse, he said that he could have done
this (literally, had been able
to do).
Haec facere non potuerunt, they were unable to do this, or
they could not do this.
Submoverl non possunt, they cannot be driven off.
Observation. Translation of the various forms of possum with
the present infinitive of another verb. (For the conjugation of
possum, see Part III., section 42.) Position of the infinitive. 1
EXERCISE LXI.
I. 1. Null! civitati Germanorum persuadere potestis. 2. Vobis
possumus utiles esse amici. 3. Ab his se defendere, traditis armis,
non possunt. 4. Minus facile earn rem consequi poterunt. 5.
Cum oppidum expugnare non potuissent, agros populati sunt.
6. Ne ipse quidem sperat nostrum exercitum superari posse. 7.
Quid sine reliquis legionibus efficere potestis? 8. Id efficere
1. The infinitive is used with possum in the same way as is illustrated in Lesson
XIX.
92 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
non potuerant. 9. Cum iter in provinciam nostram facerent,
e;i impedimenta, quae secum portare non poterant, citra flumen
Rhenum deposuerunt. 10. Tanta est Germanorum virtus ut ne
di quidem immortales pares esse possint. 11. Cum ab proximo
Germanis impetrare non possent, ulteriores temptant. 12. Ne
id quidem Caesar ab se impetrari posse dlxit. 13. Nostris sub-
sidio venire non poteramus. 14. Oppidum oppugnare conati,
propter latitudinem fossae murlque altittidinem expugnare non
potuerunt. 15. Haec quis pati potest ?
II. 1. They cannot defend their own territories. 2. He thinks
that he can do this without danger. 3. When they could not
persuade these, they send ambassadors to us. 4. He was informed
that they had not been able to hold out (any) longer. 5. They
could not withstand the attacks of our men. 6. He has been
unable to advance farther. 7. We had not been able to storm the
camp. 8. We could not take up arms quickly. 9. Such a storm
arose that we were not able to finish the work. 10. They did
not think that even (literally, they thought that not even) their
first attack could be withstood. 11. We can very easily prevent
them. 12. So great was the alertness of our men that nothing
could be accomplished. 13. You cannot be seen from the enemy's
camp. 14. We have been so alarmed by these things, that we can
less easily resist the enemy. 15. They could not pursue the
enemy, because the cavalry had been unable to set out.
LESSON LXII.
(a) Study the formation of the perfect subjunctive active of
all conjugations (Part HI., section 29), * and of the subjunctive
passive, all tenses (Part III., section 30). 2
(6) Rogat quis tibi persuaserlt, he asks who has persuaded you.
Rogavit quis tibi persua- he asked who had persuaded you.
sisset,
1. See footnote 1, page 88, and refer also to Part III., sections 41 and 42, for the
perfect subjunctive of sum and pottxuni.
2. See footnote 1, page 88, and compare also the subjunctive of the deponent verbs
in Part III., section 40.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 93
Quern usum belli habeant he inquires what experience of
quaerit, icar they have.
Quem usum belli liaberent he learned what experience of war
cognovit, they had.
Quid venissetis non intel- I did not understand why you
legebam, had come.
Quanta facultas daretur they pointed out what an oppor-
demonstraverunt, tunity was afforded*
Observation. The mood used in dependent sentences intro-
duced by an interrogative. 1 Contrast the independent sentences
given in Lesson LI. The translation of the different tenses of the
subjunctive. 2
EXERCISE LXII.
I. 1. Ab his quaesivit quae civitates in armis essent. 2. Rogat
quas 3 in partes hostes iter faciant. 3. Ex loco superiore quae res
in nostris castris gererentur conspicatus, decirnam legionera subsidio
nostrls misit. 4. Rogavit cur eos ab officio discessuros judica-
remus. 5. Quibus 3 in locis sit Caesar ex captlvis quaerunt. **.
Ostendit quae 4 in concilio Gallorum de eo siiit dicta. 7. Intelle-
gebat quanto 3 cum periculo legionem ex hiberms educturus esset.
8. Ejus rei quae causa esset miratus erat. 9. Caesar intellegebat
qua 3 -de causa ea dicerent. 10. Ibi ex captlvis cognoscit quae 4 in
hostium castris gerantur. 11. Flmneii est incredibili lenitate,
ita ut oculis, in utram partem fluat, judicari non possit. 12.
Insidias verebatur quod qua 3 de causa discederent hostes nondum
perspexerat.
II. 1. He asked him why they were coming to him. 2. They
asked in what 3 direction they were being led. 3. He could dis-
cover neither what (literally, how great) was the size of the island,
nor what nations inhabited (it). 4. They know what 4 he does,
with whom he converses. 5. They ask the merchants from what 3
districts they come, and what things they have learned there. 6.
Although Caesar understood for what 3 reason they had said this,
he yet ordered him to come to him with two hundred hostages.
1. The verbs upon which these subjunctive clauses depend are verbs of asking,
learning, knowing:, telling, perceiving and deciding.
2. See footnote 2, page 88. 3. See footnote 3, page 75. 4. See footnote 4, page 75.
94 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
7. We had learned how great a number they had promised for (use
ad) that war. 8. They compel the traders to declare what 1 they
have heard or learned about these things. 0. He shows what 1 is
being done in Gaul. 10. He could not discover what 1 was being
done in our camp. 11. When Csesar learned where (literally, in
irhttt- place) the enemy's forces had encamped, he left ten cohorts
as guard for the ships. 12. They are unable to find out what
(literally, of what kind) is the nature of the mountain.
LESSON LXIII.
Haec facere vult, he wishes to do this.
Haec facere nolebat, he did not wish to do this, or he was un-
willing to do this.
Haec facere malunt, they prefer to do this, or they Jiad ratlier
do this.
Observation. Translation of volo, nolo and maid, with the
present infinitive. For the conjugation of these verbs, see Part
III., section 43. 3
EXERCISE LXIII.
I. 1. Quas 2 in partes vultis proficisci ? 2. Quae 1 vellet ostendit.
3. Servire quam pugnare malunt ? 4. Quod fortunam temptare
nolebat, postero die in provinciam revert! constituit. 5. Mons,
quern Labienum occupare voluistis, ab hostibus tenetur. G.
Respondit se velle de re publica cum eo agere. 7. Eos interficiet
quod haec facere nolunt. 8. Rogavit quid vellent. 9. Cum
post tergum hostem relinquere nollet, obsides sescentos poposcit.
10. Praesidium quam amlcissimum habere volebat. 11. Respon-
derunt se aquilam hostibus prodere noluisse. 12. Pacem nobiscum
facere vult. 13. Certior factus est eos obsides dare nolle.
II. 1. He wishes war to be carried on. 2. He did this be-
1. See footnote 4, page 75. 2. See footnote 3, page 75.
erbs are pi
in the imperfect subjunctive.
3. Apart from the peculiar principal parts, these verbs are precise!}' like those of
the third conjugation, except in the present tense and in th
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 95
cause he did not wish that place to be unoccupied. 3. They
answered that they had been unwilling to come to him. 4. He
asked why we were more willing to submit than to fight. 5. The
Helvetians, whom we were unwilling to leave, had turned aside
their line of march from the Arar. 6. He said that he wished to
treat with him about these things. 7. You wish to settle in their
territories. 8. As he wished the business to be finished, he set
out at once. 9. They are so alarmed by his arrival, that they
are unwilling to join battle. 10. We had rather be slain, than
betray the eagle to the enemy. 11. He asked why they were
unwilling to hold the place. 12. They said that they were un-
willing to return. 13. When he had set out for Britain, because
he wished to become acquainted with those regions, a sudden war
arose in Gaul.
LESSON LXIV.
Hostes legatum, qul missus the enemy have detained the am-
erat, retinuerunt, bassador tvho had been sent.
Renuntiant liostes legatum, they bring back word that the
qul missus esset, retinu- , enemy have detained the am-
isse, bassador who had been sent.
Liegatum quern retinent inter- they will put to death the ambas-
ficient, sador whom they are detain-
ing.
Cognoscit legatum quern reti- he learns that they ivill put to
neant cos interfecturos death the ambassador whom
esse, they are detaining.
Existimabat legatum quern re- he thought that they would put to
tinerent eos interfeeturos death the ambassador whom
esse, they were detaining.
Galll commotl snnt quod Ger- the Gauls were alarmed because
maul copias coegerant, the Germans had collected
forces.
Certior factus est Gallos com- he was informed that the Gauls
motos esse quod GermanI were alarmed because the Ger-
copias coegissent, mans had collected forces.
90 PlllMAEY LATIN BOOK.
Observation. The difference between English and Latin usage
in relative or other subordinate sentences when put in indirect
narration. 1
EXERCISE LXIV.
I. 1. Certior factus est legates ab omnibus nationibus, quae
trans Rhenum incolerent, ad se venire. 2. Respondet cum sola
decima legione, de qua non dubitet, se proelium commissurum.
3. Nuntiaverunt omnes naves afflictas esse quod nautae vim tem-
pestatis pati non potuissent. 4. Responderunt impulses a suis
prlncipibus, qui dicerent Aeduos ab Caesare in servitfitem redactos
esse, se ab Aeduls defecisse. 5. Renuntiaverunt Gallos proelium
eo die non commissures, quod ampliores copias, quae nondum con-
venissent, exspectarent. 6. Certiorem Caesarem faciunt Venetos
naves habere plurimas, quibus in Britanniam navigare soleant. 7;
Animadvertit Caesar Sequanos nihil earum rerum facere quas
ceteri facerent. 8. Respondit miseriorem et graviorem esse fortii-
nam Sequanorum quam 2 reliquorum quod soli queri non auderent.
9. Ex captivis cognovit omnes Gallos ad oppidum quod circiter
millia passuum qumque abesset confugisse. 10. Per exploratores
comperit Ariovistum omnes copias quas coegisset trans Rhenum
traduxisse.
II. 1. These informed Caesar that the Germans who dwell
across the Rhine are in arms. 2. They think that they will
recover the hostages which they have given to Crassus. 3. He
perceived that our men were being thrown into great confusion,
because they were unable to keep their ranks. 4. On the same
day Caesar was informed by scouts that the enemy had encamped
at the foot of a mountain, which was eight miles from his camp.
5. They promised to do what 3 he had commanded. 6. He was
informed that all the Belgians were conspiring, because they did
not wish a Roman army to winter in Gaul. 7. He thought ^ that
they would not do what 3 they were promising. 8. He had learned
that the Germans were awaiting the cavalry which had been sent
1. For the rendering of the various tenses of the subjunctive, see footnote 2,
page 88. Notice that this subordinate clause in the subjunctive regularly depends on
mother clause whose verb is in the infinitive after a verb of saying, thinking, etc.
2. In translating this sentence supply the word that.
3. See footnote 4, page 75. 4. See footnote 3, page 82.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 97
across the Rhine. 9. They answered that the leading men who
had said this had fled to Britain, because they understood in what
(literally, how great) danger they were. 10. Cgesar thought terms
should not be received from those who, after seeking peace, had
voluntarily made war.
LESSON LXV.
Turn to the conjugation of the verb fero, Part III., section 44.
Observation. The irregularities in the inflection of fero and
its compounds. 1
EXERCISE LXV.
I. 1. Nocte clam ex castris exercitum ducit et ad Caesarem
auxilium fert. 2. Quae audlverunt ad legates deferunt. 3. Tanta
erat militum virtus ut ne unum quidem nostrorum impetum hostes
f errent. 4. Responderunt impulses a prmcipibus populo Romano
se bellum intulisse. 5. Frumentum ex agris in castra conferebat.
6. Servitutem perferre malunt. 7. Defertur ea res ad Caesarem.
8. In silvas ac paludes se suaque omnia contulerunt. 9. Imperium
populi Roman! non perferemus. 10. Tandem vulneribus defessi
pedem referre coeperunt. 11. Respondit non sese Gallis, sed
Gallos sibi bellum intulisse. 12. Tanta tempestas subito coorta
est ut naves ad Galliam referrentur. 13. Commisso proelio, nos-
trorum impetum hostes ferre non potuerant. 14. Multum ab
reliquis diifertis. 15. Impedltis hostibus propter ea quae ferebant
onera, nostrl subito eruptionem fecerunt.
II. 1. He was informed that all who could bear arms were
assembling to one place. 2. The Aedui said that the corn was
being collected. 3. Alarmed by these things the barbarians
retreated. 4. They understand how great a disaster they have
. brought on the state. 5. He promised not to make war 2 on them
1. Apart from the peculiar principal parts, fero is irregular in the present indica-
tive, -present infinitive, imperfect subjunctive and the imperative, but in all the other
forms is precisely like verbs of the third conjugation. Study carefully also the
variations in form of the principal parts of compounds of fero.
2. See footnote 2, page 83, and footnote 3, page 61.
7
98 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
or their allies. 6. On this answer being brought back to Caesar,
he a second time sends ambassadors to him. 7. The report is
carried with incredible speed to Labienus. 8. They found out
what he had said and reported (it) to Caesar. 9. The ambassadors
denied that the Germans were making war on the allies of the
Roman people. 10. All these differ from one another l in language
and laws. 11. He explains how (literally, in what) these nations
differ from one another. 1 12. Galba is slain and his head brought
back to the camp. 13. He attacked them when the Helvetians
could not bring aid to their friends. 2 14. Such was the strength
of the ships that they easily withstood the storm. 15. He
ordered the baggage to be collected to (literally, into) one place,
and that (place) to be fortified.
LESSON LXVI.
(a) Profectus est ut oppidum he set out that (or in order that)
oppugnaret, he might attack the town, or
he set out to attack the town.
Portas claudl jutoet, ne in- he orders the gates to be closed,
juria accipiatur, that (or in order that) injury
may not be received, or lest
injury be received.
Observation. The mood used to express purpose. The differ-
ence between ut and ne. The various translations. The tenses
used in sentences of purpose. 3 The position of the clause of
purpose.
(b) Legates mlserunt qul pa- they sent ambassadors to seek
cem peterent, peace (literally, who were to
seek peace, or who should
seek peace).
1. From one another, literally, among themselves.
2. See footnote 2, page 64.
3. The present subjunctive is used where English would use may, i.e., after the
primary tenses (see footnote 1, page 82), the imperfect where English would use
might, i.e., after the secondary tenses. Notice also that in clauses of purpose the
subjunctive is not to be translated, as is generally the case, by the English indicative
(see footnote 2, page 88).
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS, 99
Observation. The use and translation of the subjunctive de-
noting purpose with the relative pronoun. 1
(c) Mllites cohortatus est ne he urged the soldiers not to be
perturbarentur, dismayed.
Petere coepit ut in Gallia he began to ask to be left in Gaul.
relinqueretur,
Observation. The use and translation of the subjunctive with
ut or ne after verbs of requesting, urging, etc.*
KXERCISE LXVI.
I. 1. Vadis repertis, copias transducere conati sunt ut oppidum
expugnarent et agros popularentur. 2. Cohortes longiore itinere
circumductae sunt ne ex hostium castris conspicl possent. 3.
Ciceronem hortatur ut pristinam virtutem retineat. 4. Tantae
tempestates consecutae sunt ut nostri opus perficere non possent.
5. Legati ad eum missl sunt qui obsides se daturos pollicerentur.
6. Suos 3 intra castra continet ne ea res ad hostes perferri possit.
7. Caesar omnium ex conspectu removit equos ut spem fugae
tolleret. 8. Legati ad Caesarem venerunt qui pacem peteren^.
9. Equites monet ut quam latissime pervagentur. 10. Ita per-
territi sunt ut legatl statim ad Caesarem mitterentur. 11. Phalan-
gem faciemus ut celeriter perrumpere possimus. 12. Nuntios
praemittit qui Boios de suo adventu doceant, hortenturque ut
hostium impetum sustineant. 13. Caesar cum duabus legionibus
et magno numero equitatus in Britanniam proficiscitur, ne ex his
nationibus auxilia in Galliam mittantur.
II. 1. He left two legions in the camp that the enemy might
not be able to surround our men. 2 The cavalry fought most
bravely to wipe out the disgrace of the flight. 3. The Helvetians
had left their homes to make war on the whole of Gaul. 4. He
urges the Nervii not to lose the opportunity. 5. Ambassadors
were sent to ask aid. 6. They decided to return home that they
1. This in Caesar is chiefly used after verbs of sending.
2. The infinitive should not be used in Latin after verbs meaning to urge, ask,
command (except jubeo), advise or persuade, or generally to express purpose.
3. See footnote 2, page 64.
100 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
might carry on the war in their own territories. 7. He urged him
to remain in his allegiance. 8. They ask Caesar (literally, from
Ccesar) to come to them. 9. Such a storm arose that the work
could not be finished. 10. He led the rest of the forces across
that he might pursue the Helvetians. 11. He determined to lead
the army across in order to punish the Germans. 12. That he
may not be compelled to spend the summer in Gaul, he orders 1
him to come to him with two hundred hostages.
LESSON LXVII.
Turn to the conjugation of the verbs eo and flo, Part III.,
sections 45 and 46.
Observation. The irregularities in ftie inflections of eo and flo
and their compounds. 2
EXERCISE LXVII.
I. 1. Transeunt Rhenum navibus ratibusque. 2. Exploratores
jilssit quid fieret cognoscere. 3. Eas nationes adire volebat. 4.
Ignes fieri jubet ut significatio adventus Caesaris fiat. 5. Quid
fieri velit docet. 6. Ad earn partem pervenit quae noiidum flumen
transierat. 7. IpsI translre flumen non dubitaverant. 8. Pontem
fieri jussit ut minore cum periculo flumen transiret. 9. His
rebus flebat 3 ut minus facile fmitimls bellum inferre possent.
10. Eodem itinere, quo hostes ierant, ad eos contendit. 11. Iter
per Alpes patefieri volebat. 12. Captivos interficl jussit. 13.
Rhodanus vadis transitur. 14. Hoc idem reliquis fit 3 diebus. 15.
Locum duplici fossa munivit ne impetus ab hostibus fieri posset.
16. Rogavit num hostes paludem transirent. 17. Milites cohorta-
tus ut f ortiter pugnarent, quid fieri velit ostendit. 18. Cum
sola decima legione ibo.
1. This sentence may be translated in two ways, using impero or jubeo for order;
see footnote 2, page 99.
2. Notice that eo, while very irregular, resembles verbs of the fourth conjugation,
while jfio is exactly like a verb of the fourth conjugation, except in the present
inpnitive and imperfect subjunctive. Notice also that while Jio serves as the passive
of facio, its forms are active.
3. In the third person singular fio often means it comes about, happens, generally
with an id clause of result following.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 101
II. 1. He orders a sally to be made. 2. That river the
Helvetians were crossing. 3. He declares that he will go with the
tenth legion alone. 4. He did not wish that country to be
unoccupied, lest the Germans should cross into the Helvetians'
territories. 5. They will not allow the Helvetians to go through
their territories. 6. In order that an attack might be made on
the enemy from all sides at one time, he sent Labienus in advance
with two legions and all the cavalry. 7- He ordered those
through whose territories they had gone to bring the Helvetians
back. 8. He declares that he knows what is being done. 9. The
river can be crossed by a ford. 10. He showed what he wished
done (literally', to be done). 11. He was informed that those who
had crossed the river had not been able to bring aid to their
friends. 12. The Helvetians are informed about his arrival.
13. That was being done at that time. 14. While crossing the
river they are surrounded by our cavalry. 15. He thought that
this could be done. 16. About fifteen thousand Germans have
crossed the Rhine. 17. The enemy will not cross the river.
18. He is informed that the Germans who are crossing into Gaul
have been invited by the Sequani.
LESSON LXVIII.
Oppugnandl causa 1 conveni- tJiey come together for the purpose
unt, of attacking, or to attack.
Dlmioandl facultatem habent, they have an opportunity of fight-
ing.
Paratus ad proflciscendum, ready for setting out, or ready to
set out.
Naves inutiles erant ad navi- the ships were useless for sailing.
gauduni,
Observation. Formation and translation of the gerund (see
Part III., section 35). Voice of gerund. How may the gerund
1. Causa, for the purpose (or sake), always follows the genitive which depends
on it.
102 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
be used to express purpose? How does the gerund differ from
the gerundive in its forms ?
EXERCISE LXVIII.
I. 1. Reliquas naves paratas ad navigandum invenit. 2. Omni
spe impetrandi adempta, prmcipes Galliae sollicitare coepit. 3.
Cognoverat equitatum praedandi 9 causa trans Rhenum missum
esse. 4. Caesar loquendi 2 fmem facit. 5. Ulciscendi 2 Romanes
occasionem dimittere nolebant. 6. Hunc ad egrecliendum 2 nequa-
quam idoneum locum arbitratur. 7. Cum fmem oppugnandi
nox fecisset, legatl de pace ad eum venerunt. 8. Ea, quae ad
oppugnandum usui erant, comparare coepit. 9. Equites frumen-
tandi 2 causa praemittendi erant. 10. Nostrl, depositis armls, in
muniendo occupati sunt.
II. 1. They saw that our men were advancing into unfavorable
ground in order to fight. 2. This was the reason for (literally, of)
crossing the Rhine. 3. He had got suitable weather for sailing.
4. Time for (literally, of) hurling their javelins at the enemy is not
given. 5. When they saw that our men had crossed the river,
they left the camp in order to pillage. 6. They had made our men
more eager for fighting. 7. Suddenly making a sally, they leave
the enemy no opportunity of learning what was being done. 8.
They had collected large forces for an attack (literally, for attack-
ing). 9. They made an end of pursuing. 10. They made i
attack so suddenly, that time for (literally, of) taking up arms
was not given.
LESSON LXIX.
Praesidium pontls tucncll can- he stations a garrison for the pur-
sa ponit, pose of protecting the liridy,
or to protect the bridge (liter-
ally, for the sake of the
bridge to be defended).
1. Caesar uses ad and the gerund to express with regard to rather than for the
purpose of.
2. For the gerund of deponent verbs, see Part III., section 68, c.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 103
Difficultas faclendl pontls, the difficulty of building a bridge
(literally, of, or as regards, 1
the bridge which is to be
built).
Legates mlserunt ad pacem they sent ambassadors to seek peace
petendum, (literally, for the peace which
was to be sought).
In petenda pace liaec dl- in asking peace, tJiey spoke tlms.
xerunt.
Observation. The use of the" gerundive instead of the gerund
with an object. 2 How may purpose be expressed by the gerundive
construction? How is this gerundive construction to be distin-
guished from the use of the gerundive given in Lesson XL. ?
EXERCISE LXIX.
I. 1. His rebus coacti, legates ad enm pacis petendae causa
mittunt. 2. Naves latiores facit ad multitudinem jumentorum
transportandam. 3. In agris vastandis occupati sunt. 4. Caesar
navium parandarum causa moratur. 5. Galli in consilils capiendis
mobiles sunt. 6. Spe expugnandi oppidi adductus, majores copias
cogere coepit. 7. Reditionis spe sublata, 3 paratiores ad omnia
subeunda erunt. 8. Haec faciunt reciperandorum suorum causa.
9. Ibi discit Litaviccum ad sollicitandos Aeduos profectum esse.
10. Neminem belli Inferendi causa in Britanniam transiturum
confidebant.
II. 1. Tliey are assembling from all sides to defend the Remi.
2. Influenced by all these things, he set out for the province to ask
aid. 3. Orgetorix is chosen to carry out these arrangements. 4.
He gave the signal for (literally, of) joining battle. 5. Ciesar had
set out to harass the enemy. 6. They promised a sufficiently large
number of ships to transport two legions. 7. They hasten to
Caesar for the purpose of lending aid. 8. He sends a lieutenant in
1. The genitive is often to be rendered by as regards (or an equivalent expression),
rather than by of.
2. See more fully Part III., section 104, ft. This gerundive construction is regularly
preferred to the use of the gerund with an object in the accusative.
3. Sublata is from tollo.
104 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
advance to ascertain these (things). 9. He answered that the
seventh legion had been sent to seek supplies. 10. Caesar runs
down to encourage the soldiers.
LESSON LXX.
Ponteiii resclndl jussit ne quis he oi'dered the bridge to be cut
* flu men translret, down, lest any one should
cross the river, or that no one
might cross the river.
Aliquos ex navl egredientes they saw some leaving the ship.
conspexerunt,
Quisque in conspectu Caesaris each was fighting in Casar's sight.
pugnabat,
Comprehendunt utrumque, they seize each (or both).
Neque turpius quicquam babe- nor is anything considered more
tur, disgraceful.
Quid am centurio ad eum ac- a certain centurion runs up to
currit, him.
Observation. Use and translation of quis, aliquis, quisque,
uterque, quisquam, quldam. For the declension of these pro-
nouns, see Part III., section 26. Which of the two words for any
is used after ne ? Which of the two words for each implies each
of two ?
EXERCISE LXX.
I. 1. Principes cujusque civitatis ad se vocat. 2. Proximo die
Caesar ex castris utrisque copias dtixit. 3. Aliquem de niotu
Gallorum nuntiura se accepturos existimabant. 4. Idoneum quen-
dam hominem delegit ex iis quos secum habebat. 5. Cum Ro-
mams se bellum gestures dixerunt, neque cujusquam 1 imperio
obtemperaturos. 6. Milites ex oppido exire jussit ne quam 1 in-
juriam acciperent. 7. Ab Ariovisto postulavit ne quos Rhenum
1. Neque quisquam, literally, and not (or nor) any one, may often be well
rendered by and no one. Similarly, ne quis may often be rendered by that no one, or
(in agreement with a noun) that no.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 105
transire pateretur. 8. Uterque se legibus creatum esse dicit. 9.
Quantam quisque multitudinem ad 1 id bellum pollicitus esset cog-
noverant. 10. Eruptionem subito fieri jussit ne quis 2 arma
capere posset.
n. 1. Certain of (literally, out of) these came to him by night.
2. He orders each to return. 3. They have lands and villages on
(use ad) each bank of the river. 4. He ordered all the horses to
be removed, lest any hope remain (literally, be left) in flight. 5.
The rest resist most vigorously, nor does any one turn his back.
6. Some opportunity will be given of crossing the river. 7. They
inquire what each of them has learned about each matter. 8. He
hopes that there will be some opportunity of fighting. 9. He
requests him not to bring any large number- of Germans into Gaul.
10. After selecting certain cohorts, he ordered both legions to
follow him.
1. Translate ad by for. 2. See footnote 1, page 104.
106 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES,
i.
(Tliis exercise may be introduced after Lesson XXIII.)
Ad initium silvarum Caesar pervenit, et castra munire Instituit.
Roman! in opere dispersi suht. Subito ex omnibus partibus
silvae hostes evolaverunt et in milites impetum fecerunt. Roman!
celeriter arma ceperunt hostesque in silvas repulerunt et multos
interfecerunt. Omnes hostium agrl a Romams vastati sunt,
vlclque incensl. Caesar exercitum reduxit et in flnitimls civita-
tibus in hlberms collocavit.
(Adapted from C&sar, B. G., IIL, 28, 20.}
II.
(This exercise may be introduced after Lesson XXXII.)
Britanniae interior pars ab iis 1 incolitur, qui 2 nati 3 sunt in
insula, maritima pars ab iis, qui praedae causa ex Belgio trans-
ierunt 4 et ibi permanserunt atque agros colere coeperunt. Homi-
num est mflmta multitudo, creberrimaque 5 aedificia. Loca 6 sunt
temperatiora quam 7 in Gallia. Insula natura 8 est triquetra, cujus 9
unum latus est contra Galliam. Ex his 10 omnibus longe sunt
humanissimi qui 11 Cantium incolunt. Interiores friimenta non
serunt, sed lacte 12 et carne vivunt, pellibusque sunt vestltl. 13
Omnes se 14 Britanm vitro Inficiunt, quod 15 caeruleum efficit colo-
rem, atque hoc 16 horridiores sunt in pugna. Una 17 ex parte est
Hibernia, minor quam 7 Britannia, et complures minores subjectae
sunt insulae. Breviores sunt quam 7 in continent! noctes.
(Adapted from Cctsar, B. G., V., 12-14.)
1. = Those. 2. = TT^o. 3. Xuti sunt = have been born. 4. From transeo. 5.
Snpiih there are. 6. = The climate, literally, the regions. 7. =Than. 8. =In
shajji: 9. = Of which. 10. = These. 11. = Those U'ho. 12. Translate ablative by
on, literally, by means of. 13. = Clothed. 14. = Themselves. 15. =Which. 16.
= Thus. 17. Una ex parte = on one side.
PAIIT L INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 107
IIL
(This exercise may be introduced after Lesson XXXIX.)
Galli, qui magnas copias peditatus equitatusque coegerant et
Labienum cum una legione, quae in finibus Aeduorum hiemaverat,
adoriri 1 parabant, jam ab eo 2 millia passuum qumdecim aberant
cum 3 adventum duarum legionum, quae a Caesare missae erant,
cognoscunt. Castra ponunt et auxilia Germanorum exspectare
constituunt. Labienus, qui hostium cognoverat consilium, prae-
sidium sex cohortium impediment^ 4 relinquit atque cum vigintl
quattuor cohortibus et duobus millibus equitum contra hostes
procedit, et circiter mille passus a loco in quo Galli consederant,
castris 4 idoneum locum deligit. Sedecim cohortes in arims esse 5
jussit, octo reliquae castra communiunt.
(Adapted from C&sar, B. G., VI., 7, and I., 49.)
IV.
(This exercise may be introduced after Lesson XLVI.)
Hora circiter die! quarta cum primis navibus Britanniam attigit,
atque ibi in omnibus collibus expositas hostium copias armatas
conspexit. Erat 6 ob has 7 causas summa difficultas, quod naves
propter magnitudinem nisi 8 in alto constitui non pot erant,
mllitibus autem, 9 magno et gravi onere armorum oppressis, ordines
in fluctibus servandi eraiit ; hostes verd 10 ab latere aperto tela
conjiciebant. Nostri, simul atque in arido constiterunt, in hostes
impetum fecerunt, atque eos in fugam dederunt. 11 Hostes
proelio 12 superati, simul atque se ex fuga receperunt, statim ad
Caesarem legates de pace miserunt.
(Adapted from Ccesar, B. ., IF., 23-27.)
1. = To attack. 2. = Him. 3. = When. 4. Translate the dative by for. 5. In
armis esse = to remain un<k>r anus. C. = There was. 7. = These (or thefottmoing),
S. Mi*! .... constitui, /ton pot erant = could be stationed only. 9. = While. 10.
= Moreover. 11. = Put, and translate in by to. 12. = In battle.
108 PBIMABY LATIN BOOK.
V.
(TJiis exercise may be introduced after Lesson LIII.)
His rebus gestis, Labieno in continent! cum tribus legionibus
et equitum millibus duobus relicto, ipse cum qumque legionibus
et eodem numero equitum, quern in continent! reliquerat, solis
occasu naves solvit. Omnes naves ad Britanniam accesserunt
circiter meridiem, neque in eo loco hostis est visus, sed ut 1 postea
Caesar ex captivis cognovit, magnae copiae, quae convenerant,
multitudine navium perterritae a litore discesserant ac se in 2
superiora loca abdiderant. Caesar, exposito exercitii et loco cas-
tris 3 idoneo capto, cohortibus decem ad 4 mare relictls et equitibus
trecentis, tertia vigilia ad hostes contendit. Millia passuum cir-
citer duodecim progressus, hostium copias conspicatus est.
(Adapted from Casar, B. G., F., 8, 9.)
VI.
(This exercise may be introduced after Lesson LVII.)
Caesar Avarici 5 complures dies commoratus, summamque ibi
copiam frumenti et reliqui commeatus nanctus, exercitum ex 6
labore atque inopia reficit. Jam prope hieme confecta, legatl ad
eum Aeduorum veniunt, qul haec locuti sunt: duo magistratum
gerere, et utrumque 7 edrum se legibus creatum esse dicere;
horum esse alterum Convictolitavem, florentem et illustrem adu-
lescentum, alterum Cotum, antiquissima familia natum, 8 atque
ipsum hominem summae potentiae et magnae cognationis ; civita-
tem esse omnem in armls ; divisum 9 senatmn, divisum populum.
Caesar, etsi a bello discedere detrimentosum esse existimabat,
tamen ipse in Aeduos proficiscl statuit, senatumque omnem ad
se evocavit.
(Adapted from Ccesar, B. G., VII., 32, 33.)
1. =As. 2. =In. 3. Translate dative by for. 4. =By or at. 5. = At Arrtri-
citin. 6. = After or (literallj-) from. 7. = Each (que is part of the word, and does
not mean and). 8. Natus with the ablative = born of, descended from. 9. i.e.,
divisum esse.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 109
VII.
(This exercise may be introduced after Lesson LXII.)
Caesar cum in Britanniam proficisci constituisset, magno sibi
fore usui arbitrabatur si 1 reperire posset quanta esset insulae
magnitude, et quae aut quantae nationes incolerent, et quern tisum
belli haberent. Itaque vocatis ad se undique mercatoribus, cum
haec omnia fere eis essent incognita, Volusenum praemittit et
jubet eum, exploratis omnibus rebus, ad se quam primum 2 reverti.
Navibus interim circiter octoginta coactis, ipse tertia fere vigilia
leni vento 3 solvit. Cum naves approplnquarent Britanniae tanta
tempestas subito coorta est, ut nulla earum cursum tenere posset,
sed permultae ad inferiorem partem insulae dejicerentur. Eadem
nocte accidit ut esset luna plena, ut 4 nonntillae naves, ancoris
jactis, aestu complerentur.
(Adapted from Ccesar, B. (?., IF., 20-29.)
VIII.
(This exercise may be introduced after Lesson LXIX.)
Caesar, his rebus administratis, ad cohortandos milites decu-
currit et ad legionem decimam devenit. Milites cohortatus ut
suae 5 pristinae virtutis memoriam retinerent, hostiumque impetum
fortiter sustiiierent, proelii committendi 6 signum dedit, atque in
alteram partem 7 item cohortandi causa profectus est. Temporis
tanta fuit exiguitas, hostiumque tarn paratus ad dimicandum ani-
mus, ut etiam ad galeas induendas tempus defuerit. 8 Quae 9 prima
quisque 10 signa conspexit, ad 11 haec coustitit, 12 ne in quaerendis
suis, 13 pugnandi 6 tempus dimitteret.
(Adapted from Ccesar, B. ., II., 21.)
1. If. 2 = As soon as possible. 3. Translate the ablative by with. 4. = So
that. 5. = Their. Q. Translate the genitive tey for. 7. = Side. 8. From dcsum;
translate by the English past tense 9. = Whatever ; with siijna. 10. = Each.
11. = By. 12. From consisto. 13. = Bis comrades.
110 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
REVIEW EXERCISES ON THE
ACCIDENCE. 1
I. Decline the following combinations of a noun with an adjective in
agreement :
Duplex fossa, commune consilium, reliqua cohors, alia res, regio
fmitima, omnis pars, longius iter, incredibilis virtus (s.), 2 major
pars, manus dextra, tota acies (s.), omnis annus, Belgae soli (p.),^
injuria vetus, tilla navis, pugna superior, navis longa, exercitus
noster, vir fortis, res familiaris, idoneus locus, omnis copia, utra
pars, ager ferax, locus superior, reliqui Belgae {p.), acies triplex
(s.), vetus navis, tota provincia, omne genus, proelium equestre,
continent impetus, primus ordo, complures anm (p.), caput solum,
homo iiobilis, omnia arma (p.}, nullus ager, omnis equitatus (s.),
unum proelium, castra majora (p.), nullus communis magistratus,
priniuni agmen, altera pars, equitatus noster (s.), omnis ordo, silva
continens, proxima nox, par bellum, tota civitas, castra navalia
(p.\ latus apertum, omne tempus, altius vallum, res opportuna,
commune periculum, silva densior, alia pars, humilior navis,
eques Romanus, reliqua legio, unum latus, niillus hostis, legio-
narius miles, signum militare, communis salus (s.), locus declivis,
commune periculum, major copia, aliud tempus, pedestre iter,
ingens magnitudo (s.), continui complures dies (p.), magnum iter,
omnis spes (s.\ ullus dies, copiae pedestres (p.), superior dies,
miles integer ac recens, summa spes (s.).
II. Give the other degrees of comparison of the following adjectives,
in the same case, gender and number as thz form given :
Facillimo, acrem, altissimae, breviorum, majoribus, optimarum,
1. These exercises are intended to be suggestive merely, for \\hich reason the
examples given to illustrate many of the most valuable kinds of drill are few in
number, the teacher being left to add, as he easily can, further examples of the
same nature.
2. The letters (s) and (p) mean that the combined phrase is to be declined in the
singular or plural only, as the case may be.
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. Ill
fortis, crebris, veteris, multos, dltissimi, humiliorl, prima, diffieilia,
deiisissima, superiore, gravium, proxiinuni, celerriuias, inagiiao,
ferocissimam, potentcs, pleno, antiquam, parvum.
III. Change the following adjectives to agree with, the nouns in
parentlieses :
Omnis (rerum), complures (annorum), paucus (diebus), magnus
(copias), plus (loca), ingens (magnitudine), omnis (nobilitatis),
omnis (annos), novus (rerum), magnus (auctoritatis), plurinms
vetusque (naves), noster (marl), reliquus (ordines), maximus (mul-
titudim), fmitimus (partem), inlquior (locum), dexter (cornu),
alter (castra), summus (duce), omnis (hiberms), singularis (studio).
IV. Give the Latin numerals for the following numbers, in agree-
ment with the nouns in parentheses :
3 (horas), 200 (obsidibus), 2 (legionibus), 3rd (die), 3 (dierum),
20 (vicos), 1000 (equites), 1000 (equitibus), 1500 (Belgas), 1 (proe-
lio), 1 (cohortis), 10th (legionem), 10 (legionum), 1st (acie), 12
(annos), 1st (impetil), 4th (nocte), 3 (millia), 2 (millibus), 13th
(legio), 4th (diem), 1892nd (anno).
V. Decline the following combinations of a pronoun and noun in
agreement :
Nostra castra, utrumque latus, ilia pars, hoc proelium, utraque
castra, quldam miles, hie locus, is collis, hoc ipsum flumen, quod-
que tempus (s.), idem illud consilium, qui dies, qua legio, meus
filius, haec civitas, eadem res.
VI. Write those forms of hie, is, suus, ille, qui, idem, which will
agree with tJie following words :
Legione, consilium, loca, locum, rem, militum, cohort!, diebus,
annos, die.
VII. Give the other degrees of comparison of the following adverbs :
Audacius, saepissime, multum, minus, maxime, fortiter, acrius,
melius, mature, facile, liberrime, diu, satis.
112 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
VIII. Circumvenio, surround; colloco, xtat'mn : do, fjire ; inter-
ficio, kill; jubeo, order; mitto, send; accipio, receive; re-
linquo, leave; venio, come; video, see.
Conor, attempt; experior, try; polliceor, promise ; proficiscor,
set out; progredior, advance.
1. Write out tlie principal parts of these verbs.
2. Under each of the principal parts (a) of mitto, (6) of conor,
virile out the names oftJie moods and tenses which are formed
from it.
3. Name and write out in full the tenses of the indicative whose
first person singidar means :
I shall send, I have given, I am coming, I had left, I shall
order, I receive, I was coming, I shall have seen, I station,
I saw.
I was ordered, I shall be sent, I have been left, I used to be
sent, I am ordered, I had been ordered.
I had promised, I shall attempt, I advance, I advanced, I
shall set out, I have tried.
4. Translate the following form s :
Circumvent! erant, interficit, accipietur, veneramus, dabunt,
mitteris, videris, collocantur, jussae estis, relinquar.
Pollicebantur, progredimur, conatus est, experieminl, pro-
ficiscitur.
5. Translate the following forms :
We shall leave, they will station, he had sent, they come,
they were killed, you shall have seen, we were giving, it
has been received, you are being surrounded, I shall order.
We shall attempt, he tried, she had promised, I was setting
out, they advance.
6. Translate the following :
Cum vidisset, ne interficeremur, cum collocarent, ut veniret,
ne accipiatur, quod reliquerit, quis interfectus esset, cum
jubeat, ne detur.
Cum proficisceretur, ne conantur, quod pollicitus sis, ut ex-
periamur, cum progress! essent.
7. Write out (a) the third singular imperfect .s >///'/ >j/-fz'jv pa s*i <,
the third plural present subjunctive active, and the first plural plu~
PART I. INTRODUCTORY LESSONS. 113
perfect subjunctive active and passive, of mitto, circumvenid, do,
video and interficio ; and (b) the third singular present and plu^r-
fect subjunctive and tlte third plural imperfect subjunctive of coiior,
experior, polliceor, proficiscor and progredior.
8. Write out and name all the infinitives, active and passive, of
relinquo, accipio, colloco, video, circumvenio.
9. Translate:
(Dlcit eos) mittere, reliquisse, interfectos esse, collocari, ven-
tures esse, prefectures esse, progredi, conatos esse.
(Dlxit eos) venire, dedisse, circumventos esse, mitti, accep-
turos es"se, conaturos esse, conari, pollicitos esse.
(Jussus est) venire, interne!, pronciscl.
10. Write out and name all the participles, active and passive, of
jubeo, interficio, colloco, mitto, circumvenio, conor, progredior,
experior, polliceor, proficiscor.
11. Write out the participles meaning while coming, after ad-
vancing, after being surrounded, while attempting, in agreement
with the following words: multibus, Caesarem, legione, legionis,
equitum, exercituL
12. Write out the genitive of the gerund of do, venio, progredior,
video and relinquo ; and all cases of the gerund of proficiscor.
13. Write out tJie following parts :
Third singular pluperfect subjunctive active of do, mitto.
Second plural present subjunctive active of venio, colloco.
Third plural imperfect indicative passive of interficio, re-
linquo.
First plural future indicative active of do, venio, video
Perfect infinitive active of video, venio, interficio.
Present infinitive passive of accipio, do, mitto.
Future participle active feminine plural accusative of video,
relinquo.
Gerundive ablative singular neuter of accipio, do, jubeo.
14. Name fully the following forms :
Videremur, accipietis, reliquit, interficiendos, conati sunt,
pronciscl, progress!, interfeci, jubentem, data essent, det,
videris.
114 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
15. Write the corresponding active or pa^irc. form (as the case
may be) of the follow uuj :
Intorfecit, relhiquam, rellquisset, datum cst, videtur, aecipi-
eris, accipere, datum esse.
16. Write the corresponding form in the indicative or subjunctive
(as fhe case may be) of the folloiviny :
Dabat, misisset, venerunt, circumveniatur, relict! essent_,
jusseram, jubeo, interficitur.
17. Translate: He promises to come, he was ordered to come,
he was asked to come, so terrified as to come, it is difficult to
come, he did this in order to come ; they said that he had come,
so important that he had come, he did this that he might come^;
they attack the soldiers who are coming, he learns who are com'ng,
they attack those who are coming, he learns that they are attack-
ing the soldiers who are coming.
IX. 1. Write out the jyrincipal parts of sum, possum, fero, eo,
volo, nolo, malo, fio.
2. Write out in full the present indicative and subjunctive of these
verbs.
3. Write out the following parts :
First singular imperfect and future indicative of sum, possum,
eo.
Third singular imperfect subjunctive of sum, possum, fero, eo,
volo, fio.
Present participle, nominative and genitive singular^ of pos-
sum, absum, eo.
Present imperative of fero, eo, nolo.
Genitive of gerund of fero, eo.
4. Write out the principal j)arts of the compounds of fero icith in,
ex, ab, ad, dis, sub, con, ob ; of eo with pro and re ; and
of sum with ab and pro.
PART II.
RULES OF SYNTAX AND EXERCISES IN
PROSE COMPOSITION.
EXERCISE I.
(a) ORDER OF WORDS. 1
1. The best way to become familiar with the order of
words in Latin is to give careful attention to the writings of
some good Latin prose author, such as Caesar. The following
general remarks, however, may be of some service to the
young student :
2. As a rule, the subject, followed by its attributes, comes
first in the sentence; the verb comes last, preceded by the
words that modify or depend upon it; as, All these differ from
one another in language, customs and laws: Hi omnes lingua,
institutls, legibus inter se differunt.
3. The usual order of words is often changed, for the sake of
emphasis or of euphony ; as, Among the Helvetii by far the noblest-
born and richest was Orgetorix : Apud Helvetios longe nobilis-
1. It may be stated generally that the order of words in Latin corresponds to the
order of the notions or the thoughts, and that the writer mentions in natural succes-
sion, as they would appear to him, the persons, objects, conditions, circumstances,
etc., connected with the actual event. Take, for example, the sentence, Rex illo anno
agrum ferro et igni vastavit : The king in that year -the land with fire and sword
laid waste. Here we have before our mind's eye the actor, the time, the object, the
instruments, and finally, as a finishing touch to the picture, we are told what was
done. How much more vivid, dramatic and natural is this than the impatient,
business-like order of the English sentence, The king laid waste the land in that it/'ar
with fire and sivord. An Englishman seems eager to know at once what the subject
did, and then the setting of time, place and other attendant circumstances may be
described if he has leisure to listen.
The order of words in a Latin sentence may be likened to the sequence of events
in a play or a novel, in which we have all the actors and the accessories of time and
place before us, when in the last act or chapter comes the catastrophe or denouement ;
116 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
sunns ct clitissimus fuit Orgetorix. Other route had they none :
Aliud iter habebant nullnm. They point out that there is but
one hope of safety : Unam esse spem salutis decent.
4. The link verb esse should not be placed at the end of the
clause, its usual position being before its predicate word ; as, Gaul
as a whole is divided into three parts: Gallia est omnis divlsa in
partes tres. Among them this punishment is very severe : JHaec
poena apud eos est gravissima. One side is opposite Gaul : Unum
latus est contra Galliam. The nature of the place was as follows:
Loci natiira erat haec.
5. In an inflected language such as the Latin, the order of the
words may be varied (for emphasis or euphony) to an almost
unlimited extent without any sacrifice of clearness ; whereas in
English, such a variation would pretty certainly lead to ambiguity,
if, indeed, the meaning of the sentence were not entirely changed.
Compare, for example :
(1) Consul interfecit regem,
(2) Regem interfecit consul,
(3) Consul regem interfecit,
(4) Regem consul interfecit,
with
(1) The consul slew the king,
(2) The king slew the consul,
(3) The consul the king slew,
(4) The king the consul slew.
6. Inquit, em'm, vero, autem, quidem and quoque never come first
in a sentence. Itaque usually has first place, and the word or
phrase emphasized by Tie .... quidem is enclosed by them ; as,
J, said he, have returned home: Domum, inquit, redii. You also
were there : Tii quoque aderas. Not even the wminded are spared :
Ne sauciis quidem parcitur.
while following the order of the words in the English is somewhat like reading- the
last chapter of a novel immediately after the first, and then going back to get some
idea of the framework of the story and a knowledge of the circumstances that led
up to the climax.
Each language, however, follows the order best adapted to its character and genius,
and the above statement of the arrangement of words that usually obtains in the
respective tongues, is not meant to be considered as an invariable rule, but only as a
general tendency, for in both languages the position of a word, phrase or clause
depends mainly on its relative importance in the thought, and, to some extent, may
be varied accordingly. The same principle of order holds in long sentences, producing
the periodic structure which prevails extensively in Latin, in which the subjects,
objects and adverbial adjuncts are frequently represented by subordinate clauses.
A good example of the Latin period is found in Caesar, Bell. Gall., Book II..
ch. XXV.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 117
7. The particles ve, ne (interrogative), que are enclitics, and are
always appended to some word. In like manner, the preposition
cum is written after and appended to ms, te, nobls, vobls, s2,
quo, qua and quibus. Examples : One or two were present: Unas
alter ve aderat. Will you write ? Scrlbesne ? The senate and the
people of Home have made this decree : Senatus populusque Roma-
nus hoc decrevit. I cannot save myself along with you: Me una
vobiscum servare non possum. He carries all his possessions with
him: Omnia sua seeum portat.
8. The more unusual the position for any word in a sentence the
more emphatic is it for that word. Accordingly the subject will
have most emphasis when placed at the end of the sentence, and
the verb when placed at the beginning ; as, It teas Csesar who
conquered the Gauls: Gallos vicit Caesar. Ccesar sailed to Greece:
Navigavit Caesar in Graeciam. It was avarice that instigated
them : Impellit cos avaritia.
N.B. The order of words is often (especially in narrative) de-
termined by what may be called the principle of proceeding from
the known to the unknown. For example, in Caesar we find that
generally the first words of a sentence form a connecting link
between what follows and what goes before, by beginning the new
sentence with something known to us from the preceding one ; as,
He makes haste to lead his army across the river Axona. Upon that
river there was a, bridge: Flumen Axonam exercitum traducere
maturavit. In co flu mine pons erat. 1
In accordance with this principle, the relative (pronoun or
adjective) is regularly the first word in the clause or sentence,
often even preceding prepositions and conjunctions, though neces-
sarily coming after them in the English translation ; as, When
Ccesar learned this, he set out: Quod ubi Caesar resciit, profectus
est. He ivas informed of these tnatters: Quibus de rebus certior
factus est.
(b) CONCORDS.
9. The following concords, or general forms of agreement,
should be noticed and borne in mind :
(a) A noun, or pronoun, in apposition with another substantive,
agrees with that substantive in case. If the appositive has a
different form for a different gender, it agrees also in gender ; as,
1. It will be observed that the principle of arrangement is the same in English, the
introductory words of the second sentence forming, as it were, a common ground on
which the minds of the hearer and the speaker meet, a sort of mental stepping-stone
leading out from the known present of the one sentence to the unknown future of
the other.
118 PillMAltY LAT1S BOOK.
He persuades Dumnorix, the Aeduan, the brother of Divitiacus:
Durnnorigl Aeduo fratri DivitiacI persuadet. Experience, the
best of masters, has taught us: Usus magister optimus nos erudivit.
Philosophy, the best of teachers, wdl instruct you: Philosophia
inagistra optima vos erudiet.
(6) A predicate noun, or pronoun, agrees with its subject in case,
and usually in gender, if capable of distinguishing gender ; as, He
had been called friend by the senate: Is a senatu amicus appellatus
erat. We are allowed to be freemen: Nobis esse llberls licet.
Philosophy is the guide of life: Philosophia magistra vltae est.
Athens was victorious: Athenae erant victrices.
(c) An adjective, whether attributive, appositive or predicative,
agrees with its substantive in gender, number and case. This rule
applies to possessive and demonstrative pronominal adjectives.
(1) An attributive adjective, qualifying two or more substantives
of different genders, agrees with the one nearest it, or is repeated
with each ; as, Many boys and women were on the wall : Puri
multl mulieresque erant in muro. Pueri mulieresque multae
erant in muro. Multl puerl, multae mulieres erant in muro.
(2) A predicate adjective, or participle, qualifying two or more
nouns representing persons, is masculine and plural, or it may be
made to agree with the noun nearest it; as, The boys and women
were seen on the wall: Pueri mulieresque in muro visl (or visae)
sunt. My brother and your sisters have set out: Meus f rater et
tuae sorores sunt prefect! (or profectae). Meus frater profectus
est et tuae sorores.
(3) A predicate adjective, or participle, qualifying two or more
nouns representing things, is put in the neuter plural, or it may
agree with the noun nearest it; as, The city and temple were taken:
Urbs teuiplumque capta sunt. The task of (constructing} the winter
camp and the fortifications had been completed: Opus hibernorum
mumtionesque erant perfectae.
(d) A pronoun (relative or other) agrees with its antecedent in
gender, number and person.
When the relative has several antecedents, it follows the rule
for the adjective. Occasionally we find 'the relative agreeing, not
with its antecedent, but with some word in the predicate, especially
after the verb esse; as, He pushed forward to seize Vesontio, which is
the largest town of the Sequani : Ad occupandum Vesontionem quod
est oppidum maximum Sequanorum contendit.
(e) A finite verb agrees with its subject (which is in the nomina-
tive case) in number and person.
If the verb has two or more subjects, it may be plural, agreeing
with all, or it may agree with the one nearest it, being understood
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 119
with the others; as, Ccesar and Labienus were in Gaul: In Gallia
erat Caesar et Labienus. Caesar et Labienus erant in Gallia.
The verb is also singular if the subjects form but one notion;
as, The order and arrangement of the column teas different: Ratio
ordoque agminis aliter se habebat. A loud din and shouting ( = a
noise of shouting) arose: Clamor fremitusque oriebatur.
N.B. It is to be observed that for the unemphatic introductory
word there, and also for it, when used as an impersonal or repre-
sentative subject, Latin has no equivalent words ; as, There is no
one without some hope : Nemo est sine aliqua spe. It is pleasant
to be praised: Laiidari est jucimdum. It is raining : Pluit.
10. In the case of two or more subjects of different persons, the
verb is plural, and the second person is preferred to the third, and
the first to both second and third ; as, You and I (ive) have
spoken : Ego et tu dlximus. lie and I ( = ive) have spoken: Ego
et ille dlximus. You and he ( = you) have spoken: Tu et ille
dixistis. You and he and I ( = we) have spoken: Ego et tu et
ille dlximus.
Observe the order of the pronouns in the Latin sentences.
11. By a sense construction (synesis, constructio ad sensum) a
plural verb, adjective, or pronoun, is often found with a singular
substantive, agreeing with the latter in meaning, but not in form ;
as, The multitude depart: Multitude abeuiit. Some of them, are
ready: Pars eorum paratl sunt. He sends forward the cavalry to
see in what direction the enemy are pursuing their march: Equita-
tum praemittit qui videant quas in partes hostes iter faciant.
(c) THE ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE THE COMPLEMENTARY
INFINITIVE.
12. One of the most characteristic idioms of the Latin
language is the infinitive with its so-called subject accusative,
after verbs of saying, thinking, believing, knowing, feeling,
declaring, and such like (verba sentiendl et decldrandT), where
in English we find a noun clause introduced by the conjunc-
tion that; as,
" He says that the Gauls are exceedingly brave: Dicit Gallos ess
fortissimos. Caesar perceived that Dumnorijc, icas meant: Caesar
Dumnorigem deslgnarl sentiebat.
The conjunction that is frequently omitted in English, as is the
case with the esse of the compound forms of the Latin infinitive ;
as, He says he ivill not come: Negat se venturum.
120 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
13. Verbs signifying to hope, to promise, to undertake, to
threaten, to swear (sperdre, polliceri, promittere, recipere, mi-
ndri, minitdrl, jurdre), usually take the future infinitive with
subject accusative expressed, while in English we use the
present infinitive without a subject ; as,
He promised to come: Pollicitus est se venturum (esse). They
swore to adopt no measures against the i3equ&ni: Juraverunt nihil
se contra Sequanos consilii inituros.
Spsrdre is also found with a present infinitive, but regularly so
only with posse ; as They hope to be able to become masters of the
ivliole of Gaul : Totius Galliae sese potm pos.se sperant. They do
not hope that our armies can be entrapped: Non sperant uostros
exercitus cap! posse.
14. When verba sentiendi et declarandi are found in the
passive, the personal construction is used in Latin, except in
the compound tenses ; as,
It is said that Cwsar was consul: Caesar fuisse consul dicitur,
not Caesarem fuisse consulem dicitur. It has been said that the
Gauls occupy one part: Unain partem Gallos ofetinere dictum
est.
15. When the subject of the infinitive is a pronoun of the
third person, standing for the same person as the subject of
the principal verb, se must be used ; but, if it denotes a
different person, use the proper form of is or ille; as,
He says that he ( = the person denoted by the subject of says)
will come: Dicit se venturum esse. He says that he ( = some other
person) will go: Dicit eum (or ilium) iturum esse.
16. Consider carefully the following rules for the use of the
different infinitives :
(a) When the time denoted by the two verbs is the same, use
the present infinitive ; as,
(1) He says that Ccesar is a brave soldier: Caesarem esse fortem
mllitem dicit.
(2) He said that Ccesar was a brave soldier: Caesarem esse fortem
mllitem dlxit.
(3) He will say that Ccesar is a brave soldier: Caesarem esse
fortem mllitem dicet.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 121
(6) If the time denoted by the infinitive is prior to that denoted
by the principal verb, use the perfect infinitive ; as,
(1) He says that Caesar was (or has been) consul : Caesarem f uisse
consulem elicit .
(2) He said that Caesar had been consul: Caesarem f uisse con-
sulem dixit.
(3) He will say that Ccesar has been consul: Caesarem f uisse
consulem dicet.
(c) If the time denoted by the infinitive is subsequent to that
denoted by the principal verb, the future infinitive is to be used;
as,
(1) He says the leader will come: Ducem venturum elicit.
(2) He said the leader woidd come: Ducem venturum dixit.
(3) He will say that the leader will come: Ducem venturum
dicet.
(d) Woukl have is expressed by the future participle and fuisse ;
as, He said he would have come : Dixit se venturum fuisse.
These rules may be briefly summed up thus : Let the pupil
imagine himself in the place of the original speaker and discover
the tense employed in what was actually said or thought, and use
the corresponding infinitive. For example, in the sentence, He
said the boy - was his brother, the words of the original speaker
would be, The boy is my brother; hence, in Latin, Dixit puerum
esse suum fratrem. So, in the sentence, He said Caesar would
come, his exact words would be, Cwsar ivill come; hence, -in Latin,
Caesarem venturum esse dixit.
17. It is not necessary that the verbal function should be per-
formed, in every case, by a single word. Any phrase or combina-
tion of words having the logical value of some particular verb,
may have the construction of that verb; as, There is a report
( = they say) that the enemy is at homd: Fama est hostem adesse.
He began to have great hopes that it would residt in his abandoning
his obstinate position: Magnam in spem veniebat ( = sperabat)
fore uti pertinacia desisteret. He bound the citizens by an oath
(=made them swear} thojt they would not ask aid from the Roman
people: Jurejurandd elves obstrinxit se lion auxilium a populo
Ilomano imploraturos.
Other examples of such phrases are : rumor est, testis est, certior
fieri, certiorem facere, spem habere, rationem habere, rationem con-
ficere, conscius esse; as, Ccesar was informed that the enemy had
encam,ped at the foot of the mountain: Caesar certior factus est
hostes sub monte consedissc.
122 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
18. With the exception of inquit, and credo, used ironically ( = 1
suppose), verbs of saying and thinking are not used parenthetically
as in English; for example, "T/ie enemy," he answered, "are close
at hand," is in Latin, Responclit hostes adesse.
19. Several verbs, as in English, are followed by a comple-
mentary infinitive without a subject intervening. These are
called modal verbs, and are chiefly the following : possum, void,
nold, maid, desin^J, coepl, conor, nequed ; also, consuescd, debeo,
contendd, dubito, mdturd, constituo, decerno and paro.
EXAMPLES. He wishes to be Cwsar's friend: Vult esse amicus
Caesaris. He preferred to remain at home: Domi remanere
maluit. He prepares to complete the fortifications that were begun:
Munltiones Institutes parat perficere. He hastens to set out for
Britain : In Britanniam proficisci contend.it. He makes haste to
leave the city: Maturat ab urbe proficisci.
Polliceor is also exceptionally used as a modal verb; as, They
promise to give hostages : Obsides dare pollicentur.
20. When the infinitive, after a modal verb, is followed by a
predicate word, this agrees with the subject of the principal (i.e.,
the modal) verb; as, Cwsar determined to become consul: Caesar
consul fieri constituit.
21. Coepl is used with an active or deponent infinitive, but
where the complementary infinitive is passive, coeptus sum is used ;
as, Ccesar began to advance the battering ram : Caesar arietem
agere coepit. The battering ram began to be advanced : Aries
agl coeptus est. Javelins began to be hurled: Tela conjicl
coepta sunt.
22. Some of these verbs, especially void, nold and mold, take an
infinitive with subject accusative if the subject of the infinitive is
different from that of the principal verb, and occasionally (chiefly
with esse or a passive infinitive), even when the subjects are the
same ; as, He wishes his friends to grow in honor : Amicos honore
auctiores vult esse. He did not wish tliat place to be unoccupied :
Noluit euin locum vacare. He wishes to be consul himself: Se
consulem esse vult.
This is the regular construction with simidd : as, They make a
2T< fence of returning home: Domum revert! se simulant.
23. The accusative and infinitive is also found after the verbs
jubeo, veto, patior, si no, prohibed, and some others ; as, He orders
the lieutenant to storm the town : Legatum oppidum oppugnare
jubet. He had forbidden the soldiers to depart : Milites discedere
vetuerat. They suffer no wine to be brought in : Nihil vim inferrl
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 123
patiuntur. TJiey do not alloiv wine to be brought to them at all:
Vinum ad se omnlno importari non sinnnt. They prevented the
Germans from crossing : Germanos translre prohibebant.
EXERCISE 1.
1. He replied that Caesar had conquered Gaul. 2. He thinks
that the Roman leader will easily vanquish the Belgians. 3. We
saw that the nights were shorter in Britain than on the continent.
4. The enemy sent ambassadors to Caesar, and promised to give
hostages. 5. Word was brought to Caesar that the hill was held
by the Roman soldiers. 6. To these envoys Caesar replied that
the Gauls had been conquered by the Roman army. 7. The
general hears that the enemy are hurling javelins at the soldiers.
8. The enemy, he answered, had been hurling javelins at Caesar's
cavalry. 9. He learned from the scouts that all the Belgians had
encamped on the other side of that river. 10. It is said that
Caesar set out into Gaul, and defeated the Helvetii on the other
side of the river Rhone. 11. To that embassy he replied that he
would have come to the enemy's camp. 12. The Helvetii are
accustomed to receive, not give, hostages. 13. Some even reported
to Caesar that the soldiers would not advance (literally, bear on the
standards). 14. He said the Aedui wished to wage war with the
Germans, and to be the friends and allies of the Roman people.
15. The troops began to storm the town, and stones began to be
hurled from all sides against the wall.
EXERCISE II.
FINAL CLAUSES (CLAUSES OF PURPOSE).
24. In Latin prose the infinitive is never used in a final
sense, that is, to denote the purpose or end of the action. In
English the adverbial or gerundial infinitive (i.e., with to) is
regularly so used.
25. The commonest mode of expressing purpose in Latin is
by ut (uti) with the subjunctive in negative clauses, tie or
by the relative followed by the subjunctive, if the clause of
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
purpose is closely connected with some one substantive in the
principal clause. The qui clause is especially common after
mittj and praemitto.
EXAMPLES. He sets out to attack the eamp of the enemy: Proficis-
citur ut castra hostium oppugnet. He waited for our troops, in
order that an attack might be made upon the enemy from all sides:
Ut undique in hostes impetus fieret nostros exspectabat. In order
that tJicij mag not (or in order not to) be surrounded by the enemy,
they will make a sally: Ne ab hostibus circumveniantur erup-
tionum facieiit. Ccesar thought he ought to take the greatest precau-
tion tli at tli is might not ha]>p<-n: Id ne accidcrct magnopere sibi
praecavendum Caesar existimavit. /Soldiers were sent to seize (liter-
ally, who were to seize) the city: Milites niissi sunt qui urbem
ocouparent. He sent forward the cavalry to withstand (lit*, -nil y,
irliu were to withstand) the attack of the enemy: Equitatum qui
sustineret hostium impetum praemisit.
26. When the clause of purpose contains an adjective or adverb
in the comparative degree, it is usually introduced by quo ( = ut
co) which should be closely followed by the comparative ; as, In
order that men may grieve the more deeply, the immortal gods some-
times grant them a longer exemption from punishment : Quo
gravius homines doleant, di immortales iis interdum diutur-
niorem impunitatem concedunt. He gave orders to open out the
rc'/iA.s, tit at tliey might use their swords more easily: Manipulos
laxare jtissit quo facilius gladils uti possent.
27. The subjunctive with ut or ne is used after verbs of
urging, wishing, commanding, advising, asking, striving, etc.
(hortor, opto, impero, sudde5, persuaded, Togo, contendo, etc.),
where the notion of purpose is often scarcely discernible.
Such a subordinate clause is really substantival, and forms the
object of the principal verb (or the subject, if the verb is
passive).
EXAMPLES. He persuades Casticus to seize the chief power in his
state : Persuadet Castico ut regnum in civitate sua occuparet.
He asked me not to do this: Me rogavit ne hoc facerem. He
was persuaded to cross the Rhine : El pcrsuasum est ut Rheiiuni
tranalret.
N.B. But jubeo, conor and rolo regularly, and contendo gener-
ally, are followed by a complementary infinitive. See sections 19
and 23, page 122. Caesar uses nitor with an infinitive, once. Tliey
strive to burst through : Perrumpere nltuntur.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 125
28. With regard to the sequence of tenses in final clauses,
primary or principal sentences are followed by the present
subjunctive; secondary or historical tenses, by the imperfect
subjunctive.
The Primary tenses are :
Present, amo ; I love, I am loving, I do love.
Perfect (translated by have), ainavi ; I have loved.
Future, amabo ; I shall love.
Future Perfect, amavero ; J shall have loved.
The Secondary tenses are :
Imperfect, amabam ; I was loving, I loved, I did love.
Perfect (Aorist), amavl ; I loved, I did love.
Pluperfect, amaveram ; I had loved.
The historical present often follows the rule for secondary
tenses, as in meaning it is really a past tense ; as, He persuades
Dumnorix to make the same attempt : Dumnorigi ut idem conare-
tiir persuadet.
29. A negative purpose is never expressed by ut non, always by
tie. So in clauses of purpose,
that nobody = ne quis.
that nothing = ne quid.
that no = ne qui (or quis).
that never = ne unquam.
EXAMPLES. He persuaded the leader to do nothing: Duel per-
suasit ne quid faceret. He will destroy the bridge that no one
may cross the river: Pontem rescindet ne quis numeri traiiseat.
30. Negative final clauses are connected by neve or neu (seldom
by neque) ; as, He ordered the Gaids not to assist them with corn or
aitything else: Gallis imperavit ne eos frumento neve alia re
juvarent. He orders Cassivelaunus not to injure Mandubracius
op the Trinobantes: Imperat Cassivelauno ne Mandubracio neu
Trinobantibus noceat. So also if the first clause is affirmative ;
as, He urged the soldiers to bear in mind their former valor, and
not to be thrown into confusion: Milites cohortatus est utl suae
pristinae virtutis memoriam retinerent, neu perturbarentur.
31. The same verb may be used in two senses, and with corres-
ponding constructions. For example, it may at one time be used
as a verb of thinking or declaring (sentiendi vel declarandi), when
it has the accusative and infinitive, and at another time as a verb
of commanding or effecting (imperandi vel efficiendi), when it is
followed by a clause introduced by ut or ne. Such verbs are :
moiied, persuaded, facio, died, scrlbo, etc. ; as, Cwsar persuaded the
soldier not to go: Militi ne iret Caesar persuasit. Cwsar was
126 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
persuaded that the enemy were near : Caesarl persuasum est
liostes adessc.
32. Certain verbs usually modal, such as constititd, take an ut or
ne clause when the subject of the subordinate verb is different
from that of the verb which governs such clause ; as, He <}<'t<T-
mines that these should leave the town : Coustituit ut M oppidd
excedant.
EXERCISE 2.
1. They sent Csesar into Gaul to carry on war with the Helvetii.
2. The Gauls had sent envoys to Caesar to ask for peace. 3. In
order to defeat the enemy, and not to suffer them to cross the
river, Caesar exhorted the soldiers to fight valiantly. 4. Cavalry
were sant to take possession of the enemy's camp. 5. He ordered
the cavalry not to pursue the enemy, but to return at once to
the camp. 6. He sent forward the cavalry and the slingers
to attack the enemy in the rear. 7. He sent messengers to
announce to Caesar that the Roman cavalry had been routed by
the enemy and were fleeing into the woods. 8. He replied that
Csesar had praised the soldiers of the tenth legion in order that
they might fight the more valiantly. 9. Caesar ordered (impero)
his soldiers to press forward and not to hurl any weapon whatever
at the enemy. 10. They ordered the bridge to be destroyed in
order that 110 one might be able to cross the river. 11. The Gauls
sent a messenger to say that the Roman troops had built a bridge
over the river in order to pursue the enemy more easily. 12. He
persuaded the Helvetii to go forth from their territories with all
their forces. .13. He warned the leader that the Gauls were at
hand, and directed the soldiers not to leave the camp. 14. He
persuaded the soldiers that ambassadors had been sent to Caesar
concerning a surrender. 15. Caesar determined that Labienus
should not be sent to storm the town.
EXERCISE III.
CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES (CLAUSES OF RESULT).
33. Result or Consequence is denoted by ut (utl) with the
subjunctive ; in negative clauses by ut nijn ; as,
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 127
He is so honest that all men believe him: Tarn probus est ut omnes
ei credant. They made an attack so suddenly that no one resisted :
Impetum tain subito feceruiit ut nemo resisteret. No one is so
brave as not to fear death (or that he does not fear death) : Nemo est
tarn fortis ut mortem non pertimescat. It happened that there
was a full moon: Accidit ut esset lima plena.
It will be observed that just as the infinitive in English is used
to express purpose, so the English infinitive preceded by as after
so and such, is used to denote result.
N.B. A common use of the consecutive clause is to form with
a preceding fore (futurum esse), or futurum fuisse, a substitute for
the future or future perfect infinitive, represented in English by
will, would or would have : He said that the city would be (or would
have been) taken by storm: Dixit fore (or futurum fuisse) ut urbs
expugnaretur.
This is especially the case after verbs that want the supine.
34. Closely connected with consecutive clauses are clauses of
characteristic introduced by the relative pronoun or by relative
adverbs. Such clauses describe the antecedent as being or
not being one of a class characterized by a certain quality.
EXAMPLES. Nor am I the man to be frightened (=Nor am I one
of the class of men who are frightened) : Neque is sum qui terrear.
He is not the man to do this: Non. is est qui hoc faciat. No ship
capable of carrying soldiers was lost : Nulla navis quae milites
portaret deslderabatur.
35. Such a clause of characteristic is found after unus, solus,
dlgnus, indignus, idoneus, and some other words ; as, He is worthy
to be loved : Dignus est qui ametur. The Belgae are the only ones
who have prevented the Teutons from entering their territories:
Belgae soli sunt qui Teutonos intra fines suds ingredi pro-
hibuerint. He is a suitable man to be sent : Homo idoneus est
qui mittatur.
36. Quln (=qui + ne) is often used to express result after nega-
tives or interrogatives implying a negative ; as, Who is tJiere who
does not see (or, but sees) ? Quis est quln videat ? There is no one
who does not see (or, but sees) : Nemo est quln videat. No one is
so brave as not to be disturbed : Nemo est tarn fortis quln pertur-
betur.
37. Observe that in consecutive clauses,
that nobody =ut nemo.
that nothing = ut nihil.
that no =ut null us.
that never =ut uunquam.
128 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXAMPLES. The attack was so sudden that no one offered resis-
tance : Impetus tarn subitus erat ut nemo resisteret. He was so
brave that he feared nothing : Tain f ortis erat ut iiiliil timeret.
He is so cowardly that he never engages in battle : Tain timidus est
ut iiunquam proelium committat.
38. As regards the use of tenses in consecutive clauses, the
English will, in general, be a sufficient guide, noting that the
imperfect is generally used for our past tense ; as,
The enemy inspired our troops with such terror that they do not
to-day dare to join battle : Tantum terrorem nostris mllitibus hostes
injecerunt ut hodie lion committere proelium audeant.
39. However, after a historical tense, the perfect subjunctive is
frequently used, either (1) to denote the action as one whole,
nothing being stated as to its continuance ; or, (2) for the sake of
greater vividness, as if the result were present to the mind of the
speaker; as,
(1) Such a panic seized all, that not only did not a single other
man endeavor to drive the enemy out of the camp, but even the king
himself fled to the river and the ships: Tantus pavor omnes occu-
pavit ut non modo alius quisquam castris pellere hostem conaretur
(denoting continuance or repetition) sed etiam ipse rex ad fluinen
navesque perfugerit (a single act).
(2) Such tvas the expression of his face that he presented the
appearance even of one who laughed : Eo f uit habitii oris ut ridentis
etiam speciem praebuerit.
EXERCISE 3.
1. The leader was of such a character that all the soldiers loved
him. 2. The sea was so closely bordered by cliffs, that from the
higher places a missile could be thrown to the water's edge. 3. He
said that so great was the valor of the soldiers that they dared
even to cross the river. 4. So great a panic seized our soldiers
that we did not dare to join battle with the enemy. 5. There
is no one but knows that brave soldiers are always praised by the
general. 6. There are (those) who say that Csesar was defeated by
the cavalry of the Gauls. 7. He replied that the commander was
not worthy to be loved by the soldiers. 8. There followed such
storms as confined our troops to the camp and kept the enemy
from fighting. 9. He was the only man who had not been
induced to take the oath or to give his children (as) hostages.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 129
10. Such was the valor of the soldiers that not a man withdrew
from the rampart. 11. Cresar said that from these circumstances
it had happened that they roamed about less widely. 12. We
have been so taught by our ancestors that we are accustomed to
receive, not to give, hostages. 13. The general had judged this
cavalry-man a suitable person to send to Caesar to ask assistance.
14. The envoys made answer to Cresar that the bridge had been
so bravely defended by the enemy that the army had been unable
to cross. 15. So great was the terror of the whole army that no
soldier dared to leave the standards or to hurl weapons at the
enemy.
EXERCISE IV.
QUESTIONS, DIRECT AND INDIRECT.
40. A direct question is a principal clause introduced by an
interrogative pronoun or adverb, or by one of the interrogative
particles, nonne, num or -ne ; as,
Who has done this ? Quis hoc fecit ? Did not the boy come to
the city ? Nonne puer ad urbem venit ?
41. The following sentences will show how the particles -ne,
num and nonne differ from one another in meaning.
(1) Is he writing? Scrlbitne ? (Asks for information.)
(2) He is writing, is he not ? (or, Is he not writing) ? Nonne
scribit ? (Expects affirmative answer.)
(3) He is not writing, is he ? (or, Surely lie is not writing) ?
Num scribit ? (Expects negative answer.)
Ne (which is sometimes omitted) is an enclitic, that is, an unem-
phatic particle appended to the introductory word of the sentence.
These particles must not be used when the sentence contains some
other interrogative word.
42. Alternative or disjunctive questions are expressed by ntrum
or -ne (whether) in the first clause, and an (or) in the second ; as,
Whether are you slaves or freemen ? Utrum servT (or Servine) estis
an liberl ? ( Utrum and -ne are sometimes omitted.)
For direct questions, whether single or alternative, the indica-
tive is the proper mood except in the case of dubitative or
rhetorical questions (of which mention is made in section 151, c).
9
130 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
43. A subordinate clause introduced by any of the interrog-
ative words mentioned above is called a dependent or indirect
question, and always has its verb in the subjunctive ; as,
He asked who the man was: Quis homo esset rogavit. He asked
whether the man had been a slave : Quaesivit servusne fuisset
homo. Tell me if you have seen the man : Die mihi num hominem
vlderis,
Observe that, in a dependent question, num does not necessarily
imply a negative answer.
44. In form, indirect disjunctive questions are much the same as
the direct. Of course the subjunctive mood must always be used ;
as, J ask whether you are slaves or freemen : Utruni servl (or,
Servine) sltis an liberi rogo.
Or not, in the direct question, is annon ; in the indirect, necne.
45. In English we do not usually consider the clause as a
dependent question unless the principal sentence contains a
verb of asking or inquiring, but in Latin the principal verb
need not be of an interrogative nature, but may be a verb
meaning learn, find out, know, tell, point out, see or decide ; as,
He told me what he was doing: Quid faceret mihi dlxit. 7
cannot hear what you are saying : Audire non possum quid dicas.
46. The use of the tenses in dependent questions in Latin
is, as a rule, the same as in English, except that after a primary
tense the perfect subjunctive is generally used instead of the
imperfect. The future is represented by the subjunctive of the
active periphrastic' conjugation. (Part III., 69, a.)
EXAMPLES.
(a) I see what you are doing : Quid facias video.
(6) / see what you have done (or did) : Quid feceris video.
(c) I saw what you were doing : Quid faceres vidl.
(d) I saw what you had done (or did) : Quid f ecisses vidl.
(e) I Jiave seen what you are doing : Quid facias vidl.
(/) J see what you will do : Quid facturus sis video.
(g) I saw what you woidd do : Quid facturus esses vidl.
47. English abstract nouns, such as size, number, character,
reason, time, place, etc., are generally best rendered into Latin by
clauses introduced by such words and phrases as quantus, quot,
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 131
qudlis, cur, quando, quo in loco, etc. ; as, He was unable to learn
their numbers (literally, how many tiiey were): Quot essent reperlre
11011 poterat. He cannot discover the position of the enemy (literally,
in ivhat place they are) : Quo in loco hostes sint cognoscere non
potest. I do not know the reason of his return (literally, why tie has
returned) : Cur redierit nescio.
EXERCISE 4.
1. He asks who is leading the army into the city. 2. He told
the general who had persuaded the soldiers to leave the camp.
3. He was unable to ascertain what harbors were convenient for
the war-galleys. 4. Cfesar had sent horsemen in advance to
observe in* what direction the enemy were marching. 5. He said
Cresar had inquired why the officers had not led the troops against
the enemy to prevent them crossing (literally, to cross) the river.
6. The general asked whether the Roman people had made peace
with the Helvetii or not. 7. Did you not know that Cresar had
asked if ( = whether) the Roman people were likely to make peace
with the enemy ? 8. I shall ask the date of his return to the city.
9. He found out what villages the Gauls had beyond the Rhone,
and their size. 10. He could not learn how the Sequani had led
their forces through the territories of the Aedui, and why they
were laying waste their lands. 11. Caesar inquired by whom the
inland part of Britain was inhabited and the number of the towns.
12. Are you a Roman soldier or not ? What is the reason of your
coming into our territories ? 13. He sent spies in order that he
might be able to know with whom the leader of the Gauls held
communication. 14. They wished to learn what sort of man the
leader was, and the position of the enemy's forces. 15. He sent
scouts across the river to ascertain what was going on in the camp
of the enemy, and when they were going to make an attack upon
the city.
EXERCISE V.
THE ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE AND ITS COMMONEST EQUIVALENTS.
48. A construction which (owing to the want of a perfect
participle active) is exceedingly common in Latin, is the
132 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ablative absolute, which somewhat resembles the much less
common nominative absolute in English, in its defining the
time or attendant circumstances of an action. The ablative
absolute is usually a combination of a substantive and a
participle generally the perfect participle passive, more sel-
dom the present active.
EXAMPLES. On hearing this (literally, this Jutving been heard),
he departed : His audltls, abiit. While these were fighting, one of
his men put him on a horse : His pugnantibus, ilium in equum
quidam ex suis intulit. After receiving Jwstages (Literally, hostages
ha ////;/ been received), he made peace: Obsidibus acceptls, pacem
fecit. While the enemy were assaulting the camp, our men made
a sally: Hostibus castra oppugnantibus, eruptionem nostri
fecerunt.
49. As the English nominative absolute is comparatively
seldom used, it is generally best to avoid that construction in
translating the ablative absolute, and to use, instead, a depen-
dent clause introduced by such words as after, while, when,
if, although, because; or, one of the prepositions on, after,
without, etc., followed by the gerund; or, the English active
participial phrase with having, or even the present participle
active.
Such expressions consequently (especially if short) are to be
translated into Latin by means of the ablative absolute.
EXAMPLES.
(a) After this battle was fought, he led the army across : Hoc
proelio facto, exercitum traducit.
(b) Haring said (or, after saying, or saying) this he departed: His
dictls, discessit.
(c) They will not be able to defend themselves from these men if
their arms are surrendered: Ab his se defendere, traditis armis,
non poterunt.
(d) Altlwugh the defenders were few, he icas not able to take the
tovn by storm: Oppidum, pant-is defendentibus, expugnare non
potuit.
(e) At the request of the Eemi (or, because the Eemi asked it), tlie
enemy obtained their safety: Peteutibus Beiuis, hostes ut con-
servarentur impetrant.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 133
(/) Without any time having elapsed, he led the troops back to the
camp : Nullo tempore intermisso, in castra copias reduxit.
N.B. It will be observed that the absolute phrase is usually
grammatically equivalent to an adverbial clause of some descrip-
tion, time, cause, condition, concession, etc., although it may
frequently be best translated by a co-ordinate sentence ; as, The
enemy made an attack and threw our men into confusion: Hostes,
impetu facto, nostros perturbaverunt.
50. As the verb esse has no perfect or present participle, we
frequently find a noun, or pronoun, with an adjective, or with
another noun in the ablative absolute; as, He did that against
my will : Me Invltd, hoc fecit. He was born in the consulship of
Caisar : Caesare consule, natus est. So long as their vigor u-<i*
unimpaired, our men offered a brave resistance: Nostri, integris
viribus, fortiter repugnSverunt.
51. The conditional force of the ablative absolute is, in negative
expressions, more clearly brought out by the use of nisi instead
of non; as, He thought he ought not to fight unless the place were
favorable: Nisi aequo loco dimicandum non existimavit. There
are no terms of surrender unless the arms are given up : Deditionis
iiulla est condicio nisi armis traditis. It is really a case of
omitted protasis (see section 79), the first example in full being :
Nisi aequo loco (dimicaretur), dimicandum non existimavit.
52. But the ablative absolute is not used invariably where the
English phraseology would lead us to expect that idiom.
() The absolute construction is not used with intransitive verbs,
that is, with verbs which, in the active, do not govern an accusa-
tive case ; as, Caisar, having pardoned the prisoners, returned to
Rome : Caesar, cum captivls ignovisset (not captlvis ignotls),
Romam rediit. Having reached the Rhine, they plunged into the
river : Cum ad R lie num pervenissent, se in flumen praecipita-
verunt.
(6) The absolute construction is not used when the verb is a
deponent, as the perfect participle of such a verb has an active
force ; as, When he had said this, he took his departure : Haec
locutns, abiit.
Occasionally the perfect participle of a deponent verb is passive
in force, when the ablative absolute may be used ; as, After l<nfin<i
waste Gaul, the Cimbri departed : Depopulate Gallia, CimbrI
excesserunt.
However, when the participle refers to some other word than
the subject or object of the verb, the ablative absolute may be
used with a deponent ; as, As soon as our troops gained a footing on
134 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
the dry land, their lead being followed by all their comrades, they
made an attack upon the enemy : Nostri simul in arido constiterunt,
suis omnibus coiisecutis, in hostes impetum fecerunt.
(c) The absolute construction is not generally used when the
noun or pronoun modified by the participle is the subject or object
of the principal verb ; as, Wliile lie was fleeing he ivas concealed by
the woods: Fugiens (not 1116 fugiente) silvis tectus est. Having
led out their troops from the camp, they drew them up in battle
array: Suas copias ex castris eductas (not copiis eductls) m-
struxerunt.
In Caesar, however, there are frequent exceptions to this rule ;
as, After summoning the leading men he reconciled them to Cin-
getorix : Prmcipibus convocatls, lios Cingetorigi conciliavit.
53. From an observation of the preceding examples, it will be
seen that the absolute phrase is usually placed at or near the
beginning of the sentence.
54. Instead of the ablative absolute we find, for the perfect par-
ticiple, cum with the pluperfect subjunctive, or ubi, or posttpiam,
with the perfect indicative, and for the present participle, cum with
the imperfect subjunctive, or dnm with the present indicative ; as,
When he had said this, he departed : Cum haec dlxisset, abiit, or
postquam (or ubi) haec dixit, abiit. After receiving hostages he
made peace: Cum obsides accepisset pacem fecit. Wlien the
enemy were assaulting the camp, our troops made a sally: Cum
hostes castra oppugnarent eruptionem nostri fecerunt.
In Caesar, the ablative absolute is the almost invariable rule with
short expressions, that is, in the case of verbs capable of having
that construction. When the expression is somewhat long, the
cum clause is generally used, ubi and postquatn being seldom
found.
N.B. Groups of ablatives absolute, with equivalent expressions,
may be found in C^sar, Bell. Gall. II. 25 ; III. 1 ; IV. 23 ; V. 15.
The ablative absolute may be connected (although the connec-
tive is very often omitted) by a conjunction (e.g., et, -que) with
another ablative absolute, but not with any other (even an equiva-
lent) form of expression.
EXERCISE 5.
1. After settling these matters, the commander returned to the
city with his army. 2. After encouraging the soldiers, and giving
the signal, he ordered the lieutenant to make a sudden attack upon
the enemy. 3. He set out for the city against the will of the com-
mander, after promising to return shortly. 4. In the consulship
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 135
of Marius many citizens were put to death without a hearing. 5.
After that assembly had been dismissed, the chief men of the
states returned to Caesar. 6. As no enemy prevented (him), he led
the legion in safety into the province, and there passed the winter.
7- After this was done, the Roman soldiers, drawing their swords,
made an attack upon the enemy's infantry. 8. Csesar with reluc-
tance heard the prisoner and dismissed him. 9. Having pardoned
all the prisoners, he ordered the troops to return to the camp.
10. After this battle was fought, the enemy, having been impressed
by the bravery of our soldiers, sent ambassadors to Caesar to seek
peace. 11. Having called to him the traders from all quarters, he
was unable to learn what tribes inhabited the island. 12. This
said, after dismissing the ambassadors, he returned to the city in
safety. 13. After lingering a short time before the town, having
laid waste the fields of the enemy, and having set fire to all their
villages, Caesar returned to the camp. 14. In the face of a valiant
resistance on the part of our men (literally, our men resisting
bravely), the enemy pushed forward up the hill to our camp. 15.
After pardoning the prisoners and receiving hostages, he set out
(use participle) a little after midnight, and reached the camp in
safety.
EXERCISE VI.
VERBS WITH THE DATIVE.
55. Many verbs which in English are considered transitive
and take a direct object, are intransitive in Latin and are
followed by the dative. Such verbs are those meaning to
favor, harm, spare, command, obey, believe, distrust, serve,
please, displease, indulge, pardon, threaten, be angry with, and
many others ; ( faved, noceo, parcu, impero, pared, credo, fido,
confldo, diffldo, servio, placed, displiceo, indulged, ignoscd,
minor, Irdscor).
EXAMPLES. He favors the Helvetii: Helvettls fa vet. He spares
neither man nor beast : Neque homlni neque ferae parcit. It
pleased the majority: Major! parti placuit. He obeyed Ccesar:
Caesarl parebat.
136 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
In like manner, such expressions as fidem habere, to trust, to
have confidence in, take a dative ; as, He reposed th<' greatest confi-
dence in Procillus: Procillo suinmam fidem liabebat.
56. The dative is found with many (but not with the ma-
jority of) verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, ante,
con, de, in, inter, ob, post, prae, sub and super ; as,
TJiis one thing Ccesar lacked : Hoc unum Caesar! clefuit. Labie-
;j//.s commanded tJie cavalry: Labienus equitatui praeerat. Night
put an end to the contest : Nox ccrtamini intervenit. He came to
the aid of the state: Clvitatl subvenit.
The verb when compounded really takes a new meaning, which
requires a dative case. Many of these compounds take an accusa-
tive of the direct, along with the dative of the indirect object (see
section 69).
57. Verbs which in Latin take the dative must be used
impersonally in the passive, the dative being retained in that
voice; as,
Ccesar is obeyed by the Gauls: Caesar! a Gallis paretur. This
man can be pardoned: Huic liomiii! Ignosci potest. I am
believed : Mihi creditur.
This is a special case of the general rule that all intransitive
verbs, that is, verbs that do not govern the accusative case in the
active, if used in the passive, must be used impersonally ; as, Tfie
battle raged fiercely : Acriter pugnatum est. A general run is
made to arms : Ad arma concurritur.
58. The verbs, laedo, delectd, oblecto, juvo and offendo, take the
accusative, though from their meaning we should expect them to
govern the dative ; as, Tliis life delights me : Haec vita me delec-
tat. He violated his pledge : Fidem laesit. He assisted them icith
food: Eos cibo juvit. Jnbed takes a complementary infinitive
with the accusative ; as, He orders the troops to return : Mllites
redlre jubet.
59. Several verbs, especially considd, impero, caved, timed, metiio,
tempero, moderor, prospicio and provided, take a dative or an accu-
sative, according to their signification ; as, I ask Caesar's advice ;
Caesarem consulo. I consult Casar's interests: Caesarl consulo.
He did not restrain (=pu,t a check upon) himself: Non sibi tem-
peravit. He was unable to govern the states : Clvitates temper-
are non poterat. He makes a demand for cavalry: Equites
imperat. He gires orders to the c<i;nlry: Equitibus imperat.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 137
Notice, also, He refrains from outrage : A maleficio temperat.
He is taking measures against Cccsar : In Caesarem consulit.
60. The force of the dative can often be readily observed by
paying strict attention to the exact meaning of the verb ; thus,
He orders ( = gives orders to) the soldiers: Multibus imperat. tfhe
married (= retted herself for) an officer of Cceaar's : Caesaris legato
niipsit. He desired (~ivas eager for) a revolution: Novls rebus
studebat. They satisfied ( = did enough for, or made an apology to)
the Aedui: Aeduis satisfecerunt.
61. In Latin prose, never use the dative to express to after
a verb of motion ; as,
He came to the city : Venit ad urbem (not urbi).
EXERCISE 6.
1. Caesar is angry with the soldiers who have returned to the
camp. 2. Caesar gave the soldiers orders not to harm the pris-
oners. 3. The soldiers were ordered by Caesar to obey their
officers and storm the town. 4. The soldier replied that the
general had participated in many battles. 5. He says that the
Gauls were pardoned by the senate, and ordered to leave the city.
6. The general cannot be harmed by the soldiers, nor will the
soldiers be pardoned by the Roman people. 7. He ordered the
soldier to ask who was at the head of the army. 8. Casticus was
persuaded by Orgetorix to seize the supreme power in his state.
9. They neither come to the assemblies, nor do they obey Cresar's
command. 10. He said the Belgians had spared neither women
nor infants. 11. After dismissing the ambassadors, he asked if
the general had provided for supplies of corn. 12. He consulted
for the welfare of the soldiers whom Labienus commanded. 13.
He answered that the soldiers were always opposing Caesar's plans
and resisting the lieutenants. 14. After promising to obey the
consul, he came to the camp to consult Caesar on these matters.
15. The legions that had displeased the lieutenants apologized to
Caesar, and said they were willing to take part in the battle.
138 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE VII.
VERBS WITH THE GENITIVE VERBS WITH THE ABLATIVE.
62. Verbs of pitying, remembering and forgetting, such as
miser eor, me mini, reminiscor, obliviscor, are followed by the
genitive; as,
They might to pity us ; Nostrl misererl debent. The soul remem-
bers the past : Animus memlnit praeteritorum. He urged the
Aedni to forget the differences : Cohortatus est Aeduos ut dissen-
sidnum oblivisoereiitur. He remembers the old disaster : Veteris
incominodl reminiscitur.
So, a phrase with the value of any of these verbs may take a
genitive ; as, He forgot the affair : In obllvionem negotii venit.
I recollect that day : Venit mini in mentem illius diei.
63. The impersonal (or rather imipersonal) verbs, interest
and refert (it interests, is of importance^ concerns), take the
genitive of the person to whom it is of importance, except that
ined, tud, nostrd, vestrd, and sud are used instead of the
genitive case of the corresponding pronouns. The thing of
importance is expressed by an infinitive (with or without
subject accusative), a neuter pronoun, or a substantive clause ;
and the degree of importance by the genitive of price or an
adverb.
EXAMPLES. It is your interest and the interest of all to do right :
Interest tua et omnium recte facere. It is of great importance
to the state that the enemy should be kept apart : Magni relpublicae
interest hostes distinerl. This concerns me very much : Hoc mea
refert maxime. It is of great importance that his anthoritu should
prevail : Magni interest ejus auctoritatem valere.
64. Recordor, memim, to call to mind, to recollect, especially when
used with the name of a person, and miserdrl, to express pity for,
to bewail, take the accusative ; as, He called to mind the common
chances of war : Communes belli casus recorda/batur. I remem-
ber Cinna : Cinnam memini. They kept bewailing the common
danger : Commune perlculum miserabantur.
65. The following verbs take the ablative : utor, fruor,
fungor (and their compounds), potior, wscor, glorior ; and
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 139
verbs of plenty and want, such as eged, cared, abundd, etc.;
also, riitor and confldo, in the sense of to rely on.
EXAMPLES. Ccesar was unable to use the corn : Caesar frumento
utl non poterat. He is free from blame : Culpa vacat. He is
amply supplied ivith cavalry: Abundat equitatu. He boasted
haughtily about his victory : Sua victoria msolenter gloriabatur.
He enjoys all advantages in life : Omnibus in vita commodls
fruitur. He gained the town without a struggle: Oppido sine con-
tentione potitus est. He had been without food: Cibo caruerat.
He relied on the time of the year: Ami! tempore confisus est.
They rely on deceit : Do 16 nltuntur.
66. Potior takes the genitive, in the sense of to gain the supreme
power, to become master of a state ; eged sometimes takes a geni-
tive; and vaco, in the sense of to be free far, to have leisure for, a
dative. Examples. They hope to be able to gain the sovereignty
of all Gaul : Totius Galliae sese potlri posse sperant. They
need assistance : Auxilil egent. I have leisure for philosophy :
Vaco pliilosophiae.
EXERCISE 7.
1. To this embassy the Roman leader replied that he could for-
get the old insult, but not the recent wrongs. 2. He says he
remembers the former valor of the Helvetii. 3. He said this
concerned both you and the state. 4. He asked why it was the
interest of all to obey the laws. 5. It is your interest and the
interest of your friends to feel pity for us. 6. These resources he
is using for (ad) my destruction. 7. He thinks the Helvetii can
gain the sovereign power of all Gaul. 8. He pointed out how
greatly it concerned both the republic and the common safety for
the forces of the enemy to be kept apart. 9. Word was brought to
Ca3sar that the Belgians were boasting insultingly of their victory.
10. The river abounded in large fish, but the enemy was without
corn. 11. The messenger tells us (see section 100, N.B.) that
these tribes eat corn and flesh. 12. He faithfully discharged his
duties, arid now enjoys well-merited wealth and honor. 13. On
behalf of these men they requested Csesar to exercise his usual
(SUMS) clemency and forbearance. 14. Instead of money they
make use of bronze, or bars of iron made of (literally, weighed to) a
certain weight. 15. Using the bridge which he had built over the
river, C;esar made a sudden attack upon the enemy and became
master of their camp.
140 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
i
EXERCISE VIII.
VERBS WITH Two CASES.
(a) Accusative and Genitive.
67. Verbs of reminding, accusing, condemning and acquit-
ting take the accusative of the person, and the genitive of the
thing called to mind, or of the fault or crime charged ; as,
He reminds you of friendship: Te amicitiae commonefacit.
Tht'\i acquitted him of injustice: Eum injuriae absolverunt.
They were accusing him of treason: Eum proditionis insimula-
bant. They declared them guilty of the greatest injustice: Eos
summae inlquitatis condemnaveruiit.
We occasionally find the genitive of the penalty or sentence ; as,
They sentenced him to pay tJie thing Jie had vowed ; Eum dam-
naverunt votl.
The genitive is retained in the passive, the accusative becoming
the subject of the verb ; as, He was acquitted of injustice : In-
juriae absolutus est.
68. The impersonals, miseret, pudet, piget, paenitet, taedet and
pertaesum est, take the accusative of the person, and the genitive of
that causing the feeling ; as, I repent of my folly : Me stultitiae
paenitet. I am ashamed of my life : Me vltae pudet. We feel
pity for them: Eorum nos miseret. They are disgusted with life :
Eos vltae taedet.
Instead of a noun in the genitive, we find (except with miseret)
the infinitive, and occasionally a substantive clause, or the accusa-
tive of a neuter pronoun ; as, I am ashamed of having done this:
Me haec fecisse pudet. J am weary of seeing you: Me videre
vos taedet. I am ashamed of this : Hoc me pudet.
(b) Accusative and Dative.
69. Verbs of giving and taking away, also impero, credo,
minor, and many transitive verbs compounded with certain
prepositions, such as, ad, ante, in, inter, ob, post, prae, etc.,
take the accusative and dative (see section 56) ; as,
He gave me a book; Mihi librum dedit. Caisar snatched a
shield from a soldier : Caesar scutum mil it! detraxit. He orders
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 141
the state to furnish twenty hostages: CIvitatI viginti obsides
imperat. He threatened me with death : Mihi mortem minatus
est. He preferred death to slavery : Mortem servituti anteposuit
(or, MortI servitutem posthabuit). C&sar inspired the soldiers
with hope: Caesar spem multibus intulit (or injecit).
(c) Two Accusatives.
70. Verbs of making, choosing, calling, electing, considering
and showing, take two accusatives of the same person or thing.
One of these accusatives is the. direct object, the other, which
forms an essential part of the predicate, is brought into connec-
tion with the direct object by means of the verb, and may be
called an accusative predicate noun (or adjective). If the
action of the verb produces the resulting object or quality, the
term factitive is applied both to the verb and to the noun or
adjective representing such object or quality.
EXAMPLES. They call these (persons) friends : Hos amicos appel-
lant. Ttwy elected Cmsar consid: Caesarem consulem creave-
runt. He considered himself a Roman citizen : Civem Bomanum
se arbitrabatur. He rendered the place safe: Locum tutuin
reddldlt. He showed himself brave : Se fortem praestiti.
In the passive the direct object becomes the subject, and the
other accusative becomes a subjective predicate noun or adjective ;
as, These (persons) are called friends : Hi amid appellantur. Tlie
place was made safe : Locus tutus redditus est. Caesar was
elected consul : Caesar consul creatus est.
71. Verbs of asking, demanding, teaching and concealing, admit
two accusatives, the one of the person and the other of the thing ;
as, I ask of you this kindness; Te hoc beneficium rogo. He
demands hostages of the Belgians: Bellas obsides poscit. I con-
cealed my opinion from you: Te sententiam celavi. Fortune
teaches the vanquished also the art of war: Fortuna belli artem
victos quoque docet.
In the passive the noun denoting the person becomes subject,
and the accusative of the thing is retained ; as, I was asked my
opinion ; Sententiam rogatus sum. He was taught the art of
war : Belli artem edoctus est.
72. A few transitive verbs compounded with trans take two
accusatives in the active, one governed by the verb and the
other by the preposition ; as,
142 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
He led the army across the river : Exercitum flumen traduxit.
In the passive, the object of the verb becomes subject, while the
other accusative is retained ; as, The army was led across the bridge :
Exercitus pontem traductus est.
Notice also the expression animum advertere ; as, Ctesar observed
this : Caesar id animum advertit.
(d) Accusative and Ablative.
73. Transitive verbs of plenty and want take the accusative and
ablative ; as, He loads the ships with arms : Armis naves onerat.
He deprived the city of supplies* Urbem commeatu privavit.
He stripped them all of their arms: Omnes armis exuit. He fitted
the ditch with rubbish : Fossam aggere explevit.
74. A few words, such as dono and circumdo admit a double con-
struction, (1) dative and accusative, or (2) accusative and ablative ;
as, He gives the booty to the soldiers: Praedam militibus donat.
Praeda milites donat. He surrounded the city with a wall :
31 drum urbi circumdedit. Muro urbem circumdedit.
(e) Other Constructions.
75. Two datives the object to which (the dative of interest)
and the object or end for which (the dative of purpose or
service) are found (1) with a few intransitive or passive verbs,
sum, fid, venio, (2) with transitive verbs in connection with the
accusative; as,
They are a ruin to the state : Reipublicae clad! sunt. He came
to the assistance of the lieutenant: Legato auxilio venit. The
soldiers were a hindrance to themselves : Milites sibi impedimeiitd
crant. He left five cohorts for the defence of the camp : Quinque-
cohortes castris praesidio reliquit. Do not attribute this to me
as a fault : Noli dare hoc mini vitio.
76. Utor may take two ablatives, one in the predicative relation
to the other, that is, agreeing with the latter and being brought
into relation with it by the verb ; as, He will find me an indulgent
father : Ille facili me utetur patre. He treated the man (as) a
friend : Homine amico utebatur. He used tJiese men (as) guides :
His ducibus usus est.
77. Inter dlco takes a dative of the person and an ablative of the
thing ; as, Ariovistus debarred the Romans from all Gaul : Ario-
vistus omni Gallia Romania interdixit. He forbade them the
use of fire and water (i.e., banished them) : His aqua atque igni
interdixit.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 143
EXERCISE 8.
1. They found the soldier guilty of treachery, but he was
acquitted of cruelty. 2. He reminds the soldiers of their old
disaster, and urges them not to forget the valor of the enemy. 3.
The general threatened the prisoners with death, and ordered the
enemy to furnish forty hostages. 4. The centurion says he is
ashamed of his folly, and is sorry for having done this. 5. Caesar
surrounded the camp with a trench, and sent three cohorts to the
aid of Labienus, his lieutenant. 6. Word was brought to Caesar
that the enemy had filled the trenches with rubbish and the trunks
of trees. 7. The soldiers said they preferred death to slavery,
and that they would oppose themselves to the advance of the
enemy (literally, enemy advancing). 8. The Roman citizens wished
to make Caesar king, but he preferred to be elected consul. 9. I
was not able to conceal the deed from the soldiers. 10. He replied
that the conversation had been concealed from them. 11. Making
use of (literally, having used) the same (men) (as) guides, he pro-
ceeded against the enemy, slew a great number of (use ex) them,
and deprived all the rest of their arms. 12. Caesar was informed
that the enemy were leading their troops across that river. 13.
He ordered (impero) the soldiers neither to surround the camp
with a trench nor to go to the assistance of Labienus. 14. After
peace was made they chose this place as a home for themselves.
15. The senate bestowed the (rights of) citizenship upon this man.
EXERCISE IX.
CONDITIONAL SENTENCES.
78. Conditional clauses (that is, adverbial clauses in which
something is assumed for the purpose of basing an assertion
thereon) are introduced by si, if; si non (or a weaker negative
si minus), if not ; nisi, unless, if not ; sin, if however, but if;
and occasionally by nisi si, except if, unless ; as,
If he has anything he gives it : SI quid habet dat. If lie ivere
not absent it would be well : Si non abesset beiie esset. Fix a
day for the conference, or if that does not quite please you, send some
144 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
one to me : Colloquio diem eonstitue, aut, si id minus vis, aliquem
ad me mitte. Unless some assistance is found in (Ja j sar, I shall seek
another abode : Nisi si quid iu Caesare erit auxilii, aliud domi-
cilium petam.
79. The conditional sentence, as a whole, is made up of two
parts, the subordinate clause containing the condition the Pro-
tasisand the principal clause, containing the conclusion the
Apodosis.
80. The most obvious distinction of conditions is that of ( 1 )
present or past, in which the question of fulfilment has already
been decided, and (2) future, in which there is always at least
a possibility of fulfilment.
81. In present conditions, if we wish to represent the sup-
posed case as contrary to fact, we use the imperfect subjunctive
in both clauses ; as,
If he had anything (implying that he has not anything) he would
give it : SI quid haberet daret.
If nothing is implied as to the fulfilment of the condition, the
present indicative (or the perfect for completed action) is used ;
as, If he has anything he gives it : Si quid liabet dat. If he has
done Uiat he lias made a mistake : Quod si fecit erravit.
82. In past conditions, if we wish to represent something as
contrary to the fact, to imply that the condition was not ful-
filled, we use the pluperfect subjunctive in both clauses ; as,
If he had had anything (implying that he had nothing) he woidd
have given it : Si quid habuisset dedisset.
If nothing is implied as to the fulfilment of the condition, a past
tense of the indicative is found in both clauses ; as, If it was not
lawful it was not necessary : Si non licebat non iiecesse erat.
83. With regard to future conditions, we may state them in
either of two ways :
(1) In the more vivid form, by means of the future or future
perfect indicative ; as, If he has (or shall have) anything he will give
it : Si quid habebit dabit. If he returns I sliall send him to you ;
Si redierit eum ad te mittam.
(2) In the less vivid form, by means of the present subjunctive
in both clauses ; as, If lie should hare (or had or ivere to hacc) any-
thing he would give it : Si quid liabeat det.
PAKT II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 145
Notice that in the first class of future conditions, the protasis in
the English sentence is generally in the present tense, occasionally
in the future, and the apodosis in the future indicative ; and in the
second class, the protasis in English has should or were to, and the
apodosis has would (or should, in the first person).
84. An English present in the protasis is turned by the Latin
future perfect if it expresses time, future indeed, but prior to the
action indicated in the apodosis ; as, If you do that I shall not
pardon you : Hoc si feceris, non tibi Ignoscam. Unless he does this
he will be punished ; Nisi hoc f ecerit supplicio afficietur.
85. Occasionally we find a tense, or even a mood, in the
apodosis different from that in the protasis, according as one
notion or another is prominent ; as,
If my judgment had prevailed (as it did not), we should be free,
(which we are not): SI meum consilium valuisset llberi essemus.
If he wistied to keep the maniples at the standards, the place itself
ivas a protection to the barbarians : Si continere ad signa manipulos
vellet, locus ipse erat praesidio barbaris. Nor, if he slimdd do
otherwise, has he any authority amongst his vassals : Neque, aliter
si faciat, ullam inter suos liabet auctoritatem. In the apodosis
the imperative may be used instead of the indicative ; as, Carry
your point if you so wish it ; Vincite si Ita vultis.
N.B. With possum, debed, oportet, and with both periphrastic
conjugations, the indicative is regularly used, in the apodosis,
instead of the subjunctive ; as, If Ccesar had set out, he coidd liave
crossed (or would have been able to cross) the river: Caesar, si pro-
fectus esset, flumen transire potuit. If the enemy had offered
battle, the soldiers should hare engaged them: Si hostes sui
potestatem fecissent, mllites proelium committere debuerunt (or,
multibus proelium committendum fait).
86. Alternative conditions are introduced by slve .... slve (or,
sen . . . . sen), whether . ... or, which follow the rules for si, with
regard to mood and tense ; as, Whether he wins the day or loses it,
he will not return ; Slve vicerit slve victus erit non redlbit. The
verb is frequently omitted ; as, Whether by chance or by the will of
heaven, that part of the state was the jirst to pay the penalty : Slve
casfi sive consilio deorum immortalium, ea pars clvitatis princeps
poenas persolvit.
87. In indirect narration, that is, after verbs of saying and
thinking, the conditional sentences assume the following
forms :
10
146 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Si quid habeo do, fdlcit se, si quid habeat, dare.
becomes - - -\dixit se, si quid haberet, dare.
SI quid habebam fdicit se, si quid haberet, 1 dedigge>
dabam, becomes \dixit se, si quid haberet,/
SI quid habuldedl, fdlcit se, si quid habuerit, dedisse.
becomes \dlxit se, si quid habuisset, dedisse.
SI quid habebo fdlcit se, si quid habeat, daturum esse.
dabo, becomes \dixit se, si quid haberet, daturum esse.
Si quid habeam fdlcit se, si quid habeat, daturum esse.
dem, becomes \dlxit se, si quid haberet, daturum esse.
SI quid haberem fdlcit \se, si quid haberet, daturum fuisse
darem, becomes \dlxitj (or esse).
SI quid habuissem fdlcit) se, si quid habuisset, daturum
dedisse in, becomes \dlxitj fuisse.
This section need not be considered until the exercise on
indirect narration is reached. See Exercise XXVI.
EXERCISE 9.
1. If Casticus should seize the supreme power in his state, Caesar
would wage war against him. 2. If the army is in good health,
Caesar does not fear the enemy. 3. If our troops defeat the
enemy, the Belgians will at once send ambassadors to Caesar.
4. If the Gauls had been conquered by Caesar they would have
immediately sent ambassadors to him concerning peace. 5. The
Germans would not now be carrying on war with the Gauls if
Ariovistus had been defeated by the Roman troops. 6. If this is
reported to Ariovistus, he will inflict the severest punishment on
the hostages. 7. If the general had not sent three cohorts to the
lieutenant's assistance, the enemy would have gained the victory
and our soldiers would now be in the greatest peril. 8. If Caesar
had corn at that time, he gave it to the soldiers. 9. The Helvetii
would return to their territories if the Roman people were to con-
clude (facia) peace with them. 10. Unless Caesar enrols two
legions in that place, he will not be able to carry on the war suc-
cessfully with the Gauls. 11. If Labienus were at the head of the
army, the Romans would easily defeat the enemy. 12. If the
enemy had set fire to all their towns and villages ancl burnt up all
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 147
their corn, they would not have been able to return. 13. If
Caesar meets with favorable weather, he will weigh anchor a little
after midnight. 14. If he had sent all the cavalry in advance, the
enemy would have halted and made an attack upon our army.
15. If the Germans had made an attempt to cross the Rhine,
Caesar would have marched against them with all his forces.
EXERCISE X.
CLAUSES OF CONCESSION.
88. Closely connected with conditional clauses, in which a
supposed case is assumed, are clauses of concession in which
the supposition is conceded or admitted. Such clauses are
introduced by :
(a) Etsl, etiamsl, tametsi, which follow the rules for si (which
is itself sometimes concessive) ; as, Although he saw the battle
would be without danger, still he did not think he ought to engage :
Etsi sine periculo proelium fore videbat, tamen committendum
non putabat.
(6) Quamquam, which usually assumes a fact and requires the
indicative ; as, Although they are enemies, I wish to warn them
again and again : Quamquam suut hostes, eos etiam atque etiam
monitos volo.
(c) Quamvis, cum, licet and ut, which are followed by the sub-
junctive ; as, He kept himself in camp, although the enemy every
day gave him opportunity to fight : Castris sese tenebat cum
hostes cotidie pugnandi potestatem facerent. Though all things
should turn out contrary to their expectation, they are very powerful
in ships : Ut omnia contra opinionem accidant, plurimum navibus
possunt.
89. Quamvls and nisi are sometimes joined with single words
instead of clauses, the predicate of the subordinate clause being
understood. The words following these conjunctions are in the
same case as the words to which they refer ; as, However few
tlu'i/ <ire, they dare t<> adrauce <ig<dnxf <iiti/ number of c ;><////: Ad
quemvis iiumerum equitum quamvis panel (snpj>lti sint) adire
audent. He did not come 'without being asked : Nisi rogatus non
venit. He says he will not return unless Jie is victorious: Negat se
nisi victorem, rediturum. (See also section M.)
148 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE 10.
1. Although the enemy have a great number of cavalry, Caesar
can easily defeat them. 2. Even though he should have met with
favorable weather he would not have sailed for Britain. 3. If
Ctesar comes up with the enemy he will easily defeat them, how-
ever brave and numerous (they may be.) 4. Although Caesar has
sent two legions to the assistance of the lieutenant, the enemy have
not yet been defeated. 5. Even if Caesar were in command of the
army he would not be able to defeat the enemy. 6. The Helvetii
made an attempt to cross the Rhone, although the Romans had
concluded a peace with them. 7. Even though he should think
that he could do this without danger, he would not send troops to
take the city by storm. 8. Although few (in numbers), they said
they would never return to the city unless victorious. 9. Even if
the enemy had taken up their position on the higher ground, they
could not have withstood the attacks of our men. 10. Though you
can persuade these men to send ambassadors, you cannot make
them our friends. 11. Although Caesar saw that the legions were
being hard pressed, he was unwilling to order the soldiers to
retreat. 12. Even if Caesar had been informed that the enemy
were close at hand, he would not have ordered the troops to
advance. 13. If Caesar had seen that the tenth legion was being
hard pressed by the enemy, he would have sent four cohorts to the
lieutenant's assistance. 14. Though he were present now, he
could do nothing. 15. Even if the Helvetii should return to their
territories, Caesar would not conclude a peace with them.
EXERCISE XI.
USES OF THE ACCUSATIVE.
90. (a) The direct object of an active transitive verb, or of
a transitive deponent, is put in the accusative ; as,
He praises the soldier : Mllitem laudat. Ccesar followed the
enemy : Caesar liostes secutus est.
(6) The accusative is used with prepositions, chiefly the
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 149
following : ad, ante, apud, in (generally with the idea of
motion towards), inter, per, post, propter, sub (with idea of
motion or approach), trans and ultra ; as,
He returned to the camp : Ad castra rediit. He set out after the
third day (or three days after) : Post diem tertium profectus est.
He reached home towards evening : Sub vesperum domum pervenit.
91. The subject of the infinitive (except the historical infini-
tive, section 131) is put in the accusative; as,
He says the soldier will not return : Negat militem rediturum.
It is a most disgraceful thing for these hostages to be with Ariovistus:
H6s obsides esse apud Ariovistum est turpissimum.
92. Duration of time (time how long) and extent of space
and measurement are expressed by the accusative ; as,
They marched three days : Tres dies iter f ecerunt. They fought
a great part of the day : Magnam partem diel pugnaverunt. The
river is three feet deep : Flumen tres pedes est altum. The sword
is two feet long : Gladius duos pedes longus est. He lived many
years ago : Abhinc annos multos fuit.
93. Place to which (limit of motion) is generally denoted by
the accusative with ad or in ; as,
He came into the city : In urbem venit. He set out for Britain :
In Britanniam profectus est. He hastened to the Rhine : Ad
Rhennm contendit.
(a) As a rule, the preposition is not used before names of towns,
or before domum, domos (home), or rus (to the country) ; as, He
went home : Domnm iit. He went away to the country : Bus abiit.
He came to Rome : it 6 mam venit.
(6) Before names of towns we find ad used to denote into the
vicinity of, and sometimes in contrast with d or ab; as, He came
into the neighborhood of Geneva : Ad Genavam pervenit. He
came from Rome to Marseilles : Ab Roma ad Massiliam venit.
(c) Observe that in English we say, He came to the consul at
Rome in Italy, while we say in Latin, Ad consnlem, Romam, in
itaiiam venit. In the English sentence, the phrase, at Rome, is
adjectival, modifying consul, and in Italy is adjectival, modifying
Rome, while their equivalents in Latin, Romam and in Itaiiam,
are both treated as adverbs modifying venit.
94. Many verbs (especially of the- senses and the feelings), such
as redolere (to smell or smack of), horrere (to shudder at), desperdre
(to despoAr of), tacere (to be silent about), dolere (to grieve over),
150 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
sperdre (to hope for), take an accusative in Latin, while in English
their equivalents require a preposition to complete their meaning ;
as, He smells of wine: Vlnum redolet. They shudder at the
cruelty of Ariovistus : Crudelitatem Ariovist! horrent. He
despairs of honors : Honores desperat. Despairing of safety they
kill themselves: Desperata salute, se interficiunt. He had been
silent about that : Id tacuerat. They grieved over my misfortune :
Meum casum doluerunt. He hopes for victory: Victoriam
sperat. They wait for Ccesar: Caesarem exspectant.
95. Intransitive verbs of motion, and some others, when
compounded with ad, circum, in, ex, trans, ob, per, prae
and praeter, frequently become transitive, and take an accusa-
tive; as,
He attacked the enemy : Hostes aggresus est. He began to cross
the river : Flumen transire coepit. He stormed the city: Urbein
oppugnavlt. He took th-e city by storm : Urbem expugna\ it.
They surpass all the Gaitls: Onines Gallos praecedunt. Tliey 1
crossed the Rhine : Rhenam transierunt.
96. Some intransitive verbs take what is called a cognate
accusative, which is akin to the verb in form or in meaning ; as,
No one lived a life of slavery: Nemo servitutem servivit. They
lived that life : Gain vitam vixerunt. He makes the same boast :
Idem gloriatur. He commits many sins : Malta peccat.
97. Closely connected with the cognate accusative is the accusa-
tive of reference or specification (or adverbial accusative), which in
prose is confined to a few expressions, such as mdximam partem,
id aetdtis, id temporis, id genus, and the neuters hoc, quid, etc.;
as, They live for the most part on milk and (the flesh of) cattle :
Maximum partem lacte atque pecore vivunt. He will learn hmv
brave the Germans are (literally, what they amount to with respect to
valor) : Intelleget quid German! virtute possint.
98. The accusative is used in exclamations, with or without an
interjection ; as, Ah, wretched me : Me miserum, or 6 me
miserum.
99. For construction with verbs of asking, teaching, etc.,
verbs of electing, choosing, etc., and transitive verbs com-
pounded with trans and ad, see Exercise VIII.
EXERCISE 11.
1. For a few hours OUT men were able to withstand the attacks
of the enemy. 2. For several successive days Csesar drew up his
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 151
line of battle, and gave the enemy an opportunity of fighting.
3. After dismissing the ambassadors and encouraging the lieu-
tenant, Caesar returned to the army at Rome. 4. Having become
apprised of their design he led his army to the river Thames in
the territory of the enemy, and afterwards returned home.
5. The Gauls had already led three-fourths of their troops across
that river. 6. Caesar led his army into the vicinity of Bibracte,
and remained there fifteen days. 7. The soldiers pursued their
march for five miles through marshes and forests. 8. He asked
the general how many miles the soldiers had marched, but he was
silent on that point. 9. The Gauls shuddered at the cruelty of
Ariovistus even in his absence (literally, absent). 10. He said that
the Gauls lived for the most part on milk and flesh. 11. He came
from Geneva to Rome, and afterwards set out for the country.
12. The river, he replied, was sixty feet wide and about five feet
deep. 13. He crossed the river, and, having attacked the enemy,
he began to storm the city. 14. Caesar led his army across the
bridge and followed the enemy four days through forests and
marshes for fifty miles. 15. It is dangerous for the Germans to
be accustomed to cross the Rhine.
EXERCISE XII.
USES OF THE DATIVE.
100. The indirect object (that to or for which anything is or
is done) is put in the dative,
(a) With intransitive and passive verbs ; as, He yields to the
time : Temporl cedit. A book was given me : Liber mllii datus
est.
(6) With transitive verbs in connection with the accusative ; as,
He gave me a book : Mihi librum dedit. (See section 69.)
N.B. In Latin the dative is found after such words as polliceor,
promitto, do, died, etc., where in English to is often omitted after
the corresponding verb ; as, All this I promise you : Id omne tibl
polliceor. He told me the lieutenant had come: Legatum veiiisse
mihi dlxit.
152 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
101. The indirect object includes the dative of interest
(coinmodi et incommodl), and the dative of service, end, or
purpose (see section 75) ; as,
They consult their own interests: Sibi consulunt. He cJwse a
place for settlement : Locum domicilio delegit. He came to Ccesar's
assistance: Caesar! auxilio venit. TJieij obey Ctesar: Caesarl
parent. They are superior to the Roman cavalry: EquitatuI
Romano praestant. Our short stature is an object of contempt to
the Go^uls : Gallls brevitas nostra contemptul est.
102. The dative of interest is used with adjectives to indi-
cate the person or thing affected by the quality which the
adjective denotes, that towards which the quality is directed;
as,
Death is common to every age: Omni aetati mors est communis.
Their departure resembled a flight: Eorum profectio fugae con-
si in i 1 is fuit. It is dangerous to the soldiers : Multibus perlculo-
snm est. TJie place was suitable for a camp: Locus castris
idoneus erat.
103. In Latin, possession is quite frequently denoted by the
verb sum with the dative; as, I have a father: Mini est pater.
No one had the ability : Potestas erat nulli.
With nomen est the name is generally attracted into the dative
instead of agreeing with nomen. A defining genitive is also
rarely used. His name was Servim Tullius : Huic Servio Tullio
(or Servl Tulli) fuit nomen.
104. Most of the compounds of sum, such as, adsum, desum,
intersum, obsum, prdesum, prosum, and rarely supersum and ab*nm,
take a dative; as, He is present to aid me: Mihi adest. TJtix one-
thing was wonting to Cozsar : Hoc unum Caesarl defuit. He took
part in the fight : Pugnae interfuit. This injures the speech : Hoc
oration! obest. He is at the head of the cavalry: EquitatuI prae-
est. He said that the name of 'brother of the Roman j>t'<>/>l? mmld
avail them little : Dixit longe Ms fraternum nomen populi Roman!
afuturum. (See section 56.)
105. The dative is regularly used with the gerundive to
denote the person on whom the necessity rests, the apparent
agent; as,
Yon must do this (literally, this is for you to do) : Hoc tibi
faciendum est.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 153
This dative is found also with the compound tenses of the
ordinary passive conjugation; as, This has received my approved:
Hoc milii probatum est.
If the verb governs the dative or ablative, the gerundive must
be used impersonally, and then, if ambiguity is likely to arise, the
ablative with a or ab is used instead of the dative of the apparent
agent; as, The consuls must be obeyed by the soldiers: Consulibus
parendum est a multibus. We must take occasion by the hand (use
the opportunity): Occasione nobls utendum est.
Notice also : He ought to be consulted by us : Nobls consulen-
dus est. His interests ought to be consulted by us: El consulen-
duiii est a nobls.
106. The dative is often found depending, not on a single
word, but on the entire predicate, where we should expect a
possessive adjective or a genitive. This is called the dative of
reference, and emphasizes the person or thing represented by
that case ; as,
He came in sight of the enemy : Hostibus in conspectum venit.
They ivished to be blameless in Caesar's eyes : Caesari purgati esse
volebant. He threw himself at Ccesar's feet : Caesari ad pedes se
projecit.
107. The so-called ethical dative is used to designate the person
who is supposed to be especially interested in what is said ; as,
But see (or mark you) he comes to me : At tlbl venit ad me. He
asked what they meant : Quid sibi vellent rogavit.
This dative is always a personal pronoun.
108. For various verbs with the dative (impero, pared, obsto,
minor, credo, etc.), see Exercise VI.; and for verbs that take
two datives, or a dative in connection with some other case,
see Exercise VIII.
EXERCISE 12.
1. Thereupon they all in tears threw themselves at Caesar's
feet. 2. He said that these matters were his care (literally, ivere
to himself for a care), and that the province must be defended
by you. 3. You must consult the general's interests. 4. He
answered that the man's name was Ariovistus. 5. The soldiers
should always obey the general, and the general should take
advantage of every opportunity. 6. To these men the answer was
154 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
given that the general had left two cohorts as a protection to the
ships. 7. He asked what Caesar meant, and why he was coming
into the territories of the Germans. 8. He saw that the river
would be extremely dangerous to the cavalry. 9. He said that the
departure of the Belgians was like a flight. 10. Word was
brought to the lieutenant at the camp that Caesar had given orders
to the soldiers not to hurl back any weapon whatever at the
enemy. 11. He asked that it might be permitted him to do this
with Caesar's approval. 12. An officer who had participated in
many engagements was in command of the troops. 13. He
answered that Caesar had threatened the leaders of the enemy with
death, and had ordered them to furnish two hundred hostages.
14. They thought they were going to persuade the Romans to
allow the Helvetii to pass through the territories of the Allo-
broges. 15. The soldiers told Labienus that Caesar had always
shown special indulgence to the tenth legion.
EXERCISE XIII.
USES OF THE GENITIVE.
109. A noun limiting or defining another noun, and not
denoting the same thing, is put in the genitive ; as,
Cicero's orations : Ciceronis orationes. Ccesar's lieutenants :
Caesaris legati. The bravery of the soldiers : Virtus mllitum.
This denning genitive may be possessive, subjective, objective,
partitive, descriptive or of definition.
110. The genitive is especially used in connection with
another noun to point out the possessor of whatever that noun
signifies ; as,
C<esar's army : Caesaris exercitus.
111. If the noun which is qualified by the genitive denotes
some action or quality such that, if it were expressed by a verb,
the noun in the genitive would be the subject of that verb, the
case is called a subjective genitive ; as,
The flight of Dumnorix : Dumnorigis fuga.
PARt II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 155
In the verb form this would be, Dumnorix fled : Dumnorix
fugit.
112. The objective genitive denotes that which is the object
of the feeling or action, that is, the genitive would be the
object of the action expressed by the modified noun in verb
form ; as,
The fear of death : Mortis timor. As a sentence it might stand,
We fear death : Mortem timemus.
Both these genitives may be used in the same phrase and modi-
fying the same word, the subjective usually standing first ; as, The
wrongs done by tlie Helvetii to the Roman people: Helvetiorum
injuriae populi Rdmani.
113. The partitive genitive is used to denote the whole of
which a part is taken.
This genitive is found in connection with nouns, pronouns,
numerals, adjectives (of all degrees), and occasionally with
adverbs of quantity, time and place ; as,
Part of tJie soldiers : Pars militnm. Which of you ? Quis
vestrum. At that time : Id temporis. Many of them : Multi
eorum. TJie former of tliese : Prior horum. TJie bravest of the
Gauls: Fortissimi Gallorum. Four of the soldiers: Quattuor
militum. At that time : Turn temporis. Where in the world are
we ? Ubinam gentium sumus ? There was nothing left : Nihil erat
reliqui.
114. With reference to the partitive genitive, the following
points should be noticed :
(a) It is seldom used with an adjective of the third declension;
as, Nothing base: Nihil turpe (but nothing mea?i=nihil sordid!).
(6) It is not used to denote the whole or any local part of a
thing, as the top, middle, bottom, beginning, etc.; as, TJie u'Jiole
of Greece: Tota Graecia. The top of the hill: Summus collis.
TJie middle of the river: Medium flu men. The foot of the moun-
tain : Imus mdns. The rear of the line of march : Novissimum
agmen. At the beginning of spring: Primd vere. In these
expressions the adjective usually comes first.
(c) When the adjective and the substantive denote the same
number of persons or things, the appositive construction is used ;
as, All of its were present : Omnes aderamns. We said tJiat very
few of us survived: Diximus nos perpaucos superesse.
156 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(d) With the positive degree of adjectives of number, we gener-
ally find de or ex with the ablative instead of the partitive genitive ;
as, A few of our men fall : Pauci de nostris cadunt. They lost a
few of their men : Paucos ex suls deperdiderunt. So with unus ;
as, One of his sons was captured: Unus e flliis captus est.
115. A genitive of description or characteristic, accompanied by
an adjective or other modifier, is used to denote character, or
quality, including value, age, weight, etc. ; as, A man of very great
prudence: Vir maximl consilii. A ditch three feet deep: Fossa
trium pedum. Stones of great tveight: Magni ponderis saxa.
Three months' provisions of ground corn : Trium mensuin molita
cibaria.
See also ablative of characteristic, section 124, a.
116. Occasionally we find a genitive of definition, usually with
the force of a noun in apposition ; as, The virtue of justice : Virtus
j ustitiae. TJie town of Antioch : Oppidum Antiochiae.
This genitive is not of frequent occurrence in prose, as the
appositive construction is generally preferred (especially in the
case of proper names) ; as, The city of Home : Urbs Ronia. The
isleofMona: fnsula Mona.
117. Many adjectives require a genitive (usually objective)
to complete their meaning :
(a) Adjectives denoting desire, fondness, skill, acquaintance,
memory, fulness, guilt, mastery, participation and their opposites ;
as, Fond of praise : Avidus laudis. Skilled in war : Peritus belli.
Full of confidence : Fiduciae plenus.
(6) Verbals in ax, and present participles used as adjectives,
denoting condition or permanent quality ; as, Productive of virtues :
Ferax virtutum. Averse to labor: Fugiens laboris. Fugiens
laborem would mean avoiding labor on a particular occasion.
(c) A genitive is sometimes used (seldom in classical prose) to
signify in what respect, or in relation to what, a quality is possessed ;
as, He selected a place halfway between them (literally, midway with
respect to both) : Locum medium ntrlusque delegit.
118. The genitive is used in the predicate to express pos-
session, duty, part, quality, price or characteristic ; as,
All things belonged to the enemy : Omnia erant hostium. I sell
corn at a higher price : Pluris veiido frumentum. It is the part of
a wise man to obey the law : Hominis sapientis est legibus parere.
To wait for the enemy is the height of madness : Exspectare hostes,
sum mac est dementiae.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 15?
If the person is represented by a personal pronoun, the neuter
of the pronominal adjective is used; as, It is my duty to defend the
city : Meum est urbem defendere.
119. The word on which the genitive depends is frequently
omitted, regularly so if it has been used previously in the
sentence; as, At the temple of Jupiter: Ad Jovis (aedem).
H<i.itnibal a boy of nine years: Hannibal an no rum novem (puer).
He had been in the army of Sulla and afterwards in that of Croesus :
In exercitu Sullae et postea in Crass! fuerat.
120. Such words as perlculum and commodum, in certain phrases
take a genitive where the English expression would lead us to
expect a dative ; as, From, him he learns about tJie dangers to
Cicero and the legion : Ab eo de perlculis Ciceronis legionisque
cognoscitur. He did this with advantage to the state: Hoc
commodo relpublicae fecit. He perceived that it would be attended
with great dangers to the province : Intellegebat magno cum peri-
culo provinciae futurum.
N.B. It may be stated generally that the objective genitive
with nouns represents not only the accusative as direct object of a
transitive verb (section 112), and the dative completing the mean-
ing of an intransitive verb (section 120), but also many English
phrases made up of the objective case and other prepositions
besides o/, even where, if the verb were used in Latin, a preposi-
tion with the accusative or ablative would take the place of the
objective genitive; as, Reputation for valor: Opinio virtutis.
For an impression on Gaul: Ad opmionem Galliae. War with
(or against) the Helvetii: Bellum Helvetiorum. Fondness for
war: Studium belli.
121. For verbs governing the genitive, see Exercise VII.,
and for verbs governing the genitive and accusative, see
Exercise VIII.
EXERCISE 13.
1. The wrongs inflicted by the Gauls upon the Roman people
were so great that Caesar could not forget them. 2. Considius,
who had the greatest experience in military matters, was sent in
advance with the scouts. 3. He believed that the soldiers of
Ariovistus were wholly inexperienced in this mode of fighting.
4. He said that this circumstance had dispelled all doubt as to the
arrival of the legions. 5. The general's hesitation on the previous
days prompted the Belgians to this measure. 6. He distributed
three months' provisions of ground corn amongst the soldiers.
158 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
7. Your letters are of great value, but your friendship is of
greater. 8. He was a man of very great ability, and most eager
for political change. 9. The top of the hill was held by the Roman
army. 10. He said that it was the part of a wise man to ask
the advice of his friends. 11. In the middle of this course there
is a large island which is called Mona. 12. Caesar's lieutenant
asked the scouts how many of the enemy there were. 13. On the
morrow of that day they sent the cavalry to follow up those who
had fled. 14. The soldier said that he had been both in the army
of Labienus and in that of Ceesar. 15. Word was brought to
Caesar that the enemy were full of confidence in themselves, and
were setting out for the vicinity of Alesia.
EXERCISE XIV.
USES OF THE ABLATIVE.
122. Three or four different relations are expressed by the
Latin ablative, as it discharges the functions of that number of
originally distinct cases.
123. The ablative proper expresses the relation from,
including,
(a) Source, separation and cause; as, A man born of most worthy
parents: Homo optimls parentibus natus. We need friends:
Nobis est opus auficls. He freed them from oppression : Eos
obsidione liberavit. He delays for the sake of supplies: Com-
meatus causa moratur.
All these ablatives are also found with prepositions ; as, TJie
Belgians are descended from the Germans: Belgae sunt orti ab
Germanis. The place was left empty of defenders : A propugna-
toribus vacuus relictus est locus. He was ill because of his wound:
Ex vulnere aeger erat.
(6) Place from which is denoted by an ablative with a prepo-
sition ; as, He sets out from the city : Ab urbe proficiscitur.
Names of towns, and of some islands, also domus and r?7s, are
put in the ablative without a preposition ; as, He came from
Corinth (or from the country, or from home) : Venit Corintb.6
(or rure, or clomo). The preposition is sometimes expressed
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 159
with names of towns to denote from the neighborhood of, and for
the sake of contrast with the name of the town marking the limit
of motion.
(c) A comparative adjective or adverb (without quam) is followed
by the ablative ; as, They are more, civilized than the rest : Ceterls
humaniores suiit. He says tJiat the Gauls are not braver than
the Germans : Negat Gallos fortiores esse Germanis. He set out
sooner than any one expected: Celerius omul opinione profectus
est.
N.B. This ablative, however, should be used only when the
comparative adjective is in the nominative, or the accusative after
a verb of saying or thinking, and is especially common in negative
and interrogative sentences. In the case of adverbs the ablative is
not used unless the substantive following the comparative repre-
sents the subject or direct object of the action expressed by the
verb implied in the comparative clause.
(1) If quam (than) is expressed, the noun or pronoun following
takes the case of the corresponding preceding substantive ; as,
Grasses ivas less encumbered than those : Crassus erat expeditior
quam illi. Cwsar says tJiat Ireland is less than Britain: Caesar
dlcit Hiberniam minorem esse quam Britanniam. He lived
longer in Italy than in Gaul : Diutius in Italia quam in Gallia
vixit.
(2) The comparatives plus, minus, longius and amplius, are
regularly used (with quam omitted) without affecting the case
of the following word ; as, They completed the fortification in less
than three hours: Minus lions tribus mfmltionem perfecerunt.
More than eighty ships had been seen : Amplius octingentae naves
erant visae.
(3) If two qualities in the same object are compared with each
other, the comparative degree of the adjective is generally used
after, as well as before quamj as, He is more brave than wise:
Fortior est quam sapientior.
124. The instrumental ablative expresses the relations with
and by, including,
(a) Means; as, The camp was fortified by a rampart and trench :
Castra valid fossaqne munita sunt. It cannot be determined by
the eyes: Oculls judicari non potest. They live on flesh: Came
vlvunt. With that legion he completed tJie wall: Ea legione
murum perducit.
(6) Manner, accompaniment and quality (or characteristic) ; as,
The war must be carried on in quite a different manner: Longe
alia rations est bellum gerendum. They followed with all their
160 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
trt it ins : Cum omnibus carris secuti sunt. He was a man of the
greatest boldness : Erat homo summa audacia. A spike as thick
as a man's thumb : Clavus digit! pollicis crassitudine.
(1) As a rule the ablatives of accompaniment and manner
require the preposition cum, when not modified by an adjective or
a genitive, and even when so modified the cum is often retained,
except in the case of such words as modo and ratione ; as,
He lived with me : Mecum vixit. He set out with a large army :
IngentI exercitu profectus est. He is slain with the greatest part
of his troops : Interficitur cum maxima parte militum. He kept
the soldiers carefully in camp: Cum diligentia milites in castrls
coiitinuit. He did this ivith the greatest care : Summa diligentia
(or, cum summa dlligentia) hoc fecit. TJiat must be done in a
different manner : Id alia ratione faciendum est.
(2) The ablative of characteristic (like the genitive of quality) is
accompanied by an adjective or other modifying adjunct. A man
of boldness = Audax homo, not Homo audacia.
(3) When the description refers to number, the genitive of
quality should be used ; to denote physical characteristics or exter-
nal appearance the ablative is the proper case, while for other
descriptions either case may be used, with a preference for the
genitive to express permanent or inherent qualities; as, He made a
nine days' march: Novem dierum iter fecit. They hare long ltir
(literally, they are [a people] of long hair} : Capillo sunt promisso.
He was a man of the greatest valor : Erat vir summae virtutis, or
summa virtute.
It will be observed that the ablative (like the genitive) of charac-
teristic may be used in the predicate.
(c) Definite price and value, with verbs of buying, selling and
exchanging, are usually expressed by the ablative ; as, He pur-
cliased the taxes for a small price: Vectigalia parvd pretio rede-
mit. He sold the house for two talents: Dudbus talentis domum
vendidit. He exchanged the booty for wine : Praedam vino
mutavit.
(d) The ablative of degree of difference is used with comparatives
and words implying comparison ; as, He made the sword a foot
longer: Gladium uno pede longiorem fecit. The Romans are
much braver than the Gauls : Roman! Gallls multo fortiores sunt.
He lived many years before Ccesar : Ante Caesarem multis annis
vixit. He encamped six miles from GW</* <-<t,nj>: Millibus pas-
suum sex a Caesaris castrls consedit. He recovered the city a few
/l<t,/x after. Faucis post diebus urbem recepit. He came to hi in u
few months before : Paucls mensibns ante ad eum venit. Ireland
is considered a half smaller than Britain : Hibernia dimidio minor
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 161
quam Britannia existimatur. TJie sooner the better: Quo citius,
eo melius.
(e) The ablative of specification or respect denotes that in respect
to which anything is true ; as, They excel the rest of tlie Gauls in
ad or : Reliquos Gallos virtute praecedunt.
125. The locative ablative expresses the relations at or in,
including,
(a) Place where or in which, generally with a preposition ; as,
CcBsar ivas in Gaid : Caesar in Gallia erat.
(1) Names of towns do not require a preposition, and in the
singular of the first and second declensions, the locative, which
there is the same in form as the genitive, is used ; as, He lived at
Cartilage, at- Athens, at Rome and at Corinth: Carthagiue, Athe-
nls, Roiiiae, Corinth! vixit.
(2) Like names of towns are the locatives domi, belli and mllitiae
(in contrast with domi), and humt. Rurl (in the country) and terra
marlque (by land and sea) are also used without a preposition.
(3) In the so-called pregnant construction (constrnctio praegndns)
where there is motion towards implied, we sometimes find an accu-
sative after the preposition ; as, They concealed themselves in the
nearest woods (that is, went into the woods and hid) : In proximas
silvas se abdiderunt.
Colloco and pond, however, take the ablative after in.
(b) Time when, and time within which ; as, He returned home on
the third day : Donium tertio die rediit. He did that in one day :
Id uno die fecit. Occasionally it appears to denote duration, but
in reality denotes time in the course of which ; as, They fought five
hours : Pugnatum est horis quinque.
(c) The ablative absolute (see Exercise V.) was probably origi-
nally identical with that expressing time when or position, but the
notions of cause, condition and other attendant circumstances have
been superadded to, and frequently have entirely superseded, the
original idea.
126. The ablative is used with the words, dlgnus, indlgnus,
contentus and fretus, and adjectives denoting full of or abounding
in, and free from or destitute of; as, Worthy of remembrance:
Dlgnus memoria. Umvorthy of honor : Indlgnus honore. Satis-
fied with the infantry : Contentus peditatu. Relying on assistance:
Fretus subsidid. A life full of fleasnres: Vita plena volupta-
tibus. A mind free from cares : Animus curls vacuus.
The ablatives with dlgnus, inrllfjniis, contentus, and with adjec-
tives of plenty, are probably instrumental, the ablative with fretus
local, and that with adjectives of want, one of separation.
11
162 PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
127. For verbs with the ablative, see Exercise VII., and for
verbs with the ablative and accusative, see Exercise VIII.
128. With passive verbs the primary agent is denoted by
the ablative, with a or ab, the secondary agent by per with the
accusative; as,
The letter was sent by Cozsar through a slave : Litterae a Caesare
per servum missae sunt.
With the gerundive, the apparent agent is turned by the dative ;
as, Caesar must send the letter: Litterae Caesarl mittendae sunt.
129. As was noticed in the case of the limit of motion, so with
the place from which, each of several phrases is in Latin taken
closely with the verb ; as, He came from the consul, at Rome, in
Italy: A consul e Roma ex Italia venit. (See section 93, c.)
EXERCISE 14.
1. He asked why the soldier had wounded the lieutenant with
a sling. 2. Cresar was passing the winter in Gaul with the troops.
3. He said that the Belgians had strengthened the place with a wall
and a trench. 4. A sudden attack was made on our cavalry by
the enemy. 5. Ambassadors had come from all those districts to
ask Caesar to come to their aid with an army. 6. He says that the
cavalry of the Belgians excel the rest of the Gauls in speed. 7.
They all stain themselves with woad, which produces a dark-blue
color, and on this account (hoc) they are of more frightful
appearance in battle. 8. This victory has cost the life of so many
brave men that we now need peace. 9 With such (is) swiftness
and vehemence did 'the soldiers advance, that the enemy could not
withstand the onset of the legions and the cavalry. 10. Caesar
with his army was distant from the enemy not more than ten
thousand paces. 11. He was informed that Labienus had collected
all the ships, two hundred in number. 12. On the same day he
ordered his lieutenant to move forward the camp and take up a
position at the foot of the hill, six miles from Caesar's camp. 13.
The letter was sent by the general, through a messenger, from
Massilia in Gaul to the consul at Rome in Italy. 14. He was a
man of the highest merit and worthy of all praise ; relying on the
friendship of the consul he came from Athens in the reign of that
king, and afterwards lived many years at Rome and Tarentum.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 163
15. (Being) a man of the greatest courage, (and) relying on the
assistance of Csesar, he spoke more freely and more boldly than
the other Gauls.
EXERCISE XV.
VERBAL NOUNS INFINITIVE, GERUND, SUPINE.
(a) The Infinitive.
130. The infinitive is a verbal noun used as the subject or
object of a verb, or as the subject of another infinitive ; as,
Being praised is delightful: Jucundum est laudarl. He f deter-
mined to set out: ProficiscI constituit. He proves that carrying
out their plans is an easy matter: Perfacile esse probat coiiata
perficere. Notice that the adjective modifying the infinitive is
neuter.
131. In vivid narration, to describe a series of actions, the
present infinitive may be used instead of an historical tense of
the indicative.
This is called the historical infinitive, and when so used it
is no longer a noun, but has the value of a verb, and takes its
subject in the nominative case ; as,
The Aedui kept putting off day after day ; they said (the corn) was
being got together, was being brought in, was close at hand : Diem ex
die ducere Aedui : conferri, comportarl, adesse dlcere.
132. Although the infinitive is a noun, it yet retains some of
the peculiarities of the verb, as ; for example,
(a) It is modified by an adverb instead of by an attributive
adjective; as, Brave fighting : Fortiter pugnare.
(6) It governs the same case as any other part of the verb ; as,
Obeying the laws : Legibus parere.
(c) It has the distinction of tense ; as, He seems to be writing, to
have written, to be going to write: Videtur scribere, scripsisse,
scrlpturus esse.
(d) It has a subject in the accusative case after verbs of saying,
thinking, etc., and when used as subject of a verb; and in the
nominative when used as an historical infinitive. See sections 12
and 131.
164) PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(b) The Gerund.
133. The gerund is a verbal noun (found only in the neu-
ter singular) of four cases, genitive, dative, accusative and
ablative, with uses similar to those of other substantives, except
that it is never found in the accusative as object of a verb.
Like the infinitive, it governs the same case as the verb from
which it is derived. In use it corresponds pretty closely to the
English gerund (or infinitive in ing), but it may frequently be
translated by the English gerundial infinitive with to.
EXAMPLES. I ivas desirous of seeing you (or eager to see you):
Avidus eram te vldendi. He ivas ready to obey the commander:
Parafys fuit ad parendnm imperatorl. He has come for tJie
purpose of persuading you : Tibi persuadendi causa venit. Ckesar
makes an end of speaking : Caesar loquend! flnem facit.
134. In a few cases, especially with pronouns, the genitive of
the gerund is used as a pure substantive modified by the neuter of
the pronominal adjective; as, Nor do they give the enemy an
opportunity of recovering themselves (literally, their recovering):
Neque sul colligendl hostibus facultatem relinquunt.
Or we'may consider sul here as the objective genitive plural of
the reflexive pronoun = the recovering of themselves.
(c) The Supine.
135. Another verbal noun is the supine, which is found
only in the accusative and ablative singular, with adverbial
force in both cases.
136. The accusative supine, or supine in um, is used
to denote purpose after verbs of motion (and a few others,
dare, collocdre, etc.); as,
They came to ask peace : Venerunt pacem rogatum. He gave
his sister to that man to marry (or in marriage) : Sororem illi
n upturn dedit.
The supine in um, which corresponds to the English gerundial
infinitive with to after a verb, takes the case of the verb from
which it is derived.
137. The rare future infinitive passive is formed by means of irl
(present infinitive passive of eo used impersonally) and the supine
PART II. SYNTAX AN> COMPOSITION. 165
in urn; as, He says the city will be taken (literally, there is a going
to take the city) : Dlcit urbem captum Irl. In this example it
should be observed that urbem is really the object of captum, not
the subject of captum Irl.
138. The ablative supine, or supine in u, is used as an ablative of
specification with a few adjectives, with the nouns fas, nefds, opus
and scelus, and occasionally with the verb pudet ; as, This is easy
to do : Hoc est facile factu. That is hard to say : Id est difficile
dictu. It is unlawful to say : Nefas est dictu.
This supine corresponds to the English infinitive with adjectives.
139. The supine in u does not govern a case, but is found in
connection with a noun clause which forms the subject of the
principal vert ; as, It is hard to say how powerful the Gauls are :
Difficile est dictu quid Galli possint. Here the clause, quid
Galll possint, is not governed by dictu, but is the subject of est.
Dictu is adverbial and modifies difficile.
EXERCISE 15.
1. After the assembly was dismissed, Caesar determined to buy
up a very large number of draught animals and wagons. 2.
They will not let slip the opportunity of freeing themselves for
ever, and of avenging themselves upon the Romans. 3. The
lieutenant brought word to Caesar that he had found the other
ships ready for sailing. 4. Such showers (literally, so great a
midtifaide) of stones and darts did the enemy keep hurling, that
there was no possibility to any one of keeping his position on the
wall. 5. Caesar replied that he was ever ready to aid the wretched
and to spare the vanquished. 6. By faithfully discharging his
duties and obeying the laws, he became very popular with his
fellow-citizens. 7. They sent ambassadors to Csesar to ask help,
and he sent three legions to their assistance. 8. He proves to
them that it is a very easy thing to do, to seize the supreme
power. 9. It is very hard to say how many there are of us. 10.
He has given his daughter in marriage to a very brave man in that
state. 11. They thought the best thing to do was to cut off our
men from supplies, and protract the affair into the winter. 12.
He had learned from the scouts that the river was distant from his
camp not more than ten miles, and that on this side of that river
the enemy were awaiting the arrival of our troops. 13. After
making a bridge, Caesar attempted to cross the river and pursue
166 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
the enemy. 14. He learned from the soldiers that the ships were
useless for sailing, and although he was ready to set out, he
thought that it would be extremely dangerous for the soldiers to
embark. 15. On enquiry (literally, by questioning}, Caesar found
out that the rest of the cavalry had been thrown into a panic by
the flight of Dumnorix and his horsemen.
EXERCISE XVI.
VERBAL ADJECTIVES GERUNDIVE, PARTICIPLES.
(a) The Gerundive.
140. The gerundive (or future participle passive) is an
adjective of the first and second declensions, and agrees with
its substantive. When so used in an oblique case, it is best
translated like a gerund governing that noun ; as,
TJiey came to seek peace (literally, for peace ivliich was to be
sought) : Venerunt ad pacem peteudam. The greatest difficulty
in building a bridge (literally, of the bridge which was to be built)
presented itself: Summa difficulties faclendl pontis proponebatur.
Observe that the gerundive is passive and does not govern the
noun, but agrees with it.
141. Often in the oblique cases it is immaterial whether the
gerund or the gerundive is used, but it may be stated generally
that with intransitive verbs tbe gerund is always found, and
with transitive verbs, especially after prepositions, the gerun-
dive is preferred. Indeed, it is seldom that the Latin uses the
gerund of a transitive verb with an object.
EXAMPLES. He is ready to help the wretched: Paratus est ad
succurrendum miserls. They advanced for the purpose of fighting:
Pugnandl causa progress! sunt. Cavalry were sent to folloiv up
the enemy: Equites missi sunt ad hostes Insequendos. Hope
deceived them ivith respect to taking the toivn by storm : De expug-
nando oppido spes eos fefellit. TJiey came with the object of
seeking peace : Pacis petendae causa venerunt. Ariovistus pro-
ceeds to seize Vesontio : Ariovistus ad occupandnm Vesontionein
(Jem.) contendit. (This use of the gerund is very rare.)
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 167
(a) It will be observed that ad and causa, with the gerund and
gerundive are regular ways of expressing purpose with short
phrases. (See Part I., page 102, footnote 1.)
(6) Note that the gerundive of deponents is passive, and that in
this construction (though not with sum, see next section), the
gerundive of iitar, potior, etc., is used as though these verbs were
transitive ; as, Hope of taking the town failed the enemy : Hostibus
spes potiundl oppidi discessit.
142. One of the commonest uses of the gerundive (but only
in the nominative and accusative) is to form as a predicate
adjective, in combination with sum, the so-called passive peri-
phrastic conjugation, denoting duty or necessity ; as,
All things ivere (or had) to be done by Ccesar at one time : Caesari
omnia uno tempore erant agenda. The line of battle must be
formed : Acies Instruenda est.
In this construction, intransitive verbs are used impersonally,
the gerundive taking the same case as the verb from which it is
derived ; as, The general must be obeyed : Iniperatorl parendum
est. These things ought to be used: His rebus utendum est. We
must leap down : Desiliendum est.
In such examples as the last three, the form in -ndum is, by
some, considered the nominative of the gerund.
143. The gerundive without a preposition is used in a predica-
tive agreement with the object of certain verbs to express end or
purpose.
Such verbs are trddo, do, loco, conduco, attribud and curd; as, He
hands these aver to the Aedui to guard: Hos Aeduis custodiendos
tradit. He provided for tJie transportation of the army : Exercitum
transportandum curavit. He took a contract to build a bridge :
Pontem faciendum conduxit.
Examples illustrating uses of gerunds and gerundives may be
found in Cajsar, Bell. Gall., II., 20 and 21.
(b) The Participles.
144. The present (or imperfect) participle is used to denote
the same time as that of the principal verb ; as,
While fighting he is slain: Pugnans interficitur. lie comes upon
the soldier 8 fighting : Mllitibus pugnantibus occurrit. Wliilf the.
soldiers "</* ,< tiding he fled: Mllitibus resistentilms, fugit.
168 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Observe that in English we use when or while, apparently in
connection with a participle without a finite verb. The sentence
is of course elliptical, while fighting = while (he was) fighting. In
Latin, dum and cum are not used in this manner, and we must
either leave out these words when we use the participle, or else
make the sentence complete, Dum pugnat, or Cum pugnaret.
Notice also such sentences as, When (or While, or As) a boy he
lived at Home : Puer Romae vixit, where a simple appositive is
used in the Latin.
145. The past (or perfect) participle is used to denote an
action as completed at a time prior to that of the principal
verb ; as,
Having encouraged tJie soldiers, he proceeded to the first line:
Cohortatus milites, ad primam aciem processit. Having been
captured by the soldiers, he was put to death: A mllitibus captns,
interfectus est. Having given this reply, he ivent away : Hoc
response dato, discessit.
Observe that the perfect participle of a deponent verb is, as a
rule, active.
146. It should be carefully observed that in English we often
use the present participle in a loose way, to denote something that
takes place previously to the action expressed by the main verb.
In Latin a perfect participle or an equivalent clause should be
used ; as, Promising to return in a short time, he took his departure :
Pollicitus se brevi rediturum, discessit. Hearing this he set wit :
Hoc audito, profectus est. Eeturning to the harbor he found the
ships ready for sailing : Cuni ad portnm rediisset, naves paratas
ad navigandum invenit.
147. The future participle denotes an action as about to
happen at a time subsequent to that of the principal verb. Its
chief uses are to form (with esse) the future infinitive active,
and the active periphrastic conjugation, which denotes inten-
tion or likelihood ; as,
He says Caesar will take the city by storm : Dicit Caesarem urbem
expugnaturum esse. He was going (or was likely, or intended) to
set out : Profecturus erat.
The participles, like the infinitives, denote time relative to that
of the principal verb. (See section 16.)
148. The commonest uses of the participle are :
PART n. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 169
(a) With a substantive in the ablative absolute construction (see
Exercise V.), and as an appositive adjective agreeing with the
subject or object of a verb. It then forms a substitute for a sub-
ordinate clause of some description ; frequently also for a co-
ordinate clause describing the doing of something leading up to
the final action (see section 49) ; as, When he had mt(de peace lie.
returned to the city: Facta pace, ad urbem rediit. Tlie enemy
s iir rounded our men while they were fighting : Hostes nostros pug-
nantes circumvenerunt. It was necessary that the punishment of
being burned at the stake should overtake him if lie were found
guilty: Damnatum poenam sequi oportebat ut igni cremaretur.
TJie enemy also had led forth their troops and drawn them up in
battle array: Hostes item suas copias ex castris eductas mstrux-
erant. Our men attacked the enemy and slew a great number of
thrni : Hostes nostri aggressl magnum eorum numerum occl-
derunt.
(6) The participles are sometimes used (chiefly in the oblique
cases) as substantives ; as, He followed up the fugitives : Fugieiites
prosecutus est. They stood upon the fallen : Jacentibus insiste-
bant.
(c) Occasionally they have the value of simple predicate adjec-
tives ; as, He is dead : Mortuus est. They ivere engaged in the
work : In opere occupatl erant. Gaid is divided : Gallia est
divisa. They are prepared to give hostages: Parati sunt obsides
dare.
EXERCISE 16.
1. Thinking that he could terrify the ambassador, he said the
town would be taken in three days and that he would avenge the
wrongs done to his father. 2. Caesar says that he will hand over
the prisoners to the cavalry to guard. 3. He thought that eighty
transport ships were sufficient to carry over the two legions.
4. Thinking this place by no means suitable for disembarking, he
waited at anchor until the ninth hour. 5. They threw the ambas-
sador into chains when he was attempting to speak. 6. Fatigued
by the battle, and hearing (section 146) that two hundred horse-
men were coming to the assistance of the enemy, our men began
to retreat. 7. Saying this, he threw himself into the midst of the
enemy and fell fighting. 8. A few days after that battle, he had
caused two bridges to be built over the river. 9. Alarmed by
the arrival of Csesar, they sent hostages for the purpose (causa)
of seeking peace. 10. The Gauls (who had been) surrounded by
the cavalry he ordered to be put to death. 11. Seeing the enemy
170 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
leaving the ship, he put spurs to his horse, and hastened to Cresar
at the camp. 12. They were assembling from all sides to defend
those into whose territories the Roman army had been led. 13.
Having encouraged his men, he gave the signal to them as they
desired it (literally, to them desiring). 14. He replies that Caesar,
promising to return immediately, has run down to exhort the
soldiers. 15. The two legions declare that they have always been
ready to carry on the war.
EXERCISE XVII.
IMPERATIVE, INDEPENDENT USES OF THE SUBJUNCTIVE.
149. In the second person, the imperative mood (regularly
the present) is used in Latin as in English to express com-
mands ; as,
Suffer me to breathe my last amidst this slaughter of my soldiers :
Me in hac strage militum meorum patere exsplrare. Consider
Gaid : Respicite Galliam.
This imperative has several substitutes or equivalents which are
frequently used, chiefly velim, fac or curd, all followed by the
present subjunctive (ut being usually omitted) ; as, Write to me, I
ivish you woidd ivrite to me, See that you ivrite to me, Be sure to
ivrite to me : Ad me scribe, Ad me scribas velim, Fac ad me
scribas, Cura ut ad me scribas.
These phrases are less direct and peremptory than the simple
imperative.
1 50. The imperative is seldom used in prose to express a
prohibition or negative command.
For this purpose we use most frequently, (a) noil, nolite,
with the infinitive ; (b) ne with the perfect subjunctive ; (c)
cave (ne) or fac ne with the present subjunctive ; as,
Do not do this, Be sure not to do this, Take care not to do this :
Noli hoc facere, Ne hoc feceris, Cave (or fac ne) hoc facias.
Do not deprive tliese of your assistance : Nollte hos vestro auxilio
exspoliare.
151. Tbe subjunctive is used independently to express :
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 171
(a) A wish, desire, command or exlwrtation ; as, Let us die for
our country: Pro patria moriamur. May lie return in safety:
Incolumis redeat. Let tJie prisoner be put to death: Captivus
interficiatnr. Let us consider the whole of Gaul : Omnem Galliam
respiciamus.
This is known as the hortative or jussive subjunctive.
To express wish or desire the subjunctive is frequently preceded
by utinam. The use of the tenses is governed by the same princi-
ples as hold in the case of conditional clauses with si ; as, I Iwpe
you may (or May you) Jiave such men, (Possibility) : Utinam tales
viros habeatis. Would that you had such men, (Contrary to the
fact at the pi'esent time) : Utinam tales viros haberetis. Would
that you had had such men, (Contrary to the fact in the past) :
Utinam tales viros habuissetis.
(b) A softened assertion in a polite or hesitating manner ; as,
This I would venture to say : Hoc dicere ausim (see Part III. , sec-
tion 66). You wmdd have thought them vanquished: Crederes
victos. Someone may say this: Hoc dixerit aliquis. I could have
wished you had been present : Vellem adf uisses.
This is called the potential subjunctive, and is really the case of
an apodosis with the protasis omitted (see section 79).
(c) Doubt, perplexity (dubitative questions), or a virtual negative
(rhetorical questions or questions of appeal), in interrogative
clauses ; as, What is he to do ? Quid faciat ? What was he to
say? Quid diceret? Who would believe the messenger (now)1 Quis
nuntio credat? WJio would have believed this man? Quis huic
homim crederet ?
152. When the simple imperative or the subjunctive is used
to express negative commands, wishes and exhortations, ne is
the proper negative ; as,
' Do not swear : Ne jura (not classical prose). Do not despise the
enemy: Ne hostes despexeris. Let us not attack the city: Ne
urbem oppugnemus. Let him not dare to return : Ne audeat
redire. I wish that he may not return : Utinam ne redeat.
(a) To connect such clauses neu or neve is used (seldom -re or
neque) ; as, Do not do this nor that : Ne hoc feceris neve illud.
Let all attack the leader, and let no one wound anybody else : Omnes
ducem petant neu quis quern aliuni vulneret. Neither provoke the
Aedui nor make war upon them nor their allies: Neve Aeduos
lacesslveris neve his socilsve eorum bellum intuleris.
(b) For the negative of velim and vellem use nolim and nollem ;
as, I irish you may not return : Nolim redeas. I could have wislied
(i<m liad not been present : Nollem adfuisses.
172 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
153. Notice such expressions as the following, where we should
almost expect the subjunctive ; It would be tedious to tell every-
thing: Longum est omnia narrare. It would have been better to
do this : Satius (or Melius) fuit hoc facere. You should have done
this: Hoc facere debuistl (or Hoc tibi faciendum fuit, or Te hoc
facere oportuit). It could have been done : Poterat fieri (see
section 85, N.B.).
EXERCISE 17.
1. Do not assist the enemy with corn or with anything else. 2.
Let us love our native land and fight bravely for our parents and
our children. 3. Let us not fear the enemy, however numerous,
nor return to the city unless victorious. 4. Leap down, fellow-
soldiers, unless you wish to betray the eagle to the enemy. 5.
Would that Caesar had sent two legions to the assistance of the
lieutenant. 6. Let the Gauls send envoys to the Roman general
to seek peace. 7. Remember the former valor of the Helvetii.
8. Labienus, my lieutenant, have two bridges built over this river
as speedily as possible. 9. Be sure not to report to the enemy
that the Romans have been defeated by Ariovistus. 10. Do not
persuade the soldiers to make an attack upon the enemy. 11.
Soldiers, fill up this trench with stones and the trunks of trees.
12. Do not forget the wrongs done by the Gauls to the Roman
people. 13. Order the soldiers to advance by forced marches into
the country of the enemy. 14. Perhaps some one may ask what
the enemy told Caesar concerning this matter. 15. Who can
endure that this should be snatched away from them ?
EXERCISE XVIII.
VERBS OF FEARING, HINDERING, DOUBTING, OBJECTING.
154. After verbs of fearing (chiefly vereor in classical prose)
and such phrases as metus est, periculum est^ that and lest are
translated by ne and that not by ut, both words being fol-
lowed by the subjunctive ; as,
I fear that he will do this (or lest he do this) : Vereor ne hoc
faciat. I fear that he will not do this : Vereor ut hoc faciat.
There is danger of his not doing this : Periculum est ut hoc faciat.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 173
N.B. Instead of ut, ne non is often used, regularly so after
non vereor.
155. Verbs of fearing may be used as modal verbs, followed by
the infinitive without an expressed subject; as, I hesitate to do
this : Vereor hoc face re.
156. Verbs and phrases of objecting to, preventing, doubting
and hindering are usually followed by quin or qudminus (con-
secutive or final), and the subjunctive. When quin is used,
the preceding clause is always an actual or virtual negative,
and this is also generally the case with qudminus ; as,
The feet was prevented from returning into the harbor: Classis
tenebatur qudminus in portum rediret. He could scarcely be
prevented from leaving the city: Vix inhiberi potuit qnln urbem
relinqueret. / do not doubt that he has left the city : Non dubito
quln urbem rellquerit. And a suspicion is not wanting that he
committed suicide: Neque abest suspicio quin ipse sibi mortem
consciverit.
157. It will be observed that quln and qudminus with the sub-
junctive often answer to the English gerund governed by a prepo-
sition ; as, I do not object to your doing this : Non recuso quominus
hoc facias. The Germans could not be restrained from hurling their
iveapons at our men: German! retineri non poterant quln in
nostros tela conjicerent.
158. Common expressions with quln are nemo est, there is no
one ; non dubitdre, not to doubt ; non est dubium, there is no doubt ;
minimum abesse, and haud midtum abesse, to be ivithin a little;
nihil praetermittere, to leave nothing undone; facere non posse,
cannot but, cannot help.
With qudminus are found deterrere, impedtre, tejiere, reciisare and
such phrases as per te stetit, it was owing to you.
159. Recuso, I object, I refuse, and dubito, I scruple, I hesitate,
are used as modal verbs ; as, He hesitates to cross the river : Flumen
translre dubitat. He does not refuse to speak : Loqui non
r ecu sat. Recuso is also followed by quln, and deterred by ne or
quln, and the subjunctive.
N.B. Prohibed usually takes the accusative and the infinitive.
EXERCISE 18.
1. I fear the soldiers will not be able to take the city by storm.
2. There was the greatest danger of the enemy's crossing the river
and making an attack upon the camp. 3. The general feared that
174 PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
the Gauls would attempt the walls with ladders, and that the
troops would not be able to keep them off. 4. We fear that
the general has been wounded by the enemy, but that he will not
hesitate to cross the river. 5. He feared that he should hurt the
feelings of his lieutenant. 6. It was owing to you and your
brother that we did not conquer the enemy on that day. 7.
There is no one who does not know that the Roman soldiers can
easily defeat the Gauls. 8. Caesar could not but believe that the
enemy were filling the ditches with boughs. 9. They hesitated to
raise objections to being for ever under the sway of the enemy.
10. He was within a very little of being slain by the enemy. 11.
Ten vessels were prevented by the storms from being able to reach
the same port. 12. He feared that the soldiers would not be able
to cross the bridge and attack the enemy in the rear. 13. There
was no doubt that the Aedui used to come to the Roman province.
14. He left no stone unturned to induce the Gauls to remain
under the sway of the Romans. 15. They are deterring the
citizens from bringing in corn, and are preventing (prohibeo) them
from assisting our troops in any way.
EXERCISE XIX.
DUTY, NECESSITY, POSSIBILITY, PERMISSION.
160. Duty or obligation is usually expressed in one of three
ways :
(a) Most frequently 'by the passive periphrastic conjugation
(gerundive with esse) ; as, You ought to do this (not/') : Haec tibi
facienda sunt. It ivill be your duty to do this (or You will have to
do this) ; Haec tibi facienda eruut. You ought to liave done this :
Haec tibi facienda fuerunt.
With intransitive verbs the gerundive (or, as it is sometimes
called, the nominative Of the gerund) is used impersonally as, I
must run : Currendum est mihi. I must obey the leader : A me
duel parendum est. (See section 105.)
(o) By debed ; as, We ought to do this (now) : Hoc facere
debemus. We ought to do this (to-morrow) : Hoc facere (eras)
debebimus. We ought to have done this : Hoc facere debuimus.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 175
(c) By the impersonal (or rather unipersonal) verb oportet with
the infinitive and its subject accusative ; as, Hoc nos facere
oportet, oportebit, oportuit.
N.B. Carefully compare with their English equivalents the
tenses of debed and oportet used to denote past or future action.
Compare also the English and the Latin infinitives.
161. Necessity (combined with duty) is expressed by the
gerundive; as,
We must die for our country : Pro patria nobis moriendum est.
To express absolute necessity, use necesse with the third person
singular of sum; as, All men must die : Omnibus mori necesse est.
162. Ability, or possibility, is expressed by the modal verb
possum; as,
I can do this now: Nunc hoc facere possum. I can do this
to-morrow : Cras hoc facere potero. I might (or could) have done
this yesterday : Her! hoc facere poteram (or potul).
163. Permission is expressed by licet followed by the dative
and infinitive (the real subject of licet) ; as,
You may do this : Tibi hoc facere licet. You might have done
(or you had permission to do) this yesterday : Tibi hoc facere her!
lieu it.
(a) After such infinitives as esse, fieri, etc., any adjective modi-
fying, or any substantive referring to, the preceding dative, agrees
with it in case ; as, We may become orators : Nobis fieri oratori-
bus licet.
(6) Both licet and oportet occasionally take the subjunctive (with
ut omitted) instead of the infinitive ; as, You may come to the city :
Ad urbem venias licet. You ought to come to the city : Ad urbem
venias oportet.
164. Notice the values of should in the following sentences
and the different modes of translating them into Latin :
((t) I said I should return to Rome, (should = shall of direct nar-
ration) : Dixi me Romam rediturum esse.
(b) We should all obey the laws, (duty) : Omnibus nobis legibus
piir end 11 in est.
(c) It is a crime that a Roman citizen should be bound, (here
" diould" expresses neither duty nor futurity ; the subordinate clause
illicit be rendered, "for a Roman citizen to be bound"): Faciiius est
vincirl clvem Rom a num.
176 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(d) If I should return to .Rome, I sJiould see you, (a softened
expression of condition and conclusion, less vivid and direct than, "If
I return to Rome, I shall see you"): Si Romam redeam'te videam.
Similarly in the case of the potential subjunctive, where the
condition is not expressed : I should scarcely make that assertion :
Vix hoc affirmaverim.
EXERCISE 19. -
1. At that time Caesar could easily have defeated the Gauls.
2. To these envoys the answer was given that the soldiers ought
always to obey the general. 3. He said that it would have been
better to do this. 4. He had to die yesterday, we must die
to-day, all will have to die some day. 5. The Gauls may be
cowards if they wish, but the Roman soldiers must needs be
brave men. 6. So far as Caesar was concerned, you had per-
mission to leave the camp. 7. They asked that they might be
allowed to do this with his approval. 8. You should have replied
that you could not leave the city. 9. You ought to attempt to
take the city by storm to-morrow. 10. You ought to inform
Caesar at once that the enemy are about to make an attack upon
our cavalry. 11. Caesar could have ordered that state to furnish
hostages. 12. He said the lieutenant ought to have won over the
allies of the Germans to the Romans. 13. You may remain with
the allies three months, and afterwards you will have permission
to return, to Rome. 14. He thinks the Belgians ought to fortify
the place with a wall and a trench. 15. Our fields ought not to
have been laid waste almost in sight of your army, our children
carried off into slavery, and our towns taken by storm.
EXERCISE XX.
USES OF QUOD, QUONIAM AND CUM.
165. (a) Quod (because) takes the indicative when it intro-
duces a statement positively on the writer's own authority or
containing the writer's belief; as,
They surpass the rest of the Gauls in bravery, because they are
engaged in almost daily struggles with tJie Germans: Reliquos
PAKT II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 177
Gallos virtute praecedunt quod fere cotidiams proelils cum Ger-
manls coutendunt.
(b) It takes the subjunctive when it introduces a statement
on the authority of another virtual or informal indirect narra-
tion (see section 216) ; as,
Socrates was accused because (as his prosecutors charged) he cor-
rupted the young men : Socrates accusatus est, quod corrumperet
juventutem. He complains because (as he says) he has been deserted :
Quod sit destitutus, queritur. Ccesar complained that they had
made war without cause: Caesar questus est quod sine causa
belluni intulissent.
N.B. On the same principle we find non quod (or quo) with
(generally) the subjunctive of a reason given to be rejected=?io
because (as one might suppose). So also quam quod (or quo) after an
actual or virtual comparative.
Frequently a sort of antecedent (such as proptered, eo, hoc or ed
de causa) is found preparing the way for the quod clause.
166. Quoniam (since) invariably takes the indicative (except
in indirect narration) ; as,
Since I cannot save myself along with you, I shall provide for ymvr
life at least : Quoniam me una vobiscum servare non possum,
vestrae quidem certe vltae prospiciam.
167. Cum, meaning since or although, that is, with a clearly
causal or concessive force, is always followed by the subjunc-
tive; as,
Since they coidd not defend themselves from tJie enemy, they sent
envoys to Cwsar : Cum se ab hostibus defendere non possent,
legates ad Caesarem mittunt. Thmtgh such is the case, Ccesar will
make peace with them : Cum haec ita sint, Caesar cum iis pacem
faciet.
168. Cum takes the primary (see section 28) tenses of the
indicative to express when, whenever, used with the English
present, perfect or future (see sections 200, 202, 205) ; as,
To these they quickly retreat ivhen it is necessary: Ad quos se
celeriter, cum usus est, recipiunt. Whenever a supply of this J:ind
fails they have recourse to the punishment of even tJie innocent:
Cum ejus generis copia defecit (section 202), etiam ad innocentium
supplicia descendunt. When lie returns to the camp I shall send
him to CcEsar: Ad castra cum redierit, eum ad Caesarem mittani.
178 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
When I say into the harbor, I say into tlie city : Cum in portum
died in urbem dico.
In the* last example the action expressed by the cum clause
includes that of the principal statement, and such a clause is often
best rendered by the English gerund preceded by a preposition ;
as, In saying into the harb&r, I say into the city.
In rhetorical questions, cum (when) with a primary tense of the
subjunctive is sometimes used ; as, Shall I say that the sea has been
closed against our allies, when your armies have never crossed over
from Brundisium, except in the depth of winter ? SociTs ego nostris
mare clausum fuisse dicam, cum nunquam a Brundisio nisi hieme
summa transmlserint ?
Here cum is really causal, Since such a state of affairs exists, I
need not say, etc.
169. Cum takes the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive to
express when, used with the English past (including the past
progressive) and pluperfect tenses ; as,
When the 'magistrates were collecting men from the country,
Orgetorix died: Cum homines ex agris magistrates coherent,
Orgetorix mortuus est. When this news was brought to Ccesar, he
made haste to leave the city: Caesarl cum id nuntiatum esset,
maturat ab urbe proficisci.
As a matter of fact in these examples, the cum clause, besides
marking the time, gives the reason of the action expressed by the
principal clause.
But the accessory notion is sometimes scarcely perceptible, the
cum clause merely marking an action which as a whole, or in part,
is antecedent to that of the principal clause ; as, He died after his
return home : Cum domum rediisset vita excessit.
170. Even when these tenses (past or pluperfect) are used
in the English, cum (when) takes the indicative in the follow-
ing cases :
(a) To mark two events strictly contemporaneous, turn, (then)
being frequently used hi the principal clause to define the time
more clearly ; as, When Cwsar came into Gaul, the Aedui were the
leaders of one party, the Sequani of the other: Cum Caesar in
Galliam venlt, alterius factionis principes erant Aedui, alterius
Seuam. When the li<'uti'nnt was in (laid
Sequam. When the li<'uti'nnt was in (laid Ca j sar was at
Cum legatus in Gallia erat, turn Caesar Rdmae erat. Were the
old men doing nothing when they were defending the state by tJieir
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 179
counsel and their influence f Senes cum rempublicam consilio et
auctoritate defendebant, nihil agebant ?
In the last example the action expressed by the cum clause
includes that of the main statement. (See section 168.)
(6) In a frequentative sense, to denote a repeated action preced-
ing that of the main verb. In such cases the pluperfect indicative
is used in the cum clause, and generally the imperfect indicative in
the principal clause ; as, Whenever the ropes were caught by these
and drawn in, they woidd be torn off: His cum f tines compre-
hensi adductlque erant, praerumpebantur.
(c) To introduce a clause, apparently subordinate, but really
principal ; as, Mid-day was now approaching, when he hastened
to the camp : Jam meridies appropinquabat, cum ad castra con-
tendit.
Here by an inversion the temporal clause becomes the main
clause, and the main clause the temporal. The same peculiarity is
found in the English sentence, which would read fully as well,
When mid-day w<is nmv approaching, he hastened to the camp.
Cum in such a sentence is a co-ordinating conjunction, and has
no influence on the mood of the verb : so cam .... turn, meaning
both .... and.
EXERCISE 20.
1. Since this is the case I shall order the soldiers to storm the
enemy's camp. 2. The enemy began to beat a retreat to the
mountain, because it was not far from their camp. 3. Csesar
complained because the enemy were laying waste the territories
of the allies of Rome. 4. Since he knew that Cicero was freed
from imminent peril, he thought that without anxiety he might
slacken his pace. 5. When the ships were drawing near the
island, and were seen from the camp, so great a tempest arose
that they could with difficulty hold their course. 6. Whenever
our troops made a vigorous attack upon the enemy, they would
retreat to their camp. 7. They all, whenever there is need,
engage in war. 8. The flag had to be hung out, which was the
signal when they were to rush to arms. 9. When the iron had
become bent, they could neither draw it out,- nor fight to any
advantage. 10. The soldiers were proceeding with the greatest
caution through the territories of the enemy, when the Helvetii
suddenly attacked them in the rear. 11. Although this was the
case, Csesar determined to push forward by forced marches
180 , PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
against the enemy. 12. At the time when the enemy were pre-
paring to storm our camp, Caesar was leading the soldiers across
the bridge. 13. In accepting the surrender of the Belgians, Csesar
was exercising his usual gentleness and humanity. 14. When our
men saw that the camp was being filled with great numbers of
the enemy, they immediately took to flight. 15. When Csesar
returns to the camp, our men will make an attack upon the
enemy.
EXERCISE XXI.
USES OF DUM, DONEC, QUOAD, ANTEQUAM, PRIUSQUAM.
171. Dum, used in a conditional clause, with the force of if,
or provided that, is always followed by the subjunctive ; as,
Provided that (or so long as) the facts remain, let them fadt Ion
words according to their fancy : Dum res maneant verba fingant
suo arbitratu.
The proper negative in such a clause is ne.
172. Dum, donee and quoad, while, as long as, merely
temporal, are followed by the indicative ; as,
Therefore depart while you have the opportunity : Proinde ablte
dum est facultas. He resisted with the utmost bravery, as long as
IK' iras able: Quoad potuit, fortissime restitit.
173. When dum (while} introduces a clause marking a longer
period within which something else has taken place, it is followed
by the present indicative, even when an historical tense is found in
the principal clause; as, While C&sar uxis delaying in these region*,
envoys came to him: Dnm in his locis Caesar moratnr, legati ad
eum venerunt.
174. Dum, donee and quoad, meaning until, take the indica-
tive to express mere time, and the subjunctive to express the
further notion of purpose, expectation, or end in view ; as,
I waited until he returned : Exspectavi donee redlit. He deter-
mined tJiat he ought not to wait until the Helvetii should reach tlie
territories of theSantoni: Non exspectandum sibi statuit dum in
Santonos Helvetil pervenirent. He determined to delay in Gaid
until he learned that the winter camp had been fortified: Quoad
mumta hiberna cognovisset, in Gallia morarl constituit.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 181
175. Antequam and priusquam (before), to denote mere
priority of time, take the indicative ; to denote purpose or a
result prevented, they are followed by the subjunctive ; as,
They did not cease their flight before they readied the river Rhine :
Neque prius fugere destiterunt quam ad flumen Rhenum per-
venerunt. Before the enemy should recover from their panic Ccesar
led his army into the territories of the Suessiones: Caesar, prius-
quam se hostes ex terrore reciperent, in fines Suessionum exer-
citum duxit.
The use of priusquam is commoner than that of antequam, to
express purpose or result prevented.
Caesar does not use antequam at all, and with priusquam almost
invariably uses the subjunctive.
N.B. These words are compounds, made up of ante or prius
and quam (than), which is used after the comparative idea in ante
and prius. The parts are sometimes separated by other words, as
in the first example. This separation is called tmesis.
EXEECISE 21.
1. While this was going on at the conference, word was brought
to Caesar that the enemy were riding up to our line and hurling
stones at our men. 2. The Gauls decided they ought not to wait
until Caesar reached the river. 3. As long as the consul lived he
was a friend to me and to the Roman people. 4. Before he should
make an attack on the enemy he sent forward a scout to learn
what their numbers were. 5. While Caesar was delaying in this
place for the purpose of getting vessels ready, the enemy sent
ambassadors to him. 6. It was the height of madness to wait
until the cavalry should return. 7. Before those who dwelt be-
yond the Rhine were informed of his arrival, he crossed that river.
8. Before he should make the attempt, he sent the lieutenant with
a war-galley to find out about these matters. 9. Provided that
Labienus is able to lead the troops across the bridge, we shall
defeat the enemy without difficulty. 10. While these things were
going on, the enemy who were in the camp took their departure.
11. While our men were getting the ships ready, it was reported
that the camp had been attacked by the enemy. 12. Before I
reached the city my friend had set out for home. 13. As long as
he was in the city I remained at home. 14. Caesar has determined
182 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
to attack the camp before the enemy are informed of his arrival.
15. Provided the enemy do not learn our numbers and position,
we shall make an attack upon them to-morrow.
EXERCISE XXII.
PRONOUNS AND PRONOMINAL ADJECTIVES.*
176. As the pronominal subject is really contained in the
. ending of the verb, the personal pronouns (ego, nos, tu, vos, is,
el) are seldom expressed except for emphasis or contrast ; as,
I shall come to-morrow : Cras veniam. You will reach the city
before night : Ante noctem ad urbem pervenies. He attacked the
enemy : Hostes aggressns est. It is thundering : Tonat. I at
any rate have proved myself a brave man : Ego certe me fortem
praestiti. I have injured tfie Gauls, you your fellow-citizens : Ego
Gallis nocul, tu civibus.
177. Hie is called the demonstrative pronoun of the first
person, and is used to denote something near (in time or
place) or belonging to the speaker, or something just men-
tioned or about to be mentioned ; as,
This present war : Hoc bellum. This place where we are : Hie
locus. This slave of mine : Hie servus. Not far away there ivas a
hill. This was surrounded by a marsh: Collis non longe aberat.
Hunc palus cingebat. . The character of the ground was as follows :
Loci natura erat haec. In forensic language, hie often means,
"my client. 1 '
We occasionally find hie used in a sort of condensed or preg-
nant sense in grammatical agreement with a word expressed,
when logically it belongs to some word like res understood ; as,
Through fear of this circumstance : Hoc metu. ( = Hujns rel metu).
Grief over this matter: Hie dolor ( = Dolor liujus rel).
178. Iste is the demonstrative of the second person, and is used
to denote something near or belonging to the person addressed ;
as, That book near you (or of yours) : Iste liber. As a law term
it means, "my opponent," " the defendant," and it also occasionally
implies contempt.
*N.B. It will be understood that the words treated of in this exercise are
pronouns when they are substitutes for nouns, and adjectives when they modify
nouns.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 183
179. Hie is the pronoun of the third person, and is used to
denote something remote (from both the speaker and the
person addressed), in time or place or thought ; as,
Those good old times : Ilia antlquitas. The people of that country
call them retainers : Quos ill! soldurios appellant.
(a) Hie, as opposed to hie, usually signifies the former, while hie
is translated by the, latter ; as, The rest who have remained at Jwme
support themselves and the others. The latter, again in their turn,
are in arms the year folknving, ivhtte the former remain at home :
Reliqui, qui domi manserunt, se atque illos alunt. HI rursus in-
vicem anno post in armis sunt, ill! domi remanent.
N.B. It is frequently used (generally in the plural) referring to
persons just mentioned, who are not the subject of the last sen-
tence, and then it may often be well rendered by an emphatic he
or they, or by the others, the enemy, the latter.
(b) Hie is used pointing forward to an appositive or a relative
clause explaining the demonstrative ; as, This much he promised,
that he would give them a safe passage through his territories : Illud
pollicitus est se tutum Iter per flues suos daturum. TJuit part
which I have mentioned above : Ilia pars quaui supra coimuem-
oravl.
Hie often means that famous or well-known.
180. Is is an unemphatic pronoun of mere reference. Un-
like hie, iste and ille, it has no special force of its own. It is
used to translate he, she, him, her, it, they, them, referring to
some person or thing already mentioned. Besides this pro-
nominal use, it is also found with the value of a demonstrative
adjective, this or that.
EXAMPLES. Orgetorix was by far the wealthiest man amongst the
Helretii. He formed a league of the nobility: Apud Helvetios
longe ditissimus fuit Orgetorix. Is conjurationem iiobilitatis fecit.
He acted in this ivay for the reason that he did not think he ought to
engage with tJie enemy : Id ea 'de causa faciebat, quod cum hostibus
dimicandum non existimabat.
181. It is regularly used as or with the antecedent of the relative
qul ; as, The day that he had agreed upon came : Ea dies, quam
constituerat, venit. Those who had crossed the river to forage had
not yet returned: II qul frumentandi causa ierant trans flumen,
nondum redierant. I am not the man to be frightened : Neque is
sum qul terrear.
184 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
182. Is is frequently no more emphatic than our definite, or
even our indefinite article ; as, He put the women in a place which
the army could not approach: Mulieres in eum locum conjecit quo
exercitui aditus non erat.
183. The demonstrative should not be used, as in English, to
represent, with a genitive, a noun already mentioned ; as, Between
our army and that of the enemy : Inter nostrum exercitum atque
hostium or Inter nostrum atque hostium exercitum.
The noun is repeated if of a different case ; as, Ccesar's army was
greater than that of the Gauls : Caesaris exercitus Gallorum
exercitu erat major.
N.B. The demonstratives hie, is and ille often (like the rela-
tive) agree in gender with a predicate noun where we should
expect them to be neuter ; as, This is life : Haec est vita. He
learned that that ivas merely a rumor : Eum esse rumorem modo
cognovit.
184. Ipse (self, very} is an emphatic pronoun which may be
used in apposition with nouns or with any of the personal
pronouns; as,
Cwsar himself (or in person): Ipge Caesar. We ourselves: Nos
ipsi. He slew Dumnorix himself: Ipsum Dumnorigem interfecit.
TJie very ground protected the barbarians : Locus ipse erat praesidio
barbarls.
(a) The genitive of ipse with or without the possessive adjec-
tives may be used as the equivalent of oivn ; as, My own fault :
Mea ipsius culpa. In their own tongue these are called Celts : HI
ipsorum lingua Celtae appellantur.
(6) Self (third person), and Ms, their, etc., referring to the sub-
ject of the verb, are expressed by the proper case of sul and suus;
as, Orgetorix slew himself: Orgetorix se interfecit.
(c) Where no emphasis is required, the Latin equivalents for
my, your, his, their, etc., are generally omitted, unless ambiguity
is likely to arise. (See Part I., page 13, footnote 2).
185. The one .... the other is alter .... alter; some ....
others, alii .... alii ; the one party .... the other party, alteri
.... alteri; as, The one part of this village he gave up to the Gaids,
the other he assigned to the cohorts : Alteram partem ejus vici Gallis
concessit, alteram cohortibus attribuit. Home ivere carried back
to the same place, others ivere thrown ashore at the Imuer part of the
island: Aliae eodem referebantur, aliae ad inferiorem partem
insulae dejiciebantur. Ttwse of one division fled to the mountain,
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 185
tlwse of the other to the baggage : Alter! se in montem receperunt,
alterl ad impedimenta se contulerunt.
NOTE. Some were carried in one direction and some in another
(literally, others were carried in another direction) : Alii in aliam
partem ferebantur. Some said one thing and some another : Alii
aliud dicebant.
186. Others is expressed by alii. To denote the others, the
remainder, the rest, we use ceterl or reliqul : as, Others kept hurling
javelins : Alii tela conjiciebant. The rest of them were doing tJiese
things : Has res ceteri faciebant. They could do nothing witJwut
the other legions: Nihil sine reliquis legionibus efficere potuerunt.
187. Some, any, some one, any one, as opposed to none, no one,
is aliquis (adjective aliqm): as, In them there was some dignity: In
iis aliquid dignitatis fuit. There is no one without some hope :
Nemo est sine aliqua spe. It is no fault of yours if some have
feared you : Non est tua ulla culpa si te aliqui timuerunt.
188. (a) Some, when emphatic, is often expressed by sunt qul,
erant qul, etc., followed by the subjunctive (see section 34) ; as,
Some said this : Erant qul hoc dicerent.
(b) Some, some few, is frequently expressed by nonnulU; as,
From some states envoys had been sent to the Germans : Legati ab
11 6 mm His civitatibus ad Germanos missi erant.
(c) Some one, some one or other, may also be expressed by nescio
quis (qul), which is treated as a single word ; as, I saw some one
standing near : Nescio quem prope adstantem vidi. It is used in
affected ignorance to denote that something is small, mean or
insignificant ; as, He had raised some trifling rumor (some rumor
or other) : Rumoris nescio quid afflaverat.
Similarly nescio quomodo, nescio quo pacto, etc., mean, in some
way or other.
189. Any one or any (substantive) is quisquam, and any
(adjective) is ullus when all are excluded. This happens in
sentences actually or virtually negative, such as rhetorical
questions, comparative clauses, or clauses containing such
words as sine, vix and aegre ; as,
No one tvas found : Neque repertus est qnisquam. Scarcely
any one would say this: Vix quisquam hoc dixerit. He was
braver tJian any of the Belgae : Fortior erat quam Belgarum quis-
quam. The battle was without any danger: Proelium sine ullo
periculo fuit.
N.B. Instead of quisquam the indefinite quis (qul) is generally
186 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
used after si, nisi, num, ne, quo, quanta ; as, He ordered the soldiers
not to hurl back any weapon at the enemy : Militibus imperavit ne
quod telum in hostes rejicerent.
190. Any, in the affirmative sense, when all are included is
qulvls or quUibet, the latter expressing less of deliberation than the
former; as, It is better for us to suffer any fate at the hands of the
Romans: Nobls praestat quamvis fortunam a populo Romano
patl. We ought to encounter any danger whatsoever: Quotllibet
adire peiiculum oportet.
191. Some, some one, certain, a certain one, is quidam, often not
more emphatic than the English indefinite article ; as, One of the
soldiers: Quidam ex militibus. Certain young men: Quidam
adulescentes.
192. Each, every (of more than two\ is quisque ; each of two is
uterque. Which (of more than tivo) is quis, ivhich (of two) is "/</.
All these are used substantively with a pronoun and adjectively
with a noun.
EXAMPLES. Every man was seeking for himself the foremost place
in the line of march : Sibi quisque primum itineris locum petebat.
On each bank of the river they had villages : Ad utramque ripam
fluminis vicos habebant. Each of us: Nostrum uterque. Wliich
of those two conquered ? Uter eorum superavit ?
N.B. The children of all the noblest citizens: Nobilissiml
cuj usque liberi. TJie greatest antiquity (i.e., priority of time) :
Aiitiquissimu m quodque tempus. At the earliest moment possible :
Priind quoque tempore. Every tenth man : Decimns quisque.
EXERCISE 22.
1. I remained at Rome for three years, but you returned at
once to Gaul. 2. The Nervii and the Aduatuci were waging war
against Rome : the former had taken up their position on the other
side of the river Sabis, the latter were fortifying their own town.
3. Some said that Caesar himself would not dare to lead the army
across that river. 4. This is a custom of the Gauls, that they
compel travellers even against their will to stop, and they inquire
what everyone of them has heard concerning each matter. 5. If
any of the Gauls is captured, he will be put to death by the
Roman cavalry. 6. If the defeat and flight of the Gauls alarms
anyone, he can learn that Ariovistus defeated them by stratagem
rather than by valor. 7. Before he should make any attempt he
ordered Divitiacus to be summoned before him. 8. From the
PAKT II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 187
shore they saw some leaving the ship, one at a time. 9. The ships
were made entirely out of oak, to endure any (amount of) violence
and buffeting. 10. They thought they could gain the victory
without a ( = any) wound. 11. Let each of us come to that place
with an army ; I shall not come in (any) other manner. 12.
Scarcely anyone was found to say that this soldier was far braver
than any of the Gauls. 13. The enemy were fleeing in different
directions. 14. The one set out to Caesar in Gaul, the other led
his army into winter quarters at Rome. 15. There was no doubt
that he with his own hand ( = himself) had inflicted death upon
himself.
EXERCISE XXIII.
THE RELATIVE PRONOUN.
193. The relative pronoun not only refers to some noun or
pronoun its antecedent but also introduces a separate clause
which it joins adjectively to the antecedent by way of limita-
tion or description ; as,
The bridge , which was at Geneva, he orders to be destroyed :
Pontem qui erat ad Genavam, jubet rescind!.
On account of this connective force, which is its special charac-
teristic, the relative is often called the conjunctive pronoun.
194. The uses of qui in final and consecutive clauses have
been already noticed. (See sections 25 and 34.)
195. On account of the fondness of the Latin writers for
indicating a visual connection between what follows and what
goes before, we find qui (pronoun or adjective) used instead of
a demonstrative at the beginning of a sentence, with or without
a conjunction (see section 8, N.B.); as,
Tliese Ccesar took the greatest pains to spare : Quos Caesar diligen-
tissime conservavit. When Ccesar ascertained this, he ordered the
soldiers to return to the camp : Quod ubi Caesar resciit, ut ad castra
reverterentur militibus imperavit. For this reason the Helvetii
surpass the other Gauls: Qua de causa Helvetii reliquos Gallos
praecedunt.
188 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
196. The relative is also used to introduce clauses of con-
dition, concession and cause or reason ; as,
If any one should put trust in this man he would make a great
mistake : Erret longe qui huic fidem habeat. Though Cicero all
the previous days had kept the, soldiers in the camp, on the seventh day
he sends five cohorts to forage : Cicero, qui per omnes superiores
dies mllites in castris continuisset, septimo die quinque cohortes
frumentatum mittit. It is not without divine aid that the Eomans
carry on war, since they are able to move forward with such swiftness
engines of so great a height : Non Roman! sine ope dlvma bellum
gerunt, qui tantae altitudinis machinationes tanta celeritate pro-
mo vere possint.
In these uses qui takes the subjunctive.
197. The following peculiarities of the relative should be
observed :
(a) In Latin the antecedent is frequently omitted, or rather
contained in the relative; as, TJiey do that which ( = what) they
are ordered: Quod jussi suiit, faciunt. He sent men to find out :
Misit qui cognoscerent.
(6) Occasionally the substance of the previous or the following
clause constitutes the antecedent ; as, A thanksgiving of fifteen days
was decreed, that which had fallen to no one's lot previously: Dies
qumdecim supplicatio decreta est, quod ante id tempus accidit
nulli. They feared that, as actually happened, they might be sur-
rounded by the enemy: Timebant ne, quod factum est, ab hoste
circumvenirentur.
(c) Often we find the antecedent repeated in the relative clause ;
as, Dust was seen in that direction in which the legion had made its
march : Pulvis in ea parte videbatur quam in partem legio iter
fecerat.
(d) The antecedent is often incorporated into the relative clause
(which comes first) and omitted in the other, being represented in
the latter by a demonstrative (hlc or is) ; as, That part which had
brought disaster on the Roman people was the first to pay the
penalty : Quae pars calamitatem populo Romano intulerat, ea
princeps poeiias persolvit.
In examples like this and the preceding (c), the relative has an
adjectival force.
(e) The relative is sometimes attracted into agreement with a
word in the predicate (see section 9, d)', as, Tfie Belgians wlw
(literally, which), I have said, form the third part of Gaul, have
formed a league against Rome : Belgae, quam tertiam esse Galliae
partem diximus, contra populum Romanum conjuraverunt.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 189
Observe that in this last sentence the relative clause in Latin
is treated as the object of the verb dlximus, while in the English
I fun-e said is thrown in parenthetically without affecting the
syntax of the adjectival clause.
(/) As (relative pronoun, adjective or adverb) after the same,
such, so great, as great, so many, as many, etc., is represented in
Latin by the relatives qul, qudlis, quantus, quot, etc., after idem,
tdlis, tantus, and tot; as, This is the same as {=identical with)
that: Hoc est idem quod illud. They are such ( = of the same
character) as they have ever been : Tales sunt quales semper f ue-
runt. The army was not so great as I had befare seen it : Tantus
non erat exercitus quantum antea videram.
Idem may be followed by atque or dc, instead of by qul.
(g) In the case of two successive relative clauses modifying the
same antecedent, the relative may be omitted in the second clause
(if the two relatives would be in the same case, or where the
second relative, if expressed, would be in the nominative or
accusative), or it may be repeated, or its place in the second clause
may be taken by a demonstrative ; as, He also prevails upon l)mn-
norix, who held the chief authority and ws rcry popular unth the
common people : Item DumnorigT qul principatum obtinebat ac (or,
ac qul) maxime plebi acceptus erat, persuadet. He has sent a man
whom we neither fear nor obey : Hominem, quern neque timemus
neque el paremus, misit.
(h) When in the English sentence the antecedent is modified by
a superlative, or by an emphatic adjective of number or amount,
the Latin equivalent for such superlative or other adjective is
usually placed in the relative clause ; as, Tliey have lost the bravest
leader they had : Ducem, quein habebant f ortissimum amlserunt.
He sent the few soldiers he had with him to our assistance : Milites,
quos paucos secum habuit, nobis auxilio misit.
(i) Finally in Latin (unlike the English usage) the relative is
always expressed ; as, I saw the soldier he had sent : Militeni qnem
miserat, vidi. He saw tJie boy I gave tlie book to : Puerum vidit
cul librum dederam.
EXERCISE 23.
1. The ships which he had built in the previous summer, he
ordered to assemble at once. 2. And 110 one was ever found who
would refuse to die for his native land. 3. Having arranged
everything for their departure, they fixed a day on which all were
to assemble at the banks of that river. 4. He said there were two
routes by which they would be able to go out from their home.
190 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
5. This man, since he ( = qul) had been elected through the agency
of the priests, Caesar ordered to hold the power. 6. Caesar,
although for three days he had permitted not even a camp fol-
lower to pass beyond the works, oil the fourth day sent two legions
to make an attack upon the enemy. 7. The standard bearer (use
qul without antecedent) of the tenth legion threw himself out of the
ship, and began to carry the eagle against the enemy. 8. Vesontio,
which is the largest town of the Sequani, was about ten miles dis-
tant from Caesar's camp. 9. Caesar saw that the same thing would
happen as had happened on the previous days. 10. He sent the
bravest horsemen he had with him to the assistance of the
struggling soldiers. 11. They will not strive with the same eager-
ness as they are accustomed to exhibit in battles on land. 12. If
we had no precedent for this course of action, I should judge it
a most glorious thing (for one) to be established and handed
down to posterity. 13. The scouts saw the horsemen Caesar had
sent to the assistance of the Aedui. 14. He sent in advance the
soldiers Caesar had promised to give the corn to. 15. Csesar is
not the man to send scouts to learn where the enemy are.
EXERCISE XXIV.
TENSES OF THE INDICATIVE.
198. The present tense is used of what is going on now at
the present moment ; as,
Ccesar is enrolling two legions : Caesar duas legiones conscribit.
It is to be observed that conscribit translates not only is enroll-
ing, but also enrols and does enrol.
(a) The present is frequently used in descriptions of past
events, in animated narrative (the historical present} as,
Ccesar makes haste to take his departure from the city : Caesar
mat u rat ab urbe proficisci.
(b) It is also used to express a general truth, or a continued,
repeated, or habitual action or state ; as, The gods sometimes grant
impunity: Di interdum impunitatem concednnt. They do not
permit wine to be brought in : Vlnum importarl non si mint.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 191
(c) With jamdudum, jamdiu, and jampt^idem, the present is used
instead of the perfect to denote what has been (and still is)
going on ; as, He has long been collecting forces : Jamdiu copias
comparat.
199. The imperfect tense is used to denote what was going
on in past time, and corresponds in general to the English past
of a continuous or progressive action ; as, -
He was wintering (or wintered, or did winter) in Gaul : In
Gallia liiemabat.
(a) The imperfect is also used to denote a repeated or habitual
course of action (translated by used to, would, etc.) ; as, He used to
have the greatest confidence in this legion : Huic legion! confldebat
maxime. They would retreat into the camp : In castra se recipie-
bant.
(b) It is also used to denote an attempted or an incipient action ;
as, TJie enemy began to hurl their weapons : Hostes tela conjicie-
bant. They attempted to prevent our march : Nos itinere proliibe-
bant.
(c) It is used in the description of a locality where something
took place ; as, Before that town stretched a plain about three miles
in length : Ante id oppidum planities circiter millia passuum tria
in longitudinem patebat.
(d) In describing battles and military manoeuvres, the imperfect
is essentially the tense of description, as opposed to the mere nar-
rative. It is used to express the actions, circumstances or feelings
antecedent to or accompanying the main action which is indicated
by the aorist-perfect. For a good example of such use, see Csesar,
Bell. Gall., II. 24.
(e) With jamdiu, jamdudum and jamprldem, the imperfect is
used with the force of a pluperfect ; as, He Jwd long been carrying
on war : Jamprldem bellum gerebat.
200. The future tense is used to denote what is going to take
place at some time after the present : that is, after the time at
which the statement is made ; as,
Casar will take the city by storm ; Caesar urbem expugnablt.
In English we often use the present (especially with if and
when) in a loose way for the future. In Latin the future is the
proper tense when the actions are contemporaneous ; as, I shall
N< r linn ii-fu'/i lif /.s at home : Cum domi orlt, eum videbo.
201. The Latin perfect does duty for two English tenses:
192 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(1) It is used to denote an action completed at the present
moment, or within a portion of time of which the present is a part.
It is then translated by means of have, and is the equivalent of the
English present perfect ; as, He has returned home : Domum
rediit.
N.B. It is to be observed that in English we occasionally use
the verb to be as an auxiliary for the perfect tense, especially with
intransitive verbs of motion, and with other verbs in the passive ;
as, He is gone home : Domum lit. The messengers are killed :
Nuntii inter fectl sunt. So, He was gone = He had gone.
(2) It is the tense of narrative, our aorist or past indefinite.
In this sense it is used to show that something was done in the
past, without reference to the continuance or completeness of the
action ; as, He sent forward the cavalry : Equitatum praemisit.
202. The perfect is used in subordinate clauses to denote a
repeated action, preceding that of the main verb, which is in the
present ; as, Whenever they have worked (or work) their way in
between the squadrons of cavalry, they leap from their chariots and
fight on foot : Cum se inter equitum turmas Insinuaverunt, ex
essedis desiliunt et pedibus proeliantur.
203. Latin has something almost equivalent to a perfect tense in
the use of the present tense of habeo, followed by an object which
is modified by a perfect participle passive in the way of an accusa-
tive predicate adjective. These phrases literally express only the
possession of the result of a past action, but in some cases they are
expressions for the action itself and approach the value of the
regular perfect ; as, He has very many states attached to him, by
reason of his kindness : Plurimas civitates suo beneficio habet
obstrictas. Tliis I have learnt through messengers: Hoc per
nuntios compertum habeo.
Compare the transition from I have the letter written, to I have
written the letter.
N.B. Some perfects, such as meminl, novi and consuevl, have
the force of presents, I remember, I know, I am accustomed. Their
pluperfects have the value of imperfects. Nosco = / learn ; Con-
suesco=7 become accustomed.
204. The pluperfect tense is used to mark the act as com-
pleted at some stated time in the past ; as,
Tliey had already reached the territories of theAedui: Jam in
Aeduorum fines pervenerant.
(a) The pluperfect is used in subordinate clauses to denote a
repeated action in past time preceding that of the main verb,
which is usually in the imperfect ; as, Whenever any cohort left the
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 193
square (literally, circle) and made an attack, the enemy would make
a most rapid retreat : Cum quaepiam cohors ex orbe excesserat
atque impetum fecerat, hostes velocissime refugiebant.
(6) A past tense of habeo is used with a perfect participle passive
in agreement with the object, to make a phrase nearly equivalent
to a pluperfect (see section 203, above) ; as, He had collected
><.(! (dry from all the province : Equitatum ex omni provincia coac-
tum habebat (nearly equal to coegerat). They were persuaded
(literally, they had it persuaded to themselves) that the Romans were
attempting to' ann<\' 1 that district to the neighboring province:
Rdmanos ea loca finitimae provinciae adjungere conari, sibi
persuasum liabebant.
In the last example persuasum agrees with the clause Rdmanos
.... condrl, which is the object of habebant.
(c) In letters the imperfect and pluperfect are often used for the
present and perfect, there being an implied reference to the time
when the letter is received ; as, I hare nothing to write. Foi' I
have heard nothing neiv, and I have already answered all your
letters : Nihil habebam quod scriberem. Neque enim novi quid-
quam audieram et ad tuas omnes epistolas rescripseram.
In a somewhat similar way Csesar (thinking of the reader) some-
times uses the pluperfect in alluding to some fact or action already
mentioned, where we should expect the perfect ; as, The Belgians
who, as we have said, occupy (literally, are) the third part of Gaul,
formed a league against the Roman people : Belgae quam tertiam
esse Galliae partem dlxeramus contra populum Romanum con-
juraverunt.
205. The future perfect is used to denote that the act will
be completed at some stated time in the future ; as,
When Cmsar shall have returned (returns) to the camp, we shall
make an attack upon the enemy : Cum Caesar ad castra redierit, in
hostes impetum faciemus.
(a) In English we almost invariably use the present (occasionally
the perfect) in a loose way for the future perfect, especially in
clauses introduced by if, ivhen, whoever, whatever, etc. In Latin
the future perfect is the proper tense when the action of the sub-
ordinate verb, though future, is antecedent to that of the principal
verb ; as, Whoever does that will be punished : Qui id fecerit sup-
plicio afficietur.
(b) The future perfect is sometimes used to denote a prompt or
speedy action, and may be rendered by shall (or will) be found to
Have ; as, I at any rate shall be found to have done my duty to the
state : Ego certe meum reipublicae officium praestitero.
13
194 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
EXERCISE 24.
1. To this legion Caesar had shown especial indulgence, and he
placed the greatest reliance (on it) on account of its bravery. 2.
On the following day they move their camp from that place.
Caesar does the same, and sends all the cavalry in advance. 3.
Now the Britons call (it) a town whenever they secure the impass-
able forests with a rampart and a trench. 4. Whenever our cavalry
rushed out into the fields, the British leader would engage with
them, to the great peril of our horse. 5. If you assist them with
corn or with anything else, I shall regard you in the same light as
the Helvetii. 6. If Caesar is at the head of the Roman army, he
will easily defeat the Gauls. 7. Before midnight the enemy will
have laid aside their arms. 8. For many years he had all the
revenues of the Aedui leased at a small price. 9. He marched
through the forest of Ardennes, which was the largest of all Gaul,
and extended from the banks of the Rhine to the Nervii. 10.
When they saw that the tower was approaching the walls, they sent
ambassadors to Caesar concerning peace. 11. For the reasons I
have mentioned, Caesar had determined to cross the Rhine. 12.
Within ten days after (literally, within which) the material had
begun to be brought together, the whole work was finished, and
the army led across. 13. The enemy had already reached the ter-
ritories of the Aedui, and were laying waste their lands. 14.
Caesar in person proceeds by forced marches into Italy, and there
levies two legions. 15. His brother, who had already left the
field, perceiving this at a distance, threw himself in front of the
enemy and was killed.
EXERCISE XXV.
DIFFERENT FORMS OF THE NOUN CLAUSE.
206. A noun (or substantive) clause is one that takes the
place and discharges the functions of a substantive, as subject
or object of a verb (including the infinitive), or as an appositive
to some other word in the sentence.
Most of the varieties of this clause have been already dealt
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 195
with, but it is considered worth while, for convenience of
reference, to treat of them together.
N.B. The accusative and infinitive is treated as a clause, since,
though from the English standpoint it would be considered a
phrase, it represents our noun sentence, with or without the
conjunction that.
207. The commonest way of expressing in Latin an English
noun clause is by means of an infinitive with its subject
accusative.
This is especially the case with verbs of saying and thinking, and
with expressions composed of the third person singular of the verb
to be and an adjective. (See section 12.)
EXAMPLES.
(a) Subject. It has been said that the Gauls hold this part : Hano
partem Gallos obtinere dictum est. It ivas dangerous for the
Germans to cross the Rhine : Germanos Rlienum transire pericu-
losum erat.
Notice that neither the introductory it nor for is translated
into Latin by a separate word.
(6) Object. Then thought they possessed limited territories: An-
gnstos se flues habere arbitrabantur.
(c) Appositive. This report was brought to Ccesar, that they were
attempting to march through our province : Caesarl id nuntiatum
est, eos per provinciam nostram iter facere conarl.
208. Instead of the accusative and infinitive, a clause with
ut, ne, quln or quominus, is found where the noun clause
involves a notion of purpose or result. Such clauses, in
origin adverbial, have come to be looked upon as possessing
a substantive force, the final or consecutive notion being in
many cases almost imperceptible. (See sections 27, 33, 154,
156, 157 and 158.)
EXAMPLES. ,
I. PURPOSE.
(a) Subject. The soldiers were ordered to attack the enemy : Militi-
bus imperatum est ut hostes aggrederentur.
Observe the gender of noun phrases and clauses.
(b) Object. He prevented their leaving the city: Effecit ne ex
urbe exirent.
196 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(c) Appositive. They attempt to carry out that which they had
determined on, namely, to leave their territories : Id quod consti-
tuerant facere conantur, ut e finibus exeant.
N.B. We sometimes find the subject of a substantive clause
anticipated by a noun or pronoun standing as the direct object
(accusative of anticipation) of the verb in the principal sentence,
the dependent clause thus becoming a restrictive appositive to the
direct object; as, They had fears about the corn supply, that it might
not be com-eniently brought in: Rem frumentariain ut satis
commode supportari posset timent.
II. RESULT.
(a) Subject. It happened that there was a full moon : Accidit ut
esset plena luna.
(6) Object. He brought it about that supplies could be conveyed to
him without danger : Efficiebat ut commeatus posset sine peri-
culo portarl ad euni.
(c) Appositive. The day had this result, that a very great number
of the enemy were wounded : Dies hunc habuit eventum ut maximns
hostinm numerus vulneraretur.
209. If the sentence contains the notion of cause, or if the
fact is to be especially emphasised, we may have a clause
introduced by quod. (See section 165, b.)
EXAMPLES.
(a) Subject. There was added that they griereil that their children
had been taken from them : Accedebat quod suos ab se llberos
abstractos dolebant.
(6) Object. He makes the complaint that he has been abandoned :
Quod sit destitutus queritur.
In this example it will be observed that the noun clause shades
into an adverbial one, the object and cause being identical.
(c) Appositive. A most fortunate thing happened, that on the
morrow of that day tlie Germans came into the camp: Opportunis-
sima res accidit, quod postridie ejus die! German! in castra
venerunt.
N.B. Clauses with quod are sometimes found at the beginning
of sentences to repeat the substance of something already stated
or referred to, when the quod may often be best translated by as
to or as to the fact thftt ; as, As to your hoaxing so inxnttiiKtbj of
your victory, it comes to the same thing : Quod vestra victoria tarn
msolenter gloriamini, eodem pertinet. As to your threat that you
will not disregard the wiwigs of the Aedui, no one has contended
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 197
with me, except to Jtis oicn destruction: Quod mihi denuntias te
Aeduorum injurias non neglecturum, nemo mecum sine sua
pernicie contendit.
In the first of these examples the quod clause is subject of
pert i net; in the second it is equivalent to a phrasal adverbial
accusative of reference. 1
210. If the subordinate clause is introduced by an interroga-
tive word, the clause takes the form of a dependent or indirect
question. (See section 43.)
EXAMPLES.
(a) Subject. It cannot be determined with the eyes in what direc-
tion it flows : Oculis in utram partem fluat judicarl 11011 potest.
(6) Object. He found out what was being done : Cognovit quid
fleret.
(c) Appositive. Tliis is the real question, whether he lias returned :
Iliad quaeritur num redierlt.
211. Some verbs have more than one construction, the dif-
ference of construction, in most cases, representing a difference
of meaning.
EXAMPLES.
(a) The majority decided to defend Hie camp : Placuit major!
parti defendere castra. He decided to send ambassadors to
Ariovistus : Placuit el ut ad Ariovistum legates mitteret.
(6) It was added that they bore the tempest more easily: Accedebat
ut tempestatein ferrent facilius. (See also section 209, a.)
(c) They determine that these should leave the town : Constituunt
ut^il oppidd excedant. Tliey determined that it was best for each
man to return to his home : Constituerunt optimum esse domum
suam quemque revert!.
(d) He ivas informed that all these states hud been brought under
the sway of the Roman people : Certior factus est omnes eas
clvitates in dicionem populi R6ma.nl esse reductas. He directs
the soldiers to cease the fight for a little : Milites certiores facit
paulisper intermitterent proelium.
1. The explanation of the sj'ntax of such claiises as the last is probably this, the
quod was originally a relative pronoun, accusative of reference, with the clause in
apposition to it, then the pronominal force was lost, the quod being used as a mere
introductory conjunction, and the clause taking its present value of an adverbial
phrase. In the first example the quod was probably originally in the nominative.
Compare the origin of the l-.nglish conjunction tlmt.
198 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(e) He orders the soldiers to attack the camp : Militibus imperat
ut castra oppuguarent. He o/v/r/'.s thru: li<jht <jallei/x to be built:
Has actuaries imperat fieri. (With im-pero, the accusative and
infinitive is found, as a rule, only when the infinitive is passive.)
(/) They do not suffer the rest to nutke a stand: Reliquos
consistere noil patiuntur. (This is the usual construction with
patior). Tlie custom of the Roman people did not allow him to
abandon the allies: Non populi Roman! consuetudo patiebatur uti
socios desereret.
(g) He ivas ordered not to leave the camp: Nuntiatum est el ne
oastra relinqueret. (See also section 207, c.)
N.B. It will be observed that verbs of determining, saying,
directing, etc., take the accusative and infinitive, when the original
words of the speaker would be in the indicative expressing a state-
ment, and the subjunctive with ut (sometimes omitted) or ne,
when the original words would express a command in the impera-
tive or subjunctive. See section 214, a, (1).
EXERCISE 25.
1. He felt that it would result in great danger to the province to
(ut) have enemies of the Roman people (as) neighbors. 2. In the
meantime he sent (messengers) to the cavalry officers to announce
that they were not to provoke the enemy to battle. 3. As to your
statement that the soldiers will not advance, I am not at all dis-
turbed by that circumstance. 4. By means of messengers he
informs Caesar what he thinks ought to be done. 5. There was
added to this that he had already said in the assembly that the
chief power of the state was being conferred upon him by Caesar.
6. It happened that some of the soldiers were intercepted by^the
sudden approach of the cavalry. 7. It was reported that Caesar
had given orders to the soldiers to storm the camp of the enemy.
8. The result was that he was unable to learn what tribes
inhabited the island. 9. They made the complaint that the
enemy were laying waste their territories. 10. This had been
reported to Caesar, that the enemy had made an attempt to cross
the river. 11. He was of the opinion that it would be very
dangerous to the province that the enemy should become accus-
tomed to cross the Rhine. 12. He answered that he did not
know why the soldiers had received orders to attack the town.
13. There is no doubt that the Helvetii are the most powerful of
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 199
all Gaul. 14. They do not doubt that he will inflict the most
severe punishment upon the prisoners. 15. The enemy were
trying to prevent our men from crossing the bridge.
EXERCISE XXVI.
INDIRECT NARRATION ORATIO OBLIQUA.
212. Direct discourse (oratio recta} is that form of speech
which gives the exact words of the original speaker or writer ;
as,
"J," said he, "will come to the city": "Ego," inquit, "ad
urbem veniam."
213. Indirect discourse (oratio obllqua) gives the substance
of the thought or words of some other person, or even of the
speaker or writer under other circumstances ; as,
He said he wonld come to the city : Dlxit se ad urbem esse
venturum. The latter is the usual construction in Latin with all
rerba sentiendl et deddrandl except inquit.
214. The following are the principal rules for changing
oratio recta into oratio obllqua : -
(a) With regard to verbs :
(1) In principal clauses, statements and denials are expressed by
the infinitive, so also such rhetorical questions as in the direct
form would have the indicative mood in the first or third person ;
other questions, also wishes, commands and prohibitions, by the
tive.
(2) In subordinate clauses the subjunctive is the proper mood.
As a general rule the historical tenses are used.
N.B. If for any reason the subjunctive is used in the. direct
narration, that mood is, of course, retained in the indirect, chang-
ing, if necessary, the tense and person.
(3) With regard to tenses in subordinate clauses after secondary
tenses, the present, imperfect and future of direct narrative are
represented by the imperfect subjunctive, and the perfect, plu-
perfect and future perfect, by the pluperfect subjunctive.
(6) With regard to pronouns. Since the exact words of the
speaker are not given, it follows that only pronouns of the third
200 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
person will be found (unless the matter quoted refers to the person
reporting or the person to whom it is reporte 1).
(1) Ego, nvs, are changed to se (in the nominative '/>, ipsi) ;
metis, noster, to "",s.
(2) Til, vos, are changed to ille (sometimes is), illi ; tuns, rester,
to illlus, ill<~i ni in, ipxius, ipsornm.
(3) Hlc and iste will become ille or is.
(c) With regard to adverbs. Adverbs denoting present time
will be changed to those marking the past. So, adverbs referring
to this place will be changed to those denoting that place.
Xitnc, hodie, /(/<, /V/v, ov7.s become respectively turn or tune,
illo die, ibi or illli.; jir'ifi', itosirldit.
215. We occasionally find real or apparent exceptions to the
above rules.
(a) For the sake of greater vividness, in the subordinate and
imperative clauses the primary tenses are used instead of the
historical. This is especially the case when there is a statement
of a general truth, and naturally also when the governing verb is
in a primary tense.
(b) The hortative subjunctive in the first person plural is usually
changed into the gerundive with esse, the subject becoming the
dative of the apparent agent; as, Let us cross the river, said they:
Flumen sibi transeundum esse dixerunt. Their exact words
would be, Flumen transeamus.
(c) For the sake of vividness (or owing to the carelessness of
the writer), the pronouns and adverbs of the direct narration are
often retained. Frequently, instead of ille, the proper name is
used to represent the pronoun of the second person. Csesar often
uses nos and noster in speaking of the Roman people, even when
the words are from the mouth of a foreigner.
(d) The pronouns of indirect narration are sometimes inter-
changed (<'.<(., f>e for eum), and occasionally forms of the same
pronoun are used in referring to two different persons in the same
clause, generally where no ambiguity arises.
(e) An apparent exception is found in the use of the indicative
in subordinate clauses introduced parenthetically or by way of
explanation, giving the thought of the writer, and forming no part
of the reported speech; as, They briny bad; word that there is in
tlntl neighborhood a forest of vast extent, which is called Barmix:
Referunt silvam esse ibi mfmita magnitudine, quae appellatur
Bacenis. Here quae appellatur Bac5nis, is an explanatory clause
added by the writer, and it forms no part of the report.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 201
Very rarely we find the indicative used in a clause that forms
part of the reported speech ; it seems to make the fact more
prominent.
(/) It must be borne in mind that the relative is sometimes
equivalent to a demonstrative, and in such case the clause intro-
duced by it may have the construction of a principal sentence ; as,
From this it could be jucl^.-d n-]d an advantage there was in
undaunted courage : Ex quo judicaii posse quantum haberet in se
bom constantia.
(g) In quam clauses after a comparative (including clauses intro-
duced by antequam and priusquani), the verb and its subject are
sometimes assimilated to an accusative and infinitive in the pre-
ceding clause. The verb after quam is frequently omitted, its
subject remaining, expressed in the accusative case.
216. In informal or virtual oratio obliqua (that is, where the
verb sentiendl or di'darandl is not found in the Latin, but where in
the translation we supply some such notion as, as he said, as they
thought, etc.), the subjunctive is usually found in the subordinate
clauses ; as, He gave me all the books that (as he said) his father had
left : Omnes libros quos pater suus reliqulsset mihi donavit. The
enemy were waiting {intending to attack) if our men should cross the
marsh, : Paliidem si nostri translrent hostes expectabant. Some
treat such a clause as !.... translrent in the last example, as an
, oct question.
When the indicative is used in the subordinate clause of such a
sentence, the writer makes the statement on his own responsibility.
217. Oratio obliqua may take the form of (a) an indirect
statement, (b) an indirect command, (c) an indirect question,
in each of which the subjunctive will be found in the subordi-
nate clauses ; as,
(a) He said that the cavalry would make an attack on the enemy
who were on tfte other side of tJie river : Dixit equites in hostes qui
trans flumen essent impetum facturos.
(6) He ordered the cavalry to attack the enemy who were on the
other side of the river : Mllitibus imperavit ut in hostes, qui trans
flumen essent, impetum facerent.
(c) He rt.sAvW flic numbers of the enemy who were on the other side
of the river : Quot essent hostes qui trans flumen essent rogavit.
218. Frequently the verb of saying, ordering or asking, is not
expressed, but is implied from the context ; as, He sends an am-
n- in C<i-x(ir (.svn//m/), //<"/ unless aid is sent to him, he can hold
202
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
out no l<>n<t> i- : Xfintium ad Caesarem mittit : nisi subsidium slbi
submittat ur, sese diutius sustinere non posse.
219. The following examples (which should be carefully
studied) illustrate most of the above rules and exceptions not
already exemplified :
(1) Direct. I know these facts are
true, and no one feels
more deeply pained on
that account than I.
Indirect. (He said that) he
knew those facts were true,
and that no one felt more
deeply pained on that ac-
count than he did.
(Ego) scio haec ease vera, nee
quisquam ex hoc plus
quani ego doloris capio.
(Dixit) scire se ilia esse
vera, nee quemqnam
ex eo plus quam se do-
loris capere.
(2) Direct. Do not, O soldiers,
abandon the city, I shall
not fail your friends.
Indirect. (He ordered the sol-
diers) not to leave the city,
that he would not fail their
friends.
Nolite, milites, urbem re-
linquere, ego vestris
amicis non deero.
'Militibus imperavit) ne ur-
bem relinquerent, se
amicis illdrum non de-
futurum.
. Observe how the vocative may be turned in the indirect speech.
(3) Direct. As to your former de-
mand for a conference, that
may be carried out with
my consent, since you have
drawn nearer, and I think
I can do it without danger.
Indirect. (Ariovistus sends en-
voys to Csesar [saying] ) ; as
to his former demand for a
conference, that might be
carried out with his con-
sent, since he had drawn
nearer, and he thought he
could do it without danger.
(4) Direct. I came into Gaul be-
fore the Roman people did.
Never before this time has
the Roman army passed be-
yond the boundaries of the
province of Gaul. What
Quod antea de colloquio po-
stulavisti, hoc per me
fieri licet, quoniam pro-
pius accessisti, meque
hoc sine periculo facere
posse existimo.
(Ariovistus legatos ad Caesar-
em mittit) quod antea
de colloquio postulas-
set, id per se fieri lieere,
quoniam propius aeces-
sisset, seque id sine
periculo facere posse ex-
istimare.
Ego prius in Galliam vein
quam popnlus Roma-
nus. Nunquam ante hoc
tempus exercitus populi
Roman! Galliae provin-
ciae fines egressus est.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION.
203
do you mean ? Why do you
come into my possessions ?
This part of Gaul is mine
just as that part yonder be-
longs to the Roman people
(or to you).
Indirect. (Ariovistus answered)
that he had come into Gaul
before the Roman people
had, that never before that
time had the Roman army
passed beyond the boun-
daries of the province of
Gaul. What did he mean I
Why did he come into his
possessions ? That part of
Gaul (where they then were)
was his, just as that part
(off in the distance) belong-
ed to the Roman people.
(5) Direct. As to your threat
against me, O Caesar, that
you will not overlook the
wrongs done the Aedui, no
one has ever contended
with me without destruc-
tion to himself. Come on
whenever you please.
Indirect. (To this Ariovistus
replied), that as to the
threat Caesar was making
against him, to the effect
that he would not overlook
the wrongs done to the
Aedui, no one had ever
contended with him (Ario-
vistus) without destruction
to himself ; let him come
on whenever he pleased.
(6) Direct. There are some whose
influence with the common
people is very great, who,
in their private capacity,
have more weight than the
magistrates themselves.
Quid tibi vis? Cur
in meas possessiones
veiils ? Provincia mea
haee est Gallia, sicut
Ilia populi Roman! (or
vestra).
(Ariovistus respondit) se
prius in Galliam venisse
quam populum Roma-
ii u m. Nunquam ante
hoc tempus exercitum
populi Roman! Galliae
provinciae fines egres-
suni (esse). Quid siM
vellet ? Cur in suas
possessiones veniret ?
Provincial!! suam lianc
esse Galliam sicut ilium
nostrum.
Quod mini, Caesar, denun-
tias te Aeduorum in-
jurias non neglecturum,
nemo mecum sine sua
pernicie contendit.
Cum voles, congredere.
(Ad haec Ariovistus respon-
dit), quod sibi Caesar
denuntiaret se Aeduo-
rum injurias non neg-
lecturum, neminem se-
cum sine sua pernicie
conteiidisse. Cum vel-
let, congrederetur.
Sunt 11611 iiu Hi quorum auc-
toritas apud plebein plu-
rimum valet, qui priva-
tim plus possnnt quam
ipsi magistratus.
204
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Indirect. (He declares) that
there are some whose in-
fluence with the common
people is very great, who,
in their private capacity,
have more weight than the
magistrates themselves.
(7) Direct. Less hesitation is caused
me on this account, because
I remember those matters
which you have mentioned,
and I feel the more indig-
nant in proportion as they
happened without the de-
sert of the Roman people ;
but if I am willing to for-
get the former insult, can
I blot out the memory of
recent wrongs as well ? As
to your boasting so insult-
ingly about your victory,
and your wondering that
you have so long escaped
punishment for your mis-
deeds, they amount to the
same thing ; for, in order
that men may grieve the
more heavily from a change
of circumstances, the im-
mortal gods are accustomed
to grant greater prosperity
sometimes, and a longer im-
punity, to those whom they
wish to punish for their
sins.
Indirect. (Caesar replied) that
less hesitation was caused
him on this account, because
he remembered those mat-
ters which they had men-
tioned, and that he felt the
more indignant in propor-
tion as they had happened
without the desert of the
Roman people, but if he
were willing to forget the
former insult, could lie (he
(Proponit) esse nonnullos
quorum auctoritas apud
plebem plurimum va-
leat, qui privatim plus
possint quam ipsi magis-
tratus.
Hoc inlhi minus dubitationis
datur quod eas res quas
commemoravistis me-
moria teneo, atque hoc
gravius fero quo minus
merito populi Roman!
acciderunt. Quod si
veteris contumeliae ob-
livisci void, num. etiam
recentium injuriarum
mernoriam deponere
possum ? Quod vestra
victoria tarn insolenter
gloriamini quodque
tarn dm vos impune
injuries tulisse admlra-
miiii, eodem pertinet ;
consueverunt enim dl
immortales quo gravius
homines ex commuta-
tione rerum doleant,
quos pro scelere eorum
ulciscl volunt, his se-
cundiores interdum res
et diuturniorem impuni-
tatem concedere.
'Caesar respondit) eo sibi
minus dubitationis darl,
quod eas res quas illl
commemorassent me-
moria teneret atque eo
gravius ferre, quo minus
merito populi Roman!
accidissent. Quod s!
veteris contumeliae obl!-
visci vellet, num. etiam
recentium injuriarum
memoriam deponere
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 205
asked) blot out the memory posse ? Quod sua vic-
of recent wrongs as well? toriatam msolenter glo-
As to their boasting so in- riarentur quodque tarn
sultingly of their victory, diu se impiiiie injurias
and wondering that they tulisse odmlrarentur,
had so long escaped punish- eodem pertinere ; con-
ment for their misdeeds, suesse enim deds im-
these matters amounted to mortales, quo gravius
the same thing ; for (said homines ex commuta-
he), in order that men may tione rerum doleant,
grieve the more heavily quos pro scelere eorum
from a change of circum- ulciscl vellnt, his se-
stances, the immortal gods, cundiores interdum res
are accustomed to grant et diuturniorem impuni-
greater prosperity some- tatem concedere.
times, and a longer im-
punity, to those whom they
wish to punish for their
sins.
N.B. For the forms assumed in indirect narration by the dif-
ferent kinds of conditional sentence, see section 87, page 145.
220. We frequently find a subjunctive in clauses dependent
upon a clause containing another subjunctive or an infinitive,
and occasionally in clauses not so dependent.
In many of such cases the subjunctive is due to the fact
that the whole sentence is virtual or informal ordtio obllqua (see
section 216 above), or at any rate is felt to be such. In other
cases it is due to attraction, that is, to the tendency to assimilate
mood forms ; as,
(a) They attempted to lead part of their troops across, intending, if
they ivere able, to storm the fort which Q. Titurius was in command
of, and to destroy the bridge; and, if they were unable to do this,
then, to lay waste the field* of the Eemi : Partem suarum copiarum
traducere conati sunt eo consilio, ut, si possent, castellum, cui
praeerat Q. Titurius, expugnarent pontemque intersclnderent ;
si minus potuissent, agros Remorum popularentur.
Their exact words or thoughts would be, We shall (or, Let us),
if we can, storm the fort and destroy the bridge ; if we cannot do this,
we shall (or, let us) lay waste the fields of the Remi : Si poterimus,
castellum expugnabimns (or, expujarnemus) pontemque inter-
scindemus (or, interscindamus) ; si minus potuerimus, agros
Remorum populabimur (or, populemur.)
The clause, cm praeerat Q. Titurius is thrown in by Csesar for
the benefit of the reader.
206 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(b) On various pretexts which they said were valid reasons for
their departure, they asked permission to go ir<i>/ : Alius alia causa
illata, quam sibi ad proficiscendum necessariam esse diceret,
petebat ut discedere liceret (see section 185, NOTE.)
In this sentence diceret is not part of the reported speech, and
the subjunctive is due to mistaken analogy, the writer using the
mood which would be required if the verb of saying were omitted.
Regularly the clause would stand, quae sibi ad proficiscendum
necessaria esset, which (in their view) were valid reasons for their
departure.
(c) So powerful an impression imth regard to (or produced by) this
war was spread among the barbarians, that envoys were sent to Ccesar
by those tribes who dwelt beyond the Rhine : Tanta hujus belli ad
barbaros opmio perlata est, utl ab iis nationibus, quae trans
Rhenum incolerent, mitterentur legati ad Caesarem.
In this example the assimilating influence of mitterentur is
extended to incolerent.
EXERCISE 26.
1. To these ambassadors Caesar replied, ' ' I will come now if you
are ready to follow." 2. They sent ambassadors to the Roman
general (saying) they were ready to open the gates which they had
closed. 3. " I," answered he, " have spared the citizens, you the
Gauls." 4. He brought word to the consul that the enemy, after
having been defeated in battle, sent envoys to Caesar as soon as
they had recovered from their panic. 5. " Leap down," he said,
"fellow soldiers, unless you wish to abandon the eagle to the
enemy. I, at any rate, shall do my duty to my country and my
commander." 6. They replied that if these proceedings were
reported to Ariovistus, they did not doubt that that prince would
inflict the severest punishment on all the hostages who were in his
power. 7. " What," said he, "was more trifling or shameful than,
at the suggestion of the enemy, to form a resolution on the most
important affairs ? " 8. They answered that all things had to be
done at one time by the soldiers who were in camp. 9. He told
them not to forget the former valor of the Helvetii nor the wrongs
done by them to the Roman people. 10. He ordered the soldiers
who were in the woods to attack the enemy, who were on the
march. Why had they retreated before they had seen the enemy
with whom they had to fight ? 11. The lieutenant complained that
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 207
he had been neglected by the general and deserted by the
soldiers. 12. Ariovistus had in his consulship (said he) most
eagerly sought the friendship of Rome. Why should any one
imagine that he (Ariovistus) would so readily forsake his alle-
giance ? 13. He said that the general had pursued his march
for many miles through the marshes and forests that were between
the enemy and the Roman army. 14. He ordered the soldier to
ask who had seen the man who had been sent by the enemy to
Caesar's camp. 15. One thing they asked and prayed for, that if,
in accordance with his merciful disposition, which they themselves
were (constantly) hearing of from others, he should determine the
Belgians were to be saved, he should not deprive them of their
EXERCISE XXVII.
THE ROMAN MODE OF RECKONING TIME.
221. After the reform of the calendar by Julius Caesar, in
B.C. 46, the Roman year consisted of 365 days (in leap year,
366), the months containing the same number of days respec-
tively as the English months.
222. The day of the month was calculated in the following
manner : Three points were taken in the month, the Calends
(Kalendae), the Ides (ldiis\ and the Nones (Nonae\ which the
names 1 of the months qualified adjectively, and from these three
points respectively the date was calculated backward.
223. The Calends fell in every case on the first of the month ;
the Ides in March, May, July and October, were on the fifteenth
and the Nones on the seventh ; in the other months, the Ides came
on the thirteenth, and the Nones on the lifth. Any day between
the Calends and the Nones was reckoned such and such a day
before the Nones ; any day between the Nones and the Ides such
and such a day before the Ides, and any day after the Ides such
and such a day before the Calends of the following month.
224. From these three dates the other days were reckoned
inclusively, that is, both days were counted in, and consequently
1. These names are Januarius, Februarius, Martius, Apnlis, Maius, Junius, Quintllis,
(or Julius), Sextllis (or Augustus), September, October, November and December.
208 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
we must subtract the given day from the day on which the Nones
or Ides fall increased by one, and as the Calends fall within the
next month, if the day be one before that date, we must add two
to the last day of the month and then subtract.
225. The Romans had no second day before any of these three
fixed points. The day before was called pridie Kalendds (or
Kcdendarum), pridie Nonas, pridie Idus. The day before that was
called the third day before, being the second according to our mode
of reckoning.
226. The following examples will illustrate these calculations :
July 10th =(15 + 1-W) = VI. Id. Jul.
Feb. 15th =(28 + 2-15) = XV. Kal. Mart.
June 3rd = (5 + l-3) = III. Non. Jun.
May 14th =(15 + 1-14) = Pridie Id. Mai.
Sept. 13th = fdibns Septembribus.
227. The Roman dates given in the above section are some-
what contracted. For example, VI. Id. Jul. is strictly die sexto
ante id/Is Julias, dit and ante being omitted, the numeral VI.
being substituted for sexto and the other words abbreviated.
Sometimes we find it in the form a.d. VI. Id. Jul., that is ante
diem sextum Idus Julias, where die sexto, coming between the
preposition and its object, is attracted into the accusative diem
sextum. Such expressions are looked upon as single words and
may be governed by other prepositions ; as, They fix their departure
for the 12th of July: Profectionem in a.d. IV. Id. Jul. confir-
mant.
228. The additional day in leap year was inserted after February
23rd, the 24th (i.e., VI. Kal. Mart.) being reckoned twice and
accordingly called bis sextus; whence the year itself was called
bisextilis, from which we have our word bissextile.
229. The Romans reckoned their time from the building of the
city (Rome), the date of which is fixed at 753 B.C., and to
reduce the Roman date to the corresponding year before Christ,
the year of the city is to be subtracted from 754, and vice versa ;
as, Cicero delivered an oration against Catiline on November 8th,
B.C. 63: Cicero in Catilinam VI. Id. Nov. A. U.C. DCXCI.
orationem habuit. (A. U.C. ab urbe conditd, or anno urbis con-
ditae). If the year specified is written out in full, the ordinal
numerals agreeing with anno are used ; as, Anno sescentesimo
nonagesimo priiiid.
Any date in our era -may be calculated from the birth of Christ
with or without Anno Domini ; as. Queen Victoria ascended the
throne June 20th, 1837 : Victoria Reglna regnum excepit XII. Kal.
Jul. MDCCCXXXVII.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 209
EXERCISE 27.
1. George the Third, king of Britain, died on the 29th of January,
1820. 2. The general set out from Rome on the 24th of March,
B.C. 59. 3. It is said that Csesar was slain by Brutus and Cassius
on the loth of March, B.C. 44. 4. Augustus was born September
23rd, B.C. 63, and died at Nola on the 29th of August, in the
year of our Lord 14, at the age of seventy-six ( = h<>rn seventy-six
years}. 5. Charles I., king of England, was beheaded on the 30th
of January, 1649. 6. The consul fixed the elections for the fifth
of March, 1891. 7. On the 6th March, B.C. 35, the consul
returned to Rome. 8. He lived at Rome from the eighth of
September to the 19th of November. 9. He returned home on
the 7th July, and remained until October 27th. 10. The teacher
asked the pupil what famous battle between the English and the
French was fought on the 18th of June, 1815. 11. To this ques-
tion of the teacher's ( = to the teacher asking this), the pupil
replied that a great naval battle had been fought on the 21st of
October, 1805. 12. Mary, Queen of Scots, was executed in the
reign of Elizabeth, on the 8th of February, 1587. 13. The elec-
tions of this province were fixed for the 20th of June, 1890. 14.
Henry VIII., king of England, departed this life January 28th,
1547. 15. Thus died these two famous men, the former on the
6th day of June, 1891, the latter on the 17th of April in the follow-
ing year.
14
210 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SUPPLEMENTARY EXERCISES FOR
CONTINUOUS TRANSLATION
INTO LATIN.
EXERCISE XXVIII.
230. It is not sufficient for the student to know the rules of
Latin Syntax, and to be familiar with the points wherein the struc-
ture of the Latin sentence differs from that of the English,
although such knowledge is absolutely necessary before any
progress in composition can be expected. There are other things
to be considered, and, chief of these, perhaps, the use of figurative
language, including the technical terms of war, politics, navigation
and other occupations.
231. Though all language is to some extent figurative, yet the
English language is essentially such. In modern English, scarcely
a passage with any pretentious to style can be found that is not
replete with metaphors.
Such figures (though occasionally found) are much rarer in
Latin than in English, and consequently most of the figurative
expressions found in our own tongue must be changed for the
direct and simple statement in Latin. Even when figures are
used in the latter (as in oratory), the simile is preferred to the
metaphor, or the metaphor is quite different from the English one,
or the figures are modified by some such expression as ut aiunt :
As they say, As the saying is; or by tanqnam, quidam, etc.
Accordingly, when dealing with metaphors, and the conventional
and technical phrases of the various arts, sciences and occupations,
the student should be exceedingly careful to translate the thought
of the English into Latin, and not the exact words.
232. The following examples will illustrate some of the differ-
ences between the English and the Latin mode of expression :
(a) He came off victor : Vlcit.
(6) He lost the day : Victus est.
(c) J left no stone unturned to finish the business : Nihil praeter-
misi quin negotium conficerem.
(d) The general's roicc in<* <lr<rm.'<l in the shouts of the enemy :
Vox imperaturis prac olaiiiorc hostituii audlrl non potuit.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 211
(e) The enemy were within range of fire : Hostes non longius
aberant quam quo teluni adjici posset.
(/) Our ships ran before the wind : Nostrae naves vento se
dabant.
(g) For that was no mere spectacle, but a picture of ymir position '
Nequc eniin spectaculum inodo illud, sed quacdani veluti
imago vestrae condicionis erat.
(h) He ascended the throne : B^gnum excepit.
(i) He flung his life away : Mortem ultro oppetiit.
(j) He overcame the armies of Home : Exercitus Bomanos super-
avit.
233. Each language has its own favorite turns of expression
((/r<si-idioms, we might call them), or its own mode of viewing an
action, and these must be regarded in translating from one
language to another.
(a) For example, in English we frequently use the verb to be for
the purpose of introducing a sentence in such a manner as to
emphasize some word or phrase in the predicate. In Latin, esse
is not used, emphasis being secured by position ; as, It was at my
suggestion that lie returned to Rome : Me auctore, Bomam rediit.
It is not without divine assistance that the Romans carry on war:
Non Roman! sine ope divina bellum gerunt. He teas the first
to reach the camp : Primus ad castra pervenit.
(6) In Latin there is often a tendency to look upon an action as
proceeding from a certain locality, while in English it is considered
as happening in that place ; as, He fought on horseback : Ex equo
pugnabat. The enemy attack our troops on both flanks : Hostes
nostros ab utroque late re aggrediuntur. Sharpened a little at
the bottom : Paulum ab Imo praeacuta. The letter u:as dated at
Rome : Epistola data est Roma.
(c) In such expressions as, The wise Socrates, Your excellent
father, Our gallant commander, The abandoned Catiline, So brave a
man as you, etc., the appositive construction with the superlative
degree of the adjective is generally used ; as, Socrates, vir
sapient issi m us ; Pater tuns, vir optimns ; Noster imperator,
vir fortissimus ; Catillna, homo perditissimus ; Tu, vir fortis-
simus.
(d) In English very many transitive verbs may be used intransi-
tively also, whereas in Latin, in such a case, the reflexive pro-
noun is used, or the verb is put in the passive, or some other verb
is brought into requisition; as mow ( transit! ve)=movere, //""
(intransitive) = se movere or mover!; sdl ( transitive) = vendere,
212 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
sell (intransitive) = venire; increase (transitive) = angere, increase
(intransitive) = crescere or augeri.
234. There is a tendency in English to make the noun the
significant word, while in Latin the chief weight of the sentence
falls on the verb. Such verbs as make, have, take, hold, be, etc.,
frequently do little more than make the statements that is, are
mere symbols of predication the meaning being contained in the
noun, whereas in Latin the verb is the significant word, containing
within itself the subject or object, which, when expressed in the
form of a neuter pronoun or adjective, has the force rather of an
adverbial adjunct than that of a real subject or direct object.
Compare the following sentences in English and in Latin :
(a) He had great hopes : Magna sperabat.
(6) Mention has been made of him : De 1116 dictum est.
(c) All held their peace : Contlcuere omnes.
(d) I ordered him to take his departure ; Bum abire j ussi.
(e) He took my advice : Mihl parult.
(/) He gave utterance to many falsehoods : Malta meiitltus est.
(g) He made reply to me : Mihi respondit.
(ti) He makes haste to take his departure from the city : Maturat
ab urbe proficiscl.
(i) You are at liberty to make this attempt: Haec conarl tibi
licet.
N.B. This incorporation of the noun material into the verb is
especially noticeable in the impersonal use of the passive voice of
intransitive' verbs ; as, There was fighting (or Fighting took place) :
Pugnatum est. Obedience must beshmwi: Parendum est. Use
must be made of these things: His rebus utendum est. Tliere
ought to be no hesitation: Non dubitamlum est.
So the Latin adjective or participle frequently has the value of a
noun ; as, Me = this man, haec = these matters, magna = great
things, fugientes = the retreating force, sapientes = ivise men,
philosophers, nostrl = our men, omnla ana = all their property.
235. Owing to the scarcity of abstract nouns in Latin and to an
aversion to their general use when found therein, we frequently
find the main idea contained in the participle instead of in the
substantive as in English; as, He lived before the f<ni<l<ili<>n of the
city: Ante urbem comlitam vixit. He f <>,>! j><i,'t in Hi<' outrage on
the ambassadors: Legatis violaudis interfuit. The news of the
disaster : Nuntiata clades. In the same way English abstract
nouns are frequently represented in Latin by adjectives and
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 213
adverbs. I do not knoiv the man's character : Nescio quails sit
homo. Cceaar auks the reason of the soldier's presence: Caesar
rogat cur miles adsit. (See also section 47.)
236. By the figurative use of language prevalent in English we
frequently transfer an epithet from one word to another, while in
Latin it is more correctly made to agree with the word that it
really modifies; as, His dying ivords : Ejus morientls verba.
Tears of (those) mourning : Lugentium lacrimae.
237. Finally, the precise meaning of the English word should
be clearly understood before any attempt is made to give the Latin
equivalent. For example, take the word "country." In the
sentence, He left the city for the country, the word has a quite
different meaning from that which it has in the sentence, He is
unlling to die for his country. In the first sentence, rfis would be
used ; in the second, patria.
In the same way, "pursue" has a variety of meanings according
to the context, and the precise meaning of the word in any given
sentence must be known before a correct translation can be given ;
as, Ccesar pursues ( = follows up) the enemy : Caesar hostes sequitur.
Labienus pursues ( = makes or continues) his march: Labienus iter
facit.
In like manner the various significations of many other words
must be distinguished.
238. When the student comes to turn a continuous passage into
Latin, it will be necessary for him to observe a very important
difference between the English and the Latin. In English, as a
rule, each of the main ideas going to make up the thought as a
whole, is put into a sentence by itself, these sentences being some-
times loosely joined together by such words as or, but, and, etc.,
and sometimes succeeding each other without any connective.
In Latin, on the other hand, some one idea is seized as a
central point and expressed in the main sentence, while the other
notions are grouped about it, in more or less subordinate relations,
according to the. periodic construction (see footnote, page 115).
In such construction, the sentence is obviously incomplete, until
it is closed by the principal verb, and consequently no loosely
connected after-thoughts should be added.
However, variety is an excellent thing, and accordingly, where
some such word or phrase as proptered or eo consilio shows that
something is still to come, the clause of reason or purpose may
follow the main verb. The clause of result regularly follows the
principal statement.
239. The Latin is fonder than the English of showing the con-
nection of ideas in a narrative, and as a result of this, it frecjuently
begins a sentence, or even a new paragraph or chapter, with the
214 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
relative, where in English a demonstrative, with or without a con-
junction, would be used. (See section 8, N.B.)
Where in English a sentence begins with such expressions as
and not, and no one, and never, etc., Latin uses neque (or nec) =
nor, nee qiiisquam = nor any one,nec unquam=nor ever, etc.
A few exercises for continuous prose translation are now given,
expressed, to some extent, in figurative language, and involving
the principles above mentioned.
EXERCISE 28.*
After a census had been taken, it was found that the total popu-
lation of our province was about fifty thousand men, women and
children. Of this number there were capable of bearing arms
not more than five thousand men, very few of whom were regular
troops. Yet such was the spirit of her sons (elves) that they did
not hesitate to take the field at a moment's notice, ready to lay
down their lives for their native land. Within one month after
the declaration of war, the enemy, to the number of six thousand,
were massed in the neighborhood of the river that forms the
boundary line between our territories and theirs. At daybreak
on the 12th of October, the advance guard of this force effected a
landing on the left bank of the river in the face of a heroic defence
on the part of our men. Long and fiercely the battle raged on
both sides, when night put an end to the contest. On the follow-
ing morning there was a spirited renewal of the engagement.
When the battle had lasted three hours, our troops, after seizing
the baggage of the enemy and slaying more than two thousand of
their number, drove the rest headlong into the river. Thus
victory perched on our banners, and the enemy, disappointed in
their hope, gave up this undertaking.
EXERCISE 29.
After being informed of the arrival of the enemy, the general
made haste to take his departure from the city, and by forced
marches pushed forward against Gallus, who had taken possession
of the heights, and, with all his troops drawn up in battle array,
was awaiting the advance of our gallant leader. While the latter
* This exercise and the five subsequent ones may be used as materials for Ordtio
obllqua by placing He said, or some such expression, before each.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 215
with three battalions of the tenth regiment was making a fierce
attack upon the centre of the enemy's line, he received a mortal
wound and was carried to the rear by two faithful soldiers. The
general tried to exhort his troops not to lose heart, nor to allow
their colors to* fall into the hands of the enemy, but his dying
words were drowned in the shouts of the combatants. Maddened
by the fall of their heroic commander, our men twice attempted to
force the enemy from the heights. Twice they were driven back,
and finally were compelled to retire upon the nearest town and
there to wait for reinforcements. Setting out about midnight with
the seventh regiment, which had been sent to their assistance, our
troops again attacked the enemy, who, after the loss of more than
a thousand men, were compelled to surrender at discretion. And
so victory once more rested upon the British arms.
EXERCISE 30.
While the general was making these preparations for his
departure, the report was brought that four battalions of the tenth
regiment had been cut off to a man by the enemy's cavalry. The
news of this (qui) disaster threw the camp into a state of conster-
nation, and struck terror into the hearts of those who had never
been under fire. Many of the men who a little before had been
boasting of their bravery, threw themselves at the commander's
feet, and in tears besought him to allow them to take their
departure. He told them that they were at liberty to go, so far as
he was concerned, but they should remember the valor of their
ancestors who had ever been ready to lay down their lives for their
native land sooner than permit anyone to cast the reproach of
cowardice in their teeth. Even old campaigners, who wished to
be* considered less fearful, could scarcely put on a brave face or
restrain their tears, and, shutting themselves up in their tents,
they set to signing their wills and bemoaning the common danger.
EXERCISE 31.
At first the commander determined to defer a general engage-
ment, still, every day, in cavalry skirmishes, he kept testing the
military prowess of the enemy and the daring <>f our men, until he
216 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
found that our troops were in no respect inferior to the hostile
forces. Between our army and the country of the enemy flowed a
river, on the right bank of which, at the distance of about half a
mile, at the foot of a hill, the general gave orders to fortify the
camp with a stockade twelve feet high and a trench eighteen feet
wide. From each end of the hill he threw out a cross trench
about three hundred yards in length, and at the extremities of
these trenches he erected redoubts where he placed his artillery,
so that, after he had formed his line of battle, the enemy might not
outflank him during the engagement. After this was done, leaving
two regiments his latest levies in the camp to act as reserves
for the lieutenant in case of emergency, he led the rest of his forces
with the greatest difficulty across a marsh of no great extent that
lay between our position and the river, where the enemy a few
days previously had effected a crossing by means of a bridge of
boats.
EXERCISE 32.
Caractacus took up a position of his own choosing, where the
means both of approach and retreat were most convenient for him-
self and unfavorable to the enemy. It was defended in part by a
steep and lofty acclivity ; in part by stones rudely thrown together ;
a stream with no frequented ford flowed before it. and chosen
bands of his best armed and bravest warriors were stationed in
front of its defences. To the spirit and eloquence of the chief,
the Britons responded with shouts of enthusiasm ; and each tribe
bound itself, by the oaths it held most sacred, to stand its ground
or fall if it must fall fighting. Ostorius, on his part, was
amazed at the ardor of men whom he supposed to be beaten,
cowed, and driven hopelessly to bay. He was even disconcerted
at the strength of the British position, and the swarms which
defended it. It was the eagerness of the soldiers, rather than his
own courage or judgment, that determined him to give the signal
of attack. The stream was crossed without difficulty, for every
legionary was a swimmer, and the Britons had no engines for hurl-
ing missiles from a distance, nor were they noted even for the rude
artillery of bows and slings.
Merivale.
PART II. SYNTAX AND COMPOSITION. 217
EXERCISE 33.
But they defended their rampart obstinately with poles and
javelins, and from behind it dealt wounds and death upon the
assailants, till the Romans could form the tortoise, approach to the
foot of the wall, tear down its uncemented materials, and, bursting
in, challenge them to combat, hand to hand. Unequal to the
shock of the Roman army, the Britons retreated up the hill ; the
Romans, both the light and the heavy-armed, pressed gallantly
upon them, and, imperfectly as they were equipped, they could
withstand neither the sword and pilum of the legionary, nor the
lance and spear of the auxiliary. The victory, quickly decided,
was brilliant and complete. The wife and daughter of Caractacus
were taken ; his brothers threw down their arms and surrendered.
The brave chief himself escaped from the slaughter, evaded the
pursuit, and found an asylum for a time in the territory of the
Brigantes, leaving all the south open to the invaders. He might
hope to remove the contest to the northern parts of the island, a
land of streams and mountains like his own long-defended Siluria ,-.
but Cartismandua, the female sovereign of this nation (for, though-
married, she seems herself, rather than her husband Venutius, to
have been actual ruler of the Brigantes), was determined, by her
own fears and interests, to betray him to the Romans. The fame
of his nine years' struggle had penetrated beyond the British Isles
and the Gaulish provinces ; and when he was led captive through
the streets of Rome, great was the curiosity of the citizens to-
behold the hero who had rivalled the renown of Arminius and
Tacfarinas.
Merivale.
218
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
PART III.
ACCIDENCE, COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX AND
VOCABULARIES.
I. PARADIGMS OF INFLECTION.
(A) THE NOUN. 1
, First Declension.
SINGULAR.
Nominative.
mensa, P.
Genitive.
mensae
Dative.
mensae
Accusative.
mensam
Vocative.
mensa
Ablative.
mensa
Nominative.
Genitive.
Dative.
Accusative.
Vocative.
Ablative.
2. Second Declension.
SINGULAR.
servus, M.
servi
servo
servum
serve
servo
PLURAL.
mensae
mensarum
mensis
mensas
mensae
mensis
PLURAL.
servi
servorum
servis
servos
servi
servis
1. The genitive dative, accusative and ablative are called the Oblique Cotes.
PART III. PARADIGMS.
219
3. Second Declension (continued).
SINGULAR.
Nom. puer, M.
vir, M.
ager, M.
templum, x.
Gen. pueri
viri
agrl
templi
Dat. puero
viro
agro
templo
Ace. puerum
virum
agrum
templum
Foe. puer
vir
ager
templum
Abl. puero
viro
agro
templo
PLURAL.
Nom. pueri
viri
agrl
templa
Gen. puerorum
virorum
agrorum
templorum
Dat. pueris
viris
agris
templis
Ace. pueros
viros
agros
templa
Voc. pueri
viri
agrl
templa
Abl. pueris
viris
agris
templis
4. Third Declension Masculine and Feminine Nouns.
SINGULAR.
Nom. rex, M.
consul, M.
miles, M.
pater, M.
Gen. regis
consulis
militis
patris
Dat. regl
consul!
militi
patri
Ace. regem
consulem
militem
patrem
Voc. rex
consul
miles
pater
Abl. rege
consule
milite
patre
PLURAL.
Nom. reges
consules
milites
patres
Gen. regum
consulum
militum
patrum
Dat. regibus
consulibus
militibus
patribus
Ace. reges
consules
milites
patres
Foe. reges
consules
milites
patres
Abl. regibus
consulibus
militibus
patribus
220
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SINGULAR.
Nom. homo, M.
hiems, F.
virtus, F.
regio, F.
Gen. hominis
hiemis
virtutis
regionis
Dot. homiiil
hiemi
virtutl
region!
Ace. hominem
hiemem
virtutern
regionem
Foe. homo
hiems
virtus
regio
AU. nomine
hieme
virtute
regione
PLURAL.
Nom. homines
hiemes
virtutes
regiones
Gen. hominum
hiemum
virtutum
regionum
Dab. hominibua
hiemibus
virtutibus
regionibus
Ace. homines
hiemes
virtutes
regiones
Foe. homines
hiemes
virtutes
regiones
Abl. hominibus
hiemibus
virtutibus
regionibus
5. Third Declension Neuter Nouns.
SINGULAR.
Nom. nomen, N.
corpus, N.
opus, N.
iter, N.
Gen. nominis
corporis
operis
itineris
Dat. nominl
corpori
operi
itineri
Ace. nomen
corpus
opus
iter
Foe. nomen
corpus
opus
iter
Abl. nomine
corpore
opere
itinere
PLURAL.
Nom. nomiria
corpora
opera
itinera
Gen. nomimmi
corporum
operum
itinerum
Dat. nominibus
corporibus
operibus
itineribus
^icc. nomina
corpora
opera
itinera
VoC. nomina
corpora
opera
itinera
Abl. nominibus
corporibus
operibus
itineribus
6.
Third Declension I-stems.
SINGULAR.
Nom. urbs, p.
ignis, M.
nubes, F.
mare, N.
Gen. urbis
ignis
nubis
maris
Dat. urbi
Igni
nubi
marl
Ace. urbem
ignem
nubem
mare
Foe. urbs
ignis
nubes
mare
Abl. urbe
Igni
nube
marl
PART III. PAKADIGMS.
221
PLURAL.
Norn, urbes
Gen. urbium
Dat. urbibus
Ace. urbes 1
Foe. urbes
Abl. urbibus
Ignes
Ignium
Ignibus
Ignes 1
Ignes
ignibus
nubes maria
nubium marium
nubibus maribus
nubes 1 maria
nubes maria
nubibus maribus
7. Fourth
Declension.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. fructus, M.
Gen. fructus
fructus
fructu um
cornu, N. comua
cornus cornu um
Dat. fructul
fructibus
cornu cornibus
Ace. fructum
fructus
cornu cornua
Voc. fructus
fructus
cornu cornua
Abl. fructu
fructibus
cornu cornibus
8. Fifth Declension.
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.
SINGULAR. PLURAL.
Nom. res, F.
Gen. rei
res
rerum
dies, M. dies
diel v dierum
Dat. rei
rebus
die! diebus
Ace. rem
res
diem dies
Foe. res
res
dies dies
Abl. re
rebus
die diebus
9. Nouns Irregular in Declension.
(The forms in parentheses should be avoided in ivriting Latin ; the
forms in italics are scarcely classical.)
SINGULAR.
PURAL.
Nom. vis, F.
Gen. (vis)
Dat. (m)
Ace. vim
-
vires
virium
viribus
vires
Foe.
vires
Abl vl
viribus
1. The accusative plural of i-stems is also written urbls, nubls, Ignis.
222
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SINGULAR.
Nom. deus, M.
Gen. del
Dat. deo
Ace. deum
Voc. deus
Abl. deo
bos, M. and F.
bovis
bo vi
bovem
bos
bove
PLURAL.
Nom. di (del, dii)
Gen. deorum, deum
Dat. dis (dels, dils)
Ace. deos
Voc. di (del, dil)
Abl. dis (dels, -diis)
SINGULAR.
Nom. domus, F.
Gen. domus (locative domi)
Dat. domui (domo)
Ace. domum
Voc. domus
Abl. domo (domfi)
PLURAL.
Nom. domus
Gen. domorum (domuum)
Dat. domibus
Ace. domos (domus)
Voc. domus
Abl. domibus
boves
bourn (bovum)
bubus (bobus)
boves
boves
bubus (bobus)
Juppiter, M.
Jovis
Jovi
Jovem
Juppiter
Jove
gen. relpublicae, and jusjurandum, gen. jurisjnrandi,
are really compound words, consisting of a noun and an adjective
in agreement, both of which are declined. Bespublica is often,
and jusjurandnm sometimes, written as two words.
Paterfamilias or paterfamiliae, and mdterfamilias or matcr-
familiae, (literally, the father, or mother, of a household), have
only the first part, pater and mater, declined. Occasionally,
familidrum is found in the plural. The form familias is an old
genitive singular.
PART III. PARADIGMS.
(B) THE ADJECTIVE.
1O. First and Second Declensions.
223
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE.
FEMININE.
NEUTER.
Nom.
bonus
bona
bonum
Gen.
bom
bonae
boni
Dot.
bono
bonae
bono
Act.
bonum
bonam
bonum
Voc.
bone
bona
bonum
Abl.
bono
bona
bono
PLURAL.
Nom.
bom
bonae ,
bona
Gen.
bonorum
bonaruin
bonorum
Dat.
bonis
bonis
bonis
Ace.
bonos
bonas
bona
Voc.
bom
bonae
bona
Abl.
boms
bonis
bonis
SINGULAR.
Nom.
liber
libera
liberum
Gen.
liberi
liberae
liberi
Dat.
libero
liberae
libero
Ace.
liberum
liberam
liberum
Voc.
liber
libera
liberum
Abl.
libero
libera
libero
PLURAL.
Norn.
liberi
liberae
libera
Gen.
liberorum
liberarum
liberorum
Dat.
liberis
liberis
liberis
Ace.
liberos
liberas
libera
Voc.
b-beri
' liberae
libera
Abl.
liberis
liberis
liberis
SINGULAR.
Nom.
aeger
aegra
aegrum
Gen.
aegri
aegrae
aegri
Dat.
aegro
aegrae
aegro
Ace.
aegruin
aegram
aegrum
Voc.
aeger
aegra
aegrum
Abl.
aegro
aegra
aegro
224
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
PLURAL.
Nom. aegrl
aegrae
aegra
Gen. aegrorum
aegrarum
aegrorum
Did. aegris
aegris
aegris
Ace. aegros
aegras
aegra
Foe. aegrl
aegrae
aegra
All. aegris
aegris
aegris
11. Third Declension.
SINGULAR. MASCULINE.
FEMININE.
NEUTER.
Nom. acer
acris
acre
Gen. acris
acris
acris
Dat. acri
acri
acri
Ace. acrem
acrem
acre
Foe. acer
acris
acre
Abl. acri
acri
acri
PLURAL.
Nom. acres
acres
acria
Gen. acrium
acrium
acrium
Dat. acribus
acribus
acribus
Ace. acres 1
acres 1
acria
Voc. acres
acres
acria
Abl. acribus
acribus
acribus
SING. MAS. AXD FEM.
NEUTER.
MAS. AND FEM.
NEUTER.
A r ora. fortis-
forte
felix
felix
6ren. fortis
fortis
fellcis
fellcis
Dat. forti
forti
fellcl
fellcl
.J.cc. fortem
forte
fellcem
felix
Foe. fortis
forte
felix
felix
Abl. forti
forti
fellcl
fellcl
PLURAL.
Nom. fortes
fortia
fellces
felicia
Gen. fortium
fortium
fellcium
fellcium
Dat. fortibus
fortibus
felicibus
felicibus
Are. fortes 1
fortia
fellces 1
felicia
Foe. fortes
fortia
fellces
felicia
Abl. fortibus
fortibus
felicibus
felicibus
1. The accusative plural is also written acris, fortis, etc., (compare section G).
PART III. PARADIGMS.
225
12. Declension of Comparatives and Superlatives.
SING. MAS. AND FEM. NEUTER.
Nom. fortior
Gen. fortioris
Dat. fortiori
fortiorem
fortior
fortiore
Ace.
Voc.
Abl.
PLURAL.
Nom. fortiores
Gen. fortiorum
Dat. fortioribus
Ace. fortiores
Voc. fortiores
Abl. fortioribus
fortius
fortioris
fortiori
fortius
fortius
fortiore
fortiora
fortiorum
fortioribus
fortiora
fortiora
fortioribus
MAS. AND FEM.
NEUTER.
plus
pluris
plus
(plure)
plures
plura
plurium
plurium
pluribus
pluribus
plures
plura
plures
plura
pluribus
pluribus
Complures, a compound of plures, is declined like it.
All superlatives end in us, a, itra, and are declined like bonus
(section 10).
13. Comparison of Adjectives.
I. Adjectives are regularly compared by changing the ending
(i, or is) of the genitive singular to ior, ins, for the comparative
degree, and to issimu.s, a, urn, for the superlative degree (see
Lesson XXVIII., page 43).
II. Adjectives ending in -er form the superlative by adding
-rimus to the nominative in -er ; e.g., deer, dcerrimus; miser, miser-
rimus.
III. Six adjectives in -His form the superlative by changing -His
to -illimus. These adjectives are facilis, difficilis, simttis, dissimilis,
gracilis, humilis.
IV. The following adjectives are quite irregular in their com-
parison i 1
1. See further, section 57.
15
226
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
bonus
melior
optimus
dives
divitior, ditior
divitissimus, ditissimus
magnus
major
maximus
parvus
minor
minimus
malus
pejor
pessimus
multus
plus (neut.)
plurimus
juvenis
junior
(minimus natu)
senex
senior
(maximus natu)
maturus
maturrimus
citerior
citimus
deterior
deterrimus
interior
intimus
prior
primus
propior
proximus
ulterior
ultimus
exterus
exterior
extremus, extimus
inferus
inferior
Infimus, imus
postems
posterior
postremus, postumus
superus
superior
supremus, summus
14. Irregular Declension.
SING.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.
MASC.
FEM.
NEUT.
Nom.
unus
una
unum
neuter
neutra
neutrum
Gen.
unius
umus
umus
neutrius
neutrius
neutrius
Dat.
unl
unl
unl
neutri
neutri
neutri
Ace.
unum
unam
unum
neutrum
neutram
neutrum
Foe.
une
una
unum
Abl.
uno
una
uno
neutro
neutra
neutro
PLURAL.
Nom. uni unae una neutri neutrae neutra
Gen. unorum unarum unorum neutrorum neutrarum neutrorum
Dat. unis unis unis neutris neutris neutris
Ace. unos unas una neutros neutras neutra
Foe. uni unae una
AU. unis unis unis neutris neutris neutris
The following adjectives of the first and second declensions have
PART III. PARADIGMS.
227
their genitive singular in -ms, 1 and their dative singular in l t in all
genders.
alius, a, ud totus, a, um alter, era, erum
nullus, a, um ullus, a, um neuter, tra, trum
solus, a, um unus, a, um uter, tra, trum
(N.B. Alius has in the genitive singular, alms; in the dative
singular, alii. The genitive alms is, however, seldom found,
alterius, or in the possessive sense, alienus, a, itm, being used
instead.)
15. last of Numerals.
CARDINALS.
1. unus, a, um, one
2. du-o, -ae, -o, two
3. tres, tria, three
4. quattuor, four
5. 'quinque, etc.
6. sex
7. septem
8. octo
9. novem
10. dec em
11. undecim
12. duodecim
13. tredecim
14. quattuordecim
15. qumdecim
16. sedecim
17. septeiidecim
18. duodeviginti 2
19. undeviginti 2
20. viginti
runus et viginti
\viginti unus
28. duodetriginta 2
29. undetriginta 2
21.
ORDINALS.
primus, first
secundus, second (also alter)
tertius, third
quartus, fourth
qumtus, etc.
sextus
Septimus
octavus
nonus
decimus
undecimus
duodecimus
tertius decimus
quartus decimus
qumtus decimus
sextus decimus
septimus decimus
duodevicesimus
undevicesimus
vicesimus
primus et vicesimus
vicesimus primus
duodetricesimus
undetricesimus
1. In poetry the genitive often occurs in -lus, not in -ius, with many of these words.
With alter this seems to have been the rule in prose as well.
2. Literally, two (one) from twenty (thirty), etc. The compound forms also occur,
.</., decernetocto, octodecim, etc.
228
PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
CARDINALS.
30. trlginta
40. quadraginta
50. qumquaginta
60. sexaginta,
70. septuaginta
80. octoginta
90. nonaginta
100. centum
/centum unus
' I centum et anus
200. ducenti, ae, a
300. trecenti, ae, a
400. quadringenti, ae, a
500. quingenti, ae, a
600. sescenti, ae, a
700. septingenti, ae, a
800. octingenti, ae, a
900. n5ngentl, ae, a
1000. mille
2000. duo millia (milia)
ORDINALS.
tricesimus
quadragesimus
qumquagesimus
sexagesimus
septuagesimus
octogesimus
nonagesimua
centesimus
centesimus primus
centesimus et primus
ducentesimus
trecentesimus
quadringentesimus
qumgentesimus
sescentesimus
septingentesimua
octingentesimus
nongentesimus
millesimus
bis millesimus
16. Declension of Numerals.
MASC.
FEM.
Nom. duo
Gen. duorum
Dai. duobus duabus
Ace. duos, duo duas
Foe. duo duae
All. duobus duabus
NEUT.
M. AND F. NEUT. NEUT.
duae duo tres tria millia
duarum duorum trium trium millium
duobus tribus tribus millibus
duo tres tria millia
duo tres tria millia
duobus tribus tribus millibus
For the declension of unus, see section 14.
The hundreds, from ducenti to nongenti, are declined like the
plural of bonus, section 10.
All the other cardinal numerals are indeclinable.
The ordinal numerals are all declined like bonus, section 10.
PART III. PARADIGMS. 229
(C) THE ADVERB.
17. Formation from Adjectives, and Comparison.
I. Adverbs are regularly formed from adjectives in the following
manner :
(a) In the positive, by changing the ending of the genitive
singular of adjectives of the first and second declensions to -e, of
adjectives of the third declension to -iter (or, in a few cases, to
4cr).
(6) In the comparative, by taking the neuter accusative singular
of the comparative of the adjective, that is, by changing -or of the
comparative of the adjective to -its.
(c) In the superlative, by changing -us of the superlative of the
adjective to -e.
For examples, see Lesson LIL, page 76.
II. In many cases the accusative singular neuter, or the ablative
singular, is used as an adverb ; e.g. :
ADJECTIVE.
ADVERB.
ADJECTIVE.
ADVERB.
multus
multum
plurimus
plurimum
facilis
facile
primus
primum
subitus
subito
certus
certo
creber
crebro
unus
una
III. The following are irregular in formation or comparison :
bene melius optime
parum minus minime
[magnopere] magis maxime
diu diutius diutissime
saepe saepius saepissime
(D) THE PRONOUN.
18. First Person. 19. Second Person. 2O. Third
SINGULAR. Person Reflexive.
Nom. ego tu
. Gen. mei^ tui sui
Dat. mihi tibi sibi
Ace. me te se (sese)
Foe. tu
Abl. me te se (sese)
230
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
PLURAL.
Nom. nos
Gen. nostrum, nostri
Dat. nobis
Ace. nos
Foe.
Abl. nobis
vos
vestrum, vestri
sui
vobis
sibi
vos
se (sese)
vos
vobis
se (sese)
21. Possessive Pronouns.
meus, a, um, my, mine noster, nostra, nostrum, our, ours
tuus, a, um, your, yours vester, vestra, vestrum, your, yours
suus, a, um, his, her, suus, a, um, their, theirs
hers, its
These are all declined like adjectives of the first and second
declensions, section 10, except that the vocative singular masculine
of meus is mi, rarely meus.
22. Third Personal, and Demonstrative Pronoun.
Is, he, she, it, etc. ; tJiat.
NEUTER,
id
ejus
ei
id
eo
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE.
FEMININE.
Nom.
is
ea
Gen.
Dat.
ejus
ei
ejus
ei
Ace.
eum
earn
Abl.
eo
ea
PLURAL.
Nom.
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
ei, ii
eorum
eis, ils
eos
eis, ils
eae
earum
eis, ils
eas
eis, ils
eorum
eis, ils
ea
eis, ils
PART III. PARADIGMS.
231
23. Demonstrative Pronouns.
Hie, this. Ille, that.
SING. MASC. FEM.
NEUT. MASC.
Nom. hie haec hoc ille
Gen. hujus hujus hujus illius
Dat. huic huic huic illl
Ace. hunc hanc hoc ilium
Abl. hoc hac hoc illo
FEM.
ilia
illius
illl
illam
ilia
NEUT.
illud
illius
illl
illud
illo
PLURAL.
Nom. hi hae haec illl illae ilia
Gen. horum harum horum illorum illarum illorum
Dat. his his his illls illls illls
Ace. hos has haec illos illas ilia
Abl. his his his illls illls illls
The pronoun iste, a, ud, that of yours, is declined exactly like
ille.
Ipse, -self.
Idem, the same.
SING. MASC. FEM. NEUT. MASC. FEM. NEUT.
Nom. ipse ipsa ipsum idem eadem idem
Gen. ipsius ipsius ipsms ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem
Dat. ipsi ipsi ipsi eidem eidem eidem
Ace. ipsum ipsam ipsum eundem eandem idem
Abl. ipso ipsa ipso eodem eadem eodem
PLURAL.
feidem,
Nom. ipsi ipsae ipsa 1 ._,
(iidem
Gen. ipsorum ipsarum ipsorum eorundem earundem eorundem
eaedem eadem
Dat.
ipsis ipsis
ipsis
I. iisdem 1
iisdem 1 '
Ace.
ipsos ipsas
ipsa
eosdem
easdem
eadem
Abl.
ipsis ipsis
ipsis
f elsdem,
\ilsdem 1
eisdem,
iisdem 1
elsdem,
iisdem 1
1. For iisdem we often find Zsdem.
232
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
24. Relative Pronoun.
SINGULAR.
MASCULINE.
FEMININ
Nom.
qul
quae
Gen.
cujus
cujus
Dat.
cul
cul
Ace.
quern
quam
Abl.
quo
qua
PLURAL.
Nom.
qui
quae
Gen.
quorum
quarum
Dat.
quibus
quibus
Ace.
quos
quas
Abl.
quibus
quibus
NEUTER.
quod
ciijus
cul
quod
quo
quae
quorum
quibus
quae
quibus
25. Interrogative Pronoun.
The Interrogative Pronoun differs from the relative pronoun in
having quis in Nom. Sing. Masc., and quid in Nom. and Ace. Sing.
Neut. There is also the Interrogative Pronominal Adjective qul,
quae, quod, declined exactly like the Relative Pronoun.
26. Indefinite Pronouns.
The Indefinite Pronouns are compounds of quis or qui,, and are
for the most part declined like them. 1
MASCULINE.
aliquis, aliqui
FEMININE.
aliqua
NEUTER.
aliquid, aliquod
(The neuter plural, as well as the feminine singular, has -qua for
-quae.)
quis, qui qua quid, quod
(The neuter plural, as well as the feminine singular, has qua for
quae.)
quisque quaeque quicque or quidque, quodque
quisquam quicquam or quidquam
(The plural and the feminine singular are not used.)
1. In this list where a word has both quis and qui, or both quid and quod, the
fonns in qui and quod are generally used adjectively, the others substantively.
PART III. PARADIGMS. 233
MASCULINE. FEMININE. NEUTER.
quisquis (quaeque) quicquid or quidquid
(Both parts of this compound are declined.)
quidam quaedam quiddam, quoddam
(Quidam changes m to n before -dam.)
quicunque quaecunque quodcunque
quivls quaevis quidvis, quodvis
quispiam quaepiam quidpiam or quippiam, quod-
piam
quilibet quaelibet quidlibet, quodlibet
also
uterque utraque utrumque
Uterque has the first part declined like uter, section 14.
For the common uses of these pronouns see section 95.
234
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(E) THE VERB.
27. Indicative Mood, Active Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug.
Second Conjug.
Third Conjug.
Fourth Conjug.
1.
amo
moneo
rego
audio
2.
amas
mones
regis
audis
3.
amat
monet
regit
audit
PLURAL.
1.
amamus
monemus
regimus
audimus
2.
amatis
monetis
regitis
auditis
3.
amant
monent
regunt
audiunt
IMPERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amabam
2. amabas
3. amabat
monebam
monebas
monebat
regebam
regebas
regebat
audiebam
audiebas
audiebat
PLURAL.
1. amabamus
2. amabatis
3. amabant
PLURAL.
1. amabimus
2. amabitis
3. amabunt
monebamus regebamus audiebamus
monebatis regebatis audiebatis
ihonebant regebant audiebant
FUTURE TENSE.
SINGULAR.
!. amabo
2. amabis
3. amabit
monebo
monebis
monebit
regam
reges
reget
audiam
audies
audiet
monebimus regemus audiemus
monebitis regetis audietis
monebunt regent audient
PART III. PARADIGMS.
235
(E) THE VERB.
28. Indicative Mood, Passive Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug.
Second Conjug.
Third Conjug.
Fourth Conjug.
1. amor
moneor
regor
audior
2. amaris 1
moneris 1
rfcgeris l
audiris 1
3. amatur
monetur
regitur
auditur
PLURAL.
1. amamur
monemur
regimur
audimur
2. amaminl
monemim
regimini
audiminl
3. amantur
monentur
reguntur
audiuntur
IMPERFECT
TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amabar
monebar
regebar
audiebar
2. amabaris 1
monebaris 1
regebaris 1
audiebaris 1
3. amabatur
monebatur
regebatur
audiebatur
PLURAL.
1. amabamur
monebamur
regebamur
audiebamur
2. amabamini
monebamini
regebamini
audiebamini
3. amabantur
monebantur
regebantur
audiebantur
FUTURE TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amabor
monebor
regar
audiar
2. amaberis 1
moneberis 1
regeris 1
audieris 1
3. amabitur
monebitur
regetur
audietur
PLURAL.
1. amabimur
monebimur
regemur
audiemur
2. amabimim
monebimini
regemini
audiemini
3. amabuntur
monebuntur
regentur
audientur
1. For -ria, -re also is found, especially in the imperfect and future tenses.
236 PKIMARY LATIN BOOK.
27. Indicative Mood, Active Voice (continued).
PERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug. Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Con jug.
1. amavi monui rexi audivi
2. amavisti monuisti rexisti audivisti
3. amavit monuit rexit audivit
PLURAL.
1. amavimus
2. amavistis
3. amaverunt 1
monuimus
monuistis
monuerunt 1
reximus
rexistis
rexerunt 1
audivimus
audivistis
audiverunt 1
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amaveram
2. amaveras
3. amaverat
monueram
monueras
monuerat
rexeram
rexeras
rexerat
audiveram
audiveras
audiverat
PLURAL.
1. amaveramus
2. amaveratis
3. amaverant
monueramus
monueratis
monuerant
rexeramus
rexeratis
rexerant
audiveramus
audiveratis
audiverant
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amavero
2. ainaveris
3. amaverit
PLURAL.
1. amaverimus
2. amaveritis
3. amaverint
monuero
monueris
monuerit
rexero
rexeris
rexerit
monuerimus rexenmus
monueritis rexeritis
monuerinfc rexerint
audivero
audiveris
audlverit
audiverimus
audiveritis
audiverint
1. For -erunt, -ere also is found, especially in poetry.
PART III. PARADIGMS. 237
28. Indicative Mood, Passive Voice (continued).
PERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug. Second Con jug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjug.
1. amatus 1 sum monitus 1 sum rectus 1 sum audltus 1 sum
2. 11 es it es n es n es;
3. M est it est M est n est
PLURAL.
1. amati 1 sumus moniti 1 sumus recti 1 sumus audit! 1 sumus
2. M estis i! estis M estis n estis
3. n sunt ii sunt n sunt M sunt
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amatus 1 eram monitus 1 eram rectus 1 eram audltus 1 eram
2. M eras n eras n eras n eras
3. u erat n erat n erat n erat
PLURAL.
1. amati 1 eramus moniti 1 eramus recti 1 eramus audit! 1 eramus
2. n eratis M eratis u eratis n eratis
3. n erant u erant n erant u erant
FUTURE PERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amatus 1 ero
2. n eris
3. ,i erit
monitus 1 ero
i, eris
M erit
rectus 1 ero
ii eris
M erit
audltus 1 ero
n eris
n erit
PLURAL.
1. amati 1 erimus moniti 1 erimus recti 1 erimus auditl 1 erimus
2. n eritis u eritis n eritis n eritis
3. M erunt n erunt n erunt M erunt
1. Instead of amatus and amati, arnata or amaturn are used in the singular and
amatae or amata in the plural, if the subject is feminine or neuter instead of
masculine. So in all conjugations.
238
PKIMARY LATIN BOOK.
29. Subjunctive Mood, Active Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conj
ug. Second Conjug.
Third Conjug.
Fourth Conjug.
1. amem
moneam
regam
audiam
2. ames
moneas
regas
audias
3. amet
moneat
regat
audiat
PLURAL.
1. amemus
moneamus
regamus
audiamus
2. ametis
moneatis
regatis
audiatis
3. ament
moneant
regant
audiant
SINGULAR.
1. amarem
2. amares
3. amaret
PLURAL.
1. amaremus
2. amaretis
3. amarent
SINGULAR.
1. amaverim
2. amaveris
3. amaverit
PLURAL.
1. amaverimus
2. amaveritis
3. amaverint
moneamus
moneatis
moneant
regamus
regatis
regant
audiamus
audiatis
audiant
IMPERFECT
TENSE.
monerem
moneres
moneret
regerem
regeres
regeret
audlrem
audlres
audiret
moneremus
moneretis
monerent
regeremus
regeretis
regerent
audiremus
audiretis
audirent
PERFECT
TENSE.
monuerim
monueris
monuerit
rexerim
rexeris
rexerit
audiverim
audlveris
audiverit
monuerimus
monueritis
monuerint
rexerimus
rexeritis
rexerint
audiverimus
audiveritis
audiverint
PART III. PARADIGMS. 239
3O. Subjunctive Mood, Passive Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug.
Second Conjug.
Third Conjug.
Fourth Conjug.
1. amer
mqnear
regar
audiar
2. ameris 1
monearis 1
regaris 1
audiaris 1
3. ametur
moneatur
regatur
audiatur
PLURAL.
1. amemur
moneamur
regamur
audiamur
2. amemini
moneamini
regamini
audiamim
3. amentur
moneantur
regantur
audiantur
IMPERFECT
TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amarer
monerer
regerer
audirer
2. amareris 1
monereris l
regereris 1
audireris 1
3. amaretur
moneretur
regeretur
audiretur
PLURAL.
1. amaremur
moneremur
regeremur
audiremur
2. amaremim
moneremini
regeremim
audiremin!
3. amarentur
monerentur
regerentur
audirentur
PERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
1. amatus 2 sim
monitus 2 sim
rectus 2 sim
auditus 2 sim
2. ii sis
M SIS
H SIS
it SIS
3. n sit
ii sit
ti sit
ii sit
PLURAL.
1. amati 2 simus
monitl 2 simus
recti 2 simus
audit! 2 simus
2. ,i sitis
M sitis
ii sitis
M sitis
3. n sint
n sint
ii sint
M sint
1. For -ris, -re also is found. 2. See footnote 1, page 237.
240 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
29. Subjunctive Mood, Active Voice (continued).
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug. Second Conjug. Third Conjug. Fourth Conjug.
1. amavissem monuissem rexissem audivissem
2. amavisses monuisses rexisses audivisses
3. amavisset monuisset rexisset audivisset
PLURAL.
1. amavissemus monuissemus rexissemus audivissemus
2. amavissetis monuissetis rexissetis audivissetis
3. amavissent monuissent rexissent audivissent
31. Infinitive Mood, Active Voice.
PRESENT.
amare monere regere audlre
PERFECT.
amavisse monuisse rexisse audivisse
FUTURE.
amattirus esse 1 moniturus esse 1 recttirus esse 1 auditurus esse 1
33. Participle, Active Voice.
PRESENT.
amans monens regens audiens
FUTURE.
amattirus moniturus recturus auditurus
1. See footnote 2, page 81,
PART III. PARADIGMS. 241
3O. Subjunctive Mood, Passive Voice (continued).
PLUPERFECT TENSE.
SINGULAR.
First Conjug. Second Conjug. Third Conjiuj. Fourth Conjug.
1. amatus 1 essem moiiitus 1 essem rectus 1 essern audltus 1 esseiu
2. ii esses u esses u esses n esses
3. u esset n esset u esset M
PLURAL.
1. amati 1 essemus moniti 1 essemus rectl 1 essemus audit! 1 essemus
2. M essetis M essetis n essetis u essetis
3. it essent n esseiit n essent n essent
32. Infinitive Mood, Passive Voice.
PRESENT.
amar! moneri regi audlri
PERFECT.
' amatus esse 2 monitus esse 2 rectus esse 3 audltus esse 2
FUTURE.
amatum M monitum iri rectum M auditum in
34. Participles, Passive Voice.
PERFECT.
amatus monitus rectus audltus
GERUNDIVE.
amandus monendus regendus audiendus
1. See footnote 1, page 237.
2. The perfect infinitive is made up of the perfect participle passive in -its and <he
infinitive of yum, which is sometimes omitted. The participle will, of course, agree in
gender, number and case with the person or thing it refers to, i.e., the subject.
242 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
35. Gerund, Active Voice.
First Conj. Second Conj. Third Conj. Fourth Conj.
Gen. amandi monendi regendi audiendi
Dab. amando monendo regendo audiendo
Ace. amandum monendum regendum audiendum
Abl. amando monendo regendo audiendo
36. Supine* Active Voice.
Acc. amatum monitum rectum audltum
Abl. amatu monitu rectii auditu
37. Imperative Mood, Active Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 2. ama mone rege audi
Plur. 2. amate monete regite audite
FUTURE TENSE.
Sing. 2. amato moneto regito audito
3. amato moneto regito audito
Plur. 2. amaibote monetote regitote auditote
3. amanto monento regunto audiunto
38. Imperative Mood, Passive Voice.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 2. amare monere regere audire
Plur. 2. amaminl monemini regimim audimini
FUTURE TENSE.
Sing. 2. amator monetor regitor auditor
3. amator monetor regitor auditor
Plur. 3. amantor monentor reguntor audiuntor
PART III. PARADIGMS. 243
39. Verbs in 16 of Third Conjugation. 1
INDICATIVE MOOD. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Active Voice.
Sing. 1. capio
2. capis
3. capit
Plur. 1. capimus
2. capitis
3. capiunt
Passive Voice. Active Voice.
capior capiam
caperis capias
capitur capiat
capimur capiaraus
capimini capiatis
capiuntur capiant
Passive Voice.
capiar
capiaris
capiatur
capiamur
capiamini
capiantur
IMPERFECT TENSE.
Sing. 1. capiebam
2. capiebas
3. capiebat
Plur. 1. capiebamus
2. capiebatis
3. capiebant
capiebar caperem
capiebaris caperes
capiebatur caperet
capiebamur caperemus
capiebaminl caperetis
capiebantur caperent
caperer
capereris
caperetur
caperemur
caperemim
caperentur
FUTURE TILNSE.
Sing. 1. capiam
2. capies
3. capiet
Plur. I. capiemus
2. capietis
3. capieut
capiar
capieris
capietur
capiemur
capiemini
capientur
PERFECT TENSE.'
Sing. 1. cSpi
captus sum ceperim
captus sim
PLUPERFECT TENSED
Sing. 1. ceperam
captus eram cepissem
captus essem
FUTXJBE PERFECT TENSE. 2
$i?i#. 1. cepero
captus ero
1. For a list of the verbs belonging to this class, see section 67.
2. In the perfect tenses, capio is inflected exactly like the verbs of the four regular
conjugations.
244
Pres.
Per/.
Fut.
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
INFINITIVE MOOD.
Active Voice.
capere
cepisse
capturus esse
Passive Voice.
cap!
captus esse
captum iri
Pres.
Fut.
capiens
capturus
Gen.
Dat.
Ace.
Abl.
capiendi
capiendo
capiendum
capiendo
Ace.
Abl.
captum
captu
PARTICIPLE.
Per/, captus
Gerun. capiendus
GERUND.
SUPINE.
IMPERATIVE MOOD.
PRESENT TENSE.
Sing. 2. cape
Plur. 2. capite
capere
capimini
FUTURE TENSE.
Sing. 2. capito
3. capito
Plur. 2. capitote
3. capiunto
capitor
capitor
capiunto]
PART III. PARADIGMS.
245
40. Synopsis of Deponent Verbs.
INDICATIVE.
First Con.
Pres. hortor
Impf. hortabar
Put. hortabor
Perf. hortatus
sum
PI up. hortatus
eram
Put. P. hortatus
ero
Second Con.
vereor
verebar
verebor
veritus
sum
veritus
eram
veritus
ero
Third Con.
loquor
loquebar
loquar
locutus
sum
lociitus
eram
locutus
ero
Fourth Con. Verbs in id.
potior patior
potiebar patiebar
potiar patiar
potitus
sum
potitus
eram
potitus
ero
passus
sum
passus
eram
passus
ero
S UB JUNCTI VE .
Pres. horter verear
Impf. hortarer vererer
Perf. hortatus veritus
loquar potiar patiar
loquerer potlrer paterer
locutus potitus passus
Plup. hortatus veritus locutus potitus passus
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
Perf.
Fut.
Pres.
Fut.
Perf.
Ger.
Gen.
hortari
hortatus
vereii
veritus
potiri
potitus
pati
passus
loqui
locutus
hortaturus veriturus locuturus potiturus passurus
esse esse esse
PABTICIPLE.
hortans verens loquens potiens patiens
hortaturus veriturus locuturus potiturus passurus
hortatus veritus locutus potitus passus
hortandus verendus loquendus potiendus patiendus
GERUND.
hortandi verendi loquendi potiendi patiendi
246
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SUPINE.
First Con. Second Con. Third Con. Fourth Con. Verbs in id.
Ace. hortatum veritum locutum potitum passum
IMPERATIVE.
Pres. hoi-tare verere loquere potire patere
Fut. hortator veretor loquitor potltor patitor
IRREGULAR VERBS.
41. Sum, esse, ful, to be.
42. Possum, posse, potul,
to be able, can.
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PRESENT.
Sing.
1. sum
sim
possum
possim
2. es
sis
potes
possis
3. est
sit
potest
possit
Plur.
1. sumus
simus
possumus
possimus
2. estis
sitis
potestis
possitis
3. sunt
sint
possunt
possint
IMPERFECT.
Sing. 1. eram
essem
poteram
possem
2. eras
esses
poteras
posses
3. erat
esset
poterat
posset
Plur. 1. eramus
essemus
poteramus
possemus
2. eratis
esseiis
poteratis
possetis
3. erant
essent
poterant
possent
FUTURE.
1. 1. ero
2. eris
3. erit
Plur. 1. erimus
2. eritis
3. erunt
potero
poteris
poterit
poterimus
poteritis
poterunt
PART III. PARADIGMS.
247
INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE. INDICATIVE. SUBJUNCTIVE.
PERFECT.
Sing. 1. fui
fuerim potui
potuerim
2. fuisti
fueris potuisti
potueris
3. fuit
fuerit potuit
potuerit
Plur. 1. fuinms
fuerimus potuimus
potuerimus
2. fuistis
fueritis potuistis
potueritis
3. fuerunt
fuerint potuerunt
potuerint
PLUPERFECT.
Sing. 1. fueram
fuissem potueram
potuissem
2. fueras
fuisses potueras
potuisses
3. fuerat
fuisset potuerat
potuisset
Plur. 1. fueramus
fuissemus potueramus
potuissemus
2. fueratis
fuissetis potueratis
potuissetis
3. fuerant
fuissent potuerant
potuissent
FUTURE PERFECT.
Sing. 1. fuero
potuero
2. fueris
potueris
3. fuerit
potuerit
Plur. 1. fuerimus
potuerimus
2. fueritis
potueritis
3. fuerint
potuerint
INFINITIVE.
Pres. esse
posse
Per/. fuisse
potuisse
Fut. futurus esse or
fore
Pres.
Fut.
futurus
PARTICIPLE.
potens
IMPERATIVE.
Pres. Sing. 2. es
Pkir. 2. este
Fut. Sing. 2. esto
3. esto
Plur. 2. estote
3. sunto
248
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
43. Void, N616, Malo. 1
Void, velle, volul,
X616, nolle, iidlm,
Malo, malle, iiialui.
be willing, will, wish,
be unwilling, will not.
be more willing, prefer.
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
volo
n5lo
malo
vis
non vis
mavis
vult
non vult
mavult
volumus
nolumus
malumus
vultis
non vultis
mavultis
volunt
nolunt
malunt
Imp/.
volebam
nolebam
malebam
Fut.
volam
nolam
malam
Perf.
volul
nolui
malui
Plup.
volueram
nolueram
malueram
Fut. P.
voluero
noluero
maluero
SUBJUNCTIVE.
Pres.
velim
nolim
malim
veils
noils
malis
velit
nolit
malit
velimus
nolimus
malimus
velitis
nolitis
malitis
velint
nolint
malint
Imp/.
vellem
nollem
mallem
velles
nolles
malles
veUet
nollet
mallet
vellemus
nollemus
mallemus
velletis
nolletis
malletis
vellent
nollent
mallent
Perf.
voluerim
noluerim
maluerim
Plup.
voluissem
noluissem
maluissem
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
veUe
nolle
malle
Perf.
voluisse
noluisse
maluisse
1. See footnote 3, page 94.
PART III. PARADIGMS.
249
PARTICIPLE.
..
Pres.
volens
nolens
IMPERATIVE.
'
Pres.
noli
nolite
Put.
nolito
nolito
nolitote
nolunto
44. Fero. 1
Fero, ferre, tull, latum, bear, carry,
endure.
INDICATIVE.
Active.
Passive.
Pres.
fero
ferimus feror
ferimur
fers
fertis ferris
ferimim
fert
ferunt fertur
feruntur
Imp/.
Put.
ferebam
feram
ferebar
ferar
Perf.
Plup.
Fid. P.
tuli
tuleram
tulero
latus sum
latus eram
latus ero
SUBJUNCTIVE,
Pres.
feram
ferar
Impf.
Perf.
Plup.
ferrem
tulerim
tulissem
ferrer
latus sim
latus essem
INFINITIVE.
Pres.
ferre
ferrl
Perf.
Fut.
tulisse
laturus esse
latus esse
latum Iri
PARTICIPLE.
Pres.
Fut.
ferens
laturus
Perf. latus
Ger. ferendus
1. See footnote 1, page 97. For the compounds of fero, see section 71, 6.
250
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Gen. ferendi
Dat. ferendo
Ace. ferendum
Abl. ferendo
Ace.
Abl.
latum
latu
Active.
Pres. Sing. 2. fer
Plur. 2. ferte
Fid. Sing. 2. ferto
3. ferto
Plur. 2. fertote
3. ferunto
GERUND.
SUPINE.
IMPERATIVE.
Passive.
ferre
ferimini
fertor
fertor
feruntor
45. E6. 1
46. Flo. 1
Ed, ire, ii, (ivi), Itum, go. Fid, fieri, factus sum, be made,
become, happen.
INDICATIVE.
Pres.
Impf.
Put.
Perf.
Plup.
eo
is
it
ibam
Ibo
ii
ieram
imus
Itis
eunt
Fut. P. iero
Pres. earn, eas, etc.
Impf. irem
Perf. ierim
Plup. iissem
fio
fis
fit
fiebam
flam
factus sum
factus eram
factus ero
SUBJUNCTIVE.
flam
fierem
factus sim
factus essem
fimus
fitis
fiunt
1. See footnote 2, page 100.
PAKT IIL PARADIGMS. 251
INFINITIVE.
Pres. ire fieri
Perf. iisse factus esse
Fut. iturus esse factum Irl
PAKTICIPLE.
Pres. iens, Gen. euntis Perf. factus
Fut. iturus Ger. faciendus
GERUND.
Gen. eundl
Dot. eundo
Ace. eundum
Abl. eundo
SUPINE.
Ace. itum
Abl. itu
IMPERATIVE.
Pres. Sing. 2. I Pres. Sing. 2. fi
Plur. 2. Ite Plur. 2. fite
Fut. Sing. 2. ltd
3. ltd
Plur. 2. Itote
3. eunto
252 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. SYNOPSIS OF ACCIDENCE.
47. Nouns of the First Declension. (See also section 1.)
(a) The STEM ends in a, and is like the nominative singular.
(6) GENDER. Nouns ending in a or e are feminine, those end-
ing in as or es masculine. 1 EXCEPTIONS : Masculine in a, some
nouns indicating males, e.g., nauta, agricola, poeta ; Belgae, Celtae
(names of tribes) ; Gotta, Galba (a man's name) ; so, also, Hadria.
(c) IRREGULAR CASE ENDINGS. Genitive singular in -ai (archaic,
in poetry) ; genitive singular in -as (in the word familids in com-
position, see section 9) ; genitive plural in um, especially in words
of Greek origin and (in poetry) in patronymics and compounds of
-cola and -yena ; dative and ablative plural in -abus (in dea and
ftlia, to distinguish them from the corresponding forms of deus
and filius).' 2
(d) DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. These in the singular have
the following endings, but those borrowed from the Greek are,
however, often replaced by the regular Latin endings :
Nom. e, Gen. es, Dat. ae, Ace. en, Voc. e, Abl. e,
it as, it ae, n ae, n an, n a, a, u a,
ti es, tt ae, H ae, n en, H e, a, a, u e, a.
In the plural, the regular Latin endings are used throughout.
48. Nouns of the Second Declension. (See also sections
2 and 3.)
(a) The STEM ends in o, and except in quantity is like the dative
singular. Most of the nouns whose stems end in -ro drop o in
forming the nominative, inserting also e before the final r, if, as is
more often the case, r is not preceded by e.
(6) GENDER. Nouns ending in us, er, ir or os are masculine,
those ending in um or on are neuter. 3 EXCEPTIONS : Feminine in
its, many names of towns, plants, gems or ships ; also, hunwts,
cdvus, cohis, carbasus, and vannus, and some Greek nouns ; neuter
in iis, wdgus, pelagus, virus.
1. Nouns ending in e, as, es are borrowed from the Greek.
2. Duo and ambo also have the feminine plural dative and ablative in -abus.
3. Nouns ending in os, on, are borrowed from the Greek.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 253
(c) IRREGULAR CASE ENDINGS. Genitive singular of nouns in
-lus or -iinn in -I, contracted for -ii 1 (without affecting the accent);
vocative singular of proper names in -ins, as also films and genius,
in -i, contracted for -ie (without affecting the accent) ; genitive
plural in -um (especially in words denoting coins, weights and
measures, and in some other words, chiefly in poetry). For the
declension of deus, see section 9.
(d) DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. These in the singular have
the following endings, but those borrowed from the Greek are,
however, often replaced by the regular Latin endings :
Nom. os, Gen. T, Dat. 6, Ace. on, Voc. e, Abl. o,
n 6s, o, I, M o, it on, 6 it 6s, n 6,
M eus, 2 el, eos, M ei, M ea, it eu, n eo,
ii on, I, it 6, M on, n on, n 6.
In the plural, the regular Latin endings are used throughout.
49. Nouns of the Third Declension. (See also sections 4-6.)
(a) The STEM ends in either a consonant (the genitive plural
having -um) or the vowel -i (the genitive plural having -mm). 3 "
(6) GENDER. Nouns ending in 6, or, 6s, er, es, or in es
(increasing in the genitive), are masculine ; nouns ending in as or
as, es (not increasing in the genitive), is, ys, s (preceded by a con-
sonant) us or x, are feminine ; nouns ending in men, us, a, e, I, y,
c v 1, t, ar, ar, ur or nr, are neuter.
EXCEPTIONS. The most important are as follows :
Masculine, not Feminine : Many nouns in -is (not increasing in
the genitive), e.g., amnis, civis, collis, ensis, finis, funis, hostis,
Ignis, juvenis, mznsis, orbis, testis ; also lapis, sanguis, pulvis, cinis,
Quir'is, Samnls, which increase in the genitive ; dux, grex, remex,
rex, conjunx, senex, and most nouns in -ex, genitive -icis; dens,
fons, tnons, pans, and most nouns in -ps (except daps, ops, stirps) ;
vas (genitive, vadis); rates; inti*.
1. In many editions of Latin authors -ii is retained except in proper names in -iits
2. Nouns in -eus are declined in Latin sometimes according to the second and
sometimes according to the third declension. See section 49, d.
3. Except in neuter nouns, and nouns whose stem ends in a liquid (I, n or r), the
nominative is formed by adding to the stem ; the final consonants of the stem in
combination with s often undergo euphonic changes, and the vowel i is often (in both
consonant and vowel stems) changed to e. Neuter nouns and liquid stems generally
have the nominative like the stem (sometimes modified, however, by vowel changes or
by the loss of final letters). No rule can be given for the determination of the stem,
on account of the many euphonic changes and the confusion which always existed be-
tween the consonant and the i- declensions ; in a majority of cases, however, it may
be obtained by dropping -um from the genitive plural.
254 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Masculine, not Neuter : ft&men : consul, exsid, sal, sdl ; Idr ;
augur, fur ; also names of animals, e.g., lepus, vidtur.
Feminine, not Masculine : nouns in -do (except ordo and cardo),
-go, and abstract or collective nouns in -id; card; soror, uxor,
arbor; mulier, mater, linter ; seges, Ceres, merces, abies, quies.
Feminine, not Neuter: Venus, pecus (genitive, pecudis); also,
lavs, fraus.
Neuter, not Masculine : cor, aequor, marmor ; os (genitive, dris),
also os (genitive, ossis) ; ver, iter, uber, verber ; aes.
Neuter, not Feminine : vds (genitive, vasis) ; nouns in -us (geni-
tive, -uris), e.g., jus, rus, tus, crus (except tellus).
(c) IRREGULAR CASE ENDINGS. No exceptional endings occur,
but in several cases a variation of ending is found. 1 The genitive
plural is found both in -um and in -ium. The latter occurs
chiefly in t-stems, i.e., the following cases: 2 nouns ending in -is or
-es, with dissyllabic nominative and genitive ; monosyllables end-
ing in -s or -x preceded by a consonant ; nouns ending in -ns or
-rs ; neuter nouns ending in -e, -al or -ar ; national names in -as or
-Is; also imber, linter, vis, nox, nix, fur, Idr, mas, os (ossis), card,
the plural nouns pendtes, optimdtes and fauces.
The accusative plural in masculine or feminine nouns of t-stems
has -Is as well as -es.
The accusative singular has -im for -em in the following cases :
vis, sitis, and names of rivers in -is (also Arar) ; generally febris,
securis; rarely ndvis.
The ablative singular has -I for -e in the following cases : vis,
sitis, securis, names of rivers in -is (also Arar), neuter nouns in -e,
-al, -ar (genitive, -dris); generally Ignis, ndvis, continens, puppis,
avis; also, turris, imber, trldens, familidris. For the declension
of vis, bos and Juppiter, see section 9.
(d) DECLENSION OF GREEK NOUNS. These in the singular often
have the genitive in -os and the accusative in -a ; in the plural, the
nominative and vocative in -es and the accusative in -as. 3
The other chief irregularities are as follows : Nom. is, Ace. in ;
Nom. ys, Ace. yn; Nom. 6, Gen. us, Dat., Ace., Voc., and Abl., o;
Nom. es, Gen. is (I), Dat. I, Ace. em, ea (eri), Voc. es, es (e), Abl.
e ; Nom. eus, Gen. eos (ei, I), Dat. el, 1 (eo), Ace. ea (eum), Voc.
eu, Abl. (eo).
1. This variation is due chiefly to a confusion between the consonant and the i-
stems. The tendency is for nouns to take the endings of the consonant stems and
for adjectives to take those of the i- stems.
2. Exceptions are : juvenis, ca nis, votes, a mbages, and often metisis, rolucris, apis,
sedes; opis; parenx.
3. In Caesar the names of Gallic tribes have often es in the nominative and as in the
accusative, the declension of Greek nouns being transferred to other foreign names.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 255
50. Nouns of the Fourth Declension. (See also section 7.)
(a) The STEM ends in u, and except in quantity is like the
ablative singular.
(6) GENDER. Nouns ending in us are masculine, those ending
in u are neuter. EXCEPTIONS : Feminine in us, names of plants
and trees, also domus, manns, trihus, Jdus (plural only).
(c) IRREGULAR CASE ENDINGS. Dative singular in -u, contracted
for -ui ; dative and ablative plural in -ubus, found in dissyllabic
words in -ens (e.g., laciis, arcus), also in artus, partus, tribus, and
generally portus and veru. For the declension of domus, see
section 9. The names of plants or trees belonging to the fourth
declension have generally most of the forms of the second
declension also.
51. Nouns of the Fifth Declension. (See also section 8.)
(a) The STEM ends in e, and is like the ablative singular.
(6) GENDER. All nouns end in es and are regularly feminine.
EXCEPTIONS : Masculine, di?s, 1 with its compound merldies.
(c) IRREGULAR CASE ENDINGS. Genitive singular I or e for el.
In the fifth declension only dies and res are declined throughout.
Acies, effigies, /acres, glacies, series, species and spes, have, in the
plural, only the nominative and accusative ; other words occur
in the singular only.
52. General Rules for Gender.
(a) Names of males, and of rivers, winds, months and mountains,
are masculine.
(6) Names of females, and of cities, toivns, islands, plants, trees
and abstract qualities, are feminine.
(c) Indeclinable nouns, and infinitives, phrases or clauses used
as substantives, are neuter.
d) Other nouns, and some even of the classes (a) and (6) above,
ow the rules for gender (according to the ending of the nomina-
tive singular) given under each declension.
foil
53. General Rules of Declension.
The declension to which a word belongs is indicated in all voca-
bularies and dictionaries by giving the ending of the genitive singu-
lar, which is different for each declension.
1. Dies is sometimes feminine in the singular, chiefly in the sejise of a day or time
tutrefd on orjixed.
256
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
SYNOPSIS or CASE ENDLNGS.
SINGULAR.
1st Decl.
2nd Decl.
3rd Decl.
4fh Decl.
5th Decl.
Nom.
a
us ( ) urn
us
u
es
Gen.
ae
I
I
is
is
us
us
el
Dat.
ae
5
6
I
I
Ul
u
el-
Ace.
am
urn
um
em
um
u
em
Foe.
a
(-)
um
us
u
es
Abl.
a
5
6
e(l)
e(l)
u
u
e
PLURAL.
Nom.
ae
I
a
es
a(ia)
us
ua
es
Gen.
arum
orum
orum
um (mm) um (iurn)
uum
uum
erum
Dat.
Is
Is
Is
ibus
ibus
ibus
ibus
ebus
Ace.
as
6s
a
es (Is)
a(ia)
us
ua
es
Foe.
ae
I
a
es
a(ia)
ils
ua
es
Abl.
Is
Is
Is
ibus
ibus
ibus
ibus
ebus
The following general statements should be noticed :
Neuter nouns have the nominative, accusative and vocative, in
each number, alike, and in the plural these cases always end in a
(to).
All nouns of the third, fourth and fifth declensions have the
nominative, accusative, and vocative plural alike.
All nouns have the nominative and vocative plural alike, and
(except in nouns in -us of the second declension) these cases are
always alike in the singular also.
In masculine or feminine nouns, the accusative singular always
ends in m, preceded by a short vowel ; the accusative plural in s,
preceded by a long vowel.
The dative and ablative plural are always alike.
The genitive plural always ends in um.
54. Nouns Irregular in Declension or Peculiar in Usage.
(a) DEFECTIVE NOUNS. The singular only of the following is
ordinarily found : l Proper names of places or persons, single
natural objects, names of things weighed or measured (not
counted), collective nouns, names of abstract qualities ; e.g., JRoma,
Jfippiter; telliis, humus; aurum, aes; equitatus, vulgus ; ?ra, sic-
citas.
The plural only of the following is ordinarily found : Names of
1. These are occasionally found in the plural also, with special meanings (see sec-
tion 54, e). Some names of cities occur in the plural only, e.g., Athenae, Delphi.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 257
days and festivals, names of classes or groups, names of certain
]>:irts of the body; e.g., Caloidae, Ndnae, ~Idus, Bw.cluniCd'm ;
I berl, mdjdres, Infen, super I, manes, pendtes ; artils, cervices, exta,
viscera, fauces, Ilia, praecordia ; and also of the following words :
ambages, angustiae, anna, armdmenta, bJgae, casses, castra, d'lirioc,
d'l'itiac, t'y.'/ce', <'.< iibiae, exseqniae, exuviae, fasti, grates, indutiae,
liiferiae, inimlcitiae, Insidiae, minae, moenia, nuptiae, phalerae,
quadrigae, reliquiae, sata, sentes, serta, tenebrae, virgulta.
The following words are defective in certain cases :
Found in but one case : Mane, noctii, jussu, injussu, ndtil,
rogdtu, promptu.
Found in but two cases : Fors, forte ; spontis, sponte ; fords, forls.
Found in but three cases : Nemo, neminl, neminem ; lues, luem,
lue ; grates (nom. and ace.), grdtibus.
Defective in singular, regular in plural : Vis (see section 9) ;
fidss (lyre), fidem, fide; fnlges (rare in sing.) ; opes (noin. and dat.
sing, lacking) ; preces (nom. and gen. sing, lacking).
Defective in plural, regular in singular : Efts, jiis, aes, far, in
nom. and ace. only ; calx, cor, fax, lux, nex, os, pax, ros, sal, sol,
tus, lack the gen. ; most nouns of the fifth declension (see section
51, c.).
Defective in both singular and plural : Dapis (nom. and dat.
sing., and gen. plur. lacking); dicionis (nom. sing, and all the
plural lacking) ; ricis (nom. and dat. sing., and gen. plur. lacking).
(6) HETEROGENEOUS NOUNS (with the same stem, but of varying
gender) :
Sing. Carbasus, I, F., Plur. Carbasa, drum, N.
n Epulum, I, N., ti Epulae, drum,, F.
it Frenum, I, N., n Freni , drum, M. , and (poetical)/mwi,
drum, N.
M Jocus, I, M., ii Joca, drum, N., also jocl, drum, M.
it Locus, I, M. , ii Loca, drum, N., also loci, drum, M.
(generally in transferred sense).
it East rum, I, N., M Eastrl, drum, M., also rastra, drum,
N.
n Tartarus, I, M., n Tartar a, drum, N.
(c) HETEROCLITE NOUNS (different stems with the same nomina-
tive 1 ). Coins, cupressus, lanrus, myrtus, plnus, generally of the
second declension, have also forms (in most cases, the abl. sing,
and nom. and ace. plur.) of the fourth.
Domus has forms of both the second and the fourth declension.
(See section 9.)
Fames, is, has also abl. fame, of the fifth declension.
1. Under Heteroclites are generally classed the nouns of the first declension which
have also a form of the fifth declension, e.g., materia, materies.
17
258 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Femur, gen. femoris, or feminis.
Jecur, gen. jecoris, jednoris, or jocinoris.
Jugenini, I, has, in the plural, generally jygera, -urn, of the third
declension.
Pecus, pecoris, n., or pecudis, f., also, in the plural, pecua, of the
fourth declension.
Ptebs, plebis, and plebes, plebis, or plebel.
Praesaepe, is, n., and praesaepes, is, f., also praesaepium, .
Pubes, pubis, or puberis.
Requies, requietis, has also requiem and requie of the fifth
declension.
Fc^, -wsw, has, in the plural, vdsa, orum, of the second
declension.
Vesper, vesperis, or vesperl.
(d) INDECLINABLE NOUNS. (Most of these are used in the
nominative and accusative only). Fas, nefds, Instar, mane (in
poetry), necesse, nihil, opus, secus.
(e) NOUNS WITH A SPECIAL MEANING IN THE PLURAL. Many
nouns found ordinarily in the singular only (section 54, a) are used
in a special sense in the plural. Names of persons are used to
denote the family or individuals of the same character, e.g., Luculll;
names of materials to denote objects made of them, e.g., uera,
bronze vessels ; names of single natural objects in a transferred
sense, e.g., soles, days; abstract nouns to denote various manifesta-
tions of the quality, e.g., Irae, bursts of passion; siccitdtes, droughts
(in different places). 1
The following also have a different meaning in the singular and
plural : aedes, S. temple, PL. house, palace ; auxilium, S. aid, PL.
auxiliaries; -bonum, S. a blessing, advantage, PL. property; cas-
trum, S. (rare, except as proper name), fort, PL. camp ; career, S.
prison, PL. barriers (of a race-course) ; comitinm, S. voting-place,
PL. election ; copia, S. abundance, PL. troops, stores ; finis, S.
end, PL. territory; fortuna, S. lot, fortune, PL. possessions;
impedlmentum, S. hindrance, PL. baggage; littera, S. letter (of
alphabet), PL. letter (despatch, document, literature); mos, S.
custom, PL. character; rostrum, S. beak of ship, PL. a speaker's
platform at Rome.
55. Adjectives of the First and Second Declensions* (See
also section 10.)
Most adjectives of this declension are declined like bonus; of
those ending in -er, the majority are declined like ac.jer, the
1. Sometimes the singnlar of a concrete noun is used as a collective, i.e., as
equivalent to the plura 1 , e.;>., miles, the soldiery. Again, the poets often use the
plural for the singular as though to heighten the effect..
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 259
exceptions being asper, liber, lacer, miser, tener, compounds in -fer
and -</'-/, and sometimes dexter.
Satur, satura, saturuni is delined like liber, except for the
difference of vowel.
For adjectives with the genitive in -lus and dative in -i, see
section 14.
Adjectives in -ius do not contract the genitive and vocative as
do the nouns.
56. Adjectives of the Third Declension. (See also sec-
tion 11.)
(a) These are commonly divided into adjectives of one, two, or
Ihree terminations, according to the number of varying forms found
for the different genders in the nominative singular. Adjectives
of three terminations are those with stems in -ri; those of two
terminations with stems in -i (except most of those in -ri) and
comparatives ; those of one termination with stems in consonants
(except comparatives). See also footnote 1, page 28.
(6) As a rule all adjectives (except comparatives) have -i in the
ablative singular, -ium- in the genitive plural, and -ia in the
nominative, accusative and vocative plural neuter. 1 The following
exceptions occur :
With abl. sing, in -e : pauper, pubes, prmceps, caelebs, compos,
impos, and adjectives in -es, gen. -itis or -idis, e.g., dives, superstes.
With gen. plur. in -um; adjectives with the penult of the
genitive short, e.g., those with the abl. sing, in -e, those in -ceps,
those with genitives in -eris, -oris, -uris.
With neut. plur. in -a : vetus, uber.
Participles have regularly -ia and -ium ; when used as adjectives
they have -I, as participles -e, 2 in the ablative singular.
56a. Defective and Indeclinable Adjectives.
Panel and (generally) plerique are used in the plural only.
Cetera, mfera, supera, postera, ludicra, lack the nominative
singular masculine.
Kmitis and sUminecis lack the nominative singular.
Many adjectives of one termination in the third declension lack
the neuter plural, e.g., memor, pauper, supplex, trux, compos,
uber.
f-rugl and nequam are indeclinable, and so often potis.
I. Adjectives of one termination occasionally have -e as well as -I, and comparatives
(rarely) -I as veil as -e.
2. Virgil has venientum for venientium. Notice, too, that occasionally adjectives
used as substantives (section 88, a) have the endings e and urn.
260 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
57. Comparison of Adjectives. (See also sections 12, 13,
56, b.)
In addition to the instances of irregular comparison given in
section 13, the following irregularities occur :
Compounds in -dicn-s, -ficus and -volus, and also providus, change
-us to -entior, -tntissimus.
egenus egentior egentissimus
frugl friigalior frugalissimus
nequam neqidor nequissimus
dexter dexterior dextimiw
potis potior potissimus
senex senior (major natti) 1 mdximus ndtu 1
juvenis junior (minor ndtu) 1 minimus ndtti 1
odor ocissimus
deterior deterrimus
The comparative is lacking in: d'versus, falsus, fid-it* (and its
compounds), indutus, invictus, invitus, nocus, sacer, vetus.
The superlative is lacking in : alacer, caecus, diuturnus, ingens,
InH'it/miiKs, opiinus, prddJvis, propinquiis, salutdris, segnis ; also in
most verbals in -His (except amdbilis, fertilis, mobilis, nobilis, iitilis).
Many adjectives are incapable of comparison, especially those
whose meaning does not admit of degrees; also most adjectives in
-us preceded by a vowel (except those in -quns and -guus), com-
pound adjectives, and albus, daudm, /en/.-s, lassim, m/n/.s. If in
these cases comparison is to be expressed, the adverbs magis
(more) and maxim e (most) are used w^ith the positive.
Many present and perfect participles, used as adjectives, are
compared.
58. Numerals. (See also sections 15, 16.)
(a) Unns in the plural is used in the sense of alone, or with
nouns plural in form but singular in meaning in the sense of <we,
e.g., unl Suebl, una castra. The singular also may mean alone.
(b} In combining numerals up to 100, either the ten without et,
or the unit with et, precedes. 2 But bhe forms expressing subtrac-
tion, e.g., duodevigintl, unfair iginta, are more common than those
expressing union. In combining numerals above 100, the order
1. Natu (literally by birth) is often omitted.
2. Compare English twenty-one, or one and twenty, but notice that th
unusual in ordinary prose English, while unus et viginti is good prose Latin.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 2G1
is thousands (if present), hundreds, tens, units ; et may or may
not be inserted after the highest number.
(c) The distributive numerals are : 1. singnli, 2. bini, 3. term,
4. quaternl, 5. quini, 6. senl, 7. septenl, 8. octoiii, 9. novenl,
10. denl, 20. vlceni, 100. centeni, etc. They are declined like the
plural of bonus (see section 10), but often have -um for -drum in
the genitive.
The distributives are numeral adjectives used (1) to signify (so
'many) each, or a piece, (2) in multiplication (bis septem, twice seven,
not bis septem, except in poetry), (3) with nouns used in the plural
only, in place of the cardinals (except that uni is used for one, and
trlni, not term, for three), (4) to express pairs of objects, (5) in
poetry often for the cardinal.
(d) The numeral adverbs are : 1. semel, once, 2. bis, tivice,
3. ter, 4. quater, 5. quinqnies, 6. sexies, 7. septies, 8. octies,
9. novies, 10. decies, 20. vlcies, 100. centies, 1000. millies.
For the forms in -es, -ens is also found.
(e) Fractions are often expressed as in English : Tertia, or tertia
pars, ^ ; septem, nonae, ^ ; but where the numerator is one less than
the denominator, by the cardinal and partes alone, e.g., duae partes,
f . One-half is dlmidium, or dlmidia pars. Another method com-
monly adopted for many fractions is to use the names of the
fractional parts of the as (a Roman standard unit for coins, weights
and measures). Sesqui- is used in compounds, meaning 1^.
(/) Mille in the singular is regularly an indeclinable adjective
in agreement with its substantive ; rarely (generally in the nomi-
native or accusative) a neuter noun, followed by the genitive.
Millia (or Milia), the plural, is a neuter noun, followed by the
genitive. 1 If millia be the subject of a verb, whose form indicates
gender, the masculine is often found in place of the neuter, by a
sense construction. If to millia is added some smaller number, a
noun preceding the combination is in the genitive, but a noun fol-
lowing the combination is in the same case as millia. 2
59. Adverbs. (See also section 17).
Adverbs are formed from nouns and pronouns as well as from
adjectives, 3 though the derivation is often disguised by euphonic
changes.
^1. In the common phrase milli p,txnii,ii, when the sentence requires the genitive
mQlium, Latin writers regnlarly omit paxKUiim.
2. That is, in both cases the noun is taken with the nearer numeral and understood
with the other. For the pmlicnU' utter ////7//V/, see section 7'.), h, ii.
3. Only those formed from adjectives can be compared (with the exception <
and diu).
262 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Accusative Case (Nouns) partim, diu, furtim; (Pronouns) turn,
tarn, quum, quam, tune, nunc; (Adjectives) alias, non, singvlaJim.
Ablative Case (Nouns) vulgo; (Pronouns) qua, hoc, qui; (Adjec-
tives) frustrd, intrd, contra.
Locative Case (Nouns) hodie, heri ; (Pronouns) ibi, ubi, hie,
hinc, inde, utl, ut t sic, olim, utrimque.
Dative Case (Pronouns) quo, hoc, eo, adeo ; (Adjectives) ultro.
Fossilized Phrases qudre, cur, quamobrem, quotannls, proptered,
anted, posted, extemplo, obviam, interdum, admodum.
Miscellaneous Adverbs in -tus, e.g., antiquitus, intus, penitus,
funditus, dlvmitus ; quidem, quondam, quando, jam, etiam, dum,
ita.
60. Personal, Possessive and Reflexive Pronouns. (See also
sections 18-21.) '
(a) In the first and second persons, the personal pronouns serve
also as the reflexive pronouns.
(6) In the partitive sense, the genitives nostrum and vestrum
are used ; in the objective sense, the genitives mel, tul, sul,
nostri and vestri ; in the possessive and subjective senses, the
adjectives incus, tuns, suns, noster and vester.
(c) For mihi, the contracted form mi also occurs. These pro-
nouns are emphasized by the addition of certain particles,
especially -met (added to all forms of ego, til and sm, except tu and
the genitive plural) and -pte (added to the ablative singular of the
possessives); Reduplicated forms of the accusative singular of the
personal and reflexive pronouns also occur, especially sese, which,
in usage, is interchangeable with se.
(d) With ego, tu, sui, the preposition cum is always suffixed to
the ablative it governs, the accent being on the syllable preceding
-cum.
(e) The reflexive pronouns with inter are equivalent to the
reciprocal each other or one another (including often the English
preposition governing these words), e.g., inter se amant, inter nos
colloquimur.
61. Demonstrative Pronouns. (See also sections 22, 23.)
Hie is often emphasized by the addition of -ce to the cases
ending in -s (and sometimes in -in, which is then changed to -n). 1
1. The -c of hie, hunc, hoc, haec, is a remnant of this same suffix -ce. In the same
way ille and iste have (in colloquial use) more emphatic forms, in the nominative,
accusative and ablative ending in -c, in the other cases (except the genitive plural) in
-ce.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 263
For the feminine plural nominative liae, haec also occurs.
For the dative singular of tile, oil! is found (from an archaic
In the genitive singular of ille and iste, the poets often use Ulius
and istius, not Ulius and istlus.
Of the alternative forms given for the nominative, dative and
ablative plural of is and idem, those in el are the rarer. Those
in it are often written I (and probably with greater correctness).
62. Relative, Interrogative and. Indefinite Pronouns.
also sections 24-26.)
(a) An ablative singular form qui occurs, chiefly with cum. It
is also used as an adverb meaning how. Quis occurs for the dative
and ablative plural.
In the interrogative and indefinite pronouns, the distinction
between adjective and substantive forms (sections 25 and 26) is
less carefully observed in the masculine than in the neuter.
Quis indefinite has sometimes quae in feminine singular and
neuter plural.
The two parts of qulcumque are sometimes divided by another
word.
(6) With the relative and interrogative pronouns, the preposition
cum is (except very rarely) suffixed to the ablative it governs, the
accent being on the syllable preceding -cum. Occasionally other
prepositions (especially contra) follow the relative, without, how-
ever, forming one word with it.
264.
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
^ fl
a* B
\ I
GO 0^
"3 '3
O^ ^^
fl
fl 0*
0*
a 1
^
a
I o S
<
^
^ si
1
f
1
0*
a 1
1 i|
g^-s g*
cT
T3
fl
cr 1
o
fl
.-f*
*
0*
Tj /-<
C ""^
fl B
ea fl
iO "3
c3 E2
fl fl
fl fl
fl fl
ro
o^ o
o^ ^ "
3
^ ^
^ fl
o
w '3
tf o*
a s 's s ,3 1
^ fl fl C^ O 4 O
r^
I
.2
o o
fl ie3 fl
^ ^ fl
S* 2
1 flail
!'**
D w
g
.2 -S
9 I
cr 1 cr 1
cr a*
Vvl
- " ? i
"cS* ^> ^> *>> ?>
^ r5
$ g
4
i ii
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 265
64. Verb Inflection.
(a) The PRINCIPAL PARTS of a verb give the main stems from
which, as starting points, all parts of a verb are formed according
to a fixed system.
From the present indicative (in -o, or with deponents, -or) are
formed :
the present, imperfect and future indicative, active and
passive ;
the present and imperfect subjunctive, active and passive ;
the present and future imperative, active and passive ;
the present infinitive, active and passive ;
the present participle active, the gerundive and the
gerund.
From the perfect indicative active (in -1} are formed :
the perfect, pluperfect and future perfect indicative
active ;
the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive active ;
the perfect infinitive active.
From the supine (in -urn) or with deponents from the perfect
indicative (in -us sum) are formed :
the perfect, pluperfect and future perfect indicative
passive ;
the perfect and pluperfect subjunctive passive ;
the perfect and future infinitive passive ;
the perfect participle passive ;
the future participle and future infinitive active, and the
supine.
The stems of any active verb may be found by omitting -re, -i
and -um in the present infinitive, perfect and supine in the
principal parts. 1
These stems are called respectively, the present, perfect and
supine stems.
The parts of the verb derived from the perfect and supine steins
are formed in the same manner in all conjugations (and also in
irregular verbs) ; the formation of the parts derived from the
present stem differs with each conjugation, for which reason the
present infinitive (active or deponent) is always included among the
principal parts, to indicate the conjugation.
1 . The stems of a deponent verb may be got by omitting -ri of the present infinitive
(in the third conjugation by changing -i to -e) for the present stem, and by omitting
-us sum of the perfect indicative for the supine stem. The perfect stem does not occur.
266 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(6) The PERSONAL ENDINGS in Latin are as follows :
1. Indicative and Subjunctive. ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
[N.B. The active endings in (or o) or I.
are used in the perfect or s ris (or re) you.
compound tenses of the t tur he, she, it.
passive.] mus mur we.
tis mini you.
nt ntur tJiey.
2. Perfect Indicative Active. I, istl, it, imus, istis, erunt.
3. Imperative. ACTIVE. PASSIVE.
Pres. Sing. 2. (the present stem) re
Plur. 2. te mini
Fut. Sing. 2. to tor
3. to tor
Plur. 2. tote (wanting)
3. nto ntor
(c) The various tenses and moods have the following formation :
1. INDICATIVE.: The present has no sign, but is the present
stem + the personal endings. The imperfect has always ba,
preceded by a long vowel. The future has, in the first and second
conjugations, bi (l>, bu, be), in the third and fourth conjugations, e
(a). The perfect active is made up of the perfect stem + the
personal endings of the perfect active. The pluperfect has always
era. The future perfect has eri (er, eru). The perfect, pluperfect
and future perfect passive are composed of the perfect participle
passive with the present, imperfect and future indicative respec-
tively of the verb sum.
2. SUBJUNCTIVE. The present may be formed by changing o of
the present indicative in the first conjugation to e, in the second,
third and fourth to a, and adding the personal endings. The
imperfect has always re, and may be formed by adding the personal
endings to the present infinite active. The perfect active has
always eri. The pluperfect active has always isse. The perfect
and pluperfect passive are composed of the perfect participle passive
with the present and imperfect subjunctive respectively of the
verb sum.
3. INFINITIVE. The present act-ire is the present stem + re.
The perfect active is the perfect stem + isse. The future act ire
is the future participle with esse. The present passire is the
present stem + rl, except in the third conjugation, where it is
formed by changing e of the present stem to I. The perfect passive
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 267
i
is the perfect participle passive with esse. The future passive is
the supine with Iri (the present infinitive passive of eo, I go).
4. PARTICIPLES. The present active is the present stem + ns
(in the fourth conjugation, ens). The future active is the supine
stem + urus. 1 The perfect passive is the supine stem + us. The
gerundive is the present stem + ndus (in the fourth conjugation,
endus).
5. GERUND. The gerund is the present stem + ndi (in the
fourth conjugation, endl).
65. Formation of the Tense Stems.
The PRESENT STEM in the first, second and fourth conjugations is
identical with the verb stem, e.g., amd- (amd), comple- (complcd),
audl- (audio). But sometimes, and especially in the second conju-
gation, a, e, or I is added to the verb stem,, e.g., vetd- (veto), vide-
(video), venl- (venid). (This is practically a mixture of conjuga-
tions.)
In the third conjugation a short vowel (e, i) is added to the verb
stem, which may remain unchanged, e.g., rege- (rego), or may be
changed or extended in one of the following ways :
Lengthening the voicel, e.g., duce- (duco);
Adding, or inserting a nasal (n, m) e.g., temne- (em?io), vince-
(vinco) ;
Adding t, e.g., plecte- (plecto);
Adding sc, or (after consonants) isc, e.g., cognosce- (cognosco),
proficisce- (proficiscor).
Adding i (which, after I or r, is assimilated), e.g., capi- (capio^ ),
pelle- (pello), curre- (curro) ;
Reduplication, e.g., siste- (sisto).
The PERFECT STEM is formed from verb stems :
(a) Ending in a vowel, by adding v (in the second conjugation
changed generally to u, with e of the verb stem dropped), e.g.,
amdv- (amdm), complev- (complevl), habu- (habul), audlv- (audlvl).
(b) Ending in a consonant, in most cases, by adding s, e.g., carps-
(carpsi). But if a single consonant be preceded by a short vowel,
this vowel is lengthened, and s is not added, e.g., eg- (egi) from ag-
(ago).
(c) In a few cases, chiefly after liquids by adding u, e.g., alu-
(alu-i)
(d) Sometimes reduplicating the verb stem, e.g., pepid- (pepidi),
from pel- (pello).
1. In a few verbs the future participle active is formed from the present stein, e.g.,
juvo, lavo, aecu, aono ; nwrio/-, vrior, parivr, iiascvr.
2. Verbs in -io do not retain i before all endings. (See section 67.)
208 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
The SUPINE STEM is formed by adding t to the verb stem, but if
this ends in d, t, I, or r, t is regularly changed to s; e.g., amdt-
(ain<~'tum), vent- (ventum), puls- (pulsum). In the second conjuga-
tion those verbs which have ul in the perfect have i, not e,
before t.
The following EUPHONIC CHANGES occur in adding s of the per-
fect and t or s of the supine to consonant verb stems :
c, g, qu with s, become x ;
g, qu, before t, become c ;
b, before s or t, becomes p ;
t, d, before s, are dropped, or become s.
66. Irregular Forms in the Conjugation of the Regular
Verb.
Perfects in -avi, -evi, and also movl and novl (from moved and
nosed) often, before s or r, drop v and contract the two vowels
thus brought together to a, e, 6 respectively.
Perfects in -ivi may drop v in any of their forms, 1 but the
vowels thus brought together are contracted (to l) only before s.
For -erunt of the perfect indicative -ere is found, chiefly in
poetry.
For -ris of the second singular passive -re is found, but rarely in
the present indicative.
The gerund and gerundive of the third and fourth conjugations
have sometimes, especially after i, -undi and -nndus for -endl
and endus.
The archaic -ier for -I of the present infinitive passive is used by
the poets.
Sometimes in poetry is, iss, or sis, is dropped in forms from
perfects in -si or -xi
The imperative, second singular present active, of died, dtlcd,
facid, ferd, is die, due, fac, fer. These forms are retained in com-
pounds, except in those compounds of j 'acid, which change to -field.
An archaic future perfect indicative in -so and perfect subjunc-
tive in -sim are found in poetry. (Faxd is for facsd.)
In the compound tenses of the regular verb, esse is very often
omitted, especially in the future infinitive active ; so also est and
xn nt, but chiefly in poetry.
1. Except in the compounds of eo, in peto and desino, perfects in -ivi do not drop v
except before s or r.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 269
67. Verbs in -id of the Third Conjugation.
These drop i before i, I or er, but otherwise are formed precisely
after the model of rego, replacing reg- by capi-, foci-, fiigi-, etc.
The verbs so conjugated are : capio, cupio, facio, fodio, fugio,
jacio, pario, quatio. rapid, sapio ; morior, patior ; and com-
pounds (of obsolete verbs) ending in -licio, -spicio, -gredior.
68. Deponent Verbs.
A synopsis of the conjugation of deponent verbs (which may be
denned as verbs which no longer retain the active forms, but use
the passive forms with an active meaning), is given in section 40.
(a) The PRINCIPAL PARTS of deponents necessarily differ from
those of the regular active verb. The present indicative and
infinitive are given in the passive forms, there is no perfect (active)
stem, and the supine stem is indicated by giving the perfect
indicative (passive). (See footnote 1, page 265.)
(6) SEMI-DEPONENTS are certain verbs which are deponent in the
perfect tenses only, viz., audeo, ere, ausas sum; gaudeo, ere,
gavisus sum ; fldd, ere, flsus sum (and compounds) ; soled, ere,
solitus sum.
Flo, fieri, foetus sum (section 46) is practically a semi-deponent,
and several verbs otherwise active are deponent in the perfect par-
ticiple, e.g., ceno, cendtus; prandeo, prdnsus; juro (so conjuro),
ji'irntxs; suesco, suetus; adulesco, adultus. Certain also of the
impersonal verbs have in the perfect both active and deponent
forms, e.g., placet has placuit and placitum est ; so libet and licet.
(c) The forms of the ordinary deponent are not all passive, nor
is the meaning of all its parts active. The deponent verb has
regularly the present and future participles, the future infinitive,
the gerund and the supine of the active voice, and the gerundive
is regularly passive in meaning.
In some cases the use of the active forms survived in other
parts, but there are very few verbs in which both active and
deponent forms were in common use. Such are reverto (rercrfn,-)
and mereo (mereor) ; alsojpoptcZd (popidor), fabrico (fabricor), <ni<juru
(< rui furor). In a larger number of verbs the perfect participle alone
is passive in meaning, e.g., partior, dimetior, paciscor, tueor.
69. The Periphrastic Conjugations.
All compound forms of the verb might strictly be called peri-
phrastic, but the term is usually limited to two sets of forms :
270 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(n.) The act ire periphrastic conjugation, viz., the future par-
ticiple active, in -urns, with the various parts of the verb sum.
(b) The passive periphrastic conjugation, viz., the gerundive, in
-mlus, with the various parts of the verb sum.
For the uses of these compound forms, see, respectively, sections
102, b, and 104, a.
70. The Verb SUM and its Compounds. (See also sections 41
and 42.)
For the imperfect subjunctive, essem, etc., there occur also the
forms forein, fores, foret and forent. 1
Sum is compounded with many of the prepositions, in most
cases with no irregularity : absum (perf . afui) I am absent, distant ;
adsum, I am present; desum, I am wanting; Ijisum, I am in;
intersum, I am between, differ, am present at (interest, impersonal,
it concerns) ; obsum, I am against ; praesum, I am over ; prosum, I
am for, benefit; subsum, I am under, near, (no perf.)', supersum, I
am over, survive.
Possum is a compound of potis, able, and sum, t of poti being
changed to s before another s.
A present participle occurs in the compounds absum and prae-
sum (absens, praesens). Possum has potens used adjectively.
Prosum laas f prdd, not pro, before all forms of sum beginning
with e.
71. (a) The Verb EO and its Compounds. 2 (See also section
45.)'
Some of the compounds of eo are transitive (e.g., adeo, circumeo,
ineo, trdnseo, praetereo) and have passive forms, formed in the
usual way from the active endings, e.g., the present indicative of
adeo is adeor, adlris, adltur, adimur, adimim, adeuntur. Ed also
has passive forms in the third person used intransitively, e.g., Uur,
irf,
In the perfect tenses il is commoner than, 1m, and in the com-
pounds is the usual form.
(6) The Verb FERO and its Compounds. (See also section 44.)
The prepositions with which fero is compounded often undergo
changes to harmonize their final sound with the letters /, t and I,
of the three stems of fero.
1. For the present subjunctive fuam,fuas,fuat,fuant, and siem, sies, siet, sient,
are rarely found.
2. Queo and nequeo are conjugated like eo.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 271
ab au-fero, au-ferre abs-tull ab-latum
ad af-fero, af-ferre at-tull al-latum
con coii-fero con-ferre con-tull col-latum
Ala dif-fero dif-ferre dis-tull di-latum
ex ef-fero cf-ferre ex-tull e-latuiii
in In-fero in-ferre in-tuli il-latum
ob of-fero of-ferre ob-tnll ob-latum
sub suf-fero suf-ferre sus-tull sub-latuiii. 1
(c) The Verb Fio and its Compounds. (See also section 46.)
Flo is compounded with verbal stems or with adverbs, e.g.,
patefierl (patefacio) ; satisfieri (satis/acid) ; very rarely with prepo-
sitions, as confieri, defit, infit. The passive of compounds of facio
with prepositions is formed regularly from the active, e.g., inter-
ficior, interHcij conficior, cdnficl.
72*. Defective and Impersonal Verbs.
(a) COEPI, I began, is used in the perfect, pluperfect and future
perfect tenses only. (The other tenses are supplied by inc !/>!''>).
A passive form, coeptus sum, is used with the same force as coepl,
when a passive infinitive follows.
(6) MEMINI, I remember, and GDI, I hate, are used in the perfect,
pluperfect and future perfect tenses only, with the meaning of the
present, imperfect and future, respectively. Meminl has the
imperative second singular memento, plural mcmcntvte. Odl has a
perfect participle osus, and a future participle ostirus.
(c) Aio, I say, is scarcely found except in the forms, present
indicative, did, ais, ait, diunt ; imperfect indicative aiebam, etc.
(d) INQUAM, I say, is scarcely found except in the forms, first
person inquam, third person inquit.
(e) FARI, to speak, a deponent of the first conjugation, has in
use the present indicative fdtur, the future indicative fdbitm; the
perfect and pluperfect indicative and subjunctive, the infinitive
/cm, the imperative fdre, the gerund fandl, etc., the participles
fdtus, fandus and (fans) fantis.
(/) QUAESO, I beg, is used in the first person singular quaeso,
and plural quaesumus.
(g} Many verbs having no definite subject, and hence called
IMPERSONAL, are found in the third personal singular only. Of
these, some refer to the weather (e.g., pluit, it rains), and some
1. Sitstuli, sublatum-, on the score of meaning, are assigned to tollo, not to su/ero
in the vocabularies.
272 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
express the existence of certain feelings (e.g., miseret, paenitet,
pudet, piget, taedet).
(h) The passive of many intransitive verbs is used in the third
singular impersonally, the subject being contained in the verb
itself; e.g., pugndtur, there is fighting going on; non dubitandum
est, there must not be hesitation. (II. 234, N.B.)
(i) Many other verbs are said to be used impersonally in the
third singular when a clause furnishes a subject, e.g., licet ln.ae,c,
facere, it is permissible to do this. So licet, oportet, necesse est,
accidit (and other verbs of happening), constat, praestat, restat,
superest, interest, refert, juvat, and phrases like cerium est.
N.B. In all compound tenses of impersonal verbs and all
phrases used impersonally, a participle or adjective in the predi-
cate will be in the neuter singular, e.g., pugnatum est, non dubiutn
73. Prepositions. (See more fully section 87.)
The following are always used with the ACCUSATIVE :
Ad; ad versus (adversum) ; ante; apud ; circa; circiter;
circuni ; cis, citra ; contra; erga ; extra; infra; inter; intra;
juxta; ob ; penes; per; pone; post; praeter ; prope ; prop-
ter ; secundum ; trans ; ultra ; versus.
The following are always used with the ABLATIVE :
A, ab (abs) ; absque ; corani ; cum ; de ; e, ex ; prae ; pro ;
sine ; tenns.
The following are used with both the AccrsATrvE and ABLATIVE :
In ; sub ; subter ; super.
74. Conjunctions.
I. CO-ORDINATE, connecting sentences or phrases of equal gram-
matical value.
(a) Copulative particles : et, -que, atque (ac), and ; etiam,
quoqne, also ; neque (nee), nor, and not.
(6) Adversative particles : autem, sed, verum, vero, but ; at,
atqui, but yet; tamen, still ; ceterum, as for the rest, but.
. (c) Disjunctive particles : aut, vel, -ve, sive, or.
(d) Illative particles : itaqne, igitur, ergo, ideo, idcirco,
proinde, tlierefore.
(e) Causal particles : iiani, enim. namque, etenim, for.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 273
IT. SUBORDINATE, introducing dependent clauses.
(a) Final particles : ut (uti), quo, that, in order tJiat ; ne, neve
(neii), lest, in order that not ; quomiuus, that not.
(b} Consecutive particles : ut (uti), so that ; quln, so that not.
(c) Temporal particles: cum, 1 when; ut, as; ubi, qua ml 6,
when ; postquam (posteaquam), after ; simul atque (ac), as soon
as; antequam, priusquam, before; dum, donee, while, until;
quoad, as long as, until ; quamdiu, as long as.
(d) Causal particles : quia, quod, because; quoniam, quandd,
since ; cum. 1 since, as.
(e) Conditional particles : si, if; nisi (nl), if not ; sin, but if;
modo, dum, dummodo, if only, provided.
(/) Concessive particles : quamquam, licet, cum, 1 although;
ctsi, etiamsi, tametsi, even if, although ; quamvis, however much,
although; ut, ne, granted that or that not.
(a) Comparative particles : ut (uti), slcut, as ; velut, ceu, like
as; qnam, atque, as, tin in; tanquam, quasi, utsi, ac si, velut
si, as if.
(h} Interrogative particles : nuiu, -ne, utrum, whether ; nonue,
whether not ; an, or whether.
75. Derivative Suffixes.
I. Suffixes used in NOUN formation.
-tor (fern, -trix), denoting the agent, chiefly from verb
stems.
-or, -us, -es, denoting a state or action, chiefly from verb
stems.
-tio, -io, -tus, -tura, denoting an action, or often the con-
crete result of an act, chiefly from roots or verb stems.
-men, -mentum, denoting the subject, means or result of an
action, chiefly from roots or verb stems.
-tia, -ia, -tas, -tudo, -tus, denoting abstract qualities,
chiefly from adjective stems.
-ium, denoting abstract ideas or often conditions or offices,
chiefly from noun stems or roots.
-bulum, -culum, -brum, -crum, denoting instrument,
chiefly from verb stems or roots.
-ulus (a, um), -culus (a, um), diminutives, from noun
stems, of the same gender as the simple word.
-ades, -as ; -ides, -is ; -ides ; -eus, -eis ; patronymics, from
proper nouns (Greek).
1. Cum is often, but less correctly, written quum.
18
274 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. Suffixes used in ADJECTIVE Formation.
-alls, -aris,- -ills, -arius, denoting belonging or pertaining
to, from noun stems.
-anus, -inns, -as, -ensis, -ions, denoting belonging or per-
taining to, from noun stems, especially from proper
names of persons, places or countries.
-osns, -(o)lens, -(o)lentus. -atus. -Itus, denoting full of,
supplied ivith, from noun stems.
-ax, denoting inclined to ; -ills, -bills, denoting capable of;
-Idus, -bundus, -cundus, denoting characterized by,
from verb stems.
III. Suffixes used in VERB Formation.
-a, -e, -I, forming denominatives of the first, second and
fourth conjugations, 2 denoting the doing, being or mak-
ing of something, from noun or adjective stems.
-sco, forming incept ives or inchoatives (of the third conjuga-
tion) denoting the beginning of an action, from the
present stems of verbs, and used only in the present
stem.
-to, -ltd, forming frequentatives, iteratives or intensives (of
the first conjugation), denoting repeated or vigorous
action, generally from the supine stems of verbs.
-urio, forming desideratives (of the fourth conjugation),
denoting a desire to do something, from verb stems.
-1116, forming diminutives (of the first conjugation), denoting
a feeble or petty action.
76. Composition of Words.
Compound NOUNS consist of two parts, of which the first, in
most cases, modifies the second. The second part is a noun, or
from a noun stem not actually occurring in Latin, but connected
with some verb stem. The first part is usually the stem (some-
times an inflected form) of a noun or adjective.
Compound ADJECTIVES have the same formation as nouns.
Compound VERBS have a verb stem for the second part, and for
the first usually a preposition, rarely a substantive, adverb or verb
(the latter only with facio).
2. Those ending in -eo are commonly intransitive.
PART III. ACCIDENCE. 275
The prepositions commonly used in composition have the
following meanings, and assume (by assimilation) the following
forms :
a, ab, rmv7?/; a, ah, ahs, as, au. ad, to, towards, besides; ad,
;ic, ag, al, up, ar, as, at, a. ante, before; ante (rarely anti).
eircuiii, around; circum (rarely circu). cum, together, completely,
earnestly; com, con, col, cor, co, co. de, down, xenj ; de. e, ex,
out, forth, thoroughly ; e, ex, ef. in, in, into, on, against; in, im,
il, ir. inter, between; inter (rarely intel). ob, against, towards,
to meet ; ob, oc, of, op, o. per, through, thoroughly ; per (rarely
pel), post, after, behind; post, pro, forward, forth, for ; pro,
prod, sub, under, from beneath, secretly, slightly; sub, sue, suf,
sug, sum, sup, sur, sus, su. super, over; super, trans, across,
through; trans, tran, tra.
The following (called inseparable prepositions) are particles
used only in composition, having never been developed into separate
prepositions :
ambi, around ; amb, am, an. dis, apart : dis, dl, dif , dir. in
not, un-; in, im, il, ir, I. por, forth, forward ; por, pol, pos. re,
back, again ; re, red. se, apart ; se, sed.
276 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX.
77. Apposition,
A word placed in apposition with another agrees with it in
case, and as far as it can in gender and number. (II. 9, a, c.)
i. The appositive word may agree with the unexpressed subject
of a verb.
ii. A possessive pronoun takes an appositive in the genitive
case. (II. 184, a.}
iii. A common noun (e.g., nr&s, oppidum, msuld) in apposition
with the name of a place without a preposition, in the locative
(II. 125 , 1), accusative of motion towards (II. 93, a), or ablative
of motion from (II. 123, &), generally has the preposition ex-
pressed, always so if it precedes.
iv. In place of a partitive genitive depending on a noun, the
nouns are sometimes placed in apposition (partitive or distributive
apposition.
v. An appositive sometimes is used in a predicate or adverbial
sense (II. 144); for adjectives so used, see section 88, d.
vi. In apposition with a whole clause, a word is used in the
accusative (and, if an adjective or pronoun, in the neuter singular).
vii. A denning genitive is rarely used in place of a noun in
apposition. (II. 116.)
viii. The dative is common instead of a noun in apposition
with phrases like nomen est. (II. 103.)
78. Attributive Words.
An adjective (including numerals), pronoun or participle
agrees in gender, number and case with the word to which it
refers. If it refers to more than one word it regularly agrees
with the nearest. (II. 9, c, 1.)
79. The Predicate.
(a) The verb agrees with its subject in number and person.
Where compound forms of the verb are used, the participle
follows the rules for predicate adjectives (&).
i. Collective nouns (chiefly those of multitude, not organized
bodies) often take a plural verb. (II. 11.)
ii. Where there is more than one subject, the verb may be
plural or agree with the nearest (II. 9, e); where the subjects
are of different persons, the first person takes precedence, then
the second. (II. 10.)
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 277
iii. Esse is repeatedly omitted, especially in the compound or
periphrastic forms of the verb; es l and sn-nt are of ten omitted in
poetry, and sometimes, for compactness' sake, in prose.
(6) A predicate adjective agrees with the subject of the verb
in gender, number and case.
i. Where there is more than one subject the adjective will be of
the same number as the verb (see o, ii., above) ; if singular, it will
agree in gender with the nearest subject; if plural, it will agree in
gender if the subjects are of the same gender, but if they are of
different genders, it will be masculine referring to living beings,
neuter referring to things. (II. 9, c, 2, 3.)
ii. Where the subject, though referring to persons, is neuter
(e.g., milUa\ the predicate is often masculine.
iii. An adjective in the predicate may be used (substantively) in
the neuter, though referring to a masculine or feminine subject ;
see section 88, a.
iv. A predicate adjective with esse may be in the nominative
(II. 14, 20), the accusative (II. 12, 13, 22), or the dative (II.
163, a).
v. With verbs of making, calling, shotting, etc., adjectives may
be used in the same way as predicate nouns (see c, i., below).
(c) A predicate noun agrees in case with the word of which
it is predicated.
i. Predicate nouns are used with the verb sum and verbs of
seeming, becoming, making, thinking, calling, appointing, etc. ; for
the predicate nominative or accusative with such verbs, see II.. 70.
ii. For the dative of purpose replacing a predicate noun, see
section 82, c.
80. The Nominative.
The nominative is used as the subject of the finite moods
(i.e., indicative, subjunctive and imperative) of the verb, as
the subject of the historical infinitive (section 101, d), in
apposition with a nominative or with the unexpressed sub-
ject of a finite verb (section 77), or as a predicate nominative
.(section 79).
81. The Genitive.
The genitive case is used for the more exact limiting of
nouns, and has thus an adjectival force. A special use is to
278 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
limit certain adjectives and to fix the application of certain
verbs in a more essential way than the accusative (see section
83, below). The genitive may regularly be translated by the
English possessive case, by means of the preposition of, or by
means of the phrase as regards, or some equivalent preposi-
tion. The various uses are :
(a) POSSESSIVE, denoting the owner, the person to whom some-
thing belongs. Occasionally the noun which the genitive limits is
omitted (II. 119).
i. The possessive genitive may be in the predicate, chiefly with
sum, denoting the person whose property, business or custom the
subiect is. The subiect is most frequently an infinitive or a clause.
(II. 118.)
ii. This predicative genitive of possession is regularly used in
place of an adjective of the third declension in the predicate nomi-
native (or accusative) with sum.
(b) PARTITIVE, denoting the whole to which a specified part
belongs. (II. 113, 114.)
i. The partitive genitive often depends on neuter adjectives or
pronouns (in the nominative, or accusative without a preposition),
used substantively; e.g., nihil, tantum, quantum,, plus, minus, satis,
quid, quod, id, hoc. The genitive may itself be a neuter adjective
of the second (not the third) declension used substantively (II.
114, a.).
ii. The partitive genitive is regularly used with millia, some-
times with mule, unus, and other numerals (section 58, /, and II.
114, d).
iii. The partitive genitive is used with some adverbs of quantity,
place, extent.
iv. The partitive genitive is sometimes used with nouns of
weight or measure.
(c) SUBJECTIVE, with nouns of action, feeling, existence, denot-
ing the person who acts, feels, exists. (II. 111.)
(d) OBJECTIVE, with nouns of action or feeling, denoting that to
which the act or feeling is directed. (II. 112.)
i. The objective genitive is more frequently than any other to
be translated not by of, but by as regards, or some equivalent
expression.
ii. The verb with which the noun of action or feeling is, in
sense, connected may be one which governs some other than the
accusative case. (II. 120, N.B.)
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 279
(e) CHARACTERISTIC, 1 denoting some quality or characteristic
chiefly essential. (II. 124, b, 3.) There must be some modifying
adjective or its equivalent. (II. 115.)
i. Except in stereotyped phrases, such as Imjusmodi, ejusmodi,
the best prose writers do not use the genitive of characteristic with
a pronoun or with par, similis, dissimilis, aequus, as modifier.
ii. The genitive of characteristic may be used as a predicate.
(II. 118.)
(/) WITH SPECIAL ADJECTIVES AND VERBS, the genitive is
regularly an extension of the objective genitive.
i. The adjectives so used are chiefly those of desire, knowledge,
poorer and fulness, with their opposites, so also verbals in -dx and
present participles used as adjectives. (II. 117, , <")
ii. In poetry the number of adjectives with which the genitive
(denoting as regards) is used is largely extended. For a rum 7, with
an adjective, see section 86, ii.
iii. The verbs so used are chiefly those of memory (II. 62, 67),
fueling (II. 62, 68), judicial action (II. 67), the verbs interest and
refert (II. 63), also some verbs of plenty (including pc&ior) and
1 rat it- (II. 66). For the genitive with verbs of estimating, buying,
etc., see (g) below.
iv. In poetry the genitive, as in Greek, may denote separation.
(g) PRICE, denoting the value, but only in general, not definite,
terms.
i. With verbs of estimating are found tantl, quant I, mdgni, parvl,
pluris, minoris, niliili, and a few other words.
ii. With verbs of buying and selling are found only tantl, quanti,
pluris, minoris.
(h) OF DEFINITION, explaining the meaning of a noun, as a
word in apposition might do. (II. 116.) This usage is chiefly
poetical.
i. The genitive of definition is sometimes used with nouns of
weight or measure.
(i) The genitive is used with causa, gratia, Instar, postridie and
pridie.*
82. The Dative.
The dative case is used to express the indirect or remote
connection of a person or thing with the action or feeling
expressed by a verb or adjective. From a fusion with the loca-
1. This is also culled the yenitivc of quality, or desertion. Compare the ablative
of characteristic, section 85, c.
2. The genitive with cauna may be regarded as a genitive of definition, with gratia
as an objective genitive, with iiistar as possessive, and with pridie and pvstridic
probably as partitive.
280 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
tive, it also serves to indicate a purpose or (in poetry) a place
attained. The dative may generally be translated by means of
the prepositions to or for. The various uses are :
(a) INDIRECT OBJECT, denoting the person (or thing) indirectly
affected hy the action of the verb. The verb may be cither
intransitive or passive, or transitive with the direct object in the
accusative. (II. 100.)
i. In the poets the dative of indirect object is extended to
include the idea of motion towards (II. 61), and is also used with
verbs of nearness, union, separation and contention.
(6) INTEREST, denoting the persons (or things) concerned in
(e.g., benefited or injured by) some act or condition of things (II.
101, 102). This is really one variety of the indirect object.
i. With verbs of taking an-ajt, the dative of interest is to be
rendered by means of the preposition from. (II. 69.)
(c) PURPOSE or SERVICE, denoting the purpose served or the end
attained. It is regularly in the predicate with such verbs as xmn,
fid, mittO, rcnid, rclin>jnd, d<~>, In'dx'd, and is a semi-abstract noun
always in the singular. (II. 75.) There is usually another dative
of the person interested.
(d) AGENT, or APPARENT AGENT, with passive verbs, really
denoting the person interested, hence, presumably, the agent.
i. This is the regular way of expressing the agent with the
gerundive, unless there would be danger of ambiguity. (II. 105.)
ii. The dative at times expresses (inferentially) the agent with
perfect passives, and in poetry almost any part of the passive.
iii. Videor, I seem, regularly has the dative of agent.
(e) WITH SPECIAL VERBS OR ADJECTIVES. This is really one
variety of the dative of the indirect object or of interest. (II. 55-
60, 102.)
i. The dative is used with many verbs intransitive in Latin, but
generally rendered by an English transitive verb. (II. 55, 60.)
ii. The dative is used with many compounds of intransitive
verbs with prepositions. (II. 56, 104.)
iii. Intransitive verbs taking a dative cannot be used in the
passive voice, except impersonally with the dative retained (II.
57). See also section 96. b.
iv. For the dative with ddnd and circumdo, see II. 74; for verbs
taking both a direct and an indirect object, see II. 69.
v. Most adjectives denoting likeftess, fitness, nec'.rness, friendli-
ness, and their opposites, take the dative of the person or thing
affected. (II. 102.)
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 281
(/) REFERENCE, denoting some person indirectly concerned with
some statement made (but not affected by the action expressed in
any one word). (II. 106.)
i. This dative often has much the force of a possessive genitive.
(II. 106.)
ii. The dative of reference is very common with participles,
to express the point of view.
iii. The ethical dative is confined to personal pronouns and indi-
cates a weaker connection than other datives of reference. (II.
107.)
(#) POSSESSOR, denoting the person interested as owner, in the
existence of something. The emphasis is on the fact of possession,
not on the person of the possessor. (II. 103.)
83. The Accusative.
The accusative case is used to determine the application of
a verb, most frequently to state the external object to which
the action of a verb is directed. The various uses are :
(a) DIRECT OBJECT, denoting the external object of the action
of transitive verbs. (II. 90, .)
i. The larger number of prepositions govern the accusative case ;
see section 8?.
(6) THE SUBJECT OP AN INFINITIVE is put in the accusative,
whether in the purely substantival use or in the more common use
with verbs of saying, thinking, etc. (II. 91.)
(c) DURATION OF TIME and EXTENT OF SPACE, stating how long
or how far. (11.92.)
i. The accusative of the duration of time is used with verbs,
including the participle ndtus, and with abhinc.
ii. The accusative of extent of space is used with verbs and with
the adjectives longus, altus and Idtus.
(d) COGNATE ACCUSATIVE, expressed by some noun of kindred
meaning with the verb, or some word more fully denning its
application. (II. 96.)
i. The cognate accusative may be a substantive (generally modi-
fied) or much oftener a neuter adjective or pronoun used substan-
tively.
(e) ADVERBIAL ACCUSATIVE, defining the extent, degree or cause
of the action of a verb. This is an extension of the cognate accusa-
tive.
282 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
i. This adverbial construction is commonly limited to certain
neuter pronouns or adjectives and a few phrases. (II. 97.)
ii. In poetry it is extended to denote the part affected ; this is
sometimes called the Greek accusative.
(/) WITH SPECIAL WORDS, in all cases mere varieties of the
uses already given.
i. For the double accusative with verbs of asking, teaching, and
concealing, see II. 71 ; with verbs of making, choosing, calling,
etc., see II. 70; with compounds of trans, see II. 72.
ii. The verbs induor, exnor and cingor, being really reflexives,
take an accusative ; so other verbs are used in poetry.
iii. Certain adverbs (propius, proximo, pridie, postr7die) and
certain adjectives (propior, proximus) are found taking the accusa-
tive on the analogy of prepositions.
((/) LIMIT OF MOTION, with names of towns and islands. (II.
93, a.) In poetry the preposition is omitted more freely.
(/*) EXCLAMATIONS, with or without an interjection, are often in
the accusative. (II. 98.)
84. The Vocative.
The vocative case denotes the person directly addressed.
It is often preceded by to heighten the effect of an appeal.
85. The Ablative.
The ablative case is an adverbial case, and is used to deter-
mine more accurately the circumstances attending upon some
action expressed by the predicate. It is in most cases to be
rendered by means of some English preposition, especially
with, by, from, in.
The Latin ablative represents three main ideas : the true
ablative, =from (see /, h, I, m, pages 284, 285) ; the instrumental
(or comitative), = with (see a, c, d, e, g, i, pages 282, 283, 284) ;
the locative, =in or at (see b, k, o, pages 283, 284, 285). These
shade into one another so closely that it is uncertain to which of
the three we ought to assign some of the various uses of the
ablative, but in most cases there is general agreement. The
various uses are :
(.) MEANS or INSTRUMENT, telling that by means of which some-
thing is effected. (II. 124, a.)
i. Occasionally persons are regarded as the means by which,
rather than the agents by or through whom, something is done.
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 283
ii. The ablative of means includes the ablative (a) telling the
route by which one goes, or the means of conveyance ; (b) with
verbs of filling and abounding (II. 65, 73) ; (c) with adjectives of
plenty (II. 126) ; (d) with the verbs fttor, fruor, potior 1 (II. 65) ;
(e) with opus est and tisus est ; l (/) with assnefacid, assmsco, and
afficio ; (g) and with verbs of confining or receiving within.*
(b) TIME, denoting the time when or within (in the course of)
which something occurs. (II. 125, 6.)
i. With negatives, the ablative of the time within which is
translated by for.
ii. The ablative of the time within which may include the whole
period, and be emphasized by totus.
iii. Such phrases as his tribus disbus (in the last three days), Hits
di'bt's (in the three days previous), panels diebus quibus (a few
after, literally, u'ithin the few days within which), are cases of
the time within which.
iv. Occasionally, by inference, the ablative of the time within
which is equivalent to the accusative of the time how long. (II.
125, 6.)
(c) CHARACTERISTIC, 3 denoting some quality or characteristic,
chiefly external. There must be some modifying adjective or its
equivalent. (II. 124, b, and 2, and 3.)
i. This is the only adnominal (or adjectival) use of the ablative.
The ablative of characteristic may also be used in. the predicate
with esse.
(d) SPECIFICATION, specifying in what respect a statement or
term is to be applied. (II. 124, e.) 4
i. The ablative of specification includes () the ablative supine
(II. 138), (b) phrases like mea sententia, jure, and (c) perhaps the
ablative with dlgnns and indignus. 5
(e) MANNER and ACCOMPANYING CIRCUMSTANCES, .telling the
manner in which, or that in accordance with which, something is
done. (II. 124, b.)
i. Lateral accompaniment is regularly expressed by the ablative
with cum. The chief exception is in some military phrases,
especially those telling the troops with which a march is made.
There is always a modifying word, when cum is omitted.
1. The ablative with fungor seems to be separative, that with vescor is probably
means. The ablative with opus and usus est came to be looked on as separative.
2. The ablative in such phrases as castris se tenere, finibus eum recipere, may also
be taken as locative, the place in which. (See page 285, k, iii.)
3. This is also called the ablative of quality or description. Compare the genitive
of characteristic, section 81, e.
4. This is generally considered instrumental in origin, but some regard it as the
ablative telling from what point of view.
5. The ablative with dignus is, by some, explained as the ablative of price.
284 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
ii. Manner is often denoted by the ablative with cum, always so
when there is no modifying word. An apparent exception is in
the case of some nouns whose ablative cases have come to be used
virtually as adverbs, e.g., modo, vl, pedibus.
(/) COMPARISON, telling that with which something is compared.
(II. 123, c.)
i. It is commonly restricted to cases where the word it is com-
pared with is in the nominative or accusative. It is rarer in prose
after adverbs than after adjectives.
ii. For the adverbial use of plus, minus, amplius and longius,
with numerals, see II. 123, c, 2,
iii. A special idiom is the ablative of abstract words, such as
oplnio and spes, in the ablative of comparison after adverbs, where
English would use a verbal clause.
(</) MEASURE OF DIFFERENCE, telling the extent to which two
things compared differ. (II. 124, d.)
i. The ablative of the measure of difference is used (a) with
comparatives or with words implying comparison, e.g., post and
ante, (b) with words implying distance, e.g., absum, disto (where
also the accusative may be used).
ii. To this usage belong quo . . eo (or quanta . . tanto),
with comparatives ; quo and quominus with the final subjunctive,
and eo or hoc with a comparative anticipating a quod clause. 1
(/i) SEPARATION, telling the place whence (literally or meta-
phorically) something is removed or excluded. (II. 123, a.)
i. Separation is most frequently expressed by the ablative with
d (ab), ex or de. The use of the ablative without a preposition is
chiefly with (a) names of cities and islands, domus and rfis, (b) with
verbs of relieving, depriving, wanting and removing, (c) adjectives
of freedom and ivant.
ii. But with classes b and c the preposition is frequently found,
regularly so with the names of persons. Many verbs admit either
construction.
(i) PRICE, stating the definite price or value of something. (II.
124, c.)
i. This ablative is sometimes used to state the penalty.
ii. The ablative with mfito states either that given or that taken
in exchange. For the genitive of price, see section 81, g.
(fr) PLACE, stating the place where something is or happens.
(II. 125, a.)
I. Eo and hoc are found anticipating a quod clause, even when there is no compara-
tive present. In this case it seems to be an ablative of cause, though it may have
arisen from the use with comparatives.
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 285
i. In prose the place where is commonly expressed by the
ablative with in, except with names of cities, etc., and words which
possess a locative (section 86). The ablative alone is more freely
used in poetry.
ii. With totus, and occasionally other adjectives, e.g., mcdius,
as a modifier, the simple ablative is used to denote the place
where.
iii. The ablative of place includes the ablative with field, con-
fido, sto and nltor, with fret us, and perhaps the ablative in such
phrases as castrls se tenere andfmibus eum accipere.
(I) SOURCE, telling that from which something is derived. (II.
123, a.)
i. This is chiefly found with participial adjectives denoting
origin or ancestry, e.g., natus. In other cases the preposition ex,
de, or a (ab) is used.
ii. Under this head belongs the ablative denoting the material
of which something is made, but in prose this ablative is com-
monly joined with ex.
(m) CAUSE, telling the motive from which some act proceeds, or
rarely the cause of something. (II. 123, .)
i. This ablative is chiefly used with verbs denoting emotion.
The moving cause is regularly expressed by the ablative with a
participle such as adductm, permotus. 1
ii. Under this head belong the ablatives causa, gratia, jussti,
rogdtu, and perhaps phrases like med sententid.
(n) With SPECIAL VERBS AND ADJECTIVES, really belonging to
other classes already given. (II. 65, 126.)
i. With idor, fruor, fungor, potior, vescor (see a), glorior (see m),
verbs of plenty (see a), and want (see /i), nitor, fldo (see A').
ii. Vfithfretus, contentiis and laetiis (see k}, dlgniis and iml7gnus
(see d), adjectives of plenty (see a), and freedom (see h).
(o) The ABLATIVE ABSOLUTE, defining the attendant circum-
stances of an action. (II. 48-54, 125, c.)
i. This consists regularly of two parts, a quasi-subject and a
qitasi-predicate. The former is a noun or pronoun (very seldom a
clause), the latter most frequently a perfect participle, less fre-
quently a present participle, or a noun or adjective used predica-
tively (without the verb of predication being expressed). 2
ii. The ablative absolute clause expresses the same idea as many
kinds of subordinate clauses, and is also frequent where English
would use a co-ordinate clause to carry on the narration.
1, The ablative with these participles may be regarded as the ablative of means.
2. It will be remembered that sum has no present participle equivalent to the
English being.
286 PRIMARY LATIN COOK.
iii. For the restrictions to the use of the ablative absolute, see
II. 52, c.
iv. Many phrases which appear like ablatives of accompanying
circumstances are better explained as ablatives absolute, e.g.,
v. With a negative the ablative is often to be rendered by
witltout. (II. 49,/.)
86. The locative.
The locative was at one time a separate case, denoting the
place where, from which was developed the idea of the time
when. Its forms became merged into other cases, being in the
singular of the first and second declensions the same as the
genitive, elsewhere the same as the ablative. 1
i. The few surviving forms to be classed as locatives include,
domi, humi, militiae, belli, rum, and forms like Carthagim, Rd-
mae, CorinthL Many adverbs are strictly locative in origin.
ii. The locative animl is used with verbs of feeling.
iii. For the ablative denoting the place where, see section 85, k.
87. The Prepositions.
The following are the commonest uses of the prepositions :
A, AB, ABS (a before consonants, ab before vowels or consonants,
abs rarely found before q and t) ; from ; at a distance of; at,
on, in, with words denoting the point of view ; by of the
personal agent.
ABSQUE ; without.
AD ; to, towards ; up to, of time and numbers ; with a view to,
for, for the purpose of ; near ; according to.
ADVERSUS (ADVERSUM) ; towards, against.
ANTE ; before, in front of (generally of time rather than place,
rarely of preference).
APTJD ; at, near ; among, with ; (more often of persons than
places).
CIRCA ; CIRCUM ; CIRCITER ; circa, around, round about, about,
with regard to; circum, around, round about, of place only ;
circiter, about, rare as a preposition in phrases of time.
Cis, CITRA ; on this side of.
CONTRA ; against, in opposition to ; over against, opposite.
1. There are some reasons for regarding the dative rather than the ablative or
genitive as the form which finally replaced the locative.
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 287
CORAM ; in the presence of.
CUM ; with, along with, of accompaniment, union or simultaneous
acts.
DE; from, down from; of, after numerals or of material ; about,
concerning.
E, EX (e occasionally before consonants, ex before vowels or con-
sonants) ; out of, from ; of, after numerals ; in, on, at, with
words denoting the point of view ; in accordance with, in
consequence of; after.
ERGA ; towards (of direction or attitude).
EXTRA ; without, beyond, except (of place or transferred).
IN, with the accusative, into, to; against; with a mew to, for.
with the ablative, in, on ; among ; in the case of; in view of.
INFRA ; below (rare, of place and transferred).
INTER; between; within; among (local or reciprocal).
INTRA ; within (of place, more rarely of time and transferred).
JUXTA ; near (very rare as preposition).
OB ; before (of place, and rare) ; on account of.
PENES ; in the power of (of the possession not the gaining of
power).
PER ; through ; by means of, by.
PONE ; behind.
POST ; after, behind (generally of time rather than place).
PRAE ; in front of (rare) ; in comparison with ; because of (chiefly
in negative clauses).
PRAETER ; beyond, besides.
PRO ; before (in order to protect); in place of, for, as; in propor-
tion to, in accordance with.
PROPE ; near (of place, very rarely of time).
PROPTER ; near (rare) ; on account of.
SECUNDUM ; along ; after ; next to ; according to.
SINE ; without.
SUB, with the accusative, under ; towards; close to.
with the ablative, under ; near.
SUBTER, with the accusative or ablative, beneath, under.
SUPER, with the accusative, above ; over ; beyond.
with the ablative, upon ; except ; about.
TENUS ; as far as.
TRANS ; across ; beyond.
ULTRA ; on the other side of; beyond.
VERSUS ; towards.
288 PR1MARV LATIN BOOK.
88. The Adjective.
(() The adjective is often used as a substantive, in the masculine
and feminine referring to persons, and in the neuter to things.
The neuter plural is often used where the English would use the
singular, e.g., multa, much.
i. The neuter is used as a substantive chiefly in the nominative
and accusative cases ; in the other cases res is commonly found.
ii. Adjectives of the third declension are not used as neuter
substantives in the partitive genitive. (See section 81, 6, i.)
(6) The superlative degree does not necessarily imply comparison
with others, but may indicate a high degree of the quality referred
to (to be translated by very or exceedingly, or often by the English
positive). The superlative with quam or with quam potest (pot nit,
etc.), is used to mean as (many, large, etc.), as possible.
The comparative degree has often the standard of comparison
omitted, where the context will suggest it. The omission is com-
monly of the ideas, than is natural, than is proper, than that jimt
mentioned or implied. The first two of these may be represented
by unusually or too with the positive degree.
(c) In many phrases an adjective denoting the part or order, is
used in agreement with a noun, but in a partitive sense. (See
II. 114, 6.)
(d) In many phrases the adjective is used in Latin where an
adverb or adverbial clause would be found in English. Such cases
are primus, prior, medius, Ultimus, invitns, impnld<~ns, tutus, etc.
In all these cases the condition of what is expressed by the noun,
not the manner of the action expressed by the verb, is looked to.
(e) For the agreement, etc., of adjectives used attributively or
predicatively, see sections 78 and 79.
89. The Personal Pronouns.
i. The personal pronouns are not used in the nominative, except
for special emphasis, the personal ending of the verb being a
sufficient indication. (II. 176.)
ii. Is, which is strictly a demonstrative, serves as the third
personal pronoun, but where emphasis is desired, ille is preferred.
Often the relative pronoun qul replaces i-s.
iii. For the difference between nostrum and nostrl, restrum and
restrl, see section 60, b.
iv. Tu and vos both mean you, the former when addressing one
person, the latter more than one. Til also corresponds to the
English thou.
v. In the first person the plural nos is often used for ego, chiefly
in dignified language.
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 289
90. The Possessive Pronouns.
These agree in gender, number and case with the noun
with which they are grammatically connected, not with the
word denoting the possessor.
i. The possessive pronouns are used (a) for clearness' sake, (6)
for emphasis' sake. When not required for either of these reasons
they are regularly omitted. (See footnote 2, page 13.) When
emphatic they may often be translated by means of own, and
sometimes they express what is peculiar to or characteristic of a
person.
ii. THUS is used when you, the possessor, is one person, vester
when you, the possessors, are more than one. Suits is the posses-
sive of S3 and is used in the same cases (see section 91, i). Else-
where, Ms, her and their are represented by ejus and eon 'in.
iii. The possessive pronouns are often used substantively (com-
pare section 88, ), the commonest being nostrl, si.il and sua, (see
footnote 2, page 64), also in poetry t-ul and vestri.
iv. For the possessive pronoun with a virtual appositive in the
genitive, see section 77, ii.
v. The possessive pronouns are frequently used in place of a
subjective genitive, more rarely in place of an objective genitive.
vi. Alienus serves as a possessive of alius.
91. The Reflexive Pronouns.
These refer back to the subject of the verb and are trans-
lated either by the English personal pronouns or by the
compounds in -self, -selves. They must be carefully dis-
tinguished (a) from the use of -self, -selves, purely for em-
phasis' sake, and (b) from the personal pronouns referring to
others than the subject of the sentence.
i. For the reflexives of the first and second persons, see section
60, a.
ii. The rules for the reference of se may be stated generally as
follows :
In an independent sentence se refers to the subject of the verb.
Where there are several coordinate sentences with a change of
subject, each sentence must be considered by itself.
In a dependent sentence the use is twofold :
(a) With the accusative and infinitive construction, the com-
plementary infinitive, substantival clauses of purpose, the indirect
question or the subjunctive of virtual indirect narration, .sc" refers
to the personal subject of the verb upon which the infinitive or
subjunctive immediately depends (even if this verb is itself a
dependent verb).
19
290 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(b) In other cases ('</., in ordinary relative or quod clauses, or
in clauses of result) sj refers to the subject of the verb in its <>\vn
clause.
iii. And generally it may be said that in clauses expressing a
thought, statement or wish, S3 refers to the person who thinks,
states or wishes. Exceptions occur chiefly in stereotyped reflexive
formulae (e.g., sJ recipere, inter se), or where in the cases given in
() above, the verb upon which the infinitive or subjunctive
depends has not for its subject someone of the third person, or
where in indirect discourse a number of pronouns occur closely
together, in which case sJ tends to refer to the same person.
92. Demonstrative Pronouns.
(a) Hie, this, refers to what is near the speaker in place, time
or thought. Hence it is used of something j ust mentioned or of
something just to be mentioned ( as follows}. In contrast with
tile, it means the latter (rarely the former). (II. 177.)
i. Hie, like other demonstrative pronouns, is often attracted to
the case of a predicate noun to which it refers. (II. 183, N.B.)
(6) ISTE, that of yours, that near you, refers to something near
or belonging to the person spoken to. It has also at times a con-
temptuous force. (II. 178.)
(c) ILLE, that, refers to something remote from the speaker in
place, time or thought. In contrast with luc, it means the former
(rarely the latter). It is often used to indicate clearly a change of
subject, and also to point out a person as specially noteworthy or
well known. (II. 179.)
i. Itte is also used as an emphatic third personal pronoun.
(d) Is, that , is less emphatic than ille, and is preferred to ille as
an antecedent for a relative pronoun. (II. 180-182.)
i. Is is used as the ordinary third personal pronoun. As such it
is often omitted before a relative pronoun, chiefly where it would
have the same case as the relative, or would be in the nominative.
ii. Et is is used in the sense of and that too ; iieque is, and that
too not. In this case is agrees with the word which is emphasized.
(e) IDEM, the same.
i. As after Idem is either the relative pronoun qul, or the par-
ticle 0<-.
ii. Idem added for emphasis' sake has often the force of also, yet.
(/) IPSE, -self, is used to emphasize, not as a reflexive pronoun.
It is used with all three persons. (II. 184.)
i. When used to emphasize a reflexive pronoun, it is generally
in the nominative rather than in agreement with the reflexive.
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 2:)1
ii. When used to emphasize possessive pronouns it is in the
genitive. (II. 184, a.)
iii. Occasionally in indirect narration ipse is used as a reflexive
where si. would have been less clear in its reference.
iv. Ipse is sometimes used to distinguish persons from tilings
belonging or related to them.
93. The Relative Pronoun.
The relative agrees with its antecedent in gender and num-
ber ; its case is decided by its relation to the rest of the clause
which it introduces. (II. 193-197.)
i. Where there are more antecedents than one, the relative
follows the rules for predicate adjectives (section 79, 6, i.).
ii. The relative often agrees with a predicate noun in its own
clause. (II. 197, e.)
iii. The relative may be used at the beginning of a sentence, not
to introduce a subordinate clause, but to carry on the narration,
where English would use a demonstrative or personal pronoun,
sometimes with a co-ordinating conjunction. This is called the
co-ordinatiny relative. (II. 195.)
iv. The relative is used to introduce final clauses (II. 25),
consecutive clauses (II. 34), or clauses of condition, concession or
cause (II. 196) with the subjunctive.
v. The antecedent (referring to persons or things) is often
omitted. (II. 197, a.)
vi. The antecedent is often repeated with the relative, chiefly in
the case of pars, r<?s, loom, dies. (II. 197, c.)
vii. The relative clause often, for emphasis' sake, precedes the
clause on which it depends, and contains the noun which logically
is the antecedent. Generally this noun is represented in the main
clause by is or hie. (II. 197, d.)
viii. Adjectives are often incorporated predicatively in the rela-
tive clause. (II. 197, h.)
ix. For the relative pronoun (and other relative words) = as, see
II. 197, /.
x. The relative is not omitted in Latin ; but in the case of
two successive and co-ordinate relative clauses, the second relative
may be omitted if a nominative or accusative. (II. 197, i, </.)
xi. The antecedent of the relative may be implied in a possessive
pronoun ; so also in the substance of a clause (II. 197, 6).
94. The Interrogative Pronoun.
i. In poetry or elevated prose, the interrogative pronoun is
found connected with a participle, not with a finite form of the
verb, and is even found with a participle in the ablative absolute.
ii. Occasionally two interrogatives are found in the same clause.
292 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
95, Tlie Indefinite Pronouns.
i. ALIQUIS, some one or other, some, is indefinite. It may be
used after si for emphasis, = if some rather than if any. (II. 187.)
ii. QUISPIAM, some one, has the force of aliqnis, but is rarer.
iii. QTJIDAM, a certain one, one, is unspecified, though not neces-
sarily indefinite to the speaker. (II. 191.)
iv. NESCIO QUIS, some one, is unknown to the speaker. It often,
through an affectation of ignorance, implies contempt. (II. 188, c.)
v. NONNULLUS, some, NONNEMO, some one, are definite, but un-
specified. They suggest the idea some, but not many. (II. 188, b.)
vi. QUIS, any one, any, is used chiefly after si and ne ; also after
nisi, quo. num, cum, quanta, and in relative sentences. (II. 189,
KB.)
vii. QUISQUAM, any one (substantival), ULLUS, any (adjectival),
mean any, even one, suggesting the idea of no one or none. They
are used in negative, or practically negative sentences. Their
negative correlatives are nemo, nihil and nilllus, but Latin prefers
nemie (nee} with quisquam, ullus, to et (atque) with nemo, nullus.
(II. 189.)
viii. QUIVIS, QUILIBET, any one, any, mean any at all, any you
please, suggesting the idea of every one, all. (II. 190.)
ix. QUISQUE, each, of a larger number than two. With superla-
tives and ordinal numerals, it is equivalent to every. It is often
used with the reflexive, being regularly placed after it. (II. 192.)
x. UTERQUE, each (of two), and hence, both, but both regarded
separately, not together, which is ambo. (II. 192.)
xi. The indefinite relatives (quisquis, qulcumqve, etc.) take the
indicative mood, not the subjunctive, except in indirect narration.
96. The Active and Passive Voices.
(a) For DEPONENT VERBS, see section 68. They arise out of the
reflexive use of the passive voice.
(6) Intransitive verbs (i.e., verbs which do not take a direct
object in the accusative) are often found in Latin in the passive
voice, used impersonally. This IMPERSONAL PASSIVE construction
is used in the indicative, subjunctive or infinitive, the verb being
always third singular and (if gender is expressed) neuter. Such
verbs merely express or refer to the taking place of the action
described by the verb, and may often be translated by the English
introductory adverb there, by the introductory it, or most fre-
quently by the active voice, the subject being understood from the
context.
i. Occasionally a quasi-subject is found, either a neuter adjective
or pronoun used substantively. This corresponds closely to the
cognate or adverbial accusative.
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 293
ii. For the impersonal passive construction with verbs governing
the dative or the ablative, see II. 57, 142.
(c) With many verbs the passive is used as a REFLEXIVE or
middle verb, but only when the reflexive idea is not emphatic.
.(d) With a few verbs, most frequently coepi, the passive form is
used when the dependent infinitive is passive. (II. 21.)
97. The Indicative in Principal Clauses,
Ordinary statements and questions are expressed by the
Indicative. The various tenses are used as follows :
(a) The PRESENT tense is used i. for the English present pro-
gressive (II. 198), ii. as a universal present (II. 198, 6), iii. as a
historical present (II. 198, a), iv. to express an action attempted or
intended in present time, v. to express actions continued from the
past into the present, chiefly with jam (II. 198, c).
(6) The IMPERFECT tense is used i. for the English past progres-
sive (II. 199), ii. to express an action attempted or intended in
past time (II. 199, 6), [called the conceive imperfect], iii. to express
repeated or habitual actions in past time (II. 199, a), iv. to express
actions continued from a prior time into the past time spoken of,
chiefly with jam (II. 199, e), v. to describe and give details, as
compared with the perfect tense, rf, B, below (II. 199, d).
(c) The FUTURE tense is used to express what will happen or
what will be happening at some future time. (II. 200.)
(d) The PERFECT tense has two main uses :
A. The true perfect is used i. to express what has been com-
pleted by the time of the speaker (II. 201, 1), ii. to express what
has ceased to exist, iii. to express the present result of past actions
(hence the use of Latin perfects with the force of the English
present in certain verbs, see II. 203, N.B.).
B. The aoristic perfect (equivalent to our simple past tense) is
used to narrate what happened in past time (II. 201, 2). It is the
regular tense for narration as opposed to description (see 6, v.
above).
(e) The PLUPERFECT tense is used to express something as com-
pleted or attained by some point in past time. (II. 204.)
i. The pluperfect indicative is sometimes used for vividness' sake
in place of the pluperfect subjunctive in the apodosis of unreal
conditional sentences.
(/) The FUTURE PERFECT tense expresses something as com-
pleted or attained at some future time. (11. 205.)
294 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
((/) The following peculiarities occur :
i. A sort of perfect is formed by haled with the perfect parti-
ciple, which emphasizes the continuance of the result of a past act
(II. 203). In the same way habebam and the perfect participle are
like the pluperfect (II. 204, 6).
ii. For the epistolary use of the imperfect and pluperfect, see II.
204, c.
iii. Amatus ful generally differs from the far commoner amatus
sum in implying that the condition spoken of has ceased to exist.
This difference does not seem to hold in the case of amatas fueram,
andfuero, as contrasted with amatus eram and era.
iv. With indefinite relatives the indicative is used, not the sub-
junctive. So with other expressions (see II. 153 and 85), espe-
cially with the modal verbs possum and debed (II. 85, N.B.).
98. The Subjunctive in Principal Clauses.
() HORTATORY and OPTATIVE (expressing a command or a wish).
The negative is 'tie, (II. 151, a.)
1. The subjunctive is used in the first and third persons to urge
something upon a person. In the second person, the subjunctive
is used to express a command (chiefly negative) in the perfect
tense, or if addressed to no definite person, in the present tense.
2. The subjunctive is used in the present, imperfect and pluper-
fect tenses to express a wish or desire, often in combination with
utiiiHin. The present tense is used of wishes that may be fulfilled;
the imperfect and pluperfect, of a longing for impossibilities (II.
151, a). With the present, velim and nolim are found ; with the
imperfect and pluperfect, vellem and nollem (see c below).
(6) DELIBERATIVE or RHETORICAL QUESTIONS. Questions ex-
pressing doubt (to which the answer would be an imperative), and
questions which are practically equivalent to a statement in the
subjunctive (see c below), are expressed by the subjunctive.
(II. 151, c.)
(c) SOFTENED ASSERTIONS, put forward as mere ideas or views,
are in the subjunctive. This is often called the jwtential sub-
junctive. (II. 151, 6.) To this usage belong velim, vellem, etc.,
with the subjunctive expressing a wish, and also the so-called
ideal second person.
99. The Indicative and Subjunctive in Dependent Clauses.
(a) FINAL CLAUSES.
Clauses expressing PURPOSE are in the subjunctive ; the present
tense being used after primary tenses, the imperfect after second-
ary. (II. 25-32.)
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 295
1. The subjunctive of purpose is used in adverbial clauses after
ut, ne, quo (II. 26), neve, or neu (II. 30), and in adjectival clauses
after qul (II. 25).
1. After verbs of preventing, qu&minus and the final subjunctive
are used. (II. 156-158.)
ii. After verbs of fearing, ne and ut (ne non) and the final sub-
junctive are used. (II. 154.)
2. The subjunctive of purpose is used in substantival clauses
after ut and ne, with verbs of urging, asking, commanding, advising,
persuading, etc. (II. 27, 208.) '
i. With verbs of asking and commanding, the subjunctive is
found without ut in the same sense.
(6) CONSECUTIVE CLAUSES.
Clauses expressing RESULT are in the subjunctive with ut (II. 33
and 37-39). For the use of the various tenses, see II. 38, 39.
i. After many negative phrases quln and the subjunctive of
result are found. (II. 156-158.)
ii. Except with verbs of happening, the subjunctive of result
with ut is generally anticipated by some word meaning so or such.
iii. The subjunctive of result is used with fore ut (futHrum ease
ut) as a substitute for the future infinitive (especially in the
passive) ; and with futurum fuisse ut to represent in indirect nar-
ration the pluperfect subjunctive of the apodosis. (II. 33, N.B.)
iv. A consecutive clause is often used elliptically in exclama-
tions.
(c) RELATIVE CLAUSE OP CHARACTERISTIC.
The consecutive subjunctive is used in relative clauses which
describe the antecedent as belonging to a class * (II. 34-36). The
tenses are used as in ordinary consecutive clauses. (II. 38, 39.)
(d} INDIRECT QUESTIONS.
All dependent clauses beginning with an interrogative pronoun
or adverb are put in the subjunctive, whether they depend on
verbs of asking or on verbs of learning, finding out, knoioing,
telling, pointing out, seeing, deciding, etc. (II. 43-47). For the use
of the tenses, see II. 46.
(e) RELATIVE CLAUSES.
Ordinary attributive relative clauses are in the indicative, but
they are put in the subjunctive if they are dependent on -* verb
or phrase of m tying, lliin/:iiKi, 1,-imiri/nj, etc., ?'.<>., where the rela-
tive clause represents the words or thoughts of sonic other than
the writer. (II. 214, /, 2; 215, c.)
1. The relative may generally be replaced by the phrase .si/r/i cts or suck that.
296 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
i. In many cases the subjunctive is used where, without
expressly saying so, the writer is practically giving the words or
thoughts of some other person. This is called virtual indirect
narration. (II. 21G.)
ii. A clause introduced by the co-ordinating relative may be in
the infinitive in indirect narration. (II. 215, /.)
iiL Relative clauses of comparison, after ut t quam, follow the
rules for ordinary relative clauses.
iv. Relative clauses may \>Q final (99, a, i), consecutive (character-
istic) (99, c), causal (99, g, iii), concessive (99, i, iv).
v. For the use of the perfect and pluperfect indicative in fre-
quentative clauses, see II. 202, 204, a.
(/) TEMPORAL CLAUSES.
i. Postqiiam, ubi, simid atque (ac), ut, ut primum, cum primum,
take the indicative, except when forming a part of indirect nar-
ration, when the subjunctive is used.
ii. Dum, donee, quamdiu, quoad, meaning so long as, while, take
the indicative, except when forming a part of indirect narration,
when the subjunctive is used. (II. 172.)
iii. Dum, donee, quoad, meaning until, take the indicative of the
actual lapse of time, the subjunctive where the purpose or end in
view is indicated (II. 174), or in indirect narration.
iv. Antequam, priusquam (often written as twojwords), take the
indicative of the actual lapse of time, the subjunctive where the
end in view (something to be achieved or prevented) is indicated
(II. 175), or in indirect narration.
v. Cum, with primary tenses, or with secondary tenses when
used as a mere relative adverb, and in frequentative clauses, takes
the indicative (except in indirect narration) ; in other cases with
secondary tenses the subjunctive is used. (II. 168, 169, 170.)
vi. For the present indicative of past time with dum, see II.
173. For the perfect and pluperfect indicative in frequenta-
tive clause, see II. 168, 170, b. For the future perfect, where
English less exactly uses the present (or perfect), see II. 205, 6.
(g) CAUSAL CLAUSES.
i. Quod, quia, quoniam take the indicative except when express-
ing (actually or virtually) a reason given by some other than the
writer. This includes quod clauses after verbs of emotion. (II.
165, 166.)
ii. Cum, meaning since, takes the subjunctive. (II. 167.)
iii. Relative clauses with the subjunctive are often used to
express a reason. (II. 196.)
iv. An imaginary reason which is mentioned only to be rejected
is in the subjunctive. (II. 165, h. N.B.)
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 297
(A) CONDITIONAL CLAUSES.
i. These are found after si, if; nisi, si ndn, if not, unless ; s7n
but if. The conditional clause is called the protasis; the result,
the apodosis (II. 78, 79). As a rule the same mood is found in
'both protasis and apodosis. (For exceptions, see II. 85.)
ii. The usual division of conditional clauses is as follows : 1
fl. Unreal conditions. Past tenses of subjunctive.
Present or I (11.82.)
Past time. 1 2. Where nothing is said of the reality or unreality.
Indicative. (II. 81.)
Future (3. More vivid. Indicative. (II. 83, 1, and 84.)
time. \4. Less vivid. Present subjunctive. (II. 83, 2.)
iii. In indirect narration, all conditional clauses are in the sub-
junctive, the apodosis t>eing in the infinitive. (II. 87.)
iv. Conditional clauses of comparison are used after ut si, velnt
si, tanquam si, quasi, followed by the subjunctive. The present
subjunctive is used after primary tenses, the imperfect after
secondary. (For relative clauses of comparison, see section
99, e, iii.)
v. Dum, modo, dummodo meaning provided that, take the sub-
junctive. (II. 171.)
(i) CONCESSIVE CLAUSES.
i. Quamquam regularly takes the indicative (II. 88, 6), quamvls
and licet the subjunctive (II. 88, c), etsl and other compounds of
si the indicative or subjunctive (on the same principles as si). (II.
88, a.)
ii. Ut and ne may introduce concessive clauses with the sub-
junctive. (II. 88. c.)
iii. Cum = although, takes the subjunctive. (II. 88, c, 167.)
iv. Qul is found with the subjunctive in a concessive sense. (II.
196.)
(k) SUBJUNCTIVE BY ATTRACTION.
When dependent on a clause in the subjunctive or infinitive,
clauses which ordinarily would have the indicative (especially rela-
tive clauses), are put in the subjunctive, if the two clauses are
closely connected in sense, and the dependent clause is necessary
to the clause in the subjunctive or infinitive.' 2 (II. 220.)
1OO. The Imperative.
(a) The present imperative, used in the second person only, is
the tense usually employed. With a negative it is found chiefly
in poetry. (II. 149, 150.)
1. These are sometimes called I'ureal (I), Ideal (4) Logical (2 and 3).
2. It is often hard to de<-id- whether a subjunctive is such by attraction or through
heintf in a clause of virtual indirect narration.
298 PlUMAllY LATIN BOOK.
(b) The future imperative, used in the second and rarely the
third person, expresses rather a contingent command than one to
be immediately obeyed. Hence it is common in laws and precepts
and in distinct reference to some future time.
i. Scio and memim regularly use the future imperative for the
present.
101. The Infinitive.
(a) COMPLEMENTARY INFINITIVE. The present infinitive (active
or passive) is used to complete the meaning of many verbs whose
reference would otherwise be incomplete, e.g., possum, jubed, coepi,
consu-esco, void, conor, auded, cogo, debed, prohibed, and similar
verbs. (II. 19, 20, 21.)
i. This corresponds closely to the use of the infinitive with to
in English, but the usage is more restricted in Latin than in
English. (II. 24, 27.)
ii. Verbs of hoping and promising rarely take the present
infinitive, but do so regularly in the case of posse and velle. (II.
13.)
iii. This use of the infinitive is greatly extended in poetry (and
in certain prose writers), approaching more nearly English usage ;
e.g., the infinitive is used to express purpose, to define the appli-
cation of adjectives and nouns, and with verbs which are not
usually followed by the infinitive, to complete their meaning.
(6) ACCUSATIVE AND INFINITIVE. After verbs sentiendl et decldr-
andl (i.e., of saying, thinking, perceiving, etc.), the infinitive with
a subject accusative is used where English has a noun clause intro-
duced by that. (II. 12-17.)
i. The subject accusative is sometimes omitted when easily
understood from the context.
ii. When the verb of saying, etc., is in the passive, the infinitive
is used without any subject accusative. (II. 14.) In such a case a
predicate noun or adjective is in the nominative.
iii. The accusative with the future infinitive is usual after verbs
of hoping, promising, etc, (II. 13.)
iv. Verbs of ivishing often take the accusative and infinitive con-
struction, regularly so if the two verbs refer to different subjects.
(II. 22.)
v. In place of the future infinitive passive (and occasionally of
the future infinitive active), fore ut with a consecutive subjunctive
is used. (II. 33, N.B.)
vi. Esse is often omitted in compound or periphrastic infinitives.
vii. The accusative and infinitive is used in exclamations, after
some suppressed idea of thiith'tng. (The idea of, to think that .)
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 299
(c) As A SUBSTANTIVE, the infinitive is used as a neuter noun in
the nominative or accusative (but never as an accusative governed
by a preposition). (II. 130, 132.)
i. The other cases are furnished by the gerund or supine.
ii. The complementary infinitive, and the accusative and infini-
tive construction, are closely connected with this usage, and it
is impossible in some cases to say to which class a particular
infinitive belongs.
(d) HISTORICAL INFINITIVE. The present infinitive is often used
as a finite independent verb in lively descriptions. In this usage
the subject is in the nominative. (II. 131.)
(e) TENSES OF THE INFINITIVE. The present tense is used in all
the usages described in a, 6, c and d ; the perfect in 6 and rarely
c ; the future in b. For the difference in the force of the tenses as
used in the accusative and infinitive construction (i.e., to represent
an indicative), see II. 16.
1O2. The Participles.
(a) The PRESENT PARTICIPLE ACTIVE expresses continuance
at the time of the verb of the clause to which it belongs. (II.
144.)
i. The present participle, like the present indicative, occasionally
expresses an attempt.
ii. The present participle is often used as an adjective or as a
noun. (II. 148, 6, c.)
iii. For the present participle in the ablative absolute, see II.
48, 49, 148, a.
iv. For the participles of deponent verbs, see section 68, c.
(b) The FUTURE PARTICIPLE ACTIVE is generally used with
the verb sum to indicate intention, likelihood or imminence.
(II. 147.)
i. In poetry and late prose writers the future participle is used
without sum, to express intention, likelihood, or probability.
(c) The PERFECT PARTICIPLE PASSIVE expresses completion
or attainment by the time of the verb of the clause to which it
belongs. (II. 145.)
i. The perfect participle is often translated by the English
present participle in -ing, or by subordinate clauses, or even by a
co-ordinate clause. (II. 49, /. N.B., 146, 148, .)
ii. For the perfect participle used to suggest an abstract idea,
see II. 2:15.
300 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
iii. For the perfect participle in the ablative absolute, see II. 49,
148, a,
iv. The perfect participle is often used as an adjective or as a
noun. (II. 148, b, c.)
v. For the participles of deponent verbs, see section 68, c.
vi. With certain deponent verbs the perfect participle is found
with the force of the present participle, e.g., ratus, solitus, veritus.
(See also II. 146.)
103. The Gerund.
The gerund is used as a verbal noun, in the genitive, dative,
accusative and ablative cases of the singular. It is gener-
ally either an intransitive verb or a transitive without its
accusative object expressed (see section 104, b). (II. 133.)
() The genitive is used chiefly as an objective genitive, and
with causa.'
i. For the gerund with met, sui, etc., see II. 134.
(6) The dative is used chiefly with adjectives (rarely nouns)
denoting^ ness or capacity, and in a few official phrases.
(c) The accusative is used with ad, inter, and rarely other prepo-
sitions. The commonest use is with ad to express purpose.
(d) The ablative is used as an ablative of means or cause, and
with 'in,, ab, de, ex, and rarely other prepositions.
104. The Gerundive.
The gerundive (sometimes called the future participle pas-
sive) is always passive, and expresses that which is due or
proper.
(a) With the verb sum, the gerundive is used to express duty,
obligation or necessity. The form of expression is always passive.
(II. 142.)
i. The agent is generally in the dative.
ii. The neuter nominative is use$ with the third singular of sum,
impersonally, in the case of intransitive verbs.
(6) The gerundive construction is used in place of the gerund
with a direct object in the accusative, regularly so with preposi-
tions (II. 140, 141). In the genitive both modes of expression are
common, and sometimes occur in the same sentence. By this con-
struction, instead of some case of the gerund governing an object
in the accusative, the gerundive is used in agreement with the
PAltT III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 301
object, but both words are in the case the gerund would have
been in.
i. The various cases are used in the same way as the cases of the
gerund (see section 103).
ii. As a rule, the gerundive construction is possible only with
.transitive verbs, but 'iitor, fruor, fungor, potior, and resect, are
exceptions. (II. 141, 6.)
iii. The genitive is used predicatively with verbs, especially sum,
to express purpose.
ix. For the so called gerundive in -I with mel, siu, etc. , see II.
134.
(c) The gerundive is used in agreement with the object of
certain verbs, e.g., do, euro (or with the passive in the predicative
nominative) to express purpose. (II. 143.)
1O5. The Supine.
(fi) The supine is -um in used after verbs of motion to
express purpose. An object is rarely found with the accusative
supine. (II. 136, 137.)
(b) The supine in -u is used with certain adjectives and a
few nouns, e.g., fas, nefds, to specify in what respect a state-
ment is to be applied. 1 An object is never found with the
ablative supine. (II. 138, 139.)
1OG. General Rules of Indirect Narration (Oratio Obllqua).
(See more fully II. 212-219.)
(} MOOD OF VERB.
DIRECT NARRATION. INDIRECT NARRATION.
Statements 1 , . ,, /....
Rhetorical Questions/" P ut m fche Infinitl ^e.
Commands ~\
Entreaties I M Subjunctive.
Questions
Subordinate Clauses (whether^
in the Indicative or the j- u u n Subjunctive.
Subjunctive)
1. There are many reasons for thinking the supine in -u a dative of pui-pose (-u con-
tracted for uT) rather than an ablative of specification.
302 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(1>) TEXSE or VETIB.
Clauses put in the infinitive have,
The present infinitive for time contemporaneous with the
speaker.
ii perfect n n n prior to that of the speaker,
ii future ii n n subsequent to that of the
speaker.
Clauses put in the subjunctive follow the rules for the sequence
of tenses (see section 107).
(c) CASE OF NOUNS on PRONOUNS. The subject of a clause
whose verb is put in the infinitive is in the accusative, not the
nominative.
(d) PRONOUNS AND ADVERBS. Pronouns of the first or second
person are changed to pronouns of the third person, generally
se and ille respectively.
All demonstrative pronouns, adverbs or adjectives which are
relative to the time of the speaker, are as a rule adapted to the
time of the reporter.
1O7. Sequence of Tenses.
(a) In most dependent clauses in the subjunctive (f.g.,
clause of Purpose, Indirect Questions, Subordinate clauses put
in Indirect Narration), the rule is that after the primary tenses 1
the Present and Perfect Subjunctives are used, after secondary
tenses the Imperfect and Pluperfect.
The present and imperfect represent continuous actions ; the
perfect and pluperfect completed actions.
i. The future is represented by the present and imperfect ; the
future perfect by the perfect and pluperfect.
ii. Often for vividness' sake the primary sequence (the tenses of
the speaker) is used in place of the secondary sequence (the tenses
of the reporter).
iii. After the historical present, either primary or secondary
sequence may be used.
iv. Often there is found a shifting from the secondary to the
primary sequence, especially in long passages.
v. Consecutive clauses are not affected by the tense of the verb
on which they depend.
1. The primary tenses are the present, future, and true perfect (whether indicative,
subjunctive or imperative) ; the secondary tenses are the imperfect, aorist perfect, and
pluperfect (whether indicative or subjunctive).
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 803
vi. When the subjunctive clause depends on a participle! or
infinitive, its tens',! is determined by the leading verb of the
sentence to which the participle or infinitive belongs.
(6) The following will show the application of the sequence of
tenses to clauses put in the subjunctive in indirect narration.
DIRECT NARRATION. INDIRECT NARRATION.
Primar-tf Sequence. Secondary Sequence-.
Present Indie. becomes Present Subj. Imperfect Subj.
Imperfect u it Imperfect \\ \\ M
Future t n Present t? u it
Perfect n n Perfect n Pluperfect n
Pluperfect H \\ Pluperfect n \\ \\
Future Perfect Indie. n Perfect u it u
108. The Adverb.
Adverbs, as in English, modify verbs, adjectives, and other
adverbs.
i. Rarely an adverb is used to modify a verbal noun.
ii. A few adverbs, e.g., pr<>})iiia, proxime, prtdie, are found
governing cases as though they were prepositions.
iii. Yes and no are expressed in Latin by some emphatic adverb,
or more frequently by repeating the verb of the question.
109. The Conjunction. (See also section 74).
The following points are of importance in regard to the usage of
some of the conjunctions :
(a) ET, -QUE, ATQUE, AC : Et simply combines ; -que adds a
second member which belongs closely to the first and completes its
meaning; atque adds something of importance, something to be
emphasized ; dc is in force between et and atque, and is never used
before vowels.
(6) ET . . . ET = both . . . and ; NEQUE . . . NEQUE, or NEC . . . NEC
= neither . . . nor. Other combinations are -que . . . et, -que . . .
-que, neque . . . et, et . . . neque.
(c) AUT, VEL : Aut denotes an essential difference between two
things ; vel implies that there is no difference of importance. Ve
and sice have much the force of vel, but are rarer.
(d) AUT . . . AUT ; or VEL . . . vvi, = either ... or. SIVE . . .
SIVE = whether ... or.
(e) Often for vividness' sake (e.g. in rapid narrative) or to ^i\-i>
point to a contrast, the usual connective is omitted. This omis-
304 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
sion is called asyndeton. The use of needless connectives, to giv r o
more force to an enumeration by dwelling 011 it, is called poly-
syndeton.
(/) UT is used as a final (section 99, a), consecutive (99, 7>),
temporal (99, /) or concessive (99, i) conjunction. NE is used as
a final (99, a) or concessive (99, i\ conjunction. Both ut and ne
may introduce either adverbial or substantival clauses.
(g) CUM is used as a temporal (section 99, /), causal (99, g) or
concessive (99, i) conjunction.
(/*) DUM is used as a temporal (section 99, /) or conditional
(99, A) conjunction.
(i) QUOD is used as a causal conjunction (section 99, g}. It may
introduce either adverbial clauses or (in the sense of inasmuch as,
or as for the fact that) substantival clauses. Quod is often to be
translated that or the fact that rather than because.
(fc) QUANDO is used as a temporal (section 99, /) or causal (99, g)
conjunction.
11O. The Order of Words.
In addition to the more general treatment in Part II. 1-8, 238,
239, the following details should be noted.
(a) The qrder of words or of clauses commonly follows the
natural order in which the ideas would present themselves, being
changed chiefly for the expression of emotion. But though the
ideas may be presented in the same order as in English, the
syntactical relation of the various parts may be totally different.
(6) An adjective or other modifier generally follows its noun
unless it is to be emphasized. Numerals, adjectives of size and
quantity, and demonstrative pronouns commonly precede, being
generally emphatic. Additional emphasis is often given by separ-
ating two words in agreement.
(c) Personal pronouns are apt to be placed in emphatic posi-
tions, and where two personal or possessive pronouns occur in the
same clause they are generally placed close together.
(d) Relative and interrogative pronouns are placed as near as
possible to the beginning of the clause they introduce.
(e) Adverbs precede the words they modify, though sometimes
for emphasis' sake they may follow a verb.
(/) Prepositions (except tenus, versus, in certain cases cum, and
occasionally other prepositions) precede the word governed. An
adjective or genitive modifying a noun governed by a preposition
PART III. COMPENDIUM OF SYNTAX. 305
is often placed between the preposition and noun, or even before
the preposition (if it is monosyllabic).
(</) A negative is regularly placed before the word modified. If
it applies equally to the whole sentence, it is placed before the
verb.
(h) The verb is regularly at the end of its sentence.
i. The copula is generally followed by some important word or
words. When sum begins a sentence it is no longer a mere copula,
but a substantive verb, or an emphasized copula ( exists, really is}.
ii. A dependent infinitive precedes the verb on which it depends.
iii. When the verb is not placed at the end of the sentence, it is
either that it may itself be emphasized (by being placed at the
beginning of its clause), or that some other word may be empha-
sized by being placed at the close of the sentence.
(i) A word is often made more emphatic by placing immediately
after it some unimportant word.
(/.-) Antithesis may be expressed by repeating in the second
clause the order of the first (Anaphora) or, more frequently, by
reversing it (Chiasmus).
(I) The Romans paid special attention to the succession of long
and short vowels at the close of a sentence or period. The closing
cadence of a verse was particularly avoided in prose.
(m) Noun, adjective and adverbial clauses are as a rule in the
position a noun, adjective and adverb respectively would have.
Cmi wnt ice and often final clauses follow that on which they
depend. Temporal, conditional and concessive clauses often precede
the principal clause. But, except with consecutive clauses, subor-
dinate clauses are most frequently embraced within the principal
clause.
(n) In narrative passages the periodic structure is commoner in
Latin than in English.
(o) In translating, the words should be considered in the order
in which they occur, not pieced together by selecting a word here
and another there.
20
306 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
IV. METRE.
THE DACTYLIC HEXAMETER.
111. As in English, so in Latin, poetry is written in lines or
verses, and the verses are divided into feet. The main distinction
between the two languages is, that in English poetry the verse
consists of a regular succession and combination of accented and
unaccented (or rather more strongly and less strongly accented)
syllables, while in Latin it consists of the regular succession and
combination of long 1 and short syllables.
112. The smallest combination within which such long and
short, or accented and unaccented syllables, occur, is called a foot.
In each foot there is a certain syllable on which there falls a
special stress of voice called the ictus (or stroke), while on the other
syllable or syllables no such stress is placed. The part of the foot
on which the ictus falls is called the arsis, and the rest of the
foot is called the tJiesis.
In English poetry the ictus coincides with the ordinary accent of
the word, while in Latin it does not at all depend upon the word-
accent, though frequently coincident therewith.
113. The dactylic hexameter (or heroic verse of the Latins) con-
sists of six feet, of which the sixth is invariably a spondee
(or what may here be counted as such, w ), the fifth nearly
always a dactyl w w . Each of the first four may be a dactyl
or a spondee, generally a judicious combination of the two being
preferred, except where the poet for certain reasons uses a pre-
ponderance of one or the other. The ictus falls on the first
syllable of these feet.
1. For the purposes of metre, a syllable is considered long, not only when the
vowel is long by nature, but generally also when (even though naturally short) it
conies before two consonants, when it is said to be long by position. However, at
least one of the consonants must belong to the same word as the vowel in question.
With a vowel naturally long, the sj'llable is long by nature as well as by position. The
letters j, x and z have the same effect as two consonants. The letter h in combi-
nation with a consonant does not lengthen a preceding syllable, and a word or syllable
beginning with that letter is considered, metrically, as beginning with a vowel. A
syllable is considered common, that is, sometimes long and sometimes short, if its
vowel, when short b}- nature, is followed by a mute (b, g, p, t, etc.) and a liquid (I or r).
PART III. METRE. 307
The metrical scale may be represented thus, the acute accent
marking the syllable on which the -ictus falls :
J- w -
[-L ]
114. In all poetry, especially where (as in Latin) there is 110
rhyme, a great deal of the beauty and melody of the rhythm
depends upon the caesura, 1 or pause, in the verse, occurring where
a word ends within a foot, and usually, but not always, accom-
panied by a corresponding pause in the sense.
The favorite caesural pause in the dactylic hexameter is after the
arsis or in the thesis of the third foot. From occurring after the
fifth luilf foot of the verse, it is termed the penthemime ral caesura.
However, the position of the pause varies, and sometimes more
than one caesura are found in the same line.
115. A few verses of the ^Eneid are here scanned (that is,
divided into their appropriate measures) according to the rules
above given, double lines being used to mark the position of the
principal caesura in each verse : ' z
(a) Arm vl j rumque cS, | no || Tro | jae qui | primus S,b | orls
(6) Vi stipe | rum sae | vae || mem6 | rem Ju j nonls 6b | Irani
- / / / / /
(c) Infer | retqug de j 6s LatI | 6, || genus ] unde La j tmum
(d) Qul'dve d8 le"ns, || re | gln& de" | urn tot | v6lv6r6 | easus
1. Whenever a word ends within a foot, a caesura is produced. Accordingly a verse
may have several caesuras, but generally only one of them the chief caesura, or the
caesura of the verse is marked by any perceptible pause in the sense. Occasionally
we find two well defined caesural pauses in the same line, one in the fourth foot and
the other in the second. When the pause occurs at the end of a foot (which very
seldom happens), it is sometimes called diaeresis ; as,
His lacri | mis vi | tarn damus || et mise | rescimus | ultro.
The pupil may note the prosaic character of such verses as the following, in which
there is no caesura or pause of any description :
Romae | moenia | terruit I impiger | Hannibal | armis.
Sparsis | hastis | longis | campus | splendet et | horret.
2. The mark of the long quantity used in the scansion of the verses in this and the
following sections indicates that the syllable is long metrically, not necessarily that
the aoteet over which it is placed is long by nature, although in some cases the syllable
is long metrically (that is by position) and at the same time the vowel is naturally
long. For example, in (d) Quidve has the first syllable long by position, though the
vowel i in quid is naturally short; the last syllable of dolens is long by position, and
at the same time the e is long by nature; so with the last syllable of deinn\ tut
(naturally short) is here long by position only, and if it were followed by a vowel <>r
h it would be short both naturally and metrically. So the first syllable of <
long by position only, the vowel o in this word being short by nature.
308 PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
(e) Si qua j fata si | nunt, || jam | turn ten | dltque fo ] vetque
(/) Exclde | rant am | mO ; || manet | alta | mgnte re | postiim
(<j) Lustra | bunt con | vexa, || po | lus dum | sidera | pascet
The pause coming between the two short syllables of the foot,
as in the last example, is called the trochaic, weak or feminine.
caesura, that after the arsis, as in the other examples, being
termed syllabic, strong or masculine.
With these lines may be compared the following English hexa-
meters from Longfellow :
This is the forest primeval. || The murmuring pines and the hem-
locks,
Bearded with moss, || and in garments green, || indistinct in the
twilight,
Stand like Druids of eld, || with voices sad and prophetic,
Stand like harpers hoar, || with beards that rest on their bosoms.
Loud from its rocky caverns, || the deep-voiced neighbouring ocean
Speaks, || and in accents disconsolate answers the wail of the forest.
116. (a) There is an elision 1 (synaloepha) or slurring of the last
syllable of a word ending with a vowel, diphthong, or letter m
preceded by a vowel, when the following word begins with a
vowel, diphthong, or the letter h. The elision of m with the
preceding vowel is sometimes termed ecthlipsis.
EXAMPLES :
Lltora | mult(um) II | l(c) 6t ter | rls || jac | tatus et | aito.
Necd(itm) eti | am cau j s(ae) Ira | rum |] sae | vique do j lores.
Corripi tint, || one | rantq(ite) au | ro: || dux | femina | facti.
Und(e) homl | num genus, | St pecu ] d^s ; || un | d(e) Imber
6t | Ignes
COMPARE :
Impress'd th(e) effulgence of his glor(i/) abides.
May I express th(ee) unblamed, since God is light?
T(o) inveigle and invite th(e) unwary sense.
1. Certain monosyllables such as do, dem, spe, spem, sun, etc., do not suffer elision.
PART III. METRE. 309
(6) A hiatus (i.e., the retention of the final vowel in scansion
before a word beginning with a vowel, a diphthong or an /i), is
rarely found, usually in the case of proper names, interjections
and long vowels or diphthongs, especially in the arsis of the foot.
In the thesis, a long vowel is sometimes shortened instead of being
elided.
EXAMPLES :
POsthabl | ii colu | Isse Sa | m6. || Hie | Illms arma
Tun(e) il | l(e) Aene | as, || quern D^rdanl | 6 An | chlsae
(This last verse is an example of those rare [spondaic] lines,
which have a spondee in the fifth foot.)
Victor | pud rap! | dum || Simo | enta sub | Illo | alto,
Et ve r(a) Inces su patti | It dea. || Ill(e) ubi | matrem
The division in this verse is the so-called bucolic caesura, which
is found after the fourth foot when that is a dactyl.
(c) When the elision occurs at the end of the verse (which is
extremely seldom), it is called synapheia, the line being read 01
scanned in close connection with the one following, which, oi
course, must begin with a vowel or an h ; as,
Jacte | mur, doce as : || Ig | nar(i) hSml | numqtie lo | corumqu(e)
Erra | mus, || ven | t(o) hue et | vastls | flActibus | 4ctf :
117. (a) To denote a rapid or lively movement, a succession
of dactyls may be used ; as,
Radit i | ter llqul | dum || cele | res neque | commSvet | alls
Compare with this,
Leaped like the roe, when he hears in the woodland the voice
of the huntsman.
Myriads of rivulets hurrying through the lawn.
It will be observed that the metre of the last example is different
from that of the preceding one, but, as in the hexameter, the
numerous unaccented syllables are used to denote rapidly repeated
action.
(6) On the other hand a succession of spondees may be used lo
310 PEIMARY LATIN BOOK.
represent a slow or labored movement, or a stately or majestic gait
or appearance ; as,
Appa | rent ra | rl || nan j tes in | gurglte j vasto
Infe | lix sa xis |] in | procur | rentibus | haesit
Cert(e) hinc | Roma | n6s || 6 | llm vol | ventibus | iiinls
Ast egS j quae || dl | v(v.m) ince | do re | gma J6 | vlsque
With these verses compare the following :
Stand like harpers hoar, with beards that rest on their bosoms.
Thousands of aching brains, where theirs no longer are busy,
Thousands of toiling hands, where theirs have ceased from their
labors.
118. Closely connected with the use of dactyls or spondees for
the purposes mentioned in the last section, is what may be called
the imitative harmony of language, that is, the arrangement in
proper rhythmical order, of words containing certain vowel or con-
sonantal sounds, to represent the sounds made by the animate or
inanimate objects described in the verse; as,
QuadiUpe dante" pu | trem||s6nl | tu quatlt | ungula | campum
(of the galloping of horses)
L i i i i i
Ill(i) in | dignan | tes || mag | no cum | murmure | montls
(of the roaring of the pent-up winds)
Africus, | gt vas | t5s || vol | vtint ad | lltora | flfictus
(of billows dashing upon the shore)
With these verses the following English examples may be com-
pared :
Loud from its rocky caverns, the deep-voiced neighbouring ocean
Speaks, and in accents disconsolate answers the wail of the forest.
By the long wash of Australasian seas.
The league-long roller thundering on the reef.
The moan of doves in immemorial elms,
And murmuring of innumerable bees.
PART III. METRE. 311
Now soft on the sand, now loud on the ledge,
Is heard the tramp of his steed as he rides.
Half a league, half a league, half a league onward.
I galloped, Dirck galloped, we galloped all three.
119. It may be stated in conclusion that the poets, owing to the
demands of metre, take frequent liberties with the quantities 1 of
the vowels and with the number of the syllables in the words.
For example, the word deinde (usually of three syllables) is often
treated as if it were of two syllables, d^uide. This is called
or syuizesis.
Again, two syllables usually contracted into one in prose often
remain distinct in poetry, as, Orpluiis (three syllables), for the
usual Orpheus (two syllables). This is termed diaeresis.
Unms, ilUus, etc., are frequently found pronounced unius, Ulius,
etc., and especially with proper names is the quantity of the
vowels varied to suit the requirements of the verse, as Sychaeus
and tiychaeus, Ldvlnia and Jjarlnia, tildonius and IS'idonhts.
1. As the ictus falls naturally on a long syllable on the first syllable of the dactyl
or its equivalent spondee it sometimes happens that a syllable regularly short is
lengthened simply because it occupies the part of the foot on which the voice-stress
falls. For example, in the verse,
Litora javtetur, odiix Junonis iniquae,
the last syllable of jactetur, naturally short, is lengthened on account of its position
in the arsis of the foot. It is probable that in most cases where this happens, it is
merely the retention of an originally long quantity.
312 P1UMAKY LATIN BOOK.
EXPLANATORY NOTES TO THE
VOCABULARY.
Hyphens are used to distinguish the constant from the variable part of Latin
words.
Words of the same or similar form, but differently translated, are numbered
" 1, 2, 3, etc.
References are made to the sections of Parts II. and III. In the Latin-English
Vocabulary all references are to Part III.
w. stands for with. The other abbreviations are common, and do not need
explanation.
The quantity of all vowels long by nature has been marked. Vowels not marked
are to be considered short by nature.
PART 111. VOCABULARY.
313
VOCABULARY.
I. LATIN-ENGLISH.
a, ab, prep. w. abl., from, away from;
u-ith 2J(tsxivc*, by.
ab-do, ere, -didl, -dituin, conceal,
hide.
ab jicio, ere, -jeel, -jeetuni, throw
away.
absuin, abesse, aful, be distant.
ac-eedo, ere, -cessi, -cessum, come,
draw near.
ac-eido, ere, -cidl, happen.
ac-clpid, ere, -cepl, -ceptuni, re-
ceive.
ae-curro, ere, -currl or -cncurrl,
run up.
aeies, el, F., line of battle, line.
acriter, (acrius, accrrime), adv.,
fiercely, desperately.
ad, prep. r<>. ace., to, towards; near, on,
at, by ; with gerund and gerundive,
with a view to, for.
ad-ducp, ere, -cluxl, -ductum,
bring; influence, induce.
ademptus, frnin adimo.
ad eo, Ire, -il (-Ivi), ituni, go to,
visit.
adequito, are, avl, atum, ride up.
ad-imo, ere, -eml, -eiiiptuin, take
away, destroy.
adiiiinistro, are, avl, atum, attend
to.
a f lor-ior, Irl, -tus sum, attack.
adulesc-ens, -entis, M., a j'oung man.
ad vent vis, iis, M., approach, arrival.
adversus, a, um, unsuccessful ; proe-
Ihrm fi'h-flfaum, defeat, repulse.
aedineium, I, x., building.
aedifU-6, are, avl, atum, build.
Aeduus, I, M., an Aeduan ; in plur.,
the Aedui (a tribe in Gaul).
aesrre (aesrius, aej?errime), arlv.,
with difficulty; /// \viththe
-t ditHcnlty.
iic(|iiiis, a. urn, levf 1 , favorable.
.test inio, are, avl, atuin, reckon, re-
uard.
;H-stu<, us, M., tide.
att'ero, att'tirre, alt nil, allatuiu,
biinij, cause.
af fllgo, ere, -fllxl, -fllctum, shat-
ter, damage, wreck.
1. ager, agrl, M., land, field, territory.
2. ag-ger, -geris, M., mound.
ag-gredior, I, -gressus sum, attack.
ag-men, -minis, N., line of march,
army (on the march), column.
ago, ere, egl, actum, do ; treat,
confer.
agricultura, ae, F., agriculture, farm-
ing.
ali-quis, -qua, -quid or -quod [26],
some, some one, something.
alius, a, ud [14], other, another; re-
peated, in plur., some . . . others.
Allobrog-es, -um, M. plur., the Allo-
broges (a tribe in Gaul).
Alp-es, -ium, M. plur., the Alps.
alter, era, ernm [14], the other (of
two); repeated, in sing. , the one . . . the
other.
altitu-do, -diiiis, F., height, depth.
altum, I, N-., deep water.
altus, a, um, high, deep.
amicitia, ae, F., friendship.
1. amlcus, a, um, friendly.
2. amlcus, 1, M., friend.
a-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum, lose.
amplius, adn., more, further.
amplus, a, um, large.
ancora, ae, F., anchor.
angustus, a, um, narrow, small, con-
tracted.
animadver-to, ere, -tl, -sum, no-
tice, observe.
anim-al, -alis, N., animal.
animus, I, M., spirit, mind, heart, cour-
age.
a 11 11 us, I, M., year.
1. ante, adv., before, previously.
2. ante, tn-ep. ID. ace., before.
ante-c'edo, ere, -cessi, -cessum, sur-
]>as*. excel.
aiitl(|inis, a, um. old, am lent.
apcrtus, a. am, expctised, unprotected
(i. i'., hi/ the xhicltl).
iipjH't-o, ere, -Ivi, -itum, strive after,
seek.
approplnqnp, are, avl, come near,
be near (icith dat.).
31-4
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
aquila, ae, F., eagle (the standard of
t/f- Roiititn IC'jitm).
Aquitania, ae, F., Aquitania (ffte south-
it juirt. of Gaul)
arbiter, trl, M., arbitrator.
arbitror, arl, atus sum, think, be-
lieve.
arduus, a, um, steep, difficult.
aritlum, I, x., dry land.
arma, orum, s.jjlnr., arms.
anno, are, avl, atum, arm ; perf.
j-cti't. yrt.vx. , armed, in arms.
ascendo, ere, ascend!, ascensum,
mount, climb, ascend.
ascensus, us, M., ascent.
asper, era, erum, rugged, rough.
atque, and, and further.
at-tingo, ere, -tigl, -tactum, touch,
reach.
attrib-uo, ere, -ul, -utuni, assign.
auc-tpr, -toris, M., leader, adviser.
auctori-tas, -tatis, F., influence, pres-
tige, weight.
amlacter, adv., boldty.
aucleo, ere, ausus sum [68, b], ven-
ture, dare.
autlio, Ire, IvI, Itum, hear.
augeo, ere, auxl, auetum, increase.
aut, or ; repeated, either ... or.
autem, whereas, while ; moreover.
auxiliuni, I, x., aid; in plur., auxili-
aries, reinforcements.
Avaricum, I, x., Avaricum (a toim in
Gaul).
aver-to, ere, -tl, -sum, turn aside.
Axona, ae, F., the Axona (a river in
Gaul).
1. barbarus, I, M., barbarian.
2. barbarus, a, um, uncivilized.
Belgae, arum, M., plur., the Belgae
( nation in the north of Gaul).
Belgium, I, x., the country of the
Belgae.
BellovacI, orum, M. plur., the Bello-
vaci (a tribe in Gaul).
bellum, I, x., war.
Boil, orum, M. plur., the Boii (name
<>f a tribe).
brevis, e, short; brevl, u-sed as adv.,
quickly.
Britannia, ae, F., Britain.
Britannus, I, M., a Briton.
caeruleus, a, um, dark blue.
Caes-ar, -aris, M., Caesar.
C'antiuni, I, x., Kent
capio, ere, cepl, captum, take, take
_
c-aptlvus, I, M., captive, prisoner.
caro. eariiis, K.. meat.
cams, a, um, dear.
castellum, I, N., fort, stronghold.
castra, oruai, s. plur., camp.
causa, ae, F., cause, reason ; in the abl.,
tnttt a gen. preceding, for the sake of,
for the pui-pose of.
cedo, ere, cessl, cessum, retreat.
ceier, era, eruin, speedy.
eeieri-tas, -tatis, F., swiftness, rapid-
ity, activity.
centum 116], a hundred.
centur-io, -ionis, M., centurion (an
officer in the Human army).
certus, a, um, certain, fixed, specified.
ceterl, ae, a, adj. plur., the rest, the
others.
cibus, I, M., food.
Cicer-o, -onis, si., Cicero (a Roman's
name).
cingo, ere, cinxl, cinctum, sur-
round.
circiter, adv., about; also as prep. w.
ace., about.
ciroum-cio, -dare, -dedl, -datum,
surround.
circum-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum,
lead around.
circum-venio, Ire, -venl, ventum,
surround, outflank.
citer-ior, -ius, adj. compar., hither,
nearer (of the one of two provinces
ri'hicli la// nearer tn Rome).
cito (citius, citissime), adv., swiftly,
rapidly.
civ-is, -is, M., citizen.
clvi-tas. -tatis, F., state.
clam, adv.. secretly.
clam-or, oris, M., shout, shouting.
class-is, -is, F., fleet.
cliens, clientis, M., vassal, retainer.
coepl [72], began.
coerceo, ere, ul, itum, restrain,
check.
cogito, are, avl, atum, consider.
cognat-io, -iouis, F. , relationship, con-
nections.
co-gnosco, ere, -gnovl, -gnitum,
learn, find out.
cogo, ere, coegl, coactum, collect ;
compel.
cohortor, arl, atus sum, encourage.
colior-s, -tis, F. , cohort, company (one-
tenth of a legion).
coll-is/-is, M.,hill.
colloco, are, avl, atum, station,
place.
colo, ere, colul, cultum, till, culti-
vate.
col-or, -pris, M., color.
commeatus, us, M., supplies (generally
in the sin;i.).
com -mitt 6, ere, -mlsl, -missum,
entrust; urith proelium, join, begin.
Commius, I, M., Commius (a Gaul's
name).
commoror, arl, atus sum, wait,
sun.
com-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum,
disturb, alarm, agitate.
communio, Ire, IvI, Itum, fortify.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
315
cornmuiiis, e, common, general.
comparo, are, avl, atum, make
ready, procure, raise, collect.
com-peilo, ere, -pull, -pulsum,
drive.
com-perio, Ire, -perl, -pertuin,
tind out.
com-pleo, ere, -plevl, pletum, fill
up, fill.
complures, ia, adj. plur. [12], several,
very many.
comporto, are, avl, atum, bring in.
compre-liemlo, ere, -liendl, -hen-
sum, seize.
eonatum, I, N T ., attempt.
con-cedo, ere, cessl, -cessum, grant.
con-cldo, ere, -clui, -clsum, cut
down. kill.
eoncilio, are, avl, atum, win over,
gain.
concilium, I, N., meeting, assembly,
council.
eon-curro, ere, -currl or -cucurrl,
-cursum. hurry, fiock.
concursus, us, .M., charge, attack.
condic-ip, -i on is, F., terms, proposal.
condoiio, are, avl, atum, overlook.
confero, conferre, contull, colla-
_tum, collect ; u'ith se, betake.
con-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum, ac-
complish, finish ; exhaust.
coii-fldo, ere, -flsus sum [68, 6],
trust, have confidence in (with dot.).
confirmo, are, avl, atum, encour-
age, establish, arouse L
con-fugio, ei-e, -t'ugl, flee, flee for
refuse.
con jiciq, ere. -jecl, -jectum, hurl,
cast; in'th in j'u<iaiii, put.
Conor, arl, atus sum, try, attempt.
oon-scrlbo, ere, -scrlpsi, -scrlp-
Jtuui, enlist.
cqnsensus, us, M., consent.
con-sequor, I, -seeutus sum, follow;
overtake.
con-sldo, ere, -sedl, -sessnm, en-
camp.
consilium, I, x., plan, design; pru-
dence
con-sisto, ere, -stitl, halt, take up
position.
conspectus, us, M., sight, view.
con-spicio, ere, -spexl, -spectum,
see, catch siglit of, behold.
conspicor, arl, atus sum, see, ob-
aerve.
coiistit no, ere, -ul, -utum, decide;
determine, resolve ; station.
cojisuetu-do, -dinis, K., custom.
co:i-simio, ere, -sumpsl, -sump-
tuin, sjiend.
cMi-tcmiio, ere, -tempsl, -temp-
tum, di M
couteu-do, ere, -di, -turn, hagten;
contend.
coatestor, arl, atus sum, invoke,
call upon.
contin-ens, -entis, F., continent, main-
land.
con tineo, ere, -tinul, -teiitum, re-
strain, keep, hem in.
contiiiuus, a, um, successive.
contra, pr_ep. ic.acc., opposite.
con-traho, ere, -traxi, -tractum,
reduce, contract.
con-venio, Ire, -venl, -ventum,
come together, assemble.
COIIA er to, ere, -tl, -sum, change.
Conyictolitavis, -is, si., Convictoli-
tavis (a_(ja.!'ti n<-
convoco, are, avl, atum, call to-
gether, summon.
co-orior, Irl, -ortus sum, arise.
copia, ae, K. in, siny., supply, abun-
dance, plenty ; in plur., forces, troops.
cornu, us, x., wing (of an army).
corp-us, -oris, N., body.
Cotta, ae, M., Gotta (a Roman's name).
Cotus, I, M., Cotes (a Gaul's name).
creber, bra, brum, numerous, fre-
quent.
cremq, are, avl, atum, burn.
creo, are, avl, atum, elect.
cruciatus, us, M., torture, cruelty.
cul-men, -minis, x., summit.
cultus, us, M., civilization.
1. cum, prep. w. abl., with, together
with.
2. cum, conj., w-hen, after; as, since.
cunctor. arl. atus sum, hesitate.
cupide, adv., eagerly.
cur, why.
currus, us, M., chariot.
cursus, us, M., course.
D
de, prep. iv. abl., about, concerning, of;
with causa, for.
decem [19], ten.
de-cerno, ere, -crevl, cretum, de-
cide.
decimus, a. um, tenth.
decllvis_, e, sloping.
de-curro, ere, -currl or cucurrl,
-cursuui, run down.
dedit-io, -ionis, F., surrender.
de-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, surrender,
give up.
led
de -duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum, lead
off, withdraw.
de-feudo, ere, -fendi, -f ensum, de-
fend.
de-fero, -ferre, -tull. -latum, report.
de-fetiscor, I, -fessus sum, become
exhausted ; perf. jirt., exhuu-
de-fieio, ere, -feel, -fectum, fail,
revolt.
deimle. adr., then.
de-jicio, ere, -jecl, jectum, carry
down. <lrive ash..iv.
de-lij?~), ere, -lef?I, -lectuiii.
dtMiioiistro, are, -avl, atum, point
out.
densus, a, um, thick, dense.
316
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
de-pono, ere, -posul, -positum, lay
aside. _
de-sllio, Ire, -silul, -sultum, leap
down.
despero, are, avl, atum, despair,
give up hope.
desu*n, deesse, deful, be lacking.
detrlm&ntosus, a, urn, hurtful.
deterred, ere, ul, itniii, deter, pre-
vent.
de-tiiieo, ere, -tinul, -tentuni, de-
tain.
deus, I, M, [9], God.
de-venio, lie, -venl, -ventum,
come, come down.
dexter, tra, truin, right.
ul, from deus.
die 6, ere, dlxl, dictum, say.
dres, el, M., day.
differo, differre, distull, dlla-
ruiii. differ, he different.
difficilis, e, difficult.
difficul tas, -tatts,*., difficulty.
dlligeiitia, ae, F., care, watchfulness.
dlmico, are, avl, atum, fight.
dl-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum, send
out ; dismiss ; let slip, lose.
dis-cedo, ere, -cessl, -cessum, de-
part, withdraw : d-ixcedere a& = leave.
discesstis, us, M., departure.
disco, ere, didicl, karn.
dis-jicio, ere, -jecl, -j ectuni, break,
scatter.
dispor go, ere, -si -sum, scatter.
dis-tiueo, ere, -tinal, -tentuni, keep
apart, keep at a distance.
diu(diutius, diiitissime), adv., long,
for a long time.
dl-vido, ere, -vlsl, -vlsum, separate,
divide.
do, dar, dedl, datum, give, grant ;
with i n fir/a m, put.
cloc-e6, ere, -Tfcl, -turn, inform,
dolus, 1, M., deoeit, eraft, cunning.
doml, adv., at home.
domicilium, I, x., home.
dono, are, avl, atum, present.
Druides, um, M. plur., the Druids (the
priests of_the Gaidg).
dubito, at-e, avl, atum, hesitate;
have doubts.
ducentl, ae, a fl9i two hundred.
duco, ere, duxl, ttuctum, lead.
dum, conj., while.
Dumnerix, -igis, M., Dunmorix (a
Gaul's name).
duo, ae, o [IS], two.
(luodecim [19], twelve.
du-plex, -plicis, double.
E
E, x"<> ex.
i'-'liic6, ere, -duxl, -duetum, lead
out.
ef-flcio, ere, -feel, -fectum, accom-
plish ; produce.
ego [IS], I.
e-grredipr, I, -gressus sum, go out ;
land, disembark.
ejsrrejSfius, a, um, remarkable.
e-jicio, ere, -jiec-l, -j return, fling out;
ge_ ejicere = rush out.
enuiitio, are, a^-I, atum, disclose.
1. eo, Ire, il (Ivl), itum [45], go,
march.
2. eo, adv., to that place, there.
eques, equitis, M., horse soldier; in
plur., eavalry.
equester, tris, tre, of cavalry, cavalry.
equitatus, us, M., cavalry.
equus, I, M., horse.
e-rumpo, ere, -rupl, -ruptum,
make a solly.
erupt-id, -ionis, v., sally, sortie.
et, and.
etiam, adv., also, even.
ctsl, although.
e-yenio, Ire, -A'enI, -ventum, turn
out, result.
evoco, are, avl, atum, challenge.
evolo, are, avl, atum, rush out.
ex, prep. w. abl., from, out of; ii'ith
nume: als, of, out of, from ; with pars,
on.
excito, are, avl, atum, stimulate.
exemplum, I, N., example.
ex-eo, -Ire, -il (-Ivl), -itum [45], go
out; x . . exeo, leave.
exercitat-io, -ionis, F., practice.
exercitus, us, M., army.
exif?ui-tas, -tati*, F., shortness.
existimo, are, avl, atum, think.
expedltus, a, um, easy.
ex-pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum, drive
out,_banish.
explora-tor, -toris, M., scout.
exploro, are, avi, atum, examine,
reconnoitre.
ex-pono, ere, -posul, -positum,
display, array ; disembark, land.
expugno, are, avl, atum, take by
storm
e-sequor,_I, -secutus sum, enforce.
exspectp, are, avl, atum, await.
ex-struo, ere, -struxl, -structum,
raise, build.
extremus, a, um, auperl. adj. [13],
farthest, last.
ex-uro, ere, -ussl, -ustum, bura up.
faber, brl, M., workman.
facile, adv., easily.
facitts, e, easy.
facio, ere, feel, factum, do, make ;
prteliumfacio, fix-ht a battle.
fact-io, -ionis, F., party.
facul-tas, -tatis. F., opportunity,
familia, ae, F., household, family.
faveo, ere, favl, fautum, favor
(ifitli dat.).
f eliciter, adv., successfully, luckily.
fere, adv., almost, about.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
317
fero, ferre, tull, latum [44], bear,
carry ; bring ; endure.
ferti'lis, e, fertile.
fidelis. e, faithful, loyal.
fides, el, F., honor, word, fidelity.
figiira, ae, F., shape.
f nia, ae, F., daughter.
fllius, I, M., son.
fin-is, -is, M.,end; in plur., territory,
territories, country, land.
f Initimus, a, uiu, neighboring, adja-
cent.
f 16, fieri, factus sum [46], be made,
be d$ne; in 3rd sing., happen, come
about.
firmo, are, avl, atum, strengthen.
firmus, a, um, powerful, strong.
fleo, ere. fleyl, fletum, weep.
florens, eiitis, flourishing, influential.
fluctus, us, M., wave.
flu-men, -minis, N., river.
fluo, ere, fluxl, fluxum, flow.
fore, the future iiiiinitice o/sum.
fortls, e,' brave.
fortiter, adv., bravely.
fortuna, ae, F., fortune, lot.
fossa, ae, F., trench, moat.
fra-ter, -tris, M., brother.
frlg-us, -oris, x., cold, frost.
frumentarius, a, um, pertaining to
grain, of grain ; rei frumentaria, pro-
visions.
frumeiitor, arl, at us sum, forage,
get provisions.
frfimentum. I, N'., grain, corn.
fusra,, ae, K., flight.
fugio, ere, fugl, fugitum, flee.
fugo, are, avl, atum, rout, put to
flight.
iuuda, ae, F., sling.
G
Galba, ae, M., Galba (a Roman's name).
galea, ae, F., helmet.
Gallia. ae, F., Gaul.
Gallieus, a, um, of Gaul, of the Gauls.
Gallus, I, M., a Gaul.
gener, erl, M., son-in-law.
gen-us, -eris, N., race ; kind, style.
Germanus, I, M., a German.
gero, ere, gessl, gestum, carry on,
do ; with hell inn, wage ; with magistra-
te, hold.
gladius. I, M., sword.
gratus, a, um, pleasing, acceptable.
STravis, e, heavy ;_ hard, bitter.
guberna-tor, -toris, M., pUot.
Helvetil, orum, M. plur., the Helve-
tians (a tribe in Gaul).
Hi'lvetius, a, um, Helvetian, of the
Helvetians.
Iial>e6, ere, ul, itum, have; hold,
regard ; ////// t'iriitiii, deliver.
hlberna orum, N., plur., winter quar-
ters, winter camp.
Hibernia, ae, F., Ireland.
lile, liaec, hoc [23], this, the following.
liiemo, are, avl, atum, pass the win-
ter, winter.
hiems, hieinis, F., winter.
hom-o, -iiiis, M., man ; in plur., people.
liora. ae, F., hour.
horridus, a, um, terrible.
host-is, -is, M. (generally in the, plur.),
enemy.
humaiii-tas, -tatis. F., refinement.
liumanus, a, um, refined, civilized.
humilis, e, low, lowly.
ibi, adv., there.
Idem, eadem, idem [23], the same.
idoneus, a, um, suitable.
Igii-is, -is, M., fire.
Ignoscd, ere, Ignovl, Ignotum,
forgive, pardon, (with dot.).
ille, Hla, illud [23], that ; he, she, it,
they.
illustris, e, distinguished.
immortalis, e, immortal.
impedlmentum, I, N., hindrance, ob-
stacle; in plur., baggage, baggage-train.
impedio, Ire, IvI, Itum, obstruct,
hinder, hamper.
im-pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum, in-
cite, instigate.
imperium, I, N., command, order; rule,
supremacy.
impero, are, avl, atum , give orders,
order, command (with dat.); require,
demand.
impetro, are, avl, atum, obtain
one's request.
impetus, us, M., attack ; fury.
imploro, are, avl, atum, entreat.
improvlsus, a, um, unforeseen ; de
itnproviso, unexpecterlly.
1. in, prep. w. ace., into, to ; at, on.
2. in, prep. w. abl., in ; on.
in-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum,
burn, set on fire.
incito, are, avl, atum, arouse, stir
up.
incognitus, a, um, unknown.
in-colo, ere, colul, dwell, inhabit.
incolumis, e, safe, in safety.
incurs-io, -ionis, F., raid, inroad.
incredibilis, e, incredible.
indul-geo, ere, -si, -turn, favor (with
dat.).
ind-uo, ere, -ul, -utum, put on.
Infer-ior, -ius, compa>: adj., lower.
Infero, Inferre iiitull, illatuin
(icith belluiii), make ; (with injuriain),
cause, do.
In-ficio, ere, feel, fectum, stain.
Inf Inltus, a, um, boundless, vast.
In-fluo, ere, -fluxl, -fluxum, flow
[into].
in-gens. -gentis, adj., huge.
inimlcuK, a, um. unfriendly, hostile,
in it him, I, N., beginning ; edge.
318
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
injuria, ac, F., wrong-doing, injury.
wrong.
inopia, ae, F., want, scarcity, dearth,
lack.
In-sequor, I, -seciitns sum, pursue.
in si dine, arum, F. plur., ambush.
Instit uo, ere, -ul, -utum, train;
levy.
In-sto, are, stitl, -statum, press for-
ward.
In-stru6, ere, -struxl, -structum,
draw up.
Insula, ae, F., island
Integer, gra, grurn, fresh.
intel-lego, ere, -lexl, -lectum, un-
derstand, be aware.
SptGr,prep...w. ace., amojigj between.
inter-cluclo, ere, -clusl, -clusum,
cut off.
inter-ficio, ere, -fed, -fectum, kill,
put to death.
interim, adv., meanwhile.
inter-ior, -ius, cr/mpar. adj., interior ;
ititeriore.*-, those living in the interior.
inter-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum,
interrupt, stop.
inter-pres, -pretis, M., interpreter.
intra, prep._ w. ace., within.
intro-duco, ere, -duxl, -duetum,
lead [inj.
inutilis, e, useless.
in-venio. Ire, -venl, -ventum, find.
ipse, ipsa, ipsum [23], -self; he him-
self.
is, ea, id [22], that ; he, she, it, they.
ita, adv., so, in such a way.
Italia, ae, F., Italy.
itaque, adv., accordingly.
item, adv., also.
iter, itineris, N., march, road, route,
journey.
J
Jacio, ere, j eel, j actum, cast.
am, adv., now, by this time.
ufoeo, ere, jussl. jussum, order.
j udico, are, avl, atuni, decide, judge,
Consider.
i umentum, I, N. , beast of burden.
utum, aid, assist.
jus, juris, jr., right.
j uvo, are, j u vl, j u
Labienus, I, M., Labienus (a Roman's
name).
lab-or, -oris, M , toil.
laboro, are, avl, atum, be in diffi-
culty, be hard pressed.
lac, lactis, N*., milk.
lacess-o, ere, -ivl, -Itum, harass, at-
tack.
lacrima, ae, F., tear.
lacus, uis, M., lake.
latitu-do, -diiiis, F., width, extent.
1. lat-us, -eris, x., side, flank.
2. latus, a, um, broad, wide, late,
adv., widely.
legat-io, -ionis, F., embassy.
leffatus, I, M., ambassador; lieutenant,
staff-officer.
leg-io, -ioiiis, F., legion.
L/emannus, I, M., Lemannus (a lake
'now called Geneva).
lenis, e, gentle, light.
leni-tas, -tatis, F., sluggishness, gentle-
ness.
levis, e, slight, trifling.
lex, legis, F., law.
1. irber, era, erum, free.
2. llberl, orum, M. plur., children.
Litaviccus, I, M., Litaviccus (ft Gaul's
name).
litterae, arum, F. plur., letter, de-
_spatch.
lit us, -oris, N., shore.
locus, 1, M. (plur. loca, orum, N.),
place, position, ground.
lon^e (longius, longissime), far.
longus, a, um, long.
loquor ; I, locutus sum, speak, say.
luna, ae, F., moon.
Lutetia, ae, F., Lutetia (a to-ivn in
Gaul).
lux, lucis, F., light; pri-ma lux, dawn,
daybreak.
M
magis, compar. adv., more, rather.
magistratus, us, M., magistrate, office.
magnitu-do, -diiiis, F., size, extent.
ma gnus, a, um, great, large.
maj-or, -us, com.par. adj., greater,
larger.
maleficium, I, N., mischief, outrage.
malo, malle malul [43], prefer, had
rather, be more willing.
maneo, ere, mansl, maiisum, re-
main, continue.
manus, us, F., hand; manu(with mu-
mtus), by art.
Marcus, I, M., Marcus (a Roman name).
mare, maris, N., sea.
maritimus, a, um, maritime, of or
on the sea.
materia, ae, F., timber, materials.
maturus, a, um, ripe; early; adv.,
mature (super!, maturrime), soon.
maxime, superl. adv., very greatly,
very much ; most.
medius, a, um, middle, midst.
memoria, ae, F., memory.
meiis-is, -is, M., month.
merca-tor, -toris, M., trader.
merldies, el, M., noon.
meus, a, um [21], my, mine.
mll-es, -itis, M., soldier.
mllitaris, e, military.
mille [16], thousand.
minime, superl. adv., least; by no
means.
niiii-or, -us, comp. ado., smaller, less.
mlror, arl, atus sum, wonder.
mlrus, a, um, wonderful.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
319
miser, era, erum, wretched; unhappy,
pitiable.
mitt 6, ere, mlsl, missum, send.
mobilis, e, fickle, capricious.
moderor, arl, atus sum, check, con-
trol.
moneo, ere, ul, itum, warn, advise.
mons, mentis, M., mountain.
mora, ae, F., delay.
MorinI, drum, M. plur., the Morini (a
tribe in Gaul).
1. morior, I, mprtuus sum, die.
2. moror, a*f, atus sum, delay, lin-
ger.
mors, mortis, F., death.
mos, moris, M., custom.
motus, us, M., movement, motion, up-
rising.
moyeo, ere, mdvl, motum, move ;
with castra-, move, break up.
multitu-do, -dinis, F., multitude,
great number.
multum, adv., much.
multus, a, um, much ; in plur., many.
munio, Ire, IvI, itum, fortify, pro-
tect.
munlt-io, -ionis, F., fortification.
in in- us, 1, M., wall.
1. nanciscor, I, iiactus (or nanctus)
sum, find, get.
2. naseor, I, natus sum, be born.
nat-io, -ionis, F , nation, race.
natura, ae, F., nature; character.
iiauta, ae, M., sailor.
nauticus, a, um, naval, pertaining to
the sea ; res nauticae, seamanship.
navigo, are, avi, atum, sail.
nav-is, -is, F., ship.
ne, lest, that not (p. 98); ne . . . qui-
dem, not even.
nee, see neque.
necessarius, a, um, critical.
neco, are, avi, atum, kill.
neg-lego, ere, -lexl, -leetum, neg-
lect, disregard.
negd, are, avi, atum, deny, say . . .
not, refuse.
nemo [54, a], no one.
nequaquam, adv., by no means.
neque (nee), and . . . not, nor; re-
peated, neither . . . nor.
Nervil, orum, M. plur., the Xervii (a
tribe in Gaul).
neuter, tra, trum [14], neither.
niliil, N., indt'clinable, nothing; al*o
<iili}., not at all
nisi, unless, except.
nobilis, e, well-born, noble.
noceo, ere, ul, injure, harm (irHl dat.).
iiolo, nolle, nolul [43], be unwilling,
not to wish.
noil, adr,., not.
nondum, not yet.
lion n u 11 1, ao a, adj. plur., some,
some few.
nonus, a, iim, ninth.
iios, plur. of ego [18], we.
noster, tra, trum, our ; nostrl, our
men.
novem, nine.
novus, a, um, new.
nox, noctis, F., night.
nudus, a, um, unprotected, bare.
nullus, a, um, no, none ; also, in rjai.
dat. and abl., no one.
numerus, I, M., number.
nunqiiam, adv , never.
nuntio, are, avi, atum, announce.
nuiitins, I, M., messenger; message,
news.
O
o"b, prep L w. ace. , on account of, for.
obseero, are, avi, atiim, beseech,
implore.
ob-ses, -siclis^M., hostage.
ob-sideo, ere, -sedl, -sessum, block-
ade, beset.
obtempero, are, avi, atum, obey,
submit to (with dat.).
ob-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum, oc-
cupy, hold, possess.
oecas-io, -ionis, F., opportunity.
occasus, us, ii., setting; solis occdsug,
sunset.
1. oc-cido, ere, -cidl, -casum, fall, be
slain._
2. oc-cido, ere, -cidl, -clsum, kill,
slay.
occultp, are, avi, atum, conceal.
occupo, are, avi, atum, seize.
oc-curro, ere, -currl, -eursiim,
meet ; oppose, check ; (irith dat.).
Ocelum, I, N., Ocelum (a town itt Ha >/
near the Alps).
ooto [16], eight.
ootodecim [16], eighteen.
octoginta [16], eighty.
oculus, I, M., eye.
officium, I, N., duty, allegiance.
omnis, e, all ; sometimes in *iny., ever}'.
on-us, -eris, N., burden, weight.
oppidum, I, N., town.
opportunus, a, um, opportune, for-
tunate.
op-primo, ere, -pressl, -pressum,
overwhelm ; bear down.
oppugno, are, avi, atum, attack.
optimus, a, um, super . m/j., b-st.
op-us, -eris, x., work; fortification.
6ra, ae, F., shore, coast; ora maritima,
the sea coast.
orat io, -ionis, F., speech, address.
or-do, (linis, M., rank.
osten-do, ere, -dl, -turn, show, point
out ; disclose, unmask.
pagus, I, M., district, canton, clan.
p.i I us, -iidis, i .. marsh.
par, paris, adj., equal, a match for.
320
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
pareo, ere, ul, itnm, be obedient,
obey (with dat.).
paro, are. avl, atum, prepare, pro-
cure ; perf. part, pans., paratus, a,
um, ready.
pars, partis, F., part.
passus, us, M., pace (about five feet;
10< H> pace* == one Rowan mile).
pate-facio, ere, -feel, -factum; pas-
sive, pate-f lo, -fieri, -factus sum
[46],_open up, keep open.
pateo, ere, ul, extend.
pa-ter, -tris, M., father.
patior, I, passus sum, suffer, allow ;
endure.
paucl, ae, a, plur. adj., few.
paulum, adv., a little.
pax, pads, F. , peace.
pecunia, ae, F., money, sum of money.
ped-es, -itis, M., foot soldier ; (in plur.)
infantry.
pedester, tris, tre, adj., of infantry ;
cupiae pedestres, infantry.
peditatus, us, M., infantry.
pell-is, is, F., skin.
pello, ere, pepull, pulsum, defeat,
rout, drive back.
per, prep. w. ace., through by means of.
per-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum,
carry, cany along, bring ; lead safely.
perfacilis, e, very easy.
per-fero. -ferre. -tull, -latum, en-
dure, submit to ; bring, report.
per-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum, finish;
can-y out.
per Icnlosus, a, um, dangerous.
perlculnm, l, N., danger.
per-maneo, ere, -mansl, -man-
sum, remain, persist, continue.
per-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum,
alarm, dismay.
permultl, ae, a, phir. adj., very main-.
per-rumpo, ere, -rupl, -ruptum,
break through, force a passage.
per-spieio, ere, -spexl, -si>ectum,
see, find out.
per-suadeo, ere, -suasl, -suasum,
persuade (with dat.).
perterreo, ere, ul, itum, terrify ; in
the passive, be panic-stricken.
pertineo, ere, ul. extend.
perturbo, are, avl, atum, throw
into confusion, disturb.
pervagor, arl, atus sum, roam,
range, scour the country.
per-venio, Ire, -venl, -ventum,
come ; per venire icith ad and ace. = reach.
pes, pedis, M. . foot ; pedem refer re (to
bear back the foot), retreat, fall back.
pet-6, ere, -IvI, -Itum, ask, seek, beg.
plial-anx, -angis, F., phalanx, solid
column.
pllum, I, x., javelin.
plenus, a, um, full.
plurimus, a, um, superl. adj., very
many, most; plurimum, adv., most,
very much.
plus, pluris [12]. more.
polliceor, erf, itus sum, promise.
poiio, ere, posul, positum. place;
(of camp), pitch ; lay down ; in pa*ic<-,
be situated.
pons, pontis, M., bridge.
populor, arl, atus sum, devastate.
populus, 1, M., nation, people.
porta, ae, F., gate.
porto, are, avl, atum, carry.
portus, us, M., harbor.
poseo, ere, poposcl, demand.
possum, posse, potul [42], with in-
jin it ice, be able, can; with adverb, be
powerful.
post, prep. w. ace., after.
postea adv., afterwards.
posterus, a, um, next, following.
postquam, conj., after.
postulo, are, avl, atum, demand,
require.
pot-ens, -entis, powerful.
potentia, ae, F., power, influence.
potes-tas. -tat is. F., power.
prae-eeps, -cipitis, steep.
praecipue, ado., especially, particu-
larly.
praeda, ae, F., plunder.
praedieo, are, avl, atum, proclaim,
state.
praedor, arl, atus sum, plunder,
raid.
prae-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum,
send in advance.
praemium, I, x., reward.
praesiditiin, l, x., garrison; protection.
prae-sto,re, -stiti, be superior, sur-
pass, excel (irith '.int.); in third *</*/ , it
is better, preferable.
prae-sum, -esse, -ful, be in command
of (with dat.).
premo, ere, pressl, pressum, press
hard ; passive, to be hard pressed.
prldie, adv., the day before.
primus, a, um, first ; prlmum, adv.,
first; qua in prlmum, as soon as pos-
sible.
prln-ceps, -cipis, M , leading man,
chief man.
prlncipatus, us, M., leadership, fore-
most place.
prlstiiius, a, um, former, old-time.
prlvatus, a, um, private.
pro, prep. w. abl., in place of; before.
probo, are, avl, atum, favor; re-
cognize.
pro cede, ere, -cessl, cessum, ad-
vance.
pro-do, ere, -didl, ditum, betraj-.
pro -duco, ere, -duxl, ductum, 'lead
forth.
proelium, I, N., battle.
pro-ficiscor, I, -feetvis sum, set out.
pro-fugio, ere, -fugl, -fugitum,
flee.
pro-gredior, I, -gressus sum, ad-
vance, proceed.
PART 111. VOCABULARY.
321
proliibeo, ere, ul, ituin, restrain,
keep.
projicio, ere, -jecl, -jeetum.
throw.
prope, ff<7r., near, nearly.
pro pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum,
drive off, dislodge.
propero, are, avl. atum, hasten.
proplnquus. a, um, near, close.
pro-poiio, ere, -posul, -positum,
display.
propter, prep. w. ace., on account of.
propterea, adv., on this account, for
this reason; (icith quod, generally not
translated),
pro-video, ere, -vlcll, -vlsum, ar-
range for, procure.
provincia, ae, F., province (in Caesar
tlij* means the southern part of Gaul).
provoco, are, avl, atum, call out,
challenge.
proximus, a, tun, xiiperl. adj., near-
est, next.
pud-or, -oris. M.. sense of shame.
puer, erl, M., boy.
puirna, ae, F.. battle, fighting.
pugno, are, avl, atum. fight.
Q
qua, adv , where.
quadra ginta [16], forty.
quaero, ere, quaeslvl, quaesl
turn, ask ; seek, look for.
quam, adv., with comparatives, than;
with fiupurlativf-s, as as possible.
quaiitus, a, um, how great, how much.
quartus. a, uni, fourth.
quattuor [16], four.
quattuordeeim [16], fourteen.
-que, conj., and (to be translated before
tlie word t<> u-hich it in added).
queror, I, questus sum. complain.
qul, quae, quod, rel. pron. [24], who,
which, what, that.
quid, neut. of quis, used as adverb,
why.
quldam, quaedam, quiddam or
quoddam [26], a certain.
quidem, adr., after /;<% even.
quliideeim [16]', fifteen
qulnjreiitl, ae. a, five hundred.
quliique [16], five.
1. quis. quae, quid, intcrrog. pron.
A ho, which, what.
2. quis (qul). qua, quid (quod),
///<//. iii-oii. [2(J], any, anyone, anything.
quisquam.quae<|ii;uM,<|uiequam
or quodquani [26], any, anyone, any-
thin-.
quisque, qnaeqae, quieque or
quotlque [26], each.
quod, '"/'.?"., licrausf.
R
rainiis, I. M.. braiTfh.
rat io, i<mi;. >.. consideration, reason;
calculation, srrau-uv; mariner.
rat-is, -is, F., raft.
rebell-io, -ionis, F., renewal of war ;
rebeUwnem facere, to renew the war.
rec-ens, -entis, recent ; unexhausted.
receptus, us, M., retreat, means of re-
treat.
reeipero, are, avl, atum. recover.
re-cipio, ere, -cepl, ceptum, re-
ceive j with se,_ betake, recover.
reeusp, are, avl, atuiii, reject.
red do, ere, didl, ditum, give back,
restore, return.
red-igo, ere, -egl, -actum, reduce,
brin^.
redit-io, -ionis, F., return.
re-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum, lead
back.
re-fero, -ferre, -tull, latnni, bring
back ; report ; carry back ; / ciiem re-
ferre, retreat, fall back.
re-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum, repair;
recruit, rest.
reg-io, -ionis, F., region, district.
regmim, 1, N., royal power, kingdom.
re jieio, ere, -jeel, -jectum, drive
back.
re-linquo, ere, -llqul, -lictum,
leave, leave behind ; abandon.
reliquus, a, um, adj., remaining, rest
of (footnote 2, page 17).
re-maneo, ere, -mansl, -mansum,
remain.
rem-ex, -igis, >i., rower.
re-mitto, ere, inlsl, -missnm, send
back.
1. RemI, drum, M. plur., the Remi (a
tribe in Gaul).
2. remus^ I, M., oar.
re inoveo, ere, -movl, motum, re^
move, withdraw.
renovo, are, avl, atum, renew.
reiiuntio, are, avl, atum, bring
back word ; in third xin<i. paxsire, word
is brought back,
repello, ere, reppull repulsum,
drive ba.ck, defeat.
repentlnus, a, um, sudden.
reperio, Ire. repperl, repertum,
find.
repet-o, ere, -ivl, -Itum, demand
back.
res, rel, F., thing, matter, affair; in-
terests.
re-scindo, ere, -scidl, -scissum,
break down, destroy.
re-sisto, ere, -stitl, resist (with
dat.).
re-spondeo, ere, -spondl, spoil
sum, reply, answer.
respul)lica, relj>nblicae, F. [9], the
state; public interests.
re-tineo, ere, -timil, -tentuni. )>rc
serve, maintain : detain.
ret u II, //-OIK refero.
1. re- \-rt<. ere, -vertl, -v'r.uiii
';/(/ flit
t, //*-.--f, rct'uni.
322
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
2. re-yertor, I, -versus sum (gener-
ally in pi-en., impf, and fut. tenses), re-
turn.
revoco, are, ayl, atum, recall.
rex, regis, M., king, chieftain.
Rhemis, I, M., the Rhine.
Bhodanns, I, M., the Rhone.
rlpa, ae, F., bank.
rogo, are, avl, atum, ask.
Romanus, I, M., a Roman.
Romanus, a, um, Roman
Sablnus, I, M., Sablnus (a Roman's
name).
sagitta, ae, F., arrow.
sal-us, -utis, F., safety.
satis-faeio, ere, -feel, -factuiii,
apologize ; make amends.
saxuin, I, N., stone.
sea la, ae, F., ladder.
scapha, ae, F., boat, yawl.
scientia, ae, F., knowledge.
scindo, ere, scidl, scissum, tear
down.
scio, Ire, IvI, Itum, know,
se, from sul.
sed, con]., but.
sedecim [16], sixteen.
senatus, us, M., senate.
sententia, ae, F., opinion.
Septimus, a, um, seventh.
septuaginta [16], seventy.
Sequaul, orum, M. plur., the Sequani
(a tribe in Gaul).
sequor, I, secutus sum, follow.
sero, ere, sevl, satum, sow.
servio, Ire, IvI, Itum, be a slave, be
subject.
servi-tus, -tutis, F., bondage, slavery,
subjection.
servo, are, avl, atum, keep.
servus, I, si., slave.
sescentl, ae, a, six hundred.
sese,/rom sul.
sex [16], six.
sexaginta [16], sixty,
si, conj., if.
sibi, from sul.
sic, so.
slgnifieat-io, -ionis, F., intimation,
announcement, signal.
slgnum, I, N'., standard; signal.
silva, ae, F., wood, forest.
silvestris, e, wooded.
similis, e, like, similar.
simul, adv., at the same time ; simul
atque, as soon as.
sine, prep. w. abl., without.
socer, erl, M., father-in-law.
socius, I, M., ally.
sol, soils, M., sun.
soleo, ere, solitus sum [68, &], be
accustomed.
sollicito, are, avl, atum, trj r to
influence, tempt, bribe, try to win
oyer.
solus, a, um [14], alone; solum, adv.,
only._
sol-vo, ere, -vl, -utum, loose ; set
sail (with or without naves as object).
spatium, I, x., space, distance.
spero, are, avl, atum, hope.
spes, spel, F., hope.
statiin, </.v., at once.
stat-uo, ere, -ul, -utum, decide.
statura, ae, F., stature.
studeo, ere, ul, pay attention.
studium, I, N., zeal, eagerness.
1. sub, prep. u\ abl., under; with monte,
at the foot of.
2. sub, prep. ic. ace., close to, close up to.
sub-eo, -Ire, -il, -itvim [45], undergo,
encounter.
subitp, a_dc., suddenly.
sub jieio, ere, -jecl, -jectum, place
close to ; in passive, lie close by.
sublatus^ from tollo.
sub-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum,
send to aid_ (w. ace. and dat.).
sub-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum,
drive off, dislodge.
subsidium, I, N., assistance, reserves,
reinforcements.
sub-venio, Ire, -venl, -ventum,
come to aid, aid (with dat.).
suc-cedo, ere, -cessl, -cessum, ap-
proach, advance.
suc-curro, ere, -currl, -cursum,
run to aid, run to the rescue of (u-it.h
dat.).
sul, sibi, se, sese [20], of himself,
themselves ; him, them.
sum, esse, ful [41], be.
1. summa, ae, F., total.
2. sum in us. a, um, superl. adj., great-
est, very great.
super-ior, -ius, compar. a dj., higher ;
former, previous, preceding.
superp, are, avl, atum, conquer,
prevail.
super-sum, -esse, -ful [41], survive.
supra, adv. and prej). w. ace., above.
sus-cipio, ere, -cepl, -ceptum, un-
dertake.
sus tiiieo, ere, -tinul, -tentum,
withstand, endure.
suus, a, um, his, his own ; their, their
own.
T
tarn, adv., so.
tamen, adv., yet.
tandem, a dr., at last, at length.
tantulus, a, um, so small.
taiitus, a, um, so great, such ; tan-
tuni, adv., so much, so far.
tego, ere, texl, tectnm, cover, con-
ceal.
telum, I, N., weapon.
tempero, are, avl. atnm, refrain;
ffi-j. />nrt. jiitxxiri' ax adj., tempera-
tus, a, um, mild.
tempes-tas, -tatis, F., storm, weather.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
323
tempto, are, avl, atum, try, tempt.
temp-ns, -oris, N., time.
ten-eo, ere, -ul, -tum, hold ; possess.
tergum, I, N., back ; terga vertere(turn
the backs), flee.
tertius, a, inn, third.
timed, ere, ul, fear, be afraid.
tim-pr, -oris, M., fear.
tollo, ere, sustull, sublatum, take
away.
totus, a, u in [14], whole.
tra-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, give up,
surrender.
tra-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum, lead
across.
trans, prep. ic. ace., across, beyond.
trans-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum,
lead across.
trans-eo, -Ire, -il (-IvI), -itum, cross.
transit u S,_IIR, M., passage, crossing.
transporto, are, avl, atuni, carry
over, bring over.
trecentl, ae, a, three hundred.
tres, triii [16], three.
tribunus, I, M., tribune (a military
officer among the Romans).
trjgiiita [16J, thirty.
triquetrus, a, um, triangular.
tu [19], you.
tuba, ae, v., trumpet.
turma, ae, F., squadron.
turpis, e, disgraceful.
turr-is, -is, F., tower.
tuus, a, run, your.
U
ubi, adv. , when ; where.
Ubil, orum, M. plur., the Ubii (a, Ger-
man tribe).
ulciscor, I, ultus sum, punish,
u i his, a, um [14], any.
ulter-ior, -ius, compar. adj. , further ;
tilt entires, those more remote.
unde, adv., whence, from which.
undique, adv., from all sides, on every
side.
uii us, a, um [14], one ; alone.
urbs, urbis, F., city.
urgeo, ere, ursl, press hard ; i)a*sir<>,
to be hard pr< >>.< I.
usus, us, M., experience; advantage,
use.
ut, con}., with indie., as; with subj., that,
so that, in order that.
liter, tra, truin [14], which (oft wo).
nterque, utraque, utrnmque [26],
each (of two), both.
utilis, e, useful.
vaco, are, avl, atum, be unoccupied,
lie waste.
vacuus, a, um, empty.
vadum, I, N., ford.
valeo, ere, ul, itum, be influential,
be strong, be powerful.
1. vall-es, -is, F., valley.
2. vallum, I, N., wall, rampart.
vasto, are, avl, atum, lay waste.
vel, conj . , _or ; repeated, either . . or.
vel-ox, -ocis, swift, active.
Venetl, orum, M. plur., the Veneti (a
tribe in Gaul).
venia, ae, F., pardon.
venio, Ire, venl, veiitum, come.
ventito, are, avl, atum, come often.
ventus, I, M., wind.
Vercingetor-ix, -igis, M., Vercinge-
torix (a Gallic noble).
vereor, erl, veritus sum, fear.
vero, ado., in fact ; but, moreover.
ver-to, ere, -tl, sum, turn.
vester, tra, trum, your.
vestio, Ire, IvI, Itum, clothe.
vet-6, are, -ul, -itum, forbid, order
. . . not.
vetus, veteris, old.
vexillum, I, N. , banner (a red banner
was the signal for battle).
via, ae, F., road, way.
victoria, ae, F., victory.
vlctus, us, M., life, living.
vlcus, I, M., village.
video, ere, vldl, vlsum, see, per-
ceive ; in passive, be seen ; seem.
vigilia, ae, F., watch.
vlgintl [16], twenty.
1. vincio, Ire, vinxl, viiictum, bind.
2. vinco, ere, vlcl, victum, conquer.
vir, y irl, M. , man.
vir-tus, -tutis, F., valor, bravery.
vis, vim, vl, plur. vires [9]', force,
violence ; plur., powers, strength.
v it rum, I, N., woad (a plant).
vivo, ere, vlxl, victum, live.
vix, adv., scarcely.
voco, are, avl, atum, call, summon.
volo, velle, volul [43], wish, be will-
ing.
volup-tas, -tatis, F., pleasure.
Volusenus, I, M., Volusenus^a Roman's
name).
Vorenus, I, M., Vorenus (a Roman's
name).
vbs [19], you.
vulnero, are, avl, atum, wound.
vnln-us, -eris, N., wound.
324
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
II. ENGLISH-LATIN.
N.B. Words in parentheses should not be used in the translation of
exercises in Part I.
abandon, pro-do, ere, -didi, -ditum.
ability, ingenium, 1, N.
able, be, possum, posse, potul. (IIT.
42).
abound in, abundo, are, avl, atuni, u:
all.
1. about (= concerning), de, prep. w. abl.
2. about, with numerals, circiter, adv.
3. about, to be to, use the fut. part.
active with sum.
absent, absens, absentis.
accept, ac-cipio, ere, -cepi, -ceptum.
acclivity, acclivi-tas, -tatis, F.
accomplish, pro-ficio, ere, -fed, -fee-
turn.
accomplishments, humani-tas, -tatis,
F. (in the ting.).
accordance, in with, pro, prc2>. u:
abl.
according to, in I., Ex. 58, use abl. of
manner.
account, on of, propter, prep. u\ ace.
1. accustomed, be, consuevl, isse
(perfect tenses of c-onsuesco).
2. accustomed, become, con-sues-
co, ere, -suevi.
acquainted, become with, co-
gnosce, ere, -gnovi, -gnitum, iv. ace.
acquit, ab-solvo, ere, -solvi, -solutum.
1. across, trans, prep. w. ace.
2. across, lead, trans-duco.ere, -duxi,
-ductum.
action, course of, res, rel, F.
actual, >i*e re vera, = in fact.
added, to l>e ,~thirrl .<//*//. vet; re. nf
ac-cudo, ere, -cessl, -cessum.
ad j acent, flnitimus, a, urn.
Aduatuci, Aduatuci, drum, M.
1. advance, pro-cedo, ere, -cessl, -oes-
sum ; pro-gredior, I, -gressus sum ; fsigna
fero, ferre, tull, latum].
2. advance, noun, adventus, fis, >i.
3. advance, send in , prae-mitto,
ere, -nils!, -missuni.
4. advance guard, prlimim agmen
(agminis, N.).
1. advantage, usus, us, M.
2. advantage', take of, utor, I, usus
sum, w. abl.
3. advantage, to any , satis com-
mode, adi:
advice, ask of, consul-6, ere, -ui,
-turn, u\ ace.
Aedui, Aedul, drum, M.
affair, res. rel, F.
1. after, prep., post, u: ace.
2. after, conj., postquam, cum ; or use
perfect participle in aom. or abl. absol.
afterwards, postea.
again, rursus.
against, in, prep. ic. ace. ; n-ith contcn-
do, ad, w. ace. ; with bellum gero, cum,
w. abl.
agency, through the- of, per, prep.
w. ace.
agree, con-sentio, Ire, -sensi, -sensum.
1. aid, verb, juvo, are, juvl, jutiim, ii\
ace. ; [suc-curro, ere, -curri, -cursum, u\
dat.l
2. aid, noun., auxiliuin, I, x. ; [subsidium,
I, N.].
3. aid, come to of, auxilio venire, w.
dat.
4. aid, go to -of, auxilio eo, ire, ii (Ivi),
itum, w. dat.
r>. aid, send to of , auxilio mitto, ere,
mis!, missum, . dat. and ace.
alarm, per-moveo, ere, -movi, -motum ;
com-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum.
alertness, dlligentia, ae, F.
Alesia, Alesia, ae, F.
all, omnis, e.
allegiance, ofticium, I, N.
Allobroi>vs, Allobroges, urn, M.
1. allow, patior, I, passus sum.
2. allowed, be , licet, licere, licuit,
i'lHpcrxnnril '. it((t.
ally, socius, 1, M.
almost, paene.
alone, solus, a, um ; imus, a, um. (III.
14.)
already, jam. a>1>:
although, etsl : [quamquam, quamvis].
amaxed, be at, admlror, an, atus
snni, ili'/xm/'iit, ir . ace.
ambassador, logatus, T, M.
amlxish, Tusidiac, rtruni, F., /// }>lnral
iiiihl.
among, inter, prep. w. ace.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
325
amongst, >n IT., E.r. 13, use the <latii;>.
ancestors, infijr.i-c^. nin, M.
1. anchor, weigh, -set sail.
2. anchor, at-, in ancorls.
and, et, -que, atque, ac.
angry, be with, iniscor, I, iratus
sum, ?r. dat.
announce, nuntio, are, avl, atum.
1. another, alius, a, ud. (III. 14).
2. another, one, ini
1. answer, verb, re-spondeo, ere, -spon-
di, -sponsum.
2. answer, noun, respOnsum, I, x.
3. answer, give (<// make) , = er/i-
su-er, verb.
1. any, ullus, a, urn (III. 14); [after *,
qui (qui*), qua, quod] :
of, qulv!?, quaevls, quid vis or quodvls.
2. any one, quisciuaiu ; with a negative
rise nmo=no <>n? ; [aft< r s7, quis]. (III.
26).
8. anything, ulla res, quidquam ; [after
*', quid].
anxiety, without, aequo animo.
apart, keep, dis-tineo, ere, -tinul,
-tentuin.
apologi/e. satis-facio, ere, -fed, -factum.
appearance, figiira, ae, F.; [species, el,
F. : aspect us, us, M.]
apprised, become of, co-gnosco,
ere, -gnovi, -gnitum, v:. ace.
1. ;ipproacli. ' / 1 >, ac-cedo, ere, -cessi,
-cessum ; [approplnquo, are, avl, atum,
ic. dat.].
2. approach, nnim, adventus, us, M. ;
[ = nteanx <>j appmncli, aditus, us, M. ; or
:-eo, -Ire, -il, -hum].
approval, consewe _is, us, M. '
several persons) ; [volun-tas, -tatis, F.]
April, Aprilis, e, adj.
Arar, Arar, Araris, M.
Ardennes, Arduenna, ae, r.
ardor, studium, I, N*.
Ariovistus, Ariovistus, T, >r.
arise, co-orior, M, -ortus sum.
armed, armatus, a, urn.
Arminius, Armiiiius, 1, M.
armor, anna, drum, x.. in plur. only.
arms, anna, orum, x., //( plur. only.
army, exercitus, us, M.
arouse, confirmo, are, ;T\ I, atum.
arrange, constit-uo, ere, -ul, -utum.
arrangement, res, re!, F.
arrival, adventus, us, M.
arrow, sagitta, ae, F.
artillery, tonnenta, orum, N., plur.
1. as = since, cum.
2. as, after Idem, <jul, quae, quod.
3. a.8 = ichile, dum, or use present par-
ticiple.
' ;i* ablated;
i-iin.--ltive or dative of purpose.
5. as soon as, simul atque.
r>. as as possible, quam with superl.
1. as to, */.- '/> ; i,'nitir, .
ascend, ascendo, ere, ascend!, ascensum.
ascertain, cu-gnosco, ere, -gnovi, -gni-
tuni.
ashamed, be , pudet, impersonal.
1. aside, lay, de-pono, ere, -posul,
-positum.
2. aside, turn-, a-verto, ere, -vertl,
-versum.
1. a-k (of making a request), peto, ere,
1'ietlvi, petltum ; rogo, are, avl, atum.
1. ask" (of asking a ijm'ttioii), quaero,
ere, quaesivl, quaesltum ; rogo, are, avT,
iltum.
'.j. ask for, peto, ere, petlvl, petltum,
ic. ace.
4. ask advice of, consul -6, ere, -ul,
-turn, "'. (!>.
assailant, ute present participle of ag-
gredior, 1.
assemble (intransitive), con-venio, Ire,
-venl, -ventum.
assembly, concilium 1, x.
assist, juvo, are, juvl, jutum, u\ ace.
1. assistance, auxilium, l, x.
2. assistance, go to of, auxilio eo,
Ire, il (ivl), itum, w. dat.
3. assistance, send to of, auxilio
mitto, ere, misl, missum, u\ dat. and
ace.
asylum, perfugium, I, x. ; find an
in, perfugio utor, 1, usus sum, ic. abl.
1. at, of time when, use abl. without prep.
2. at, of place u-here, u.*e locative, or in
and abl.
3. at, after conjicid-hurl, in, u: ace.
4. at once, statim. adv.
5. at, in porow throw oneself at feet,
ad, ir. ace.
Athens, Athenae, arum, F., in plur.
<mbi.
1. attack, c?rb, (of places), oppugno, are,
avl, atum ; (of inen), ag-gredior, I, -gres-
sus sum ; ad-orior, In, -ortus sum ; im-
l^etum facere in, w. ace.
2. attack, noun, impetus, vis, M. [In
If., Ex. 32, use proeYmm=battle.]
1. attempt, verb ( = try, w. infinitive).
conor, arl, atus sum; [( = make an at-
tempt on), tempto, are, avl, atum].
2. attempt, make an-, conor, art,
atus sum.
August. Augustus, a, um.
Augustus, Augustus, I, M.
auxiliary, auxiliar-is, -is, M. ; in II r
Ex. '', *<' thf plural.
1. avenge, ulciscor, I, ultus sum,
2. avenge oneself on (or upon),.
ulciscor, 1, ultus sum, u\ ace.
await, exspecto, are, avl, atum.
away, take-, tollo, ere, sustull, sul>-
latum.
* The person who is asked is with rnnn in the ace., with peto in the abl. with ah.
with ftaero in the abl. with ex or alt.
326
PRIMAKY LATIN BOOK.
back, tergum, I, N.
baggage, baggage animals, im-
pedimenta, orum, N., plur.
band, manus, us, F.
bank, npa, ae, F.
bar, talea, ae, F.
barbarian, barbarus, I, M.
battalion, cohor-s, -tis, F.
1. battle, proelium, i, N. ; piigna, ae, F.
2. battle array, line of battle,
acies, el, F.
bay, driven hopelessly to, in
extrema spe salutis.
be, sum, esse, ful ; to express distance, use
absum, abes.se, aful.
1. bear, fero, ferre, tuli, latum. (III. 44.)
2. bear on, fero, ferre, tull, latum.
beat a retreat, se re-cipio, ere, -cepi,
-ceptum.
beaten, victus, a, um.
because, quod.
become, flo, fieri, factus sum. (III. 46.)
1. before, prep, (of time), ante, w. ace.;
(of 'place) pro, w. abl.; ( near) apud, w.
ace. ; (with summon) ad, w. ace.
2. before, conj., antequam, priusquam.
1. begin, incipio, ere ; for the perfect
tenses, use coepl, isse, coeptus sum.
2. begin battle, proelium com-mitto,
ere, -misi, -missum.
behalf , on of, pro, prep. w. abl.
behead, seciirl ferio, ire, Id, ictum ( =
ttnki' with an axe).
behind, from, use ex, w. abl. =from.
behold, video, ere, vldl, visum.
Belgians. Belgae, arum, M. plur.
belie ve, cre-do, ere, -didl, -ditum, w. dat.
benioan, miseror, an, atus sum.
bent, become, se in-flecto, ere, -flexl,
-flexum. ,
beseech, Qro, are, avi, atum ; imploro,
are, avi, atum.
beset, ob-sideo, ere, -sedl, -sessum.
1. best, optimus, a, um.
2. best armed, ornatissimus, a, um.
bestoAv upon, dono, are, avi, atum, w.
dat.
1. betake, re-cipio, ere, -cepl, -ceptum.
2. betake oneself to flight, se fugae
mandare, (mando, are, avi, atum).
1. better, mel-ior, -ius.
2. better, it is, praestat, are, imper-
sonal.
betray, pro-do, ere, -didl, -ditum.
1. between, inter, prep. w. ace.
2. between, be, inter-cedo, ere, -cessi,
-cessum, with inter and ace.
beyond, trans, prep. w. ace.
BibractCj Bibracte, is, N.
bind, vin-cio, Ire, -xl, -ctum ; [figura-
tively, ob-stringo, ere, -strinxl, -strlc-
tum].
bitter, gravis, e.
boast of, glorior, art, atus sum, w. abl.
boats, bridge of, naves junctae.
Boii, Boil, orum, M. plur.
boldly, audacter.
boldness, audacia, ae, F.
bondage, servi-tus, -tutis, F.
1. border, noun, initium, I, x.
2. border ( = hemin), contineo, ere.
born, natus, a, um.
1. both . . . and, et . . . et.
2. both, uterque, utraque, utrumque.
(III. -2(j.)=each.
3. both, on sides, utrimque.
bough, ramus, I, .M.
boundary, form line between,
separate.
bow, arcus, us, M. ; [abl. plur., arcubusj.
boy, puer, en, M.
branch, ramus, I, M.
brave, fortis, e.
bravely, fortiter.
bravery, vir-tus, -tutis, F. ; [fortitu-do,
-dinis, F. ; or use clause quid virtute
possint, etc,].
1. break down, re-scindo, ere, -scidl,
-scissum.
2. break up camp, castra moveo, ere,
movl, motum.
bridge, pons, ppntis, M.
Brigantes, Brigantes, um, M. plur.
brilliant, praeclarus, a, um.
1. bring, fero, ferre, tuli, latum.
2. bring (followed by across), tra-duco,
ere, -duxl, -ductum.
3. bring back ( = lead back), re-duco,
ere, -duxl, -ductum; ( = carry back), re-
-fero, -ferre, -tuli, -latum.
4. bring word, nuntio, are, avi, atum.
5. bring back word, renuntio, are,
avl.'fitum.
6. bring in ( collect), coinporto, are,
avi, atum ; ( import) importo, are, avi,
atum.
7. bring up the rear, agmen claudo,
ere, clausi, clausum.
8. bring together, comporto, are,
avi, atum ; confero, conferre, contull,
collatum.
Britain, Britannia, ae, F.
1. British, = of the Britons.
2. British Isles, = Britain.
Briton, Britannus, I, M.
broad, latus, a, um.
bronze, aes, aeris, N.
brother, fra-ter, -tris, M.
Brutus, Brutus, I, M.
buffetting, contumelia, ae, F.
build, aedifico, are, avi, atum ; [facio,
ere, feel, factum].
building, aedificium, I, N.
burden, onus, oneris, x.
1. burn, in-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum.
2. burn up, com-buro, ere, -bussi, -bus-
turn.
burst in, ir-rumpo, ere, -rupl, -ruptum.
business, negotiuin, I, N.; res, rel, F.
1. but, sed.
2. but, =who not, quln.
buy up, co-emo, ere, -emi, -emptum.
by, a, ab, prep. w. abl.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
327
Caesar, Caes-ar, -aris, M.
1. call ( = summon), voco, are, avi. atum;
( = name). appello, are, avi, atum; no-
mino, are, avi, atum.
2. call together, convoco, are, avi,
atum.
camp, castra, orum, N., inplur. only.
campaigner, old, > the phrase mag-
num in castrls usum habere.
camp-follower, cal-6, -onis, M.
can, possum, posse, potul. (III. 42).
capable, be of, possum, posse,
potul.
captive, captlvus, I, M.
capture, capio, ere, cepl, captum.
Caractacus, Caractacus, I, M.
care ( = carefulness), dlligentia, ae, P.;
[( = object of concern), cum, ae, F.].
carefully, diliirenter.
1. carry, fero, ferre, tull, latum (III. 44);
(of carrying a report), per-fero, -ferre,
-tull, -latum.
2. carry off, ab-duco, ere, -duxl, -due-
turn.
3. carry on, gero, ere, gessl, gestum.
4. carry out, con-ficio, ere, -fed, fee-
turn.
carry over, transports, are. avi, atum.
Cartismaiidua, Cartismandua, ae, F.
case, since (or although) this is
the , quae cum ita sint.
Cassius, Cassius, I, M.
1. cast (=throw headlong), praecipito,
are, avi, atum.
2. cast reproach in one's teeth, ob-
jicio, ere, -jecl, -jestum, w. dat. and
ace., = impute to one.
Casticus, Casticus, i, M.
cattle, pec-us, -oris, x.
1. cause, noun, causa, ae, F.
2. cause, verb, euro, are, avi, atum, icith
gerundir,'.
caution, with, caute ; with the
greatest, use xuperl.
1. eaxalry, noun, equitatus, us, M. (in
.<inij.); equltes, urn, -M. (inplur.).
cavalry, adj., equester, tris, tre.
3. cavalry-man, equ-es, -itis, M.
census, census, us, M. ; take the,
censum habeo, ere, ul, itum.
centre, use adj. medius, a, um.
centurion, centuri-d, -onis, M.
1. certain ( = .sv, ,m>), (juldam, quaedam,
quiddam or (juoddam. (III. 2G)
2. certain (= fixed), certus, a, um.
chain, vinculum, T, x. ; [catena, ae, F.].
challenge, evoco, are, avi, atum.
1. change, commutftt-io, -ioiiis, K.
2. change, political, novae res, F.
plur.
character, of such a, tails, e, adj.
Cliarlt-s. Carolns, I, M.
1. chief, iirln-ci-ps, -ci]>is, M.; regnlus,
1, M.
2. chief man, i>rm-cv]>s, -cipis, M.
3. chief power, regnum, I, N.;imper-
ium. I, N.
chiefly, maxime.
children, llberl, orum, M.
choose, de-ligo, ere, -legl, -lectum.
choosing, of his own , use the verb
deligo (choose).
chosen, delectus, a, um; electus, a, urn.
circumstance, res, rel, F.
citizen, civ-is, -is, M.
citizenship, clvi-tas, -tatis, F
city, urbs, urbis, F.
clemency, dementia, ae, F.
cliff, mons, montis, M.
1. close, verb, claudo, ere, clausl, clau-
sum.
2. close, be at hand, ad-sum, -esse,
-ful.
closely, anguste.
coast, ora, ae, F.
cohort, cohor-s, -tis, F.
collect (=get together), cogo, ere, coegl,
coactum ; [col-ligo, ere, -legl, lectum] ;
(=summon together), convoco, are, avi,
atum ; ( = carry to one place), conf ero,
conferre, contull, collatiun.
1. color (=hue), col-or, -oris, M.
2. colors (= standard), aquila, ae, F. ; sig-
num, I, N T .
combat, use gerund of pugno, are.
combatants, pugnant-es, -ium, M.
1. come, venio, Ire, veni, ventum.
2. come often, ventito, are, avi, atum.
3. come together, con-venio, Ire, -veni,
-ventum.
4. come up with, con-sequor, I, -secii-
tus sum, w. ace.
1. command, verb, impero, are, avi,
atum, ic. dat. of person, ace. of thing.
2. command ( = military power), noun,
imperium, I, N. ; (= order given), imper-
atum, I, N.
3. command, have of, be in, be
at head of , prae-sum, -esse, -fui, w.
dat.
4. command, hief , summa(ae, F.)
imperil.
commander, impera-tor, -toris, M.
common, communis, e.
communication, hold-, col-loquor,
I, -locutus sum.
compare, comparo, are, avi, atum.
compel, cogo, ere, coegl, coactum.
complain, queror, I, questus sum.
complaint, make , queror, I, questus
sum.
1. complete, verb, con-ficio, ere, -feel,
-fectum.
2. complete, "<//'., certissimus, a, um.
comrade, their comrades, sul,
orum, M., plur.
conceal, oc-culto, are, avi, atum ; [celo,
are, avi, atum).
1. concerns, it , interest ; refert. (II.
63.)
2. concerned, so far as . . . . is ,
per, /in-/,, if. ,i,;-.
328
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
concerning, do, prep. w. all.
conclude ( = make), faeio, ere, fed, fac-
tuin.
condition, eondic-io, -iunis, v.
confer upon, de-fero, -ferre, -tull, -la-
tum, w. dat.
conference, colloquium, l, x.
confidence, fiducia, ae, F.
confine, con-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum.
1. confusion, tumultus, us, M.
2. confusion, throw into , pertur-
bo, are, avl, atum.
conquer, yinco, ere, vlcl, victum ; su-
pero, are, avl, atum.
consider, existimo, are, avl, atum.
Considius, Cunsidius, I, M.
conspire, conjuro, are, avl, atum.
consternation, throw into state
of , perturbo, are, avl, atum.
consul, consul, consulis, M.
consulship, in the of , use consul in
the abl. absolute.
1. consult, consul-6, ere, -ui, -turn, .
ace.
2. consult (or consult for) inter-
ests (welfare) of, consul-6, ere, -ui,
-turn, w. dat.
contest (-battle), certa-men, -minis, x.,
pugna, ae, F. ; ( = war), bellum, T, x.
continent, contin-ens, -entis, F.
continually, continenter.
continue, maneo, ere, mansl, mansum.
convenient, idoneus, a, um.
conversation, serm-6, -onis, M.
1. converse, loquor, I, locutus sum.
2. converse, hold, loquor, I, locutus
sum.
1. corn, frumentum, 1, N.
2. corn, supplies of, res frumen-
taria. F. (use the si no.).
cost, con-sto, are, -stitl, -statum, iv. abl.
Cotta, Cotta, ae, M.
council, concilium, 1, x.
country ( = land), ager, agri, M. ; fin-es,
-ium, M. plur.; ( = rjround), locus, I, M. ;
(= state), respublica, reTpublicae (III. 9);
(=native country}, patria, ae, F. ; ( =
rural districts), rus, runs, N.
courage, vir-tus, -tutis, F.
1. course, cursus, us, M.
2. course of action, res, rei, F.
cover ( = complete), con-ficio, ere, -feel,
-fectum.
coivard, Tgnavus, T, M
cowardice, T.L'navia, ae, F.
cowed, perterritus, a, um.
1. cross, verb, trans-eo, -Ire, -ii (-Tvl),
-itum.
2. cross, adj. ( = oblique), trilnsversus, a,
um.
crossing, effect a , trans-eo, -Ire, -ii
(Ivl), -itum.
cruelty, crudcli-tas, -tatis, F.
crush, frango, ere, fregl, fractum.
curiosity, studium, 1, N.; or use studeo,
ere, ui ( to be eager).
custom, consuetu-do, -dinis, F.; mos,
moris, M.
cut off (^intercept or shut off), inter-
cludo, ere, -clusT, -clusum ; ( = kill), inter-
ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum.
danger, perlculum, 1, x.
dangerous, perlculosus, a, um.
dare, audeo, ere, ausus sum. (III. G8, b.)
daring, rise phrase what they dare.
dark-blue, caeruleus, a, um.
dart, telum, 1, x.
date, the of, use clause with quando,
( = when^.
daughter, filia, ae, F.
day, dies, el, M.
daybreak, prim a lux, lucis, F.
deal (Q/' injlicting wounds), mfero, in-
ferre, intull, illatum ; (of causing death),
use inter-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum, -slay.
dear, carus, a, um.
1. death, mors, mortis, F.
2. death, put to, inter-ficio, ere,
-feel, -fectum.
decide (form a resolve), constit-uo, ere,
-ul, -utum ; (=form an opinion), judico,
are, avl, atum ; ( = of deciding a victory),
pario, parere, peperl, partum.
declaration of Avar ( ivar declared).
declare ( = assert), confirmo, .are, avl,
atum ; (=make known), prdnuntio, iire,
avl, atum; ( = of declaring war), in-died,
ere, -dlxl, -dictum.
deed, factum, 1, x.
deep, altus, a, um.
1. defeat, verb, repello, ere, reppull, re-
pulsum.
2. defeat, noun, proelium advez'sum, x. ;
[calami-tas, -tatis, F.].
1. defence, munlmentum, I, x.
2. defence, in face of , use verb re-
sisto, ere, restitl (= resist), or de-fendo,
ere, -fendl, -fensum (= defend).
defend, de-fendo, ere, -fendl, -fensum.
defer, super-sedeo, ere, -sedl, -sessum,
iv. abl.
dejection, tristitia, ae, F.
delay, moror, arl, atus sum.
delightful, jucundus, a, um.
demand, impero, are, avl, atum ; posco,
ere, poposci.
dense, densus, a, um.
deny, nego, are, avl, atum.
1. depart, dis-cedo, ere, -cessl, -cessum.
2. depart this life = dit.
1. departure, discessus, us, M.; [pro-
fect-io, -ionis, F.].
2. departure, take one's, dis-cedo,
ere, -cessl, -cessum ; pro-ficiscor, 1, -fee-
tus sum.
deprive, despolio, are, avl, atum ; [of
expressed by abl.].
depth, altitu-do, -dinis, F.
desert, destit-uo, ere, -ui, -utum
design, consilium, I, N.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
329
desire, eup-io, ere, -!vl, -Ituin.
destroy, re-seindo, ere, -scidl, -scissuni.
destruction, pernk-ies, el, p.
detain, re-tineo, ere, -tinui, -tentum.
deter, deterreo, ere, uT, ituiu.
1. determine ( = rewlve), constit-uo,
ere, -ul. -f.tum.
2. determine ( = lead, induce), ad-duco,
ere, -duxl, -due-turn.
die, morior, morl, mortuus sum ; vita (or
e vita) dOeedere (r exr edere).
differ, differo, differre, distull, dllatum.
different, alius. a, ud; in different
directions, =sonie in one direction,
others in another. (II. 185.)
difficult, ditficilis, e.
1. difficulty, dirticul-t-is, tatis, P.
2. difficulty, with, vix, adv.
3. difficulty, with the greatest,
aegerrime, adr.
4. difficulty, without, facile, adv.
direct ( = order), imperu, are, avl, atum,
w. dat.
1. direction, pars, partK F.
2. directions, from all, undique,
adr.; or use pars (= quarter).
3. direction, in what, quam in par-
ten i.
disappointed in, dejectus, a, inn,
w. abl.; repulsus, a, um, w. ab and abl.
disaster, calami-tas, -tatis, F.
discharge, fungor, 1, functus sum, w.
abl.
disclose, osten-do, ere, -dT, -turn.
disconcert, oom-moveo, ere, -movl, -mo-
tuin.
discover, c6-gnosc6, ere, -gnovi, -gni-
tum ; reperio, ire, repperl, repertum.
discretion, surrender at, use the
phrase se suaque omnia potestatl per-
mittere.
disembark, ex mivibus e-gredior (I,
-gressus sum).
disgrace, turpitu-do, -dinis, F.
disgraceful, turpis, e.
dislodge, pr5-pelld, ere, -pull, -pulsum.
dismay, per-moveo, ere, -movl, -motum.
dismiss, di-mitto, ere, -mlsi, -missuiu.
dispel, ex-pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum.
display, prae-sto, are, -stitl.
displease, dis-pliceo, ere, -plicul, -plici-
tum, >''. dfit.
1. disposition, animus, I, M.
2. disposition, merciful, demen-
tia, ae, K.
1. distance, spatium, I, N\
1. distance, at a , procul, a<l>\
'.i. distance, at a of, a or ab, //'. abl.
.4. <listance, from a , uminus. adv.
distant, be, absum. abesse, afui.
distress, be in, laboro, are, avl,
atutn.
distribute, distrib-uo, ere, -uT, utuin.
district, rc^-io, -ionis, v.
disturb, pcrturbo, are, fivl, atum ; [com-
mo\ e5, ere, -movl, motuni].
ditch, fossa, ae, F.
divide, dT-vido, ere, -vlsl, -vlsum.
do, facio, ere, fed, factum ; ( = ctt rr>/ on),
gero, ere, gessi, yestum.
double, duplex, duplicis.
1. doubt, verb, dubito, are, avT, atum.
2. doubt, noun, dubitat-io, -ionis, F.
3. doubt, there is no, non est
dubium ( = it ?V not doubtful).
draught animal, jiunentum, T, N.
1. draw (of drawing a sword), de-
strin<;-':), ere, -strinxT, -strlctum.
2. draw near, = approach.
3. draw out, e-vello, ere, -velil, -vulsum.
4. draw r up, In-struo, ere, -struxl,
-structum.
1. drive ( = urge on), im-pello, ere, -pull,
-pulsum ; ( = drive back), repello, ere,
reppuli, repulsuin ; (of driving head-
long), ag-o, ere, egl, actum.
2. drive back, repello, ere, reppuli,
repulsum ; re-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jectum.
3. drive off, sub-moved, ere, -movl,
-motum.
4. drive out, e-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jectum.
drown, be drowned by shouts,
cannot be heard for shouts, see II. 232, d.
Dumnorix, Dumnor-ix, -igis, M.
during, use ace. of time hoir long.
duty, mun-us, -eris, N. ; do duty, offi-
cium (I, N.) prae-sto, are, -stitl.
dwell, in-colo, ere, -colul, -cultum.
dying words, see II. 236.
E
each (of two), uterque, utraque, utrum-
que ; (of more than tiro), quisque, quae-
que, quidque or qupdque [26].
1. eager, alacer, cris, ere.
2. eager, be most , studeo, ere, ul.
eagerly, cupide.
eagerness, alacri-tas, -tatis, F.
eagle, aquila, ae, F.
early, maturus, a, um.
earnestly, magnopere.
easily, facile.
easy, facilis, e.
eat, vesc-or,! (ivith abl.).
edge, the water's-, llt-us, -ons, N.
(= shore).
eight, octo.
eighteen, duodevlgintl ; octodecim ;
decem et octo.
eighth, octavus, a, um.
eighty, octoginta.
elect, creo, are, avl, atum.
elections, comitia, orum, x.
eleventh, undecimus, a, um.
Elizabeth, Elisabetha, ae, F.
eloquence, to the spirit and elo-
quence of the chief, .?/ "to the
chief earnestly encouraging- (them)."
else, alius, a, ud.
embark, naves con-scendo, ere, -scendl,
-sc-'iisum.
embassy, IC-gat-io, -ionis, p.
emergency, in case of, say if
there should be need of anything.
330
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
encamp, <-<"MI-SK.II., t-rr, .-li, s,-um.
encourage, cohortor, arl, atus sum.
end, fin-is, -is, JJ.
endure ( = tolerate), patior, I, passus
sum; (^withstand), per-fero, -ferre,
-tul!,' -latum.
enemy, host-is, is, M. (usually in the
plur.).
1. engage, com-mitto, ere, -misl, -mis-
sum.
2. engage in, versor, arl, atus sum, u\
in a ad abl.
3. engage with, con-fllgo, ere, -fllxi,
-flictum, U'. cum and abl.
1. engagement, proelium, 1, N.
2. engagement, during the, =
white. fighting.
engine, tormentum, I, x.
English, BritannT, orum.
enjoy, fruor, I, fructus sum (w. abl.).
enquire, quuero, ere, quaesivl, quaesi-
tum.
enrol, con-scrlbo, ere, -scrips!, -scrip-
turn.
enterprise, res, rel, F.
enthusiasm, with shouts of en-
thusiasm, use the phrase magnavoce.
entirely, use totus, a, uin, adj.
entrust, com-mitto, ere, -uilsl, -missum.
envoy, legatus, I, M.
1. equal, verb, adaequo, are, avl, atum.
2. equal, adj., par, paris.
equip, anno, are, avl, atum ; orno, are,
avl, atum.
escape, e-labor, I, -lapsus sum; ef-fugio,
ere, -fugl, -fugitum.
escort, praesidium, I, K.
especial, use praecipue = especially.
establish, confirmo, are, avl, atum ;
[of establishing a precedent, Instit-uo,
ere, -ul, -utumj.
evade, vlto, are, avl, atum.
even, etiam ; not even, ne . . . qui-
dem; even if, etiam si.
1. ever ( = always), semper.
2. ever, for - , in perpetuum.
1. every, omnis, e ; [quisque, quaeque,
quidque or quodque = each],
2. every one, omnes, plur., or quisque,
sing., -each.
every tiling, omnia ; omnes res.
example, exemplum, I, x.
excel, prae-cedo, ere, -cessi, -cessum.
excellently, egregie.
execute, inter-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum.
exercise (--xttoiv), utor, I, usus sum.
exhil)it, utor, I, usus sum.
exhort, hortor, arl, atus sum.
expect, exspecto, are, avl, atum.
experience, usus, us, M.
extend, pertineo, ere, ul.
1. extent, magnitu-do, -dinis, P.
2. extent, of great , magrms, a, um.
extremely, maxime (or use the superl.
degree).
extremity of, n,- adj. extrC-mus, a,
um.
1. face, in the of, use the abl. absol.
2. face, put a brave on, vultum
fingo, ere, finxl, flctum.
fail, de-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum.
faithful, fidelis, e ; [fldus, a, um].
faithfully, fideliter ; summa fide.
1. fall, verb, cado, ere, cecidl, casum ;
[con-cido, ere, -cidl, -casum].
2. fall, allow to fall into hands
of, pro-do, ere, -didi, -ditum (let ruin.
3. fall, noun, mors, mortis, F. (=death);
calami-tas, -tatis, F.
fame, fama, ae, F.
famous, praeclarus, a, um.
far, longe ; too far, longius.
1. farther, adt\, longius.
2. farther, adj., ulter-ior, -iua.
farthest, ultimas, a, um.
father, pater, patris, m.
father-in-law, socer, en, M.
fatigued, defessus, a, um.
favor, probo, are, avl, atum ; faveo, ere
favl, fautum (ic. dot.).
fa\'orable, idoneus, a, um.
1. fear, verb, timeo, ere, -ul ; [per*,^i-
esco, ere, ul ; vereor, en, veritus sum].
2. fear, noun, tim-or, -oris, M.; [metus,
US, M.].
fearful, timidus, a, um.
February, Februarius, a, um, adj.
feel, intel-lego, ere, -lexl, -lectum.
feelings, animus, I, M. (use sing.).
fellow-citizen, civ-is, -is, M.
fertile, fertilis, e ; fer-ax, acis.
few, paucl, ae, a ; nonnulli, ae, a ; very
few, perpauci, ae, a.
1. field, ager, agrl, M.
2. field (Afield of battle), leave the
field, proelio ex-cedo, ere, -cessi, -ces-
sum.
3. field, take the, arma sumo, ere,
sumpsl, sumptum ; ad bellum pro-ficis-
cor, I, -fectus sum.
fierce, use adverb, = fiercely.
fiercely, acriter.
fifteen, qulndecim.
fifth, quintus, a, um.
fifty, qumquaginta.
1. fight, pugno, are, avl, atum.
2. fight a battle, proelium facio, ere,
feel, factum.
3. fighting, pugna, ae, F.; orusegerund
of pugno.
fill, fill up, com-pleo, ere, -pluvl, -pie-
turn.
finally, denique.
1. find, reperio, Ire, repperl, repert-um ;
in-venio, Ire, -venl, -ventum.
2. find out, co-gnosc6, ere, -gnovl, -&ri-
tum ; com-perio, Ire, -peri, -pertum.
fine, pulcher, chra, chrum.
finish, per-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum.
1. fire, Ign-is, -is, M.
2. fire, set to, in-cendo, ere, -cendl,
-censum, IP. ace.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
331
3. flre, be under , = take part in
battle.
first, primus, u, um ; at first, primo.
fish, pisc-is, -is, ii.
five, qulnque ; five hundred, quln-
genti, ae, a.
fix ( = appoint), e-dlco, ere, -dlxl, -dictum ;
(with dies), dlco, ere, dlxl, dictum.
flag, vexillum, I, x.
flee, con-fugio, ere, -fugl; fugio, ere,
fugl, fugitum.
fleet, class-is, -is, F.
flesh, caro, carnis, F.
1. flight, fuga, ae, F.
-. flight, take to , se fugae mandare,
(inando, are, avl, atum).
1. flow r , fluo, ere, fluxl, fluxuni.
2. flow before, praeter-fluo, ere, fluxl,
-fluxum, . ace.
1. follow, sequor, !, secutus sum.
'2. follow up, per-sequor, I, -secutus
sum.
3. following, adj., posterus, a, um;
[Insequ-ens, eutis].
follower, camp, cal-o, -ouis, M.
folly, amentia, ae, F. ; [stultitia, ae, F.]
food, cibus, 1, M.
1. foot, pes, pedis, M.; on foot, pedibus.
2. foot, at the of, sub, with abl.
'.'. foot, throw oneself at the feet
of, see II. 100.
4. foot, to the of, sub, . ace.
footsoldier, ped-es, -itis, M.
1. for (of motion towards), in, ad, w. ace.;
(with reason), de, w. abl.; (of purpose),
ad and gerund or gerundive ; (of time
how long), ace. only; (with infinitive
clause) untranslated ; (of arrangements
for the future), in, u\ ace.; ( = on behalf
of), pro, w. abl.
2. for, conj., nam.
forbearance, mansuetu-do, -dinis, F.
forbid, veto, are, vetul, vetitum.
1. force, verb, com-pello, ere, -pull, -pul-
sum.
2. force, noun ( = violence), vis, F. [9];
forces ( = troops), copiae, arum, F. plu r.
3. forced (of a march), magnus, a, um.
ford, vadum, T, x.
forest, silya, ae, F.
forever, in perpetuum.
forget, ob-l!viscor, I, -lltus sum, w. yen.
1. for in ( = make), facio, ere, feel, factum.
2. form (= draw up), In-struo, ere,
-struxl, -structurn.
former, prlstinus, a, um.
forsake, dis-cedo, ere, -cessl, -cessum,
w. ab and abl.
fort, castellum, 1, .v.
fortification, munlt-io, -ionis, F.; op-
us, -eris, x.
fortify, munio, Ire, IvI, Itum.
forty, quadraginta.
forward, send, prae-mitto, ere, -mlsl,
-missum.
four, qtiattuor ; four hundred, quad-
ringentT, ae, a.
fourth, (juartus, a, um ; three
fourths, three pa rts.
1. free, cerb, liliero, are, avl, atum.
2. free, adj., liber, era, erum.
freed, liberatus, a, um.
freely, llbere.
French, Galli, oruin, M.
1. frequent, adj., creber, bra, brum.
2. frequent, verb, with no fre-
quented ford, xrtt/ \\-liich was not
wont to be crossed by a ford.
fresh, integer, gra, grum.
friend, amicus, T, M. ; (often expressed by
possess! r>- pi-ii/mc /<*, footnote 2, page 54).
friendly, amicus, a, um.
friendship, amlcitia, ae, F.
frightful, horridus, a, um.
1. from, a, ab (=.</ from), ex (=out
of) ; from which, unde ; (with verbs
of taking away), use the dat. ; (with
gerund in -ing), quin, quominus w. sub-
jwnctive.
2. from, be , absum, abesse, aful.
front, in of, pro, w. abl.; ante, w. ace.
full, plenus, a, um.
furnish, order to, impero, are, avl,
atum (w. dat. of persons ordered, ace.
of that to be furnished).
G
1. gain, potior, In, Itus sum, w. abl.;
ad-ipiscor, I, -eptus sum, w. ace.
2. gain a request, impetro, are, avl,
atum.
Galba, Galba, ae, M.
gallant, in II., Ex. 29, not to be trans-
lated.
gallantly, acriter.
Gallic, Gallicus, a, um; or use Gallorum.
Gallus, Gallus, I, M.
garrison, praesidium, I, x.
gate, porta, ae, F.
1. Gaul (the country), Gallia, ae, F.
2. Gaul (a native of Gaul), Gallus, I, M.
Gaulish province, -provincia Gallia,
in apposition.
1. general, impera-tor, -toris, M.
2. general engagement, proelium,
I, N.
Geneva, Genava, ae, F.
gentleness, dementia, ae, F.
George, Georgius, I, M.
German, Germanus, I, M. ; or adj.,
Germanus, a, um.
1. get, nanciscor, I, nactus or nanctus
sum.
2. get ready, expedio, Ire, IvI, Itum.
1 . give, do, dare, dedl, datum.
2. give orders, impero, are, avl, atum.
3. give up ( hand over), tra-do, ere,
-didl, -ditum ; (=abandon), de-sisto, ere,
-stitl, w. abl.
glorious, pulcher, chra, chrum.
1. go, eo, Ire, ii (IvI), itum.
2. go forth, ex -co, -Ire, -ii, -itum.
3. go out, ex-i-('), -ire, -ii, -itum.
332
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
4. go outside, e-gredior, I, -gressus sum,
tr. extra and ace.
5. going, to be on, fid, fieri, factus
sum ; geror, I, gestus sum, passive.
6. going, to be to, use fut. part, in
-urus and sum.
government, respublica, relpublicae,
F. [9.]
grant, do, dare, dedl, datum.
great, magnus, a, um ; how great,
quantus, a, um ; so great, tantus, a,
um ; very great, maximus, a, um.
greatest, maximus, a, um ; or use adv.,
maxime.
greatly, magnopere, magno opere ;
how greatly, quantopere ; quanto
opere.
1. ground ( =position), locus, I, x.
2. ground, stand one's, con-sisto,
ere, -stitl.
3. ground, provisions of corn,
molita cibaria, drum, N. plur.
1. guard, verb, cust6dio, Ire, Ivi, itum.
2. guard, noun, praesidium, I, x.
guide, dux, duels, M.
guilty, find, condemns, are, avl,
atum.
H
lialf a mile =five hundred paces.
halt, con-sisto, ere, -stitl.
1. hand, manus, us, Y.
2. hand to hand, cominus, adv.
3. hand down, pro-do, ere, -didl, -di-
tum.
4 hand, be at , ad-sum, -esse, -ful.
5. hand over, tra-do, ere, -didl, -di-
tum.
hang out, pro-pono, ere, -posul, -posi-
tuin.
happen, accid-6, ere, I; -flo, fieri, factus
sum.
harass, lacess-6, ere, -Ivi, -Itum.
harbor, portus, us, M.
1. hard, difficilis, e.
2. hard pressed, to be-, premor, I,
pressus sum ; urgeor, erl ; (passive).
harm, noceo, ere, ul, w. dat. ; laedo,
ere, laesi, laesum, w. ace.
haste, make, mature, are, avl, atum ;
conten-do, ere, -dl, -turn.
hasten, conten-do, ere, -dl, -turn.
1. have, habeo, ere, uT, itum ; ( = cause],
euro, are, avl, atum.
2. have to( = must), use gerundive with
sum.
he, is ; se.
1. head, cap-ut, -itis, N.
2. head, be at the of, prae-sum,
-esse, -ful, 10. dat.
headlong, prae-ceps, -cipitis.
health, be in good, valeo, ere, ui.
hear, hear of, audio, Ire, Ivi, itum, w.
ace.
hearing, without a , indicia causa.
1. heart, animus, I, M.
2. heart, lose , animum de-mitto, ere,
-mlsi, -missum.
1. heavy, gravis, e.
2. heavy armed, legioharius, a, Um,
1. height (of measurement), altitu-do,
-dinis, F.
2. height ( = a high place), superior lo-
cus, i, M. ; (in plur., N.).
3. height of madness, =highest mad-
ness.
help, auxilium, I, N.
Helvetian, Helvetius, I, M. ;adj,, Hel-
vetius, a, um.
Helvetii, Helvetil, drum, M., plur.
hem in, con-tineo, ere, -tinul, tentum.
Henry, Henricus, I, si.
hero, vir, virl, M.
heroic, fortis, e, in either positive or
superlative.
hesitate, dubito, are, avl, atum.
hesitation, cunctat-io, -ionis, F. ; (on =
gen.).
high, altus, a, um ; =great, magnus, a,
um.
higher (of position), superior, -ius.
highest, summus, a, um.
hill, collis, is, >i.; up the hill, ad-
verso colle.
himself, ipse, a, um ; se.
hinder, impedio, Ire, Ivi, Itum.
hither, adj., citer-ior, -ius.
1. hold, teheo, ere, tenui, tentum.
2. hold a levy, delectum habeo, ere,
ui, itum.
3. hold out, sus-tineo, ere, -tinul, -ten-
tum.
4. hold, (of holding power), ob-tineo, ere,
-tinul, -tentum.
5. hold ( = re(/ard), habeo, ere, ui, itum.
home, domus, us, F. ; [domicilium, I,
N.] ; at home, doml.
honor, ornamentum, I, N. ; [hon-or, -oris,
M.]
1. hope, verb, spero, are, avl, atum ; [ex-
specto, are, avl, atum].
2. hope, noun, spes, spel, F.
horse, equus, I, M. ; ( = cavalry), equita-
tus, us, M.
horseman, equ-es, -itis, M.
hostage, obs-es, -idis, M.
hostile, inimlcus, a, um ; [or = of the
enemy].
hour, hora, ae, F.
how ( = in what, manner), quomodo ; (
by what route), qua ; how great,
how large, quantus, a, um ; how
greatly, quantopere, quanto opere ;
how many, quot (indeclinable).
hoAvever, quamvls.
humanity, humani-tas, -tutis, F.
hundred, centum.
1. hurl, con-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jectum.
2. hurl back, re-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jec-
tum.
hurt, of-fendo, ere, -fendl, -fensum.
husband, maritus, I, M.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
333
if ( in case that), si ; ( whether), num.
imagine, puto, are, avl, atum.
immediately, statiin.
immense, in-gens, -gentis.
imminent peril, obsid-io, -ionis, F.
impassable, impedltus, a, um.
imperfectly, non plene.
important, magnus, a, um ; most
important, summus, a, um.
impress, com-moveo, ere, -movl, -mo-
tum.
in, in, prep. w. abl.
inclose, con-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum.
increase, augeo, ere, auxT, auctum.
incredible, incredibilis, e.
induce, ad-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum.
indulge, indul-geo, ere, -si, -turn, w.
dat.
indulgence, sho\v , indul-geo, ere,
-si, -turn, w. dat.
inexperienced, imperitus, a, um.
infant, In-fans, -fantis, M.
infantry, peditatus, us, M. ; pedestres
copiae, F. plur.
inferior, infer-ior, -ius.
1. inflict (of punishment), sumo, 'ere,
sihnpsl, sumptum ; [upon, de w, abl.].
2. inflict death upon oneself, mor-
tem con-scisco, ere, -scivl, -scltum, w.
dat.
1. influence, verb, ad-duco, ere, -duxl,
-ductum ; per-moveo, ere, -movl, -mo-
tum ; im-pello, ere, -pull, -pulsum.
2. influence, try to, sollicito, are,
si vl, atum.
3. influence, noun, auctdri-tas, -tatis,
F. ; gratia, ae, F.
influential, be, valep, ere, ul.
inform, certiorem (certiores) facio, ere,
fed, factum ; fof, =de, w. abl.].
inhabit, in-colo, ere, -colul, -cultum.
inj ure, noceo, ere, ul, itum, w. dat.
injury, injuria, ae, F.
inlj
land, inter-ior, -ius.
inquire, quaero, ere, quaeslvl, quaesl-
tum ; rogo, are, avl, atum.
inroad, incurs-io, -ionis, F.
instead of, pro, w. abl.
insult, contumelia, ae, F.
insultingly, Insolenter.
intend (use future partic. in -urus and
sum).
intercept, inter-cipio, ere, -cepl, -cep-
tum.
1. interest, utili-tas, -tatis, F.
2. interest, be of, interest; refert.
(II. 63.)
interpreter, inter-pres, -pretis, M.
into, in, ?r. ace.
invade, in-gredior, I, -gressus sum, w.
intra and ace.
invaders, u*e hostes, ium, M., plur.,
enetn-y.
invite, arcess-6, ere, -IvI, -Itum.
1. iron, ferrum, l, N,
2. iron, of, ferreus, a, um, adj.
island, insula, ae, F.
Italy, Italia, ae, F.
January, Januarius, a, um, adj.
javelin, pilum, I, N.; tclum, I, N.
join battle, proelium com-mitto, ere,
-mlsl, -missum.
journey, iter, itineris, N.
judge, judico, are. avl, atum ; arbitror,
an, atus sum.
judgment, consilium, I, N.
July, Qulntllis, e, adj.
June, Junius, a, um, adj.
Jura, Jura, ae, M.
1. keep, con-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum.
2. keep apart, dis-tineo, ere, -tinul,
-tentum.
3. keep from, prohibeo, ere, ul, itum,
w. injin. , or w. ab and abl.
4. keep off, prohibeo, ere, ui, itum.
kill, inter-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum ; [oc-
cido, ere, -cldl, -cisum.]
kind, of what, qualis, e.
king, rex, regis, M.
know, scio, ire, IvI, Itum.
Labieiius, Labienus, I, M.
lacking, be, desum, deesse, deful
ladder, scala, ae, F.
lake, lacus, us, M.
lance, lancea, ae, F.
1. land ( = country), ager, agrl, M.; [fin-
es, -Ium, M.] ; (opposed to water), terra,
ae, F.
2. land, native , patria, ae, F.
3. land, on, pedester, tris, tre, adj.
landing, effect a , ex navibus ex
ponor, I, -positus sum (passive).
language, lingua, ae, F.
large, magnus, a, um ; how large,
quantus, a, um ; very large, maxi-
mtis, a, um.
larger, maj-or, -us.
largest, maximus, a, um.
latter ille, a, ud.
1. last, verb, the battle lasts, pug-
natur, impersonal passive.
2. last, adv., , proxime.
law, lex, legis, F.
1. lay aside, de-pono, ere, -posul, -posi-
tum.
2. lay down one's life=die.
3. lay waste, vasto, are, avl, atum;
[populor, an, atus sum].
1. lead, duco, ere, duxl, ductum ; ( = ?"n-
Jluence), ad-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum.
2. lead across, trans-di'ico, ere, -duxl,
-ductum, often w. tu-n acctUOtivef.
3. lead back, re-duco, ere, -duxl, -dvc-
tum.
334
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
4. lead out, e-duco, ere, -diixl, -due-
turn.
leader, dux, duels, M.
leadership, principatus, us, M.
1. leading' man, prln-ceps, -cipis, M.
2. leading 1 place, principatus, us, M.
leap down, de-silio, Ire, -silui, -sultum.
learn, co-gnosco, ere, -gnovi, -gnitum.
lease, red-imo, ere, -emi, -emptum.
1. leave (= leave behind), re-linquo, ere,
-llqui, -lictuni.
2. leave (=go away from), ab . . . dis-
cedo, ere, -cessT, -cessum.
3. leave (go out of), ex ... e-gredior,
I, -gressus sum.
leave open, did not attempt to keep
from invading.
left, sinister, tra, tmm.
legion, leg-io, -ionis, F.
legionary, legionarius, I, M. (in II.,
Ex. !.;, !'*(> the pin.,-.).
lend, uye fern, ferre, tull, latum ( = bring).
length, in , express by using genitive
of characteristic.
less, minus, adv.
lest, ne.
letter, litterae, arum, F. plur. ; epistola,
ae, F.
let slip, de-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum.
1. levy, verb, con-scrlbo, ere, -scrips!,
-scrlptum.
2. levy, noun, delectus, us, M.; latest
levies -which had been last levied.
liberality, liberali-tas, -tatis, F.
1. liberty, llber-tas, -tatis, F.
2. liberty, be at, licet, w. dat., im-
personal.
lie ( = be situated), use sum, be.
lieutenant, legatus, I, M.
life, vita, ae, K. ; (in phi-axe cost life,
.vrt.V roxt <lt'(itf>).
light ( = estimation), use locus, I, M.
light armed, use levis armaturae, =of
tight (ii-iii<>r.
like, similis, e, u-. <lf.
likely, be to. "-'' future peuticivh in
-urns with sum ; [or volo, velle, volu!].
1. line, line of battle, acies, 51, F.
2. line of march, ag-men, -minis, N.
linger, moror, an, atus sum.
1. little, a , paulum ; (w. ante), paulo,
a&v.
2. little, be within a very of,
minimum abesse, u\ quin and subjunc-
tir.'.
live, vivo, ere, vlxi, vlctnm ; [on, =abl).
lofty, altus, a, um.
1. long-, adj., longus, a, um.
2. long, adv., diu ; longer, diiitius.
3. long, as--as, dum, eonj.
long-defended, ^.r/'/vx* bi/ n refatir*'
clavue,
lose, A-mitto, ere, -mTsI, -missum; ( = let
slip), dT-mitto, ere, -mlsT, -missum ; (of
losing men in battle), deper-do, ere,
-did!, ditum.
loss, detrlmentum, I, N.
loss ( = disaster), calami-tas, -tatis, F. ; ( =
disadvantage), detrlmentum, I, x. ; \of
loss in battle), use amitto = Zose, or inter-
fic\6=slay.
lot, fortuna, ae, F.
loud, magnus, a, um.
love, dl-ligo, ere, -lexT, -lectum ; amo,
are, avi, atum.
low, humilis, e.
lower, infer-ior, -ius.
Liiicius, Lucius, I, M.
31
madden, in-cendo, ere, -cendl, -censum.
made, be, fio, fieri, factus sum.
madness, fur-or, -oris, M.
magistrate, magistrates, us, M.
1. make, facio, ere, feel, factum.
2. make a march, iter (gen. itineris
N.), facio, ere, feci, factum.
3. make ready, compare, are, avT,
atum.
4. make use of, utor, I, fisus sum, w.
abl.
5. make war on, bellum Infero, Inferre,
intull, illatum, u\ dat.
1. man, vir, vin, M. ; homo, hominis, M. ;
(= soldier), mll-es, -itis, M., or oftfn h>i
the possessive pronouns (footnote 2, page
Bit).
2. man, to a, ad imum omneg.
manner, rat-io, -ionis, F.
many, multT, ae, a ; if followed by an-
other adjective, supply et or -que, = and ;
how many, quot, indeclinable; so
many, tot, indeclinable: very
many, permultl, ae, a.
1. march, verb, iter facio, ere, feel, fac-
tum, = make a march ; [conten-do, ere,
-dl, -turn].
2. march, noun, iter, itineris, N.
3. march, line of , ag-men, -minis, N.
4. 3Iarch (the month), Martins, a, um,
ad}.
3Iarius. Marius, I, M.
marriage, give in, imptum (supine)
do, dare, dedl, datum.
married, nuptus, a, um.
marsh, pal-us, -udis, F.
31ary, Maria, ae, F.
massed, to be , con venio, Ire, -venl,
-ventum ( = assemble).
3Iassilia, Massilia, ae, F.
master, become of, potior, in, itus
sum, ii'. a!i?.
material, materia, ae, F. ; agger, ag-
geris, M.
matter, res, rel, F.
may, licet, impersonal n\ dat.
mean, volo, velle, volul, w. dat. of re-
1. means of approach, aditus, vis, M.
2. means, by no, nequiiquam, adv.
.'!. means, by -of, per, prep. v\ aec.
meantime, In the , interea.
measure, consilium, I, N.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
335
meet with, nanciscor, 1, nactus or nanc-
tus sum, ic. ace.
memory, memoria, ae, F.
mention, commemoro, are, avT, atum.
merchant, merca-tor, -toris, M.
merciful disposition, dementia (ae,
F.) ac mansuetu-do (-dinis, F.).
merit, vir-tus, -tutis, F.
merited, meritus, a, um.
message, nuntius, I, M.
messenger, nuntius, 1, M.
middle, use meclius, a, um, adj.
midnight, media nox (noctis, F.).
midst, use medius, a, um, adj.
mile, =a thousand paces.
military, mflitaris, e.
milk, lac, lactis, N.
mischief, maleficium, 1, N.
missile, telum, I, N.
mode, gen-us, eris, N.
Mona, Mona, ae, F.
money, sum of money, pecunia,
ae, F. [(=coin), nuiumus, I, M.].
month, mens-is, -is, M.
more, plus, arnplius.
Morini, Morinl, arum, M.
morning, on the following morn-
ing, postridie ejus die! mane.
morrow, on the, postridie, ad v.
mortal (= deadly), mortifer, era, erum.
most, maxime, or use superlative.
mountain, mons, montis, M.
1. move, moved, ere, movT, motum.
2. move forward, pro-moveo, ere,
-movl, -motum.
multitude, multitu-do, -dinis, F.
1. must, ugegervmdvoepastive with sum.
2. must needs, necesse est, w. dat.
my, meus, a, um.
N
name, no-men, -minis, if.
nation, nat-io, -ionis, F.
native land, patria, ae, F.
nature, natura, ae, F.
naval battle, naviilis pfigna, ae, F.
nearer, propius, adv.
nearest, proximus, a, um.
1. need, verb, use opus est ( = thcre is
need), impersonal, w. abl.
2. need, noun, usus, us, M.
neglect, neg-lego, ere, -lex!, -lectum.
neighbor, fmitimus, I, M.
neighborhood, in the of, prope,
prep. v. ace.
neighboring, finitimus, a, um.
1. neither, adj., neuter, tra, trum [14].
2. neither . . . nor, neque . . . neque.
Xervii, Nervii, Orum, M. plur.
news of disaster, disaster an-
nounced.
next, posterus, a, um ; proximus, a, um.
night, nox, noctis, F.
nine, novem.
ninth, nonus, a, um.
no, nullus, a, um [14].
no one, nemo; gen., niillms ; ace., ne-
minem; abl., nullo ; that no one,
ne quis.
noble, nobilis, e.
noise, strepitua, us, M.
Nola, Nola, ae. F.
none, nullus, a, um [14].
nor, neque.
northern parts of island, ut-e ex
treml fines, rff)notcst territories.
1. not, non (in final and imperative
clauses, ne) ; and not, neque (or in
final clauses, neve, neu).
2. not a man, =no one.
3. not yet, nondum.
noted for, in If., Ex. 3~', nay could not
use to any advantage.
nothing, nihil, N., indeclinable.
notice, at a moment's , statim, adv.
November, November, bris, bre, adj.
noAV ( = by this time), jam; ( = at this
present time, nunc).
1. number, numerus, 1, M. [or use clause
U'ith quot how many].
2. number, large , multitu-do, -dinis,
F. ; magnus numerus, I, si.
3. number, great numbers, =large
number (use sing.).
4. number, to the - of, use ad w. a-cc.
numerous, creber, bra, brum ; [multl,
ae, a].
O
oak, rob-ur, -oris, N.
1. oath, jusjurandum, jurisjurandl, N.[9].
2. oath, take an, juro, are, avi,
atum.
obedient, be, pareo, ere, in.
obey, ]iareo, ere, ui, w. dat.; obtempero,
are, avi, atum, u'. dat.
objections, raise, reciiso, are, avi,
atum, u>. quominus and subjunctive.
observe, video, ere, vidi, visum.
obstinately, summa pertinacia.
obtain a request, impetro, are, avi,
atum.
occupy, ob-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum.
October, October, bris, bre, adj.
of ( = about), dc, w. abl.
1. officer, legatus, i, M.
2. officer, cavalry, praefectus (I, M.)
equitum.
old, vet-us, -eris.
on (of place where), in w. abl; (of time
when), use abl. only ; (of making attack
on), in w. ace; (pf direction), ab or ex
w. abl.; ( = concerning), de w. '>l.
on account of, propter, w. ace.
1. once, at , statim, adv.
2. once more, = again.
1. one, unus, a, um [14] ; one hun-
dred, centum ; no one, nemo.
2. one another, inter se.
3. one at a time, sringularis, e, arfj-
4. one, the one . . . the other, alter
. . . alter.
only, unus, a, um, adj.
336
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
onset, impetus, us, M.
1. open, pate-facid, ere, -fed, -factum ;
pa a* ice pate-fid, -fieri, -factus sum.
2. open, leave , tn II., Ex. 8
not attempt r<> keep from in radian.
1. opinion, sententia, ae, F.
2. opinion, be of the , existimo, are,
avi, atum.
opportune, opportunus, a, um.
opportunely, opportune.
1. opportunity, occas-id, -idnis, F.;
facul-tas, -tatis, F. ; [potes-tas, -tatis,
F.].
2. opportunity, give, facultatem
dare, or potestatem facere.
1. oppose (-resist), repiigud, are, avi,
atum, ic. dat.
2. oppose ( = set in opposition), op-pond,
ere, -posul, -positum.
or, aut ; (//; i/ircsfintis), an ; or not (in
ijnentiony) anndn (direct), necne (in-
direct).
1. order, jubed, ere, jussl, jiissum ; im-
perd, are, avi, atum, ic. dat.
2. orders, give , imperd, are, avi,
atum.
3. orders, receive, jubeor, en, jus-
sus sum, ( be ordered).
4. order, in that, ut, ne.
5. order, in to, ut, causa, ad.
Orgetorix, Orgetor-ix, -igis, M.
Ostorins, Ostdrius, I, M.
1. other, another, alius, a, ud [14].
2. other, the, (of two), alter, era,
erura [14]; (-the remaining), reliquus,
a, um.
3. others, the, reliqul, ae, a: ceterl,
ae, a.
ought, i'xe. gerundive passive with sum,
[debed, ere, ui ; oportet, ere, oportuit].
our, noster, tra, tram.
out of, ex, e, ic. a hi.
outer, exter-ior, -ius.
outflank, al> lateribus circum-venid,
ire, -vem, -ventuni.
outside, go of, e-gredior, I, -gressus
sum, w. extra and ace.
over (ofbrid'H-s orer rivers), in, ic. abl.
overwhelm, op-primo, ere, -press!,
pressum.
owing, is to, std, stare, steti, statum,
ic. per and ace.
own, use -piwuxife pronou'iis with &r
ipslus, ipsorum.
1. pace, passus. us, M.
2. pace, slacken, de celeritate re-
mittor, i, -missus sum, paxxire.
1. panic, tim-or, -oris, M.
2. panic, throw into a, pert em .<"..
Ore. in, itum.
1. pardon, n-rb, T-^nosr,,, ore, --nml,
if. dat.
2. pardon, mmn, venia, ae, F.
parent, par-ens, -entis, M. or F.
1. part, pars, partis, F. ; in II., Ex. IS,
/", nut translated.
2. ]>art, in , partini, adi:
3. part, on his , autem, adv.
4. part, on of, in II., Ex. 2S, not
translated.
5. part, for the most, maximam
part em.
6. part, take in, inter-sum, -t-sse, -fin,
ic. dat.
participate in, inter sum, -esse, -ful,
ic. dat.
party, fact-id, -ionis, K.
1. pass (=(/o), ed, Jre, il (Ivi), itum.
2. pass beyond, e-gredior, i,
sum, witli exira and ace.
3. pass the winter, hiemd, are, avi,
atum.
peace, pax, pac-is, F.
penetrate (of report), be carried.
people, populus, i, M.
perceive, cun spicio, ere, -spexi, -spec-
turn : intel-lego, ere, -lexi, -lectum.
perch, victory on banners, use
vinco or superd, eon^ver.
perhaps, fortasse.
peril, periculum, T, x. ; to the , cum
perlculo.
permission, have-, licet, licere, lie
uit. impersonal, -. dat.
1. permit, patior, i, passus sum.
2. permitted, be , licet, impersonal
w. dat.
1. person ( = man), untranslated.
2. person, in, ipse, a, um, hini >//.
persuade, persua-ded, ere, -si, -sum, w.
ddt.
pillage, praedor, an, atus sum.
pilum, pllum, I, x.
pitch (of a camp), pdno, ere, posul,
positum.
pity, feel for, misereor, eri, itus sum,
1C. i/Cil
1. place, cerb, pond, ere, posui, posi-
tum ; coilocd, are, avi, atum.
2. place, tiiiun, locus, i, M. sinj.; loca,
orum, \. plur.
3. place, 1 calling , I'l-incipatus, fis,
M.
4. place, in that, ibi, ad>-.
r>. ]>lace, to that -, ed, adr.
plan, c.msilium, T, N.
pleasing, trratus, a, um.
plenty, cdpia, ae, F.
plunder, praeda, ae, F.
1. point out, doced, ere, u! ; os-tendd,
ere, -tendi, -tentum.
2. point, be on the of, useful, part.
in firus with sum.
3. point, on that -. ^about that. (II.
94.)
su-s. s, F.
political change, novae res, F. )>lnr,
popular, nccrpttis, a, um.
population, tli<>*>' inhabiting.
port, portus, us, M.
portion, pars, partis, F.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
337
1. position, locus, I, M. : [or use quo in
loco, with dan xi'}. In II., E.i: 91 uml
"*e oastra.
2. position, keep a-, consist", tre.
-stitl.
3. position, take up, con-sido, ere,
-sedi, -sessum.
possess, ob-tineo, ere, -tinui, -tentum ;
pos sideo, ere, -sedi, -sessum.
1. possessions, their , sua, orum, N.
plur.
2. possession, take of, occupo, are,
avl, atum, u: ace.
possibility, potes-tas, -tatis, F.
possible, as .... as , quam, ^vith $it-
pe flat !>/'.
posterity, posterl, orum, M. plur.
1. power, royal , chief , su-
preme, regnum, 1, N.
'2. power, gain the sovereign -
of, potior, In, itus sum, ?/. yen.
3. power, in one's-, in II., Ex. 25,
use apud, prep., w. ace.
1. powerful, firmus, a, um ; pot-ens,
-entis.
2. powerful, be most, plurimum
pcs um, posse, potul.
practice, consuetu-do, -dinis, F.
1. praise, verb, laudo, are, avi, a turn.
2. praise, noun, laus, laudis, F.
pray for, deprecor, an, atus sum, w.
ace.
precedent, exemplum, i, N.
preceding, super-ior, -ins.
prefer (with nouns), ante-pono, ere,
-posui, -positum ; (with the infinitive)
malo, mal'e, malul.
preparations, make- for, comparo,
are, avi, atum, w. ad and ace.
v>repare, paro, are, avl, atum.
1. present, dono. are, avl, atum.
2. present, be , ad-sum, -esse, -fui.
preserve, re-tineo, ere, -tinui, -tentum.
1. press forward, in-sto, are, -stitl.
2. press hard, urgeo, ere, ursi ; premo,
ere, press!, pressum.
3. press upon them, = press forward.
prevail, supero, are, avl, atum.
prevent, prohibeo, ere, ul, itum.
previous, super-ior, -ius.
previously, ante.
price, pretium, 1, N.
priest, sacer-dos, -dotis, M.
prince, in II., Ex. 26, not to be trans-
lated.
prisoner, captlvus, I, M.
private, prlvatus, a, um.
proceed, pro-gredior, I, -gressus sum ;
pro-cedo, ere, -cess!, -cessum.
proceedings, =things.
procure, paro, are, avl, atum ; comparo,
are, avi, atum.
produce, ef-ficio, ere, -fee!, -fectum.
promise, polliceor, eri, itus sum.
prompt, hortor, art, atus sum ; im-pell6,
ere, -pull, -p^lsum.
protect, munio, Ire, Ivl, Itujn,
22
protection, praesidium, I, N.
protract, pro-duco, ere, -duxl, -ductum.
provide for, pro-video, ere, -vidT, -vl-
sum, it: d t. or ace.
prove, probo, are, avl, atum.
provided that, dum.
pi'oviiice. i)i-6vincda, ae, F._
1 rovisioiis, commeatus, us, v.. (use the
*!ii<n'lai-).
provoke to battle, lacess-6, ere, -Ivl,
-uum.
prowess, vir-tus, -tutis, F. ; military
prowess, vse quid virtute po^seut.
punish, ulciscor, I, ultus sum.
punishment, supplicium, I, N.
pupil, discipulus, I, M.
1. purpose, res, rel, F.
2. purpose, for the of, causa, w.
get. preceding :
1. pursue, pro-sequor, I, -secutus sum ;
con-sequor, 1, -secutus sum ; sequor, I,
sec tus sum.
2. pursue a march, iter facio (ere,
feci, factum).
]>ursuit, = those pursuing.
jiush forward (or onward), conten-
do, ere, -dl, -turn.
1. put, colloco, are, avi, atum ; pono, ere,
posul, positum.
2. put in (chains.), con-jicio, ere, -jecT,
-jectiim, ivith in and ace.
3. put to death, inter-ficio, ere, -feel,
-fectum.
4. put spurs to a horse, equum ad-
mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum.
5. put on a brave face, vultum fingo,
ere, finxl, flctum.
6. put an end to, finem facio, ere, feel,
factum, w. gei\.
1. quarters, from all , undique,
adv.
2. quarters, winter, hlberna, drum,
>. plur.
queen, reglna, ae, F.
question, quaero, ere, quaeslvi, quaesi-
turn.
quickly, celeriter.
quickness, celeri-tas, -tatis, F.
rage, the battle rages, pugnatur,
impersonal passive.
raise ( = collect), comparo, are, avl, atum.
rampart, vallum, I, N.
rank, 6r-do, -dinis, M.
rate, at any, certe.
1. rather, potius, magis.
2. rather, had, malo, malle, maluT.
reach, per-venio, ire, -venl, -ventum,
with ad or in and ace.
readily, ( = without cause), temere.
1. ready, paratus, a, um ; [for or to, -
ad w. ace. ].
2. ready, make , comparo, are, avl,
atum.
.338
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
:. ready, get (/ m-m*), i-xpedir., ire,
hi, Ituin; (of vesxrlx). paro, are, avl,
atom.
rear, novissinmm ag-men (-minis), .\. ;
in the rear, a tergo, or aversus, a,
um, in agrt'cnu-nt ; to the rear, ad
novissimos.
reason, causa, ae, v. ; [or vse clause n-itlt
cur or quamobrem].
rebuild, restit-uo, ere, -ul, -utum.
recall, revoco, are, avl, atum.
1. receive, ac-cipio, ere, -cepl, -ceptum.
2. receive orders = be ordered.
recent, rec-ens, -entis.
recover ( = u-in back), recipero, are, avl,
atum; [( '- regain courage), se re-cipio,
ere, -oepl, -ceptum].
redoubt, castellum, 1, K.
refrain, temper^, are, avl, atum. *
refuse ( = object), recuso, are, avl, atum.
regain, recipero, are, avl, atum.
regard, habeo, ere, ul, itum.
regiment, leg-io, -ionis, F.
region, reg-io, -ionis, F.
regular (of troops), legionarius, a, um
reign, in the of, use abl. absolute of
regrmns = riding.
reinforcements, subsidium, 1, x.
relationship, cognat-io, -ionis, F.
reliance, place on, con-fldo, ere,
-flsus sum, w. dat. (III. 68, b.)
reluctance, with, invltus, a, um,
adj. in agreement.
relying on, fretus, a, um, w. abl.
remain, re-maneo, ere* -mansl, -man-
sum ; maneo ; permaneo.
remaining, reliquus, a, um.
remember, inemoriam re-tineo, ere,
-tinul, -tentum, w. gen. ; [meminl, isse ;
imperative, memen-to, -t5te ; reminis-
cot, !].
Reml, Reml, drum, M. phir.
remind, commone-facio, ere, -feel, -fac-
tum.
remove, re-moveo, ere, -movi, -motum;
[of removing contest, a-moveo, ere,
-movf, -motum].
renew, renovo, are, avl, atum.
renewal, use the verb renovo renew.
renown, fama, ae, F.; gloria, ae, F.;
laus, laudis, F.
reply, re-spondeo, ere, -spondl, -sp6n-
sum.
1. report, verb, nuntio, are, avl, atum ;
renuntio, are, avl, atum.
2. report, noun, fama, ae, F.
3. report, bring, famam per-fero,
-ferre, -tull, -latum, or use nuntio, =
announce.
republic, respublica, relpublicae [9], F.
1. request, pet-6, ere, -Ivl, -itum, with
ab and abl.
2. request, gain , obtain , im-
petro, are, avl, atum.
require, impero, are, avl, atum.
reserve, rabodium, I, N.
resist, re-sisto, erej -stiti, w. dat.
resistance, valiant , use the phrase
ri'sixt! n;i rniin i/fl//.
resolution, consilium, l, N. ; form a
resolution, consilium in-eo, -Ire, -il,
-itvim.
resolve, constit-uo, ere, -ul, -utum.
resources, opes, um, F. plur.
respect, in no, non.
respond, re-spondeo, ere, -spondl, -six>n-
sum.
1. rest, verb, pono, ere, posul, positum.
2. rest, victory rests upon, use
vinco, = conquer.
3. rest, noun, use reliquus, a, um, adj.
restore, red-do, ere, -didl, -ditum.
restrain, con-tineo, ere, -tinul, -tentum ;
prohibeo, ere, ul, itumj [(of restraining
team}, teneo, ere, tenul, tentum].
1. result, be the , fio, fieri, factus
sum.
2. result in, sum, esse, ful, with cum
and abl. ( = Ue attended trith).
retainer, cli-ens, -entis, M.
retire, se re-cipio, ere, -cepl, ceptum ;
se con-fero, -ferre, contuli, collatum ;
[upon, =ad, w. ace.].
1. retreat, verb, pedem re-fero (-ferre,
-tull, -latum) ; se re-cipio, ere, -cepl,
-ceptum.
2. retreat, noun, receptus, us, M.; fuga,
ae, F.
3. retreat, means of , receptxis, us,
M.
4. retreat, beat a, se re-cipio, ere,
-cepl, -ceptum.
1. return, verb, re-vertor, 1, -versus
sum ; [red-eo, -Ire, -il (-Ivl), -itum].
2. return, noun, use clause with verb.
revenue, vectlg-al, -alis, N.
revolt, de-ficio, ere, -feel, -fectum.
reward, praemium, 1, N.
Rhine. Hhenus, 1, M.
Rhone, Rhodanus, I, M.
ride up, adequito, are, avl, atum.
1. right, noun, jus, juris, N.
2. right, adj., dexter, tra, trum.
ripe, matiirus, a, um.
rival, adaequo, are, avl, atum.
river, flu-men, -minis, N.
road, via, ae, F. ; iter, itineris, K.
roam about, vagor, arl, atus sum.
Roman, Romanus, 1, M. ; (adj.)Romanus,
a, um.
1 Rome (as a place), Roma, ae, F. ; at
Rome, Romae.
2. Rome (as a nation), populus (I, M.)
Romanus the Roman people.
3. Rome, of ( = Roman), Romanus, a,
um.
rout, fugo, are, avl, atum ; fundo, ere,
fudl, fusum.
route, iter, itineris, N.
royal power, regnum, I, N.
rubbish, agger, aggeris, M.
rude artillery, in II., Ex. 32, omit in
translation.
rudely, negligenter.
PAET III. VOCABULARY.
339
rugged, asper, era, ernm.
rule, imperium, I, N.
ruler, prin-ceps, -cipis, M. ; or use rego,
ere, rexi, rectum, =rule.
run cloAvn, de-curro, ere, -cum or -cu-
curri. -cm-sum.
1. rush to arms, con curro, ere, -curr!
or -cuctiiTl, -cursum.
2. rush out, se e-jicio, ere, -jeci, -jectum.
S
Sabis. Sab-is, -is, M.
sacred, sacer, era, crum.
safeguard, m-ucsidium, i, x.
safety, sal-us, -fitis, F. : in safety, use
incolumis, e, '//'., --safe.
sail, navigo, are, avl, atum.
sailor, nauta. ae, M.
sake, for the-- of, causa, /r. yen. pre-
ceding.
sally, erupt-io, -ionis, v.
same, idem, eadt-m, idem.
satisfaction, give, satis-facio, ere,
feci, -faetum.
save (=rescue), e-ripio, ere, -ripul, -rep-
tatn, with ex and abl. ; ( = spare), con-
servo, are, avl, atum.
say, dico, ere, dixi, dictum ; if foil need
by negative, use nego, are, avl, atum,
=de)i>i.
scarcely, vix.
scarcity_, inopia, ae, F.
Scots, Scot!, orum, M. plur.
scout, explora-tor, -toris, M.
1. sea, mare, maris, x.
2. sea, on the, maritimus, a, um, adj.
3. sea coast, ora (ae, F.) maritima.
1. second, secundus, a, urn.
2. second, a time, iterum, adv.
secure, munio, ire, IvT, Ttuni.
see, video, ere, vidl, vlsum.
seek, pet-6, ere, -IvI, -Itum ; appet-6, ere,
-IvI, -Itum.
seem, videor, en, visus sum, pa$xir<'.
seize ( = take puKxcton'on <>f\ occupo, are,
avl, atum ; (tcifh impedimenta), potior,
irl, Itus sum ; ( = tofce^>/'''soner), compre-
hendo, ere, -hendi, -hensum.
select, de-ligo, ere, -legl, -lectum.
senate, aenatus, us, M.
1. send, mitto, ere, mlsl, missum.
2. send forward, send in advance,
prae-mitto, ere, -nrsl, -missum.
separate, di-vido, ere, -vis!, -visum.
September, September, bris, bre, adj.
Sequani, Sequanl. orum, M. plur.
seriously, graviter.
1. set fire to, in-cendo, ere, -cendi, -cen-
sum, iv. ace.
2. set out, pro-ficiscor, I, -fectus sum.
3. set sail, navCs solvo, ere, solvT, sola-
turn, = l<ioxe the .-ifiiji*.
4. set to, ('/* II., Ex. JO, render by imper-
fect tense
settle (take up position), con-sldo, ere,
-sedl, sessum ; [(fledde), constit-u6,
ere, -ul, -utum].
seven, septem.
seventh, septimus, a, urn.
seventy, septuaginta.
several, oomplur-es, -ium ; [aliquot, in-
declinable].
sev r ere, gravis, c.
shameful, turpis, e.
shatter, af-flig-6, ere, -flixi, -flictum.
1. ship, nav-is, -is, F.
2. ship of Avar, navis longa.
shock, impetus, us. M.
shore, Ht-us, -oris, N.
1. short, brevis, e.
2. short, (for) a short time, paulls-
per.
shortly, brevl.
should, Bought, use gerundive with
sum.
shout, clam-or, -oris. M.
show, osten-do, ere, -dT, -ttim.
shudder at, borreo, ere, ul, w. ace.
shiit up, ab-do, ere, -did!, -ditum.
1. side, lat-us, -eris, N.; ]>ars, partis, F.
2. side, from all sidi*s, undique, adv.
3. side, on both sides, utrimque. adv.
4. side, on this , cis or citra, prep.
u\ ace.
5. side, on the other of, trans,
y>/v/>. w. acc.
sight, conspectus, us, M.
sign, obslgno, are, avi, atum.
signal, slgnum, !, N.
1. silent, tacitus, a, um.
2. silent, be, taceo, ere, til.
Siluria, Siluria, ae, F.
similar, similis, e.
since, cum.
six, sex ; six hundred, sescenti, ae, a.
sixteenth, sextus (a, um) decimus (a,
um).
sixty, sexaginta.
size, magnitu-do, -dim's, F.; [or use clause
n-ith quantus, a, um].
skirmish, proelixnn (I, N.) leve o-
parvulum.
slaughter, caed-es, -is, F.
slave, servus, i, \i.
slavery, servi-tus, -tutis, F.
slay, inter-ficio, ere, -fee!, -fectum ; oc-
cii'lo. ere, -cldi, -cis'um.
sling, funda, ae, F.
slinger, fundi-tor, -toris, M.
sloping, decl.vis, e.
small, parvus, a, um.
smaller, min-or, -us.
snatch away, e-ripio, ere, -ripui, -rep-
turn; [from, use dat.].
so ( = to xuch an extent), tarn; ( there-
fore), itaque ; so great, tantus, a, um.
soldier, mil-es, -itis, M.
1. some (-some or other), ali-quis, -qua.
-quid or -quod; [( = few], nonnfilli,
ae, a].
2. some . . . others, alii . . . alii.
3. some one, alkmis.
4. some day, aliquando.
son, fllius, i, M.
340
PKIMARY LATIN BOOK.
son-in-law, gener, en, M.
sooner, -rather.
soon, as as, simul atque.
sorry, be, paenitct, Impersonal.
1. sort, of Avhiit , qualis, e, adj.
2. sort, what sort of man, qualis, e,
= of what s<-l.
south, in II. , Ex. 33, say the lower part
<>f the isla/Kl.
1. sovereign, female, retina, ae, F.
2. sovereign, sain the power of,
potior, In, Itus sum, w. gen.
space, spatium, 1, N.
spare, parco, ere, pepercl, w. dat.
speak, dico, ere, dixi, dictum.
spear, hasta, ae, F.
specified, certus, a, um.
special, show indulgence = in-
dulge specially.
specially, praecipue.
speech, 6rat-io, -ionis, F.
speed, celeri-tas, -tatis, F.
speedily, celeriter.
spend, con-sumo, ere, -sumpsi, -simip-
tum.
spirit, animus, I, M. ; [vir-tus, -tutis, F.].
spirited, use acriter = in a spirited
manner.
spy, specula-tor, -toris, M.
squadron, turma, ae, F.
stain, In-ficio, ere, -fed, -fectum.
stand one's ground, con-sisto, ere,
-stitT.
1. standard, slgnum, I, x.
2.' standard bearer, =he who bore the
standard.
state, civi-tiis, -tatis,' F\; respublica, rel-
piiblicae, F. [9.]
statement, vox, vocis, F.; [or .<,<> dicf> =
*cty\<
station, colloco, are, avi, alum.
steep, prac-r-eps, -ripitis ; [arduus, a,
um].
stimulate, excito, are, avi, atum.
stir up, incite, are, avi, atum.
stockade, vallum, l, N.
1. stone (for building], saxum, T. x. ;
(for liio-liny), lap-is, -idis, M.
2. stone, leave no unturned,
nihil praeter-mitto, ere, -nils!, -inissum.
stop, con-sisto, ere, -stitl.
1. storm, verb, expugno, are, avi, atum.
2. storm, noun, tempes-tas, -tatis, F.
3. storm, take "by , = storm, (verb).
stratagem, consilium, I, x.
1. stream, rlvus, I, M.; flu-men, -minis, x.
2. stream, a land of streams, =
which has many streams, or where there
: ;?/ streams.
street, i ia, ae, i .
strength, fh-mitu-do, -dinis, F.
strengthen, firmo, are, avi, atum ;
[munio, ire, ivi, Itum].
stretch, pertineo, ere, ul.
strike terror into the hearts of,
timorem in-jicio, ere, -jeci, -jectuin u\
dat.
strive, conten-do, ere, -di, -turn ; [nltor,
1, nlsus sum].
strong, he, valeo, ere, ui.
1. struggle, verb, lab'~>rr>, are, avi,
atum.
2. struggle, noun, certa-men, -minis,
N.: helium, I, x.
subjection, servi-ttis, -tutis, F.
submit, servio, ire, ivi, Itum.
successfully, bene ; [feliciter].
successive, continuus, a, um.
1. such ( = so great), tantus, a, um.
2. such, of a character, talis, e.
3. such . . . as, in II. Ex. !, v*e qui ic.
subjunctive.
1. sudden, repentlnus, a, um.
2. sudden, make a sudden attack,
um' subito, (//-., ^sudden!*/.
suddenly, subito.
suffer ( = receire), ac-ci]Mc">, ere, -cepl,
-ceptum; ( = allow), patior, I, passus sum.
sufficient, sufficiently, satis.
suggestion, at the of, use auc-tor,
-toris, M., =su<tii(>xtcr, hi ahl. absol.
suitable, idoneus, a. um.
summer, aes-tas, -tutis, F.
summon (of several persons), convoco,
are, avi, atum; (of one person), voco,
are, avi, atum.
superior, be , prae-sto, are, -stitl.
1. supplies, commeatus, us, M.
2. supplies of corn, res frumentaria.
suppose, arbitror, art, atus sum; judico,
are, avi. atum.
supreme power, regnum, I, x.
sure, be not to, cave, //. snh'tmctire.
surpass, prae-sto, are, -stitl, w. dat.;
ante-cedo, ere, -cessi. -cessum.
1. surrender, verb, transit iir, de-do,
ere, -didl, -ditum ; intransitive, se dedo
2. surrender, verb (of. uirin'j vp arm*).
tra-do, ere, -didl, -ditum.
3. surrender, noun, dedit-io, -ionis, F.
surround, circum-venio, Ire, -venl, -ven-
tum ; [(=put round), circum-do, -dare,
-dedl, -datum; (= overwhelm), circum-
fundo, ere, -fudi, -fusum].
swamp, pal-us, -udis, F.
sAvarms, multitu-do, -dinis, F.
SAA'ay, dic-io, -ionis, F.
SAA'iftness, celeri-tas, -tatis, v.
swim, no, nare.
SAA T immer, be a, -can swim.
SAVord, g-ladius, I, M.
Tac farinas, Tacfarinas, ae, M.
Tarentum, Tarentum, I, x.
1. take, capio, ere, cepl, captum ; (of
triklnf) a census), habeo, ere, ul, itum.
2. take away, tollo, ere, sustull, sub-
latum.
3. take up (=JUl up), contineo, ere, ul;
(of taking up arms), capio, ere, cepi,
captum.
4. take up a position, con-sido, ere,
-sedl, -sessum.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
341
taught, be, disco, ere, didicl, learn;
(be taught by, learn from.
teacher, magis-ter, -trl, M.
tear, lacrima, ae, F. ; in tears, = weep-
ing.
tear down, scindo, ere, scidi, scissum.
tell, dlco, ere, dixl, dictum, w. dat. of
person.
tempest, tempes-tas, -tatis, F.
ten, decem.
tent, tabernaculum, I, x.
tentli, decimus, a, um.
terms, condic-io, -ionis, F. (use sing.).
terrify, terreo, ere, ui, ituin.
territory, ager, agri, w. ; fTn-es. -iuin,
M. Jili'i'.
terror, terr-or, -oris, M. ; tim-or, -oris, M.
test, periclitor, arl, atus sum.
Thames, Tames-is, -is, M. ; (ace. in -///<).
than, quam.
1. that, pronoun, is, ea, id; emphatic.
ille, a, ud.
2. that, conj., ii-ith noun clauses un-
translated ; with clauses of purpose, ut,
ne ; with clauses of result, ut.
their, suus, a, am ; or eorum.
then ( next), deinde.
there ( in that place}, ibi ; ( = to that
place), eo ; (as introductory adverb), un-
translated,
thereupon, turn.
they, el, eae, ea.
thing, res, rel, F. ; or in m>in. and ace.
use neuter of adj. or pi-<>n<'n.
think, existimo, are, avl, atum ; arbi-
tror, an, atus sum.
third, tertius, a, um.
thirty, trlfrinta.
this, hlc, haec, hoc.
though, ^although. (II. 88.)
thousand, mille.
threaten, minor, arl, atus sum, u\ dat.
of person and ace. of thing.
three, tres, tria ; three hundred,
t recent!, ae, a.
through, per, w. ace.
1. throw (of weapons), ad-igo, ere, -egi,
-actum ; con-jicio, ere, -jecl, -jectum.
2. throw (Into chains), con-jicio, ere,
-jecl, -jectum.
3. throw oneself, se pro-jicio, ere,
-jecl, -jectum ; throw oneself into,
ir-rumpo, ere, -rupl, -ruptum. >/. in and
ace.; throw oneself in front of,
se offero, ferre, obtulT, oblatum, ?/ <int.
4. throw away, ab-jicio, ere, -jecl,
-jectum.
r>. thrown down, ab-jicio, ere, -jecl,
-jectum.
G. throw out, ob-dfico. ere. -dfixT, -flue-
turn.
7. throw together, coacervo, are,
avl, atum.
thus, itaque.
1. time, teTnjt-us, -oris, x.
2. time, a seeond , itornrn. n<lr.
3. time, a sliort , pauli<pcr. tn/r.
4. time, at that , turn, adv. ; or liter-
n I hi.
5. time, for a, aliquamdiii.
6. time, one at a , singularis, e, adj.
to. ad, u\ ace. ; in, ic. ace.
to-day, hodie, <lc.
to-morrow, eras, adv.
top, use summus, a, um, adj.
tortoise, testu-do, -dinis, F.
total, use summa, ae, F. ; (noun, =sum
total).
tower, turr-is, -is, F. ; (ace. in -im).
towards, ad, w. ace.
town, oppidum, I, x.
trader, merca-tor, -t^rls, M.
1. transport, verb, transports, iire, avf,
atum.
2. transport, adj., onerarius, a, um.
traveller, via-tor, -toris. M.
treachery, perfldia, ae, K.
treat, ago, ere, egi, actum.
tree, arb-or, -oris, F.
trench, fossa, ae, F.
tribe, nat-io, -ionis, F.
tribune, tribiinus, I, M.
trifling, levis, e.
triple, tri-plex, -plicis.
troopers, =cai-alry.
troops, milites, um, M.; copiae. ftrum, F.
trunk, truncus, 1, M.
trust, con-fldo. ere, -flsus sum.
1. try, conor, arl, atus sum ; <>r use the
imperfect tense of the rerh.
2. try to influence, try to win
over, sollicito, are, avl, atuni.
3. try to prevent, prohibeo, ere, in
pres., imperf., or fut. tense.
1. turn aside, a-verto, ere, -vertl, -ver-
sum.
2. turn back, ver-to, ere, -tl, -sum.
twelve, duodecim.
twenty, vlgintl ; twenty-fifth, vi-
cesimus (a, um) quintus (a, um).
twice, bis.
two, duo, duae, duo ; two hundred,
ducentl, ae, a.
unable, be , non possum, posse, potul.
uncemented materials, agger, ag-
geris, M.
uncertain, incertus, a, um.
under, sub, prep. w. abl.
undertake, sus-cipio, ere, -cepi, -cep-
tum.
undertaking, conatus, us, M.
understand, intel-lego, ere, -lexl, -10c-
tum.
unequal to, in II., Ex. 33=since they
COUUl il<t In-ill'.
unexhausted, rec-ens, -entis.
unfavorable, alienus, a, um ; inlquus,
a, um ; [incommodus, a, um].
unfriendly, inimlcus, a, um.
unknowiOncognitus, a, um.
nnlt-ss, iiNi.
unoccupied, be, vaco, are, avl, atum.
342
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
unsuccessful, udsersus, a, um.
1. until, con/., dum, d<>
1. until, prep., ad, H-. ace.
unturned, leave 110 stone, nihil
praeter-mitto, ere, -mlsl, -missum.
unwilling 1 , be, nolo, nolle, nolui.
uphold, conserve, are, avT, atum.
upon, in, w. ace.
upper, super-ior, -ius.
uprising 1 , motiis, us, M.
urge, hortor, an, atus sum.
1. use, verb, utor, I, usus sum, u*. all.
2. use, make -of, =use.
3. use to come, ventito, are, avl, atum.
4. used to, 11 se the imperfect tense.
useful, iitilis, e.
useless, inutilis, e ; [for, = ad w. ace.].
usual, his, u*r suns, a uiu.
utmost, suimnus, a, um.
Valerius, Valerius, I, M.
valiantly, farther.
valley, vall-es, -is, F.
valor, vir-tus, -tutis, K.
value, of great , mfi^iM.
1. vanquish, vinco, ere, viol, vietum ;
supero, are, avl, atum.
1. vanquished, victus, a, um.
vehemence, vis, K. [9].
Venutius, Venutius, I, M.
venture, audeo, ere, ausus sum.
Vesontio, Vesont-io, -ionis, F.
vessel, nav-is, -is, K.
vicinity, exprexx by using ab or ad. with
itunii'x >'f towns.
victorious, vic-tor, -toris, M.
victory, victoria, ae, F.
vigorous, make a attack, magno
impetu ag-gredior, 1, -gressus sum ; acri-
ter impetum facio, ere. feel, factum.
A'igorously, acriter.
village, vicus, I, M.
violence, vis, K. [9].
voice, vox, vocis, F.
voluntarily, ultro.
AV
wage, gero, ere, gessl, gestum.
wagon, carrus, 1, M.
vvait, wait for, exspecto, are, avl,
atum, w. ace.
wall (of town), murus, I, M. ; (of camp),
vallum, I, N.
1. want, inopia, ae, F.
2. wanting, l>e , desum, deesse, deful.
1. Avar, helium, I, x.
2. war galley, Avar ship, nav-is
(-is, K.) longa.
warn, moneo, ere, ul, itum.
AA'arriors = soldiers or forces.
waste, lay, vasto, are, avl, atum;
[populor, arl, atus sum].
watch, vigilia, ae, F.
way, in any, ullo modo.
Avealth, duitiae, arum, F. j>lm:
weapon, teluin, i, \.
weather, tenxpes
1. weep, fleo, ere, flevl, fletum.
2. weeping, fletus, us, M.
1. weigh, examine, are, avl, atum.
weigh anchor, naves solvo, er r ;,
sol vi, solutum. = loose the ////.
3. weigh down, op-primo, en
-pressum.
weight '), auctori-tas, -tatis,
F. ; (=]> earn ness), onus, oneris, x. ; [(o/
xiti'-fricil trt'if/lit\, ]K!iid-us, -er's, x.].
welfare, consult- of, eunsul-6, ere,
-uT, -turn, tr. flat.
well -merited, meriti^simus, a, um.
were to, in If., Ex. M, =<>ught,
oportet.
what, quis, quae, quid.
whatever, omnlno, mli:.
when (relative), ubi, cum; (//
I, quando.
whence, unde.
Avhenever, cum.
where, in II., Ex. ',!, il/i'/ue, =and
there.
whether, mini; whether. . . or,
utrum . . . an.
which (of tico), liter, tra, tvum; from
which, unde.
while, dum ; or usepres. pa/fie.
who (relative), qul, quae, quod ; (inter-
rogative), quis, quae, quid.
whole, totus, a, um.
wholly, omnlno ; penitus.
why, cur ; quare.
wide, latus, a, um.
widely, late.
width, latitu-do, -dinis, F.
w r ife, con-junx, -jugis, F.; ux-or, -oris, F.
1. will, noun, testSmentum, I, x.
2. \vill, against the , use invltus,
a, um, adj. (==unwitting).
1. Avilling, be, volo, velle, volul.
2. willing, l>e more , maid, malle,
nialul.
1. win over, concilio, are, uvl, atum.
2. win, try to over, sollicito, are,
avl, atum.
wing, cornu, us, x.
1. winter, verb, hiemo, are, avl, atum.
2. winter, noun, hiems, hiemis, F.
3. w^inter, pass the , hiemo, are,
avl, atum.
winter quarters, hiberna, drum, N.
plur.
wipe out, del-eo, ere, -evl, -etum.
wise, sapi-ens, -entis.
1. wish, volo, velle, volul.
2. wish, not to, nolo, nolle, nolul.
with, cum, w. abl.; or use abl. alone..
1. withdraw, withdraw oneself,
se re-cipio, ere, -cepi, -ceptum ; dis-cedo,
ere, -cessl, -cessum ; (if from a ram-
part), de-cedo, ere, -cessl, -cessum :
2. AvithdraAV ( = lead o/), de-duco, ere,
-duxl, -ductum.
PART III. VOCABULARY.
343
1. within (ut'tiii
2. within, be a very little, mini-
mum abesse.
1. without, sine, w. all.
1. without, be , careo, ere, ui, w. all.
withstand, sus-tineo, ere, -tinui, -ten-
turn; (of stonnx), fero, ferre, tuli, la-
tum.
woacl, vitrum, I, x.
woman, muli-er, -eris, F.
wont, be to, use perfect tenses of con-
suesco, ere, -smevl.
wood, silva, ae, F.
J. word, bring , nuntio, are, avi,
atum.
i>. word, bring back , renfmtio,
;u>.\ avi, atum.
work, op-us, -eris, N._
workman, faber, bri, M.
worthy, di^nus, a, um, w. al>L, or u\
qul and subjunctive.
would that, utinam, w. subjunctive.
1. wound, verb, vulnero, are, avi, atum.
2. wound, noun, vuln-us, -eris, N.
wretched, miser, era, erum.
wrong, injuria, ae, F. ; [wrongs done
to ... by . . . , use objective and sub-
jective genitive].
wrong-doing, injuria, ae, F.
yard, three hundred yards two hundred
paces, (roughly).
year, annus, I. M.
yesterday, herl.
1. yet, tamen.
2. yet, not, nondum.
you, tii, vos.
young man, adulesc-ens, -ends, M.
your, tuus, a, uui ; vester, tra, truni.
344
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS.
(The references are to the Sections of Parts II. and III., not to the pages).
Ablative absolute, II., 48-54, 125, (c); III.,
85, (o); when not to be used, II., 52;
substitutes for, II., 54.
Ablative case, various uses of, II., 123-127 ;
III. , 85.
Accent, page 3.
Accompaniment, ablative of, II., 124, (b);
III., 85 (e).
Accusative and infinitive construction,
III., 101, (6) ; in exclamations, III.,
101, (6), vii.
Accusative case, various uses of, II., 90-
99; III., 83; Greek accusative, III., 83,
00, ii.
Accusing and acquitting, construction with
verbs of II., 67.
Adjectives of first and second declensions,
III., 10, 55; of third declension, III.,
11, 56 ; declension of comparatives and
superlatives, III., 12; comparison, III.,
13, 57; agreement with noun, II., 9,
(c), III., 78, 79, (6); used as a sub-
stantive, III., 88, (a); comparative and
superlative sometimes only imply com-
parison, III., 88, (ft); often translated
by an adverb in English, III., 88, (d);
used in a partitive sense in agreement
with nouns, to denote the part or order,
II., 114, (6); III., 88, (c).
Adverbial accusative, II., 97, III., 83, (e);
adverbial comparison, III., 57.
Adverbs, formed from adjectives, III., 17 ;
comparison, III., 17 ; formed from nouns
and pronouns, III., 59 ; fossilized phrases,
III., 59; use of, III., 108; used as pre-
positions, III., 83, (/), iii.
Agent, dative of, with gerundives, II., 105 ;
III., 82, (d) ; the primary and secondary
agents, II., 128; dative of agent with
perfect passives and in poetry, III., 82,
(d), ii.
Agreement, forms of, II., 9; III., 77-79;
of verb, III., 79, (a) ; of predicate
adjective, III., 79, (5); of predicate
_noun, III., 79, (c).
Aid, conjugation of, III., 72, (c).
Anaphora, III, 110, (A).
animl, locative, III , 86, ii.
Answer, yes or no, III., 108, iii.
Antecedent, peculiarities of, II., 197; III.
93.
Anticipation, accusative of, II., 208, N.B.
Apodosis, II., 70-85 ; III., 99, (h), i.
Apposition, II., 9, (o); III., 77.
Archaic case-endings, III., 47, (c), 48, (c) ;
verbal forms, ill., 66.
Arrangement of words and clauses, II.,
1-8,238; III., 110.
Ai-six and thesix, III., 112.
Asking, verbs of, with double ace., II., 71 ;
III., 83, (/), i.; with wt or ne, II., 27;
lit omitted, III., 99, (a), 2, i.
Asyndeton, III, 109, (e).
Attraction of case in ante diem, II., 2-27 ;
of relative, II., 197, (e) ; of mood, II.,
220; III., 99, ()fc).
Believing, verbs of, II., 55.
belli, locative use of, II., 125, (a), (2);
III., 86, i. *
bos, declension of, III., 9.
Caesura and caesura! pause, III., 114.
Calendar, Roman, II., 221-229.
Calends, II., 222, 223.
eapio, conjugation of, III., 39.
Cardinal numbers, III., 15; declension of,
III., 14 and 16.
Case endings, synopsis of, III., 53; irregu-
lar, III., 47, '(c), 48, (c), 49, (c), 50, (c),
51, (c).
Cases, uses of, see under Nominative,
Genitive, etc.
causa, with genitive, III., 81, (i).
Causal clauses, II., 165, 166, 167; III.,
99, (g).
Causal conjunctions, III., 74, IT., (d).
Cause, ablative of, II., 123, (a); III., 85,
(w).
cave, in prohibitions, II., 150.
Characteristic, ablative of, II., 124 (6);
III., 85, (c).
Characteristic, genitive of, II., 115; III.,
81, (e).
Characteristic, relative clause of, II., 34,
35; III., 99, (c).
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS.
345
Chiasmus, III, 110, (A).
circuniclo, double construction with,
II., 74.
eoepl, conjugation of, III., 72, fa).
Cognate accusative, II., 96 ; III., 83. (d).
Collective, noun with plural verb, II., 11 ;
III., 79, (a), i.
Commanding, verbs of, with dative, II.,
55 ; followed by ut or ne, II., 27.
Commands, how expressed, II., 149, 150;
III., 98, (a), i.
Commodl et incommoiU, dative of, II.,
101.
Comparative conjunctions, III., 74, n.,
(0)-
Comparatives, declension of, III., 12 ; con-
struction with, II., 123, (f); HI., 85,
(/)
Comparison, ablative of, II., 123, (c) ; III.,
85, (/); of adjectives, III., 13, 57: of
adverbs, III., 17 ; conditional clauses of,
III., 99, I/O, iv.; relative clauses of, III.,
99, (<?), iii.
Complementary infinitive, II., 19; III.,
101, (): extended use of, in poetrv,
III., 101, (a), iii.
Complete action, tenses of, II., 201, 204,
205.
Compound words, III., 76.
Concessive clauses, II., 88; III., 99, (/).
Concessive conjunctions, III., 74, n.,(/).
Concords, 11., 9; III., 77-79.
Condemning, verbs of, II., 67.
Conditional clauses, II., 78-87; III., 99,
(/<).
Conditional conjunctions, III., 74, H., ().
Conjugation of verbs, III., 27-46.
Conjunctions, III., 74, 109.
Consecutive clauses. II., 33 ; III., 99, (ft).
Consecutive conjunctions, III., 74, n.,
(b).
C<->,i*ti-ri,-fi6 prat>(jn<~'.n*, II., 125, (a), (3).
cdnsulo, with dative or accusative, II.,
59.
Co-ordinate conjunctions, III., 74, i.
Co-ordinating relative, II., 195; III., 93,
iii.
Correlatives, table of, III., 63; rendered
by as, II., 197, (/).
Crime, genitive of, II., 67.
cum (conjunction), since or althmigJi, 1 1.,
167; when, whenever, II., 168, 189, 170;
cum . . . tinn, II., 170, (c). See Tem-
poral, Causal, and Concessive clauses.
cum (preposition), appended to pronouns,
II., 7 ; with ablative of accompaniment
ablative of accompaniment
,11., 124, (&),(!); III., 85, (e).
and manner
Dactyl and dactylic hexameter, III., 113.
how expressed, II., 22: t.
Dative, chief uses of the, II., 100-108;
III.
debeo, denoting duty or obligation, II.,
160, (ft).
Declension of nouns, III., 1-9 ; of adjec-
tives, III., 10-12, 14; of pronouns, III.,
18-26; of numerals, III., 16.
Defective nouns, III., 54, (a) ; adjectives,
III., 56a ; comparison, III., 57; verbs,
HI., 72.
Definition, genitive of, III., 81, ih).
Demonstrative pronouns, declension of,
III., 22, 23; peculiar forms of, III., 61 ;
uses of, II., 177-184; III., 92.
Demonstrative pronouns and adverbs,
table of, I II., 63.
Dependent questions, II., 43-47; III., 99,
(d) ; clauses with indicative or subjunc-
tive, III., 99; clauses in indirect narra-
tion, U., 214, (a), (2); III., 99, (d).
Deponent verbs, III., 68 ; synopsis of con-
jugation, III., 40; gerundive of, II.,
141, (b); peculiarities of, III., 68, (6),
(c).
Derivative suffixes, III., 7"..
Descriptions, imperfect used in, II., 199,
(c),(rf); III., 97, (ft).
Desiderative verbs, III., 75, in.
deus, declension of, 111., 9.
Diaeresis, division of verse, III., 114; of
syllables, III., 119.
Difference, ablative of, II., 124, (d); III.,
85, (0).
dlgnus, with ablative, II., 126; III., 85,
(d); with a clause of characteristic, II.,
35.
Diminutive noun suffixes, III., 75, I.,
verbs, III., 75, in.
Direct object, II., 90, (a) ; III., 83, (a).
Direct question, II., 40, 42.
Disjunctive questions, II., 42, 44.
Distance, accusative of, II., 92; III., 83,
(c) ; ablative of, III., 85, (</), i.
Distributive numerals, III. ,'58, (c).
(loml, locative, II., 125, (a), (2); III.,
86, i.
d< >imis, declension of, If I., 9.
donee, construction with, II., 172, 174.
dono, double construction of, 11., 74.
Dubitative subjunctive, II., 151, (c); III.,
98, (b).
dum, how used, II., 171-174.
Duration of time, II., 92, 125, (b); III., 83,
(c), 85, (6), iv.
E
Ecthlipsis, I IT., 116, (a).
Effecting, verbs of, II., 81.
Elision or slurring, III., 116, (a).
Emphasis, affected by the order of the
words, II., 3, 5, 8/233, (a); III., 110,
<ft),(e), (/t), iii.,(t>
Enclitics, II., 7.
eo, conjugation of, III., 45 ; passive of,
III., 71, (a); compounds of, III., 71,
(a).
Epistolary tenses, II., 204, (c).
Ethical dative, II., 107 ; 111., 82, (/), iii.
346
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Euphonic changes in verb formation, III.,
65.
Exchanging, verbs of, II., 124, (c); III.,
85 (0-
Exclamations, accusative in, II., 98; III.,
83, (It); accusative and infinitive in,
III., 101, (b), vii.
exuo, construction of, II., 73.
farl, conjugation of, III., 72, (e).
Favor, dative case after verbs meaning,
II., 55.
Fearing, verbs of, with ne (won), ut, II.,
154 ; as modal verbs, II. , 155.
Feelings, genitive with verbs of the, II.,
62; III., 81, (/), iii.; accusative with
verbs of the, II., 94.
Feet, in verse, III., 112.
fero, conjugation of, III., 44; com-
pounds of, III., 71, (b).
Final clauses, II., 24-32 ; III., 99 (ft).
Final conjunctions, III., 74, n., (a).
flo, conjugation of, III., 46; compounds
of, III., 71, (c).
For, introductory, not translated into
Latin, II., 207, (a).
fore ut, periphrasis with, II., 33, N.B. ;
III., 101, (6), v.
Formation of words, III., 75, 76.
Fractions, how expressed, III., 58, (e).
Freedom, adjectives of, with ablative, III.,
85, (h), i.
Frequentative verbs, III., 75, in.; tenses
in frequentative clauses, II., 202, 204,
().
fretus, with the ablative, II., 126; III.,
85, (k), iii.
fruor and fungor, with the ablative,
II., 65; III., 85, (a), ii._
ful, fueram, fuero in compound
tenses, III., 97, (#), iii.
Future conditions, II., 83 ; III., 99, (h), ii.
Future infinitive, after verbs of hoping,
etc., II., 13; III., 101, (b), iii.
Future participle, II., 147 ; III., 102, (&).
Future perfect, use of, HI., 205; III., 97,
(/) ; changed to pluperfect subjunctive,
in indirect narration, after a secondary
tense, II., 214, (a), (3).
Future tense, use of, II., 200; III., 97,
(c).
G
Gender, general rules for, III., 52; gender
endings and exceptions, in the five de-
clensions, III., 47, (b), 48, (b), 49, (6), 50,
(b), 51, (b) ; agreement of adjectives and
pronouns, II., 9, (a), (6), (c), (d); III.,
78 79
Genitive, uses of, II., 109-121; III., 81;
use with adjectives extended in poetry,
III., 81, (/), ii.
Gerund, forms of, II., 133; III., 35; uses
of, II., 133,134; III., 103.
Gerundive, forms of, I.I, 141) : III., 34 : uses
of, II., 140-143; III., 104.
glorior, ablative with, II., 65.
gratia, genitive with, III., 81, (i).
Greek nouns, III., 47, (d), 48, (d~), 49, (d).
habeo, with perfect participle, II., 203,
204, (&); III., 97, (<?), i.
Heroic verse, Latin, III., 113.
Heteroclite nouns, III., 54, (c).
Heterogeneous nouns, III., 54, (b).
Hexameter verse, III., 113.
Hiatus, III., 116, (b).
hie, declension of, III., 23; peculiar
forms of, III., 61 ; uses of, II., 177, 179,
(a); III., 92, (a).
Hindering, verbs of, II., 156-159.
Historical infinitive, II., 131 ; III., 101,
(d).
Historical present, II., 198, (a), 28; III.,
97, (a); sequence of tenses with, III.,
107, iii.
Hoping, verbs of, II., 13; III., 101, (b),
iii.
Hortatory (or Hortative) subjunctive, II.,
151, (a); III., 98, (a).
liuml, locative use of, II., 125, (o), (2);
III., 86, i.
i-stems, declension of nouns, III., 6.
Ictus in metre, III., 112.
Idem, declension of, III., 23, 61 ; followed
by qu I or ac, II., 197, (/'); uses of, III.,
92, (e).
Ides, II., 222, 223.
idoiieus, with relative clause of charac-
teristic, II., 35.
ille, declension of, III., 23; peculiar
forms of, III., 61 ; uses of, III., 92, (c).
Imperative mood, inflection of, III., 37,
38; uses of, II., 149, 150; III., 100; in
indirect discourse, turned by subjunc-
tive, II., 214, (),(!).
Imperfect tense, uses of, II., 199; III.,
97, (b).
Impersonal verbs, purely impersonal, III.,
72, (y)\ intransitives used impersonally in
passive, III., 72, (h), 96, (b) ; impersonal
(or rather unipersonal) verbs, with clause
or infinitive as subject, III., 72 (').
Inceptive or inchoative verbs, III., 75, HI.
Incomplete action, tenses of, II., 198, 199,
200.
Indeclinable nouns, gender of, III, 52, (c) ;
list of, III., 54, (d)', adjectives, III.,
56a.
Indefinite pronouns, II., 185-192; III., 26,
62, 95.
Indefinite pronouns and adverbs, table of,
III., 63.
Indefinite relative pronouns and adverbs,
table of, 1 1 1., 63.
Indicative mood, inflections of, III., 27,
2S. (U, (n), 1; in principal clauses, III.,
97; in dependent clauses, III., 99.
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS.
347
ius, with ablative, II., 120; III.,
>r>, (</): \vitli clause of characteristic,
II., 35.
Indirect discourse, II., 213-220; state-
ments, questions and commands in, II.,
214, (), (1); subordinate clauses in, II.,
214, (.), (2); pronouns in, II., 214, (b);
adverbs in, II., 214, (c) ; real or apparent
exception to rules, II., 215; conditional
sentences in, II., 87. See also general
rules in III., 106.
Indirect object, II., 100; III.. 82, (a).
Indirect questions, II., 43-47; III., 99,
(d).
Infinitive, forms of, III., 31, 32, 64, (c), 3;
uses of, II., 12-23, 130-132; III., 101 ; ex-
tended use of, in poetry, III., l<n,(),
iii.
Infinitive clauses, II., 206, N.B., 207, 211.
iiiquain (inquit), position of, II., 6;
used parenthetically. II., 18; defective,
Ml.. 72, (d).
Inseparable particles, III., 76.
Instrumental ablative, II., 124; III., 85,
().
Intensive verbs, III., 75, in.
interdlco, construction of, II., 77.
interest, construction of, II., 63; III.,
81, (A iii.
Interest, dative of, II., 101, 102; III., 82,
(ft),
Interjection, accusative with, in exclama-
tions. II., 98; III., 83, (/*).
Interrogative particles, niinni', mini, -tie,
utrum an, amwn, necne II., 40-44.
Interrogative pronouns, III., 25, 62, 94;
uses of, III., 94.
Interrogative pronouns and adverbs, table
of, III , 63.
Intransitive verbs, II., 55; used imperson-
ally in the passive, II., 57, 142, 234,
N.B. ; III., 7-2, (/,), 82, (e), iii., 96, (It).
-16, verbs in, of third conjugation, III.,
39; list of, III., 67.
Ipse, declension of, III., 23; uses of, II.,
184; III., 92, (/).
Irregular nouns, declension of, III , 9 ;
case-endings of nouns, III., 47, (c), 48,
(c), 49, (c), 50, (c), 51, (c) ; case-endings
of adjectives of third declension, III.,
56, (b) ; verbal endings, III. , 66.
Is, declension of, III., 22, 61; uses of,
III., 89, ii.; 92, (d).
iste, declension of, III., 23; uses of, II.,
178; III., 92, (b).
It, no equivalent in Latin, when used as
an impersonal or representative sub-
ject, II., 9, (e), N.B.
itaque, position of, II., 6.
Iterative verbs, III, 75, in.
-Ins, adjectives with genitive singular in,
III., 14.
J
jam, with present and imperfect. III.,
97, (a), (b).
jubeo, construction with, II., 23.
Juppiter, declension of, III., 9.
Jusjuramlum, declension of, III., 9.
jussu (defective), III., 54, (a); ablativ<
^ of cause, III., 85, (m), ii.
juvo, takes accusative, II., 58.
K
Knowing, verbs of, with accusative and
infinitive, II., 12; with interrogative
and subjunctive, II., 45.
laeclo, accusative after, II., 58.
licet, used in third person singular, III.,
72, (i) ; used with an infinitive, to de-
note permission, II., 163 ; sometimes fol-
lowed by subjunctive, II., 163, (b); used
as concessive particle, III., 74, n., ( f),
99, (t), i.
Likeness, adjectives of, II., 102; III., 82,
(e), v.
Limit of motion, accusative of, II., 93;
III., 83, (g).
Locative ablative, II., 125 ; III., 85,
Loca
tive ablative, II., 125 ; III., 85, (k).
tive, the, II., 125, (a), (2); III., 86;
noun in apposition with name of a place
in the locative. III., 77, iii.
loiigius, used without quam, II., 123,
(c), (2) ; III., 85, (/), ii.
M
inagis, comparison expressed by, III.,
57.
magiil, with verbs of estimating, III.,
81, (g), i.
Making, verbs of, with two accusatives,
II., 70; III., 83, (/), i.
Hialo, conjugation of , III., 43 ; with com-
plementary infinitive, II., 19.
Manner, ablative of, II., 124, (b) ; III.,
85, (e).
Mastery, adjectives of, with genitive, II.,
117.
materfamilias, declension of, III., 9.
maxime, comparison expressed by, III.,
Means, ablative of, II., 124, (a); III., 85,
(a).
iiieminl (defective), III., 72, (b); with
genitive, II., 62; with accusative, II.,
64 ; future imperative of, for present,
III., 100, (b).
Memory, verbs of, II., 62, 64.
Metre of Virgil, III., 111-119.
Middle use of passive, III., 96, (c).
mllitiae (locative), II., 125, (a), (2) ; III.,
86, i.
mille (inillia), how used, III., 58, (/);
declension of -tnillia, III., 16.
misereor, construction with, II., 02.
miseret, construction with, II., fi,x.
Months, names of, II., 222, footnote 1.
Moods, see Indicative, Subjunctive, etc.
348
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Motion, limit of, II., 93; III., 83, (#);
motion from, II., 123, (b), 129: III., 85,
(h).
Multiplication, distributives used to ox-
press, III., 58, (c).
K
Natural gender, rules of, III. , 52.
natus, with ablative, II., 123, () ; III.,
85, (/), i.
-ne (enclitic), II., 7; used in questions,
II., 40, 41.
ne, with negative purpose, II., 25, 27, 29;
with dum, II., 171; with imperative or
subjunctive, to express prohibition.s, etc.,
II., 152; omitted after cave, II., 150;
with clause of concession, III., 99, (?'), ii-
ne . . . quidem, II., 6.
Nearness, adjectives of, with dative, III.,
82, (e), v.
Necessity, how expressed, II., 161.
necne (or not), used in double indirect
questions, II., 44.
nefas, with ablative supine, II., 138.
nemo, defective in case, III., 54, ().
Neuter adjectives used substantively, III.,
88, (a).
nisi, in conditional clauses, II., 78; with
ablative absolute, II., 51; with single
words, II., 89.
noli (nollte), with infinitive, to express
prohibitions, II., 150.
nolo, conjugation of, III., 43; with in-
finitive, II., 19, 22.
nomeii est, construction with, II., 103 ;
III!, 77, viii.
Nominative case. III., is a
non quod, non quo, with subjunc-
tive, II., 165, (b), N.B. ; III., 99, (g\ iv.
Nones, II., 822, 226.
Noster, Nostrl, Nostrum, use of,
III., 60, (ft).
Nouns, declension of, III., 1-9; derivative
suffixes used in forming, III., 75, i.
num, force of, II., 41; in dependent
questions, II., 43.
Number, agreement in, adjective, II., 9,
(c); pronoun, II., 9, (d); III., 93; verb,
II., 9, (e), 10, 11.
Numeral adverbs, III., 58, (rf).
Numerals, III., 15, 16, 58; method of com-
binintr, III., 58, (b).
Object, direct, II., 90; III., 83, (); in-
direct, II. , 100 ; III. , 82, (a) ; noun clauses
used as objects, II., 207-211.
Objective genitive, II., 112, 117, 120; III.,
81, (d); with adjectives, III., 81, (/).
Oblique cases, page 218, footnote.
Oblique narration, see Indirect discourse _
OdI, conjugation. of, III., 72, (b).
oportet, used in third person, III., 72,
(i) ; construction, II, 160, (c), 163, (b).
Optative use of subjunctive, III., 98, (a).
opus and iisus, with ablative, III, 85,
_(a).
Ordtio obliqua, see Indirect discourse.
Order of words, II., 1-8; III., 110; of
clauses, III., 110, (m).
Ordinal Numerals, list of, III., 15; declen-
sion of, III.. 16.
paenitet, construction with, II., 68.
Participial phrases, value of, II., 148, (a).
Participles, II., 144-148, III., 64, (c), iv.;
102 ; with force of substantives, II., 148,
(b); of adjectives, II., 148, (c); case-
endings of present participle, III., 56,
(b).
Particles, III., 74-76.
Partitive apposition, III., 77, iv.
Partitive sfenitive, II., 113, 114; III., 81,
(b).
Passive voice, inflection of, III., 28, 30, 32,
34, 38 ; for impersonal use of, see In-
transitive Verbs.
Paterfamilias, declension of, III., 9.
Patronymics, III., 75, i.
Penalty, genitive of, II., 67 ; ablative of,
III., 85, (/), i.
Perfect tense, uses of, II., 201, 202; III.,
97, (d); perfect participle with hah,-,,,
II., 203, 204, (b) ; perfect participle with
fut,.fueram,fuer6, III., 97, (g), iii.
Periodic sentence, page 115, footnote 1 ;
II., 238; III., 110, (,,)-
Periphrastic conjugations, III., 69, 102,
(b), 104, (a); indicative of, in apodosis,
II., 85, N.B.
Pennission, how expressed, II., 163.
Person, agreement of pronoun in, II., 9,
(d) ; agreement of verb in, II. , 9, (e),
Personal construction of verba sentn-nili et
decldrandl in passive, II., 14 ; III., 101,
(b), ii.
Personal endings, III., 64, (b).
Personal pronouns, declension of, III., 18,
19, 22; peculiar forms of, III., 60, (c) ;
syntax of, II., 176, ISO; III., 89.
Persuading, verbs of, with dative, II., 5", ;
with ut or ne clause, II., 27; III., 99,
(a), 2; with accusative and infinitive-,
II., 31.
Phrase, with value of a verb, II., 17, 55,
62; phrases, neuter, III., 52, (<).'
Place, from which, II., 123, (b); III., 85,
(h); in which, II., 125, (a); III., 85, (A);
to it-Inch, II., 93; III., 88, (g).
Plenty, verbs of, II., 65, 78; III., 85, (a);
adjectives of. II., 117, 126; III., 85, (a).
Pluperfect tense, uses of, II., 204; III.,
97, (e).
Plural, nouns with special meaning in,
III., 54, (e).
plus, declension of, III., 12; comparison
of, III., 13; without f/uam, II., 123, (c),
(2); III., 85, (/), ii.
Polysyndeton, III., 109, (e).
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS.
349
posse, used after spero, II., 13 ; III., 101, qul, see Relative Pronoun.
,
Possession, dative of, II., 103 ; HI., 82, (#).
Possessive genitive, III., 8, (a).
Possessive pronouns (adjectives), III, 21,
CO, (c), 90; with appositive in genitive
ca^f, II., 1-4, (a); III., 77, ii.; contain-
ing the antecedent of a relative, III.,
93, xi.
possum, conjugation of, III., 42; a mo-
dal verb, II., 19.
Potential subjunctive, II., 151, (ft); III.,
98, (c).
Predicate noun, II., 9, (ft); III., 79, (c);
a-ljec-tive, II., 9, (c); III., 79, (ft); geni-
tive, II., 118; accusative, II., 70; abla-
tive, II., 76, 124, (ft), (3).
Pregnant construction, II., 125, (a), (3).
See also II., 177.
Prepositions, III., 73, 87 ; in composition,
III., 76.
Present tense, uses of, II., 198; III., 97,
(a).
Price, genitive of, II., 118; III., 81, (a);
ablative of, II., 124, (c); III., 85, (i).
Primary tenses, II., 28; III., 107, foot-
note 1.
Principal clauses, in the indicative, III.,
97 : in the subjunctive, III., 98.
Principal parts of the verb, III., 64, (a).
Prohibitions, II., 150: III., 98, (a), 1, 100.
Promising, verbs of, with future infinitive,
II., 13.
Pronouns, declension of, III., 18-26, 60-62 ;
uses of, II., 176-197; III., 89-95.
Pronunciation of Latin, page 1.
prosum, conjugation of, III., 70; takes
the dative, II., 104.
Protasis, II., 79; III., 99, (h), i.
Purpose, expressed by subjunctive, II.,
24-32; III., 99, (a) ; by supine after verb
of motion, II., 136; III., 105, (i ; by
gerund and gerundive, II., 141, (a);
III., 103, (c); 104, (b), iii.; 104, (c) ;
dative of, II., 75, 101; III., 82, (c).
Quaeso, conjugation of, III., 72, (/).
Dualities, two, compared, II., 123, (c), (3).
Quality, genitive of, II., 115, 118, III.,
81, (e); ablative of, II., 124, (ft), III.,
85, (c).
Quantity of syllables in scansion, III., Ill,
footnote 1 ; 115, footnote 2.
quain, modifies superlative, III., 88, (ft);
with comparatives, II., 123, (c), (1); III.,
85, ( : compounded with ante and
print, II., 175, N.B.
quamquam, with indicative in conces-
sive clause, II., 88, (ft) ; III., 99, (i\ i.
quamvls, with subjunctive. II., 88, <c);
III., 99, (t), i. ; joined with single word,
II., 89.
Questions, direct and indirect, II., 40-47;
in indirect discourse, II , 214, (a), (1) ;
dubitative and rhetorical questions, II.,
161, (c); III., 98, (ft).
quln, II., 36; with verbs of dmthfiny,
preventing, etc., II., 156-159, 203 ; III.,
99, (ft), i.
qnisquam, II., 189; III., 95, vii. ; de-
clension of, III., 26.
quod (conjunction), II., 165; III., 99, ((/),
i. ; introducing noun clauses, II., 209.
quomiiius, II., 156-159, 208; III., 99,
(\ 1, i.
quoque, position of, II., 6.
quum, see cum (conjunction).
Reciprocal relation, how expressed, III.,
60, (e).
recorder, with accusative, II., 64.
Reduplication of tense stems, III., 65.
Reference, dative of, II., 106; III., 82,
(.0.
refert, construction of, II., 63.
Reflexive pronoun, declension of, III. , 20 ;
peculiar forms of, III., 60, (c) ; of first
and second person, III., 60, (a) ; uses of,
III., 91 ; verbs, HI., 83, (/), ii.,96, (c).
Relative clauses, III., 99, (e).
Relative pronouns, declension of, III., 24 ;
uses of, II., 193-197; III., 93; peculiar
forms of, III., 62.
Relative pronouns and adverbs, table of,
III., 93.
Repeated action, present tense denotes,
II., 198, (ft) ; imperfect tense denotes, II.,
199, (a) ; expressed in subordinate clauses
by the perfect, II. , 202 ; by the pluper-
fect, II., 204, (a). See also III., 97.
Respublica, declension of, III., 9.
Result, clauses of, II., 33-39 ; III., 99, (ft).
S
Saying, verbs of, construction, II., 12 ;
used personally in the passive, II., 14.
Scanning, III., 115.
Se, uses and reference of, III., 91, ii., iii.
Secondary tenses, II., 28; III., 107, foot-
note 1.
Semi-deponents, III., 68, (ft).
Sense construction, II., 11; III., 79, (a),
i. ; 79, (ft), ii., iii.
Separation, ablative of, II., 123, (a); III.,
85, (h) ; genitive of, in poetry, 81, (/),
Sequence of tenses, II., 28, 38, 46; III.,
107.
Service, dative of, II., 75, 101 ; III., 82, (c).
Serving, verbs of, with dative, II., 55.
si, with conditional clauses, II. , 78-87 ;
III., 99, (A).
Smell, verbs of, with accusative, II., 94.
solus, declension of, III., 14; with rela-
tive clause of characteristic, II., 35.
Source, ablative of, II., 123 (a); III., 85,
(0-
Space, extent of, accusative of, II., 92 ;
III., 83, (c).
350
PRIMARY LATIN BOOK.
Sparing, verbs of, with dative, II., 55.
Specification, accusative of. II., 97 ; III., 83,
(e); ablative of, II., 124, (e); III., 85, (d).
Spondaic verse, III., 116, (b).
Stems of the five declensions, III., 47, (a),
48, (a), 49, (a), 50, (a), 51, (a) ; present,
perfect and supine stems of verbs, III.,
64, (a).
Subject, agreement of verb with, II., 9,
(e),10, 11; III., 79, (a); subject of infini-
tive, II., 12; of historical infinitive, II.,
131.
Subjective genitive, II., Ill ; III., 81, (c).
Subjunctive mood, inflection of, III., 29,
30, 64, (c). 2; in principal clauses, III.,
98; in dependent clauses, HI., 99; in
clauses of purpose, II., 24-32 ; of result,
II., 33-39; in dependent questions, II.,
43-47 ; in conditional clauses, II., 81-87 ;
in concessive clauses, II., 88 ; independ-
ent uses of, II., 150-152: with verbs of
fcdr'mij, hi nil r i- ing, etc., II., 154-159;
with quod, II., 165, (6); with cum, II.,
167, 169; with dum, donee, quoad, II.,
171, 174 ; with antequarn and prius-
quam, II., 175; with qul, II., 194,196;
in indirect discourse, II., 214, (a); of
virtual indirect narration, II., 216, 220;
III., 99, (e), i.; by attraction, II., 220;
III., 99, (k). For synopsis of uses, see
III., 98, 99.
Subordinate conjunctions, III., 74, n.
Substantival use of infinitive, III., 101,
(c).
Substantive clauses, II., 206-211.
Suffixes, derivative, III., 75.
sum, conjugation of, III., 41; peculiar
forms of, III., 70; compounds of, III.,
70.
sunt qul, with clause of characteristic,
II., 188, (a).
Supine, forms and uses of, II., 135-139;
III., 105.
Swearing, verbs of, II. , 13.
Syllabication, page 2.
Synaeresis or synizesis, III., 119.
Synaloepha, III., 116, (a).
Syncopated verb forms, III., 66
Synesis, II., 11.
Teaching, verbs of, with two accusatives.
II., 71
Telling-, verbs of, with indirect question,
II. 45; III. ,99, (d).
Temporal clauses, II., 168-170, 172-175;
III., 99, (/).
Temporal conjunctions, III., 74, n, (c).
Tense stems, formation of present, per-
fect and supine, III., 65.
Tenses of the indicative, II., 198-205; III.,
97; of the infinitive, II., 16, 132, (c); of
participles, II., 144-147 ; of the subjunc-
tive in indirect questions, II., 46; III,
106, (6) ; 107, (6).
terra marlque, without preposition,
II., 125, (a), (2).
The. . . the, quo . . . ed, II., 124, (d) ; III.,
85, (g), ii.
Thinking, verbs of, construction with, II.,
12; III., 101, (6).
Third declension, accusative in int., abla-
tive in i, genitive plural in inni. III.,
49, (c).
Threatening, verbs of, with future infini-
tive, II., 13 ; with dative, II., 69.
Time, duration of, II., 92; III., 83, (c);
time when and witliiii ichlrh, II., 125,
(6); III., 85, (b).
totus, declension of, III., 14 ; nouns with,
in ablative without preposition, III., 85,
(ft), ii-
Towns, limit of motion with names of, II.,
93, (rtl; III., 83, (g); pluo- where, with
names of, II., 125,' (a), (1); III., So, (*),
i. ; pltii-i- I',-*,,,! irJnch, with names of,
II., 123, (b): III., 85, (ft).
trans, compounds of, with accusative,
II., 95; compounds with two accusa-
tives, II., 72.
Transitive verbs, compounded with some
" tive and accusative,
ubi, with perfect indicative, II., 54.
ullus, declension of, III., 14; uses of,
II., 189.
unus, declension of, III., 14; plural of,
III., 58, (a); followed by a clause of
characteristic, II., 35.
Urging, verbs of, construction with, II.,
_>7 ; III., 99, (a), 2.
visas (need), with ablative, III., 85, (a), ii.
ut (utl), to denote concession, II., 88,
(c); HI., 99, (r), ii. ; in final clauses, II.,
25 ; III., 99, (a) ; in consecutive clauses,
II., 33; III., 99, (6); substantive clauses
introduced by, II., 208 ; a temporal con-
junction, III., 74, n, (c), 99, (/, i.;
omission after certain verbs, II.. 149,
1C3, (6); III., 99, (}. >, i.
uterque, declension of. III., 26; use of,
II., 198.
utinam, with subjunctive, to express
wish, II., 151, (a); III., 98 (a), 2.
utor, with ablative, II., 65; with two
ablatives, II., 76; gerundive used im-
personally, II., 142.
utrum . . an, II., 42, 44.
Value, genitive of. III., 81, (g) ; ablative
of, II., 124, (c); HI-, 85, (t).'
Vevba sentiendl et decliirandi, construc-
tion of, II., J2; III., 101, (6); personal
construction in passive, II., 14 ; III., 101.
(b), ii.
Verbal adjectives, with genitive, II., 117,
(b); gerundive, II., 140-143; III., 104;
participles, II., 144-148; III., 102.
INDEX OF SUBJECTS AND WORDS. 351
Verbal nouns, infinitive, II., 130, 132; III., void, conjugation of, III., 43; a modal
101 ; gerund, II., 133, 134; III., 103; su- verb, II., 19; with accusative and in-
pine, II., 135-139; 111,105. finitive, II., 22; with subjunctive, II.,
Verbs, conjugation of, III.. 27-46 ; princi- 151, (b).
pal parts of, III., 64, (a) ; deponent, III., w
68; semi-deponent, III., 68, (b\ i; defec-
tive and impersonal, III. 72 ; irregular Want adjectives o f, with ablative, II.,
forms, III., 66; position of, II., 2; III., 12 6 III 85 (h) i
110, (A); agreement of finite verb with Way b ' v wh ' ich> ' m \ f & 5| (a)j jj.
subject, 1L, 9, (). Wish, 'how expressed, II., 151, (a), 152;
\ erse. III., 111. m 98 ^ .'
vescor, yjth the ablative, II. , 65. Won ^ formation of, III. , 75, 76 ; order of,
\ ester, \ estrl, Vestruiii, use of, jj ^.^ . jjj ^Q
III., 60, (b).
vicleor, dative with, III., 82, (d), iii.
Virtual indirect narration, IJ., 216, 220; Y
III., 99, (e),i.
vis, declension of, III., 9. Year, months of, II., 222, footnote 1.
Vocative case, III., 84. You, expressed by tu or vos, III., 89, iv.
Voices, inflections of, III., 27-39; active Your, expressed by tuus or vester, III.,
and passive, III., 96. 90, ii.
to
C\2
00
O
to
-p
^H
<D
O
T5 O
cd '-P
73 OJ
* h
CO H
cd
O
^ a
c: CD
University of Toronto
Library
DO NOT
REMOVE
THE
CARD
FROM
THIS
POCKET
Acme Library Card Pocket
LOWE-MARTIN CO. LIMITED
